BS  2505  ,H46  1923 
Henry,  Lyman  I. 
Paul,  son  of  Kish 


[•'i. 


"!  i  i 


’lM'‘<: 


i‘ ; 


t,i 


I  '■ 


The  University  of  Chicago  Publications 
IN  Religious  Education 


EDITED  BY 

ERNEST  D.  BURTON  SHAILER  MATHEWS 
THEODORE  G.  SOARES 


CONSTRUCTIVE  STUDIES 


.  ■  1 


■t 


i- 


■J 

1. 


,  i 


\ 


'■ill 

''i' 

* ' 


1 


/ 


^ ' 


H 


Paul ^  Son  of  Kish 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 
CHICAGO,  ILLINOIS 


THE  BAKER  AND  TAYLOR  COMPANY 

NEW  TORE 

THE  CAMBRIDGE  UNIVERSITY  PRESS 

LONDON 

THE  MARUZEN-KABUSHIKI-KAISHA 

TOKTO,  OSAKA,  ETOTO,  FUEnOEA,  SENDAI 

THE  MISSION  BOOK  COMPANY 


SHANOHAI 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2019  with  funding  from 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary  Library 


https://archive.org/details/paulsonofkishOOhenr_0 


THE  VICTOR 
(See  page  55) 


Paul^  Son 


By 

LYMAN  I. 


HENRY 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 
CHICAGO  ILLINOIS 


Copyright  1923  By 
The  University  of  Chicago 


All  Rights  Reserved 


Published  September  1923 


Composed  and  Printed  By 
The  University  of  Chicago  Press 
Chicago,  Illinois,  U.S.A. 


To  My  Son 


FOREWORD 


The  experiences,  sacrifices,  and  achievements  of  Paul, 
if  appreciated  by  us,  create  a  desire  for  more  intimate 
knowledge  of  his  preparation  and  equipment. 

In  this  story  the  life  of  Saul  of  Tarsus,  historically 
reconstructed,  has  been  harmoniously  blended  by  the  use 
of  fiction  with  the  accounts  of  his  life  given  in  the  New 
Testament. 

In  matters  of  customs,  manners,  and  conditions,  as 
well  as  in  the  use  of  important  dates,  the  generally  recog¬ 
nized  historical  authorities  have  been  faithfully  followed 
to  aid  in  giving  correct  impressions. 

Imagination,  within  historical  bounds  and  probabil¬ 
ity,  has  supplied  the  restoration  in  the  early  part  of 
SauPs  life,  and  in  the  interims  between  later  events. 
Interpretations  of  vital  Scriptures  by  recognized  scholars 
have  not  been  violated,  nor  have  recorded  events  been 
taken  out  of  their  settings.  Events  in  Paul’s  life  have 
been  selected  for  continuity  of  the  story,  not  for  histori¬ 
cal  exegesis. 

The  admonition  of  Paul  and  Barnabas  to  the  citizens 
of  Lystra,  ^‘We  also  are  men  of  like  passions  with  you,” 
has  been  the  textual  authority  for  presenting  Paul  human¬ 
ized — the  wholesome,  courageous,  and  lovable  man.  Not 
only  is  he  a  man’s  man  but  also,  by  analogy,  he  is  a  boy’s 
boy.  In  his  time  he  spoke  in  terms  understood  by  both 
young  and  old.  His  life,  reproduced  in  his  environment, 
interests  the  student  of  development  and  the  admirer  of 
his  achievements. 


IX 


X 


FOREWORD 


Scenes  and  characters  have  been  supplied  by  inven¬ 
tion  in  an  effort  to  realize,  in  narrative  form,  the  vivid 
personality  of  Paul.  His  marriage  to  Tabitha  qualifies 
him  to  become  a  member  of  the  Sanhedrin;  the  adapta¬ 
tion  of  the  legend  of  Thekla  gives  the  customs  and  reli¬ 
gion  of  the  East,  and  the  effect  of  his  teachings;  David, 
as  a  younger  brother,  supplies  the  necessary  funds  until 
the  loyal  brothers  of  Macedonia  send  relief  to  Rome; 
and  Alexander,  the  coppersmith,  as  the  wandering  Jew, 
personifies  the  opposition  to  Paul.  These  and  similar 
liberties,  easily  recognized  as  inventions,  are  merely  aids 
in  the  visualization  of  the  dramatic  and  interesting 
incidents  in  Paul’s  life. 

It  is  impossible  to  make  specific  acknowledgment  of 
the  many  able  writers  on  the  life  and  letters  of  Paul 
whose  books  have  been  helpful  and  influential  in  the 
composition  of  this  story. 

To  Dr.  Shirley  J.  Case,  Professor  of  Early  Church 
History  and  New  Testament  Interpretation  in  the  Uni¬ 
versity  of  Chicago,  I  am  so  deeply  indebted  that  the 
expression  of  my  sincere  thanks  to  him  in  no  sense  dis¬ 
charges  my  obligation.  With  his  scrupulous  fidelity  to 
historical  accuracy  and  with  his  thorough  knowledge  of 
the  period  and  events  at  the  foundation  of  this  story,  he 
has  advised  and  criticized  generously  and  sympathetically 
to  the  end  that,  in  this  freedom  of  romantic  reconstruc¬ 
tion,  no  erroneous  use  of  known  facts  and  incidents  would 
be  permitted.  In  appreciation  of  his  generous  labors 
changes  have  been  made  to  conform  to  his  learned  sug¬ 
gestions. 

Paul  the  man!  Irresistible  I  Incomparable! 


FOREWORD 


XI 


His  preparedness;  the  intensity  of  his  life;  his 
unswerving  devotion  to  Jesus;  his  incalculable  influence 
through  the  centuries  to  our  day;  the  depths  of  his 
mysticism;  his  strong  personality  creating  loyal  friend¬ 
ships  and  exciting  bitter  animosities;  his  fearlessness, 
integrity,  loyalty,  and  zeal;  his  keen  sense  of  justice; 
his  sweet  reasonableness;  and  his  exalted  spirituality 
have  inspired  and  will  inspire  unnumbered  generations 
of  men. 

To  visualize  Paul  and  his  heroically  sacrificial  life  in 
terms  of  human  experience  as  ^‘a  man  of  like  passions 
with  us,”  thoroughly  equipped,  has  been  the  impelling 
motive  in  writing  this  story. 


Lyman  I.  Henry 


■  ,  ■'  ’^. - ,  ■•-'  ,.  ",.  ..  ■ 

:  .■■:•;  '«■  SfSSStPf; 

•:  ,  ’'V- 

/  •  •■  .  •'  '1  dVI'.-o  '’■'■'•■  ■'\vW‘.",‘  ‘  •■'.  !(<,•'  .'  'J 

■i 

.  ;■•  •  { 

•  -.v 

■  *'  ’  1 

■■  ■"■  ■,'  ,  .  •:  .■'VV-v ,  ^ rC|'!!l|i|fe 

. :  V;;VV" 

:  .  '  ’  ^  ;;■■■■'■  ■  ..  ;  ■"■  ' 

.  ■  ■.,■  :S'':  '  '''^'  .  ,. 

»  • 

/ .  '  / 

’  •  .  1.  . 

'  ■  ■  '■  :'■■  /-  . 

'  ■'  ''  '  '  " '  '  'iV' 

• 

»  •  • 

, 

,  < 

V 

-  •  ■  ■  ■  ■  ■ 

^  ■  '•  I','.  ■■' 

. •■■,.  : 

■  '-Mv  '■■;■■''■  ■■• 

•  '  •  ',  ‘  ■'  ■  ■' 

‘i  ■  '•■■  '  ■  I i  !■'•'■ 

•..  .  3  ;  '  ■ 

. ■,  i  v' 

*'  ’  ‘  I  *  -  '  lIIH  'l^r^  ■ 

1*0'^  . 

f. 

^^''v7:^Vv4  '  • 

I./'- 

:  ■  '  ’  ■ ' ::  ■'  ■ 

t'Sv"''  ^'V;  '  ■ 

is  -  v..'. 

CONTENTS 


PAGE 


Illustrations . xv 

Part  I.  A  Youth  in  Tarsus 

CHAPTER 

I.  Schools  and  Tent-Making .  3 

II.  Mark  Antony’s  Gift . 17 

III.  Staying  to  the  End . 26 

IV.  Roman  Envy . 33 

V.  The  Will  to  Win . 41 

Part  II.  In  Jerusalem 

VI.  Up  to  Jerusalem . 59 

VII.  Gamaliel’s  School . 73 

VIII.  The  Passover . 82 

IX.  Early  Services . 90 

X.  Azel’s  Vision . 95 

XI.  At  Gamaliel’s  Feet . 98 

XII.  Accepting  Responsibility . no 

XIII.  Facing  Opposition . 115 

Part  III.  A  Rabbi  in  Tarsus 

XIV.  The  Family  Circle . 123 

XV.  Wooing  Tabitha . 130 

XVI.  A  Lover-Husband . 142 

XVII.  The  Passing  Years . 151 

Part  IV.  The  Valley  of  Shadows 

XVIII.  The  Mourner . 157 

XIX.  The  New  Way . 161 

XX.  Stephen’s  Defense . 169 

XXI.  The  Law  Votes . 175 

XXII.  Ruthless  Zeal . 181 

XXIII.  Testimony  of  Neighbors . 185 

XXIV.  Darkness  to  Light . 191 

xiii 


XIV 


CONTENTS 


Part  V.  Meditation  and  Preparation 


CHAPTER  page 

XXV.  In  Arabia  . . 199 

XXVI.  Rejected  of  Men . 208 

XXVII.  Learning  Patience . 215 

XXVIII.  A  Busy  Salesman . 225 

XXIX.  Antioch  Calls . 231 

XXX.  Relief  of  Famine . 236 

Part  VI.  Herald,  Leader,  Martyr 

XXXI.  Antioch  in  Pisidia . 245 

XXXII.  Thekla  of  Iconium . 253 

XXXIII.  “Joint  Heirs” . 264 

XXXIV.  Athens  and  Corinth . 275 

XXXV.  Ephesus . 283 

XXXVI.  Plots  That  Failed . 289' 

XXXVH.  Felix  Trembles . 298 

XXXVIH.  To  Caesar . 309 

XXXIX.  Busy  in  Chains . 317 

XL.  Born  a  Gentleman . 322 

XLI.  Again  in  Prison . 329 

XLH.  By  the  Ostian  Way . 341 

Index . 351 


ILLUSTRATIONS 


By  Louis  Grell 


The  Victor . 

.  Frontispiece 

I  Know  That  You  Believe  .... 

.  facing  page  $12 

I  Come  Quickly . 

.  facing  page  338 

Map . 

.  facing  page  242 

XV 


PART  I 

A  Youth  in  Tarsus 


CHAPTER  I 

SCHOOLS  AND  TENT-MAKING 

The  deep-water  wharf  in  ancient  Tarsus  was  teeming 
with  activity.  An  Alexandrian  grain  ship  being  unloaded 
would  receive  a  returning  cargo.  Freight  was  being 
assembled  for  another  ship  that  was  discharging  military 
stores  and  soldiers  from  Rome.  Bundles  of  spices,  of 
dried  fruits  and  of  rare  loom  fabrics  were  being  unslung 
from  the  pack  trains  of  camels  and  donkeys  while  the 
swarthy  owners  from  the  East  opened  the  packages  to 
display  their  property  for  sale  and  barter.  Merchants 
from  Alexandria  and  from  Rome  in  great  excitement 
carried  on  loud  and  passionate  arguments  with  the  vol¬ 
uble  men  of  the  desert  who  were  schooled  in  bargaining. 

Two  boys,  about  fifteen  years  of  age,  wandering  aim¬ 
lessly  along  the  cluttered  wharf,  were  closely  watched  by 
the  desert- tanned  owners  of  the  merchandise  lest  curiosity 
might  develop  into  appropriation.  One  of  the  lads, 
restless  and  undersized,  was  dressed  in  the  blue-bordered, 
white  garment  affected  by  the  Pharisees,  while  the  other 
wore  the  somber  robe  of  a  Sadducee. 

They  stopped  in  front  of  a  large,  good-natured, 
Roman  soldier  who  was  busy  at  the  moment  in  directing 
other  soldiers  to  gather  the  luggage  and  equipment  of 
the  military  company  for  a  long  journey  across  the  moun¬ 
tains.  Because  of  youthful  interest  in  military  affairs 
the  boys  began  questioning  the  soldier. 

‘‘What  war  is  now  going  on  ?  ”  asked  the  boy  in  white. 

“No  war  at  all,”  the  soldier  answered  good-humor¬ 
edly,  “but  there  have  been  bands  of  robbers  in  the  moun- 


3 


4 


A  YOUTH  IN  TARSUS 


tains  taking  toll  from  caravans;  and  Rome  not  only 
rules  but  protects  all  her  Empire.  What  is  your  name  ?  ” 

‘^My  name  is  Saul/^  the  boy  in  white  replied. 

‘‘Then  you  are  a  Jew,  and  surely  this  other  boy  looks 
like  a  Jew,’’  said  the  soldier,  laughing.  “But  he  is 
dressed  differently,” 

“That  is  because  I  am  a  Pharisee,”  said  Saul,  and 
proudly  pointed  to  the  blue  margin  on  his  sleeve  and  gar¬ 
ment.  “He  is  only  a  Sadducee.” 

“What  is  the  difference?”  The  guard  showed  he 
did  not  care  what  the  difference  might  be.  “You  are 
both  Jews.” 

“There  is  a  great  difference,”  replied  Saul  with  impor¬ 
tance.  “  I  believe  a  whole  lot  more  things  than  he  does.” 

The  soldier  doubled  over  with  laughter,  “It  is 
enough  to  be  a  Jew  without  having  to  believe  more  than 
any  other  who  is  a  Jew.” 

Saul  turned  from  the  subject  and  picked  up  a  heavy 
shield. 

“How  do  you  use  it  ?  ”  he  asked. 

Putting  the  shield  on  his  arm  and  using  his  short 
sword,  the  soldier  went  through  his  sword  exercises. 
Then,  with  youthful  inquisitiveness,  Saul  asked  what 
the  breastplate  was  for,  and  the  soldier  showed  by  strik¬ 
ing  it  with  his  sword  that  it  would  withstand  heavy 
blows.  Other  soldiers  came  up  and  Saul,  looking  up  at 
the  sun  and  noting  the  time  of  day,  told  his  comrade  that 
he  must  go,  but  the  Egyptian  grain  ship  being  unloaded 
attracted  the  boys. 

“The  whole  world  comes  to  Tarsus,”  said  Saul,  as 
the  boys  watched  slaves  carrying  great  jars  of  grain  out 
of  the  ship  to  the  wharf. 


SCHOOLS  AND  TENT-MAKING 


5 


‘^Yes,  and  the  men  of  Tarsus  go  out  to  the  whole 
world,”  answered  the  Sadducee  boy.  ‘^And  some  day 
when  we  grow  up,  we  can  go  out  in  the  ships.” 

‘‘You  ought  to  go  to  Nestor’s  school,  and  you  would 
meet  boys  from  all  over  the  world,”  said  Paul,  very  sagely, 
“and  then  you  would  know  something  about  the  world 
before  you  got  into  it.” 

“In  ships,”  said  an  Arab  who  had  been  standing  near, 
“you  will  never  see  the  fruits  and  flowers,  nor  hear  the 
sweet  songs  of  the  birds  along  the  Euphrates  where  my 
children  are  so  happy  that  they  do  not  want  to  come  here 
with  me.” 

The  boys  were  listening  eagerly,  but  Saul  again 
turned  to  look  at  the  sun.  “I  fear  I  am  late  now,”  he 
said.  “I  must  hasten  to  my  father’s  shop  to  my  work 
and  my  lessons  from  my  grandfather.” 

He  left  the  wharf  and  ran  down  the  long  street,  lined 
with  booths  on  either  side  opening  into  the  storerooms — 
past  the  dealers  in  food  stuffs,  the  workers  in  wood — and 
wound  his  way  in  and  out  among  camels  and  donkeys  until 
he  came  to  his  father’s  booth,  in  the  upper  part  of  the 
city.  A  dark  Arab  was  dealing  for  a  tent  and  after  the 
manner  of  his  people  was  telling  Saul’s  father  of  his 
country  far  in  the  East. 

“We  do  not  have  the  narrow  streets  of  a  city  like 
this,  through  which  a  man  must  fight  his  way  among 
thieves  who  would  rob  and  merchants  who  would  cheat 
him.  We  follow  our  flocks  and  herds  in  the  early  spring 
up  the  clear,  cold  streams,  as  the  melting  snow  retreats 
up  the  mountain  sides,  and  they  fatten  without  any  other 
worry  on  our  part  except  to  keep  away  the  wolves  and 
beasts  that  hunger  after  them.  Your  tents  are  our 


6 


A  YOUTH  IN  TARSUS 


homes,  and  they  have  lasted  through  many  storms.  It  is 
a  shame  that  we  have  to  pay  so  much  for  them.’’ 

Saul  was  listening  intently  and  his  father  turned  to 
him,  saying: 

^‘Do  you  think  your  task  will  be  done  if  longer  you 
listen  in  idleness?” 

Saul,  shamefaced,  hastened  through  the  booth  front¬ 
ing  on  the  street  into  the  workroom.  His  grandfather 
was  seated  on  a  raised  part  of  the  floor,  sewing  away  at 
heavy  tent  cloth.  In  the  room  was  a  rude  loom  partly 
sunk  in  the  floor,  so  that  when  the  weaver  went  down 
into  the  pit  to  work  he  was  seated  almost  level  with  the 
floor.  Saul  hurried  to  his  place  at  the  loom,  and  with 
his  nimble  fingers  began  the  weaving  of  a  coarse  dark 
cloth  made  of  goat’s  hair  and  camel  hair  mixed.  The 
grandfather  stopped  his  sewing  and  came  to  Saul  to 
examine  his  work. 

^^This  cloth  must  be  woven  so  tight  that  it  will  turn 
the  water  until  holes  wear  in  the  cloth,”  he  said,  “and 
each  strand  must  be  beaten  down  in  place  and  not  left 
loose,  as  that  is.” 

“If  I  am  to  be  a  tent-maker,  why  must  I  take  time 
to  weave  ?  ”  asked  Saul. 

“Because  you  must  be  able  to  make  the  cloth,  if  need 
be,  and  most  of  all  you  must  know  how  to  judge  the  cloth 
that  you  would  buy,”  replied  the  grandfather,  as  he 
went  back  to  his  station.  He  added,  “Now  weave  with 
every  strand  a  memory  of  the  law.  What  is  the  law  for 
false  teachers?” 

“They  must  be  stoned  to  death,”  answered  Saul 
briskly,  as  he  worked  the  thread  of  the  woof  through  the 
taut  warp. 


SCHOOLS  AND  TENT-MAKING 


7 


“Nay,  that  is  not  such  an  answer  as  one  of  your  fam¬ 
ily  must  give.  You  must  give  the  words  as  I  gave  them 
to  you.  Now  answer.” 

Saul  began  again,  repeating  in  a  monotone: 

“If  your  brother,  your  son,  your  daughter, 

Or  the  wife  of  your  bosom,  or  your  friend 
Shall  entice  you  secretly. 

Saying,  Let  us  serve  other  gods. 

You  shall  not  consent  unto  him. 

Nor  listen  to  him; 

Neither  shall  your  eye  pity  him. 

Neither  shall  you  spare. 

Neither  shall  you  conceal  him; 

But  you  shall  surely  kill  him . 

You  shall  stone  him  with  stones  that  he  die; 

Because  he  has  tried  to  draw  you 
Away  from  the  Lord  your  God.” 

“That  is  better.  You  are  to  become  a  rabbi,  and 
you  must  not  be  careless  in  answering  at  any  time  what 
is  the  law.”  The  old  man  spoke  harshly.  “Even  if 
your  father  does  send  you  to  Nestor’s  school  to  learn 
many  useless  things,  you  must  never  be  lax  in  the  law. 
Rabbi  Ben  Arza  sups  with  us  tonight,  and  he  will  want 
to  know  what  you  are  learning  in  the  law.” 

During  the  afternoon  Saul  recited  passage  after  pas¬ 
sage  of  the  old  Jewish  law  to  his  grandfather,  who  caught 
up  every  failure  in  the  smallest  detail. 

It  is  difficult  to  speak  of  the  grandfather  by  name, 
because  his  name  was  seldom  used.  His  age  was  revered, 
and  it  was  with  some  regret  that  he  submitted  to  the 
proper  direction  and  policy  of  his  son,  Ben  Hanan,  now 
the  head  of  the  house.  It  was  through  no  disrespect  that 


8 


A  YOUTH  IN  TARSUS 


he  was  referred  to  as  the  grandfather  and  not  by  his  name, 
Azel  Hanan;  rather,  it  was  a  sign  of  the  veneration  in 
which  Azel  was  held  by  his  son’s  family. 

Even  while  weaving  the  heavy  tent  cloth  and  reciting 
the  Law  of  Moses,  the  alert  Saul  would  steal  a  glance 
through  the  doorway  to  see  the  customers  coming  in, 
some  with  their  young  sons  who  were  seeing  for  the  first 
time  the  city  life  of  Tarsus. 

Late  in  the  afternoon  Ben  Hanan  carried  the  goods 
displayed  in  the  booth  into  the  storeroom  back  of  it, 
barred  the  door  and  passed  through  the  storeroom  into 
the  workroom  where  Azel  and  Saul  were  engaged.  While 
undemonstrative,  Ben  Hanan  critically  examined  Saul’s 
work  and  analyzed  his  conduct.  He  stopped  at  the  loom 
to  inspect  his  son’s  weaving.  His  eyes  feasted  on  the 
lad  continuing  industriously  at  his  work.  Then  Ben 
Hanan  called  attention  to  the  fact  that  it  was  near  time 
to  dine  and  led  the  way  into  the  living-rooms  adjoining, 
where  they  were  as  affectionately  greeted  by  the  mother 
and  children  as  if  they  were  returning  from  a  long  journey. 
The  six-year-old  younger  son,  David,  of  whom  Saul 
was  very  fond,  rushed  into  his  father’s  arms  and  was 
lifted  up  and  given  the  usual  kiss.  The  little  sister, 
a  babe  in  arms,  was  taken  from  her  cradle  and  kissed 
and  tossed  by  all  in  turn,  from  the  grandfather  to 
Saul. 

Deborah,  Ben  Hanan’s  wife,  a  sweet,  motherly  little 
woman,  flung  her  arms  about  Saul,  saying: 

^‘How  is  my  Greek  boy  tonight?  Does  Nestor’s 
school  worry  you  ?  ” 

^Ht  is  interesting  and  easy  to  me,”  said  Saul. 
have  a  great  advantage  over  the  other  boys,  for  they  only 


SCHOOLS  AND  TENT-MAKING 


9 


know  what  they  learn  there,  while  I  have  the  schooling 
at  home  and  with  Ben  Arza.  Still,  interesting  things 
do  come  up,  dear  little  mother.” 

‘‘Have  you  found  anything  better  than  we  know?” 
asked  Ben  Hanan,  coldly. 

“Not  anything  to  take  the  place  of  what  I  know  and 
believe,  but  it  is  interesting  to  find  out  what  other  people 
believe,  also  what  they  think.” 

The  evening  meal  was  already  placed  on  a  mat  spread 
on  the  floor,  and  was  contained  in  two  or  three  large 
wooden  bowls  into  which  all  the  members  of  the  family 
reached  for  their  food;  but  before  sitting  down  to  the 
meal,  a  curious  ceremony  was  performed.  Each  in  turn 
washed  his  hands  in  water  poured  from  a  small  pitcher 
by  some  other  member  of  the  family.  A  basin  at  the  side 
of  the  room  was  used  for  the  purpose. 

In  the  midst  of  the  meal  Rabbi  Ben  Arza  came  in. 
He  too  washed  his  hands  over  the  basin,  in  water  poured 
for  him  by  Saul,  after  which  he  joined  in  the  eating. 
His  meal  was  soon  finished  and  he  began  questioning  Saul 
sharply,  while  the  old  grandfather  anxiously  considered 
the  boy’s  answers. 

“So  bright  a  scholar  as  is  this  boy,”  said  the  rabbi 
finally  to  Ben  Hanan,  “should  not,  in  my  judgment,  be 
tainted  with  heathen  learning,  and  least  of  all  should  he 
be  led  away  by  their  athletics.” 

“In  that  you  are  mistaken.”  The  father  spoke  with 
finality.  “Otherwise  he  would  become  a  rabbi  only  to 
his  own  people;  but  if  he  is  well  taught  and  if  he  is  faith¬ 
ful  as  has  been  his  family  for  many  generations,  he  will 
be  a  teacher  among  the  Greeks  and  other  people,  to 
bring  them  to  see  our  religion.” 


lO 


A  YOUTH  IN  TARSUS 


‘^But  the  waste  of  time  on  games  and  feats  of  skill,” 
the  rabbi  was  shaking  his  head  dolorously,  “is  not  the 
part  of  a  Hebrew.” 

“Our  laws  are  for  health  and  strength,”  said  the  father 
with  some  animation.  “If  he  can  improve  his  body  and 
gain  in  strength,  as  a  Jew  he  is  entitled  to  it.” 

Looking  around,  the  rabbi  discovered  that  the  grand¬ 
father  was  sleeping,  his  head  having  dropped  on  his 
breast.  Ben  Hanan  went  to  the  old  man,  gently  lifted 
him  to  his  feet  and  led  him  to  a  mat  at  the  side  of  the 
room,  where  he  lay  down  for  the  night.  The  rabbi  left, 
and  the  whole  familv  soon  distributed  themselves  on 
mats  for  sleep,  wearing  their  clothing  as  was  customary. 

In  the  morning  Saul  questioned  his  father  about  what 
the  rabbi  had  said. 

“Is  it  wrong  for  me  to  learn  about  the  history  of  aU 
people  and  about  their  gods  ?  ”  he  asked  timidly. 

“Not  if  you  are  strong,  but  dangerous  if  you  are 
weak.”  The  father  paused  and  then  said  impressively, 
“If  I  thought  that  a  son  of  Ben  Hanan  was  so  weak  that 
taunts,  ridicule,  or  boasts  would  make  him  doubt,  I 
would  not  carry  out  your  dedication  to  become  a  teacher. 
Unless  you  can  make  a  record  in  that  school,  you  shall 
stop.” 

“I  can  keep  up  with  all  in  the  lectures.”  Saul  looked 
up  in  fear  to  his  father.  “But  the  director  of  athletics 
discourages  me  because  of  my  size.” 

“Keep  the  pride  of  your  race  in  your  heart.  You 
are  of  the  family  of  Benjamin,  not  a  weakling.  Find 
your  own  place.  Come  home  early,  for  I  want  you  to 
take  up  tent-making.” 

“  I  am  through  with  weaving  ?  ”  Saul  asked  with  joy. 


SCHOOLS  AND  TENT-MAKING 


II 


“Not  through.  I  said  you  would  take  up  tent¬ 
making.”  The  father  spoke  severely. 

Saul  hastened  to  the  school.  The  lecture-room  was 
a  spacious  hall  with  graceful,  fluted  pillars  supporting 
a  high  ceihng  of  thin  slabs  of  marble  through  which  the 
sunlight  streamed  in  soft  rays.  In  places  where  the 
light  fell  to  best  advantage  were  many  statues,  some  of 
them  reproductions  of  famous  figures  from  the  Acropolis 
in  Athens,  some  the  original  work  of  sculptors  who  had 
gone  out  from  Tarsus.  Stone  benches  were  provided 
for  the  students,  and  there  was  a  stand  on  a  slightly 
raised  platform  for  the  lecturer.  Fifty  boys  about  the 
age  of  Saul  were  waiting  for  the  session  to  begin. 

Racially,  as  well  as  in  their  dress  and  manner,  they 
represented  many  different  nations.  Each  had  his  tablet 
of  thin  board,  on  the  waxed  surface  of  which  notes  were 
to  be  made  with  a  stylus,  since  all  their  information  came 
from  the  teacher  and  not  from  reading  books. 

Saul  came  up  to  the  group  at  the  height  of  a  discussion 
as  to  whose  god  was  greatest. 

“Isis  and  Osiris  are  the  greatest,  for  they  unite  all 
powers  of  female  and  male,  and  are  the  ancient  gods  of 
all  the  people  who  ever  went  out  from  the  Nile  country,” 
an  Egyptian  youth  was  saying. 

“Long  before  Egypt  had  any  gods,”  interrupted  a 
young  Persian,  “Persia  had  and  still  has  one  god  who  has 
all  power,  and  his  name  is  Ormazd.” 

“I  doubt  if  your  gods  are  older,”  said  Gallio,  a  Roman 
youth,  with  a  superior  air.  “At  least  none  is  so  powerful 
now  as  Jove.” 

“That  is  the  way.  Rome  always  claims  everything,” 
exclaimed  Lysander,  a  fine-looking  Greek  boy,  laughing, 


12 


A  YOUTH  IN  TARSUS 


'‘but  Zeus  is  the  most  ancient  and  powerful,  or  Rome 
would  not  have  adopted  him  under  the  name  of  Jove.” 

During  this  discussion  Saul  became  very  nervous  and 
strove  to  restrain  himself,  but  at  last  he  burst  out  in  a 
voice  that  commanded  the  attention  of  all: 

“There  is  only  one  God,  and  he  is  Lord  of  all.” 

The  kindly  old  Nestor,  who  taught  the  youth  in  this 
school,  had  approached  during  the  discussion  and  was 
listening  unobserved.  The  others  now  turned  on  Saul  in 
wonder  and  resentment. 

“He  is  only  a  Jew.  His  god  never  ruled  over  any 
people,”  said  Gallio,  sneeringly. 

All  the  boys  began  to  shout  at  Saul,  but  in  the  excite-, 
ment  Nestor  made  his  presence  known,  and  soon  the 
boys  were  in  their  places  on  the  stone  benches,  while 
Nestor  took  his  stand  at  the  pedestal  to  begin  his 
lecture.  All  except  Saul  began  writing  on  their  tablets, 
but  Saul’s  brows  were  still  drawn  in  a  heavy  frown, 
and  his  face  did  not  lighten  until  Nestor  announced  his 
subject. 

“I  had  intended  to  speak  on  a  different  matter  this 
morning,”  said  Nestor,  placing  a  roll  of  manuscript  on 
the  pedestal,  “but  your  controversy  suggests  a  subject 
of  vital  importance  to  all  people  of  every  age.  If  you 
would  profit  by  the  knowledge  of  the  gods,  you  should 
learn  that  the  mature  and  well-drilled  mind  finds  in  the 
different  names  and  attributes  of  the  gods  of  different 
peoples  the  struggle  of  mankind  to  express  its  highest 
conception  of  spirituality.  It  is  not  alone  the  form  of  the 
god,  not  alone  the  statue  that  is  of  most  importance;  but 
the  characteristics  which  the  worshiper  ascribes  to  his 
god  are  of  vital  importance. 


SCHOOLS  AND  TENT-MAKING 


13 


“Whenever  a  nation  has  become  satisfied  with  the 
attributes  of  its  idea  of  a  god,  as  expressed  in  a  mere 
formula,  and  seeks  no  further  knowledge  of  deity,  no 
higher  ideal,  then  a  study  of  that  nation  shows  invariably 
a  decay  in  all  the  finer  things  which  make  up  a  high  stand¬ 
ard  of  life  among  people. 

“Whether  it  be  Osiris,  Ormazd,  Jove,  Zeus,  Isis, 
Artemis,  the  attempt  in  the  beginning  is  to  express  in 
the  attributes  of  deity  the  best  thought  and  the  highest 
attained  spirituality  of  those  who  devoutly  desire  the  best 
possible;  but  this  devotion  must  be  directed  to  continued 
effort  to  express  an  increasing  spirituality.  While  the 
Hebrews  have  never  presented  their  deity  in  outward 
form,  yet  they  have  sought  the  one  great  fact  that  there 
is  a  final  source  of  power  and  life  in  the  attributes  of 
Jehovah,  their  Supreme  Spirit. 

“I  would  have  you  remember  the  words  of  Aratus, 
keeping  in  mind  that  the  poet  is  using  his  local  name  of 
deity : 

“  ‘Zeus  fiUs  all  the  city  streets, 

All  the  nation’s  crowded  marts;  fills  the 
watery  deeps 

And  heavens;  every  labor  needs  the  help 
of  Zeus, 

His  offspring  are  we.’  ” 

The  boys  were  rapidly  writing  while  Nestor  slowly 
recited  the  verse,  except  Saul,  whose  lips  were  moving  as 
if  repeating  carefully  several  times  what  Nestor  spoke. 
At  the  close  the  Roman  pointed  at  Saul  and  said: 

“All  have  recorded  the  words  of  the  teacher  save  the 
Jew.’’ 

“Your  tablets  will  melt,”  exclaimed  Saul  hotly,  “but 
I  have  a  Hebrew’s  trained  memory.” 


14 


A  YOUTH  IN  TARSUS 


‘‘Let  us  avoid  bickerings/’  said  Nestor  quietly.  “I 
have  often  praised  the  training  of  memory  among  the 
Hebrews.  Saul,  can  you  repeat  the  verse  ?  ” 

Saul  stood  forth  and  repeated  the  whole  of  the  verse. 
Nestor  followed  him  closely  with  smiling  approval,  and 
the  other  boys  carefully  read  their  tablets.  When  Saul 
had  finished  without  a  mistake,  Nestor  dismissed  them 
for  the  gymnasium. 

The  boys  swept  into  the  gymnasium  in  great  tumult 
of  shouting  and  shoving,  and  hastened  to  the  dressing- 
room.  Shortly  they  reappeared,  stripped  for  the  races. 
The  director  arranged  the  boys  according  to  size,  in  groups 
of  four,  and  started  them  in  trial  runs  around  the  arena, 
Saul  was  in  a  group  of  small  boys  and  came  out  easily 
ahead.  The  director  then  took  the  winners  of  each 
group  and  arranged  them  in  new  grouping.  Again  Saul 
was  victor  in  his  group. 

“This  will  be  all  the  running  for  today,”  said  the  di¬ 
rector.  “  Tomorrow  I  will  select  those  to  try  for  the  finals. 
Put  on  the  cestus  and  we  will  have  a  boxing  lesson.” 

The  boys  ran  to  the  supplies  close  at  hand,  and  began 
winding  for  each  other  the  strips  of  cloth  about  the  wrist 
with  many  thicknesses  over  the  hand,  constituting  the 
cestus  for  training — the  equivalent  of  the  modern  boxing 
glove.  Gallio  went  by  himself  and  wound  his  own 
cestus.  At  call  of  the  director  they  appeared  in  the 
arena,  arranging  themselves  in  pairs. 

“Can  you  box  as  well  as  memorize,  you  Jew?”  said 
Gallio  to  Saul. 

“I  will  play  the  game  with  anyone  in  the  game,” 
replied  Saul  quickly,  and  ranged  himself  opposite  the 
Roman  youth. 


SCHOOLS  AND  TENT-MAKING 


15 


^‘This  is  not  a  fair  match  in  size,”  said  the  director. 

“I  am  willing  to  take  my  chance/’  Saul  retorted, 
“because  he  challenged  me.” 

The  director  laughed  and  said  no  more,  but  gave 
them  a  few  lessons  in  leading  and  feinting,  by  example. 
He  then  stepped  back  and  gave  the  signal  for  the  many 
pairs  of  boys  to  begin  boxing. 

All  were  in  good  humor  and  enjoying  the  sport. 
Gallio  had  a  smile  on  his  face.  On  account  of  his  size, 
he  had  a  longer  reach  which  made  it  necessary  .for  Saul 
to  crowd  close  in,  in  order  to  land  a  blow.  The  director 
was  watching  this  contest  very  closely.  Saul  received 
a  blow  on  the  jaw  that  staggered  him.  He  recovered 
and  came  in  closer  to  his  adversary,  receiving  a  blow  on 
the  temple  that  knocked  him  down.  He  started  to  rise, 
and  the  Roman  jumped  quickly  to  strike  again,  but  the 
director’s  practiced  eye  had  seen  what  happened,  and, 
leaping  in,  he  caught  Gallio’s  right  hand  and  held  it 
while  Saul  rose.  There  was  a  bleeding  cut  over  his 
eye. 

“Nay,  I  will  hold  this  hand,”  insisted  the  director, 
holding  Gallio  in  a  viselike  grip.  As  Saul  rose,  the 
director  examined  his  wound. 

“We  will  unwind  this  cestus,”  said  he,  suiting  the 
action  to  the  word.  Beneath  a  few  folds  of  the  cestus 
on  Gallio’s  hand,  he  found  a  slug  of  copper. 

“You  are  barred  from  the  game,  because  you  do  not 
play  it  according  to  the  rules,”  cried  the  director  savagely 
to  the  Roman  youth. 

“Not  so,”  said  Saul.  “Strip  off  the  slugs  and  make 
him  box.  I  promise  not  to  beat  the  air.  I  would  win 
or  lose  honorably.” 


i6 


A  YOUTH  IN  TARSUS 


The  director  smiled  at  Saul’s  courage,  and,  following 
his  suggestion,  took  another  slug  from  the  other  cestus 
of  the  Roman.  The  boys  gathered  around  to  enjoy  the 
contest.  Having  learned  the  danger  of  staying  away 
from  his  opponent,  Saul  began  the  battle  with  fierce 
determination  and  close-in  boxing.  In  wild  excitement 
the  boys  cheered  them  on.  In  the  rapid  exchange  of 
blows,  Gallio  tried  to  get  away  from  Saul,  but  the  latter 
followed  him  too  closely,  and  finally  the  Roman  received 
a  blow  which  sent  him  down.  Saul  stood  waiting  till  he 
rose.  In  a  flash  the  Hebrew  was  again  upon  him,  rain¬ 
ing  his  blows  so  fast  that  Gallio  could  do  nothing  more 
than  try  to  protect  himself;  and  he  went  down  again. 
He  lay  still  for  a  short  time,  and  then,  partly  raising  him¬ 
self,  held  up  his  hand  in  token  that  he  was  vanquished. 
Rising,  he  extended  his  hand  in  friendship,  smiling  at  Saul. 

“I  have  learned  one  great  lesson  from  you,”  he  said, 
“to  play  the  game  according  to  the  rules.  Forgive  me. 
Let  us  be  friends.” 

“You  only  allowed  an  old  prejudice  of  your  people 
to  rule  you,”  replied  Saul,  taking  the  proffered  hand, 
while  the  blood  trickled  down  his  face.  Then,  smiling, 
he  repeated  the  words  of  Nestor: 

“We  must  remember  the  words  of  the  poet:  ‘His 
offspring  are  we.’” 

“Your  spirit  is  greater  than  your  body,”  exclaimed  the 
director  in  admiration,  placing  his  hand  on  Saul’s  shoulder. 
“You  are  not  large  enough  to  qualify  for  the  boxing 
contests,  but  you  may  be  able  to  enter  the  foot  races.” 

“It  is  fine  to  strive  to  win,”  said  the  director.  “But 
it  is  great  to  be  honorable  in  any  sport.  Tomorrow  we 
will  take  our  lesson  in  swimming.” 


CHAPTER  II 
MARK  ANTONY’S  GIFT 


Early  in  the  afternoon,  Saul  was  seated  by  the  side 
of  his  grandfather,  learning  how  to  make  the  broad, 
double  seam.  No  word  had  been  said  by  the  grandfather, 
and  Saul  was  deep  in  thought  over  the  morning  lecture. 
The  controversy  among  the  boys  and  Nestor’s  generaliza¬ 
tions  gave  him  deep  concern  as  to  the  application  of  the 
Law  of  Moses. 

“Does  the  law  concerning  stoning  apply  to  Gentiles  ?  ” 
he  asked. 

“If  it  did,  we  would  have  to  give  our  full  time  to 
them,”  replied  the  old  man.  “Our  laws  are  for  Hebrews 
who  cannot  be  led  away  by  those  of  another  belief.” 

“Cannot  other  people  find  out  God?”  was  Saul’s 
next  question,  which  caused  the  grandfather  to  stop  in 
amazement.  Long  he  gazed  upon  the  lad. 

“They  might  know  him — all  people  are  bound  to 
know  something  of  God,”  he  finally  replied,  and  then 
with  an  impressive  shake  of  his  forefinger  at  Saul,  he 
added,  “But  they  cannot  know  how  to  serve  him,  to 
gain  his  favor,  except  they  come  within  the  law.” 

After  a  few  moments  of  serious  thinking,  with  idle 
fingers,  Saul  asked: 

“How  did  Abraham  come  to  learn  of  God  ?  ” 

“That  was  different.”  The  grandfather’s  fingers 
became  idle  in  turn  while  he  pondered  his  answer,  pleased 
with  the  boy’s  searching  questions.  “Abraham  was  an 
exceptional  man  who  by  his  faith  won  favor,  and  it  was 


17 


i8 


A  YOUTH  IN  TARSUS 


revealed  unto  him.  Then  our  father  Abraham  handed 
down  the  revelation  to  us.  We  have  no  more  men  of 
such  sublime  faith.” 

‘‘But  could  there  not  be  a  man  with  as  much  faith  as 
he  had  ?  ”  Saul  persisted. 

“There  might  be;  yes,  there  will  be  one  day.”  The 
eyes  of  the  old  man  brightened  and  became  set  as  if  he 
had  seen  a  vision.  “So  it  is  written;  but  it  will  be  for 
some  other  purpose,  for  we  now  know  God.  Hasten 
with  your  work  now,  else  you  will  make  no  showing  for 
the  day.” 

Both  worked  busily  for  a  long  time  in  silence,  but 
between  his  stitches  the  old  man  would  steal  a  searching 
glance  at  Saul.  Then  Ben  Hanan,  SauTs  father,  came 
into  the  shop,  and  in  scrutinizing  the  work  done  by  Saul 
he  noticed  the  bruise  and  the  dried  blood  on  Saul’s  fore¬ 
head  and  temple. 

“Why  this?”  Ben  Hanan  touched  Saul’s  forehead 
and  spoke  severely. 

“It  was  at  the  games.”  Saul  was  very  busy  with  his 
work. 

“  Tell  me,  for  I  must  know.”  The  father’s  hand  upon 
Saul’s  head  turned  the  lad’s  face  up  to  him. 

Saul  began  to  tell  him  about  the  boxing,  and  be¬ 
came  so  excited  that  he  rose  to  his  feet  and  went 
through  the  motions,  showing  how  he  was  struck  and 
fell;  how  the  director  had  grasped  the  hand  of  the 
Roman  and  unwound  the  cestus,  disclosing  the  hidden 
metal. 

“Brutal,  brutal!”  exclaimed  the  grandfather.  “It 
comes  from  permitting  him  to  go  among  those  Gentiles. 
I  oppose  it.” 


MARK  ANTONY’S  GIFT 


19 


“Never  mind  that  just  now.”  Ben  Hanan  spoke 
kindly  to  his  father  and  turned  again  to  Saul.  “Tell  me 
all.  Surely  that  is  not  the  end  of  the  matter.” 

“It  was  not.”  Saul  forgot  all  fear  of  his  father  as  he 
proceeded  with  the  story  of  the  contest. 

Ben  Hanan,  with  all  his  austerity  and  dignity,  forgot 
tradition,  forgot  his  exalted  idea  of  his  son  set  apart  as  a 
teacher,  and  with  flashing  eye  and  sympathetic  nod  of 
the  head  followed  Saul’s  recital  to  where  Gallio  had 
extended  his  hand. 

“He  seemed  generous  and  honest  in  his  offer  to  be 
friends.”  Saul  hesitated  in  embarrassment  as  his  father 
stared  intently  at  him,  but  went  on  as  if  forced  to  do  so, 
“so  I  took  his  hand  and  we  forgave  each  other.” 

“It  is  well,  but  we  are  Romans  and  not  subjects  of 
contempt  for  these  patricians  or  their  sons,”  said  Ben 
Hanan,  drawing  himself  up  proudly. 

“I  know  you  have  said  that  before,  but  I  do  not  see 
how  that  can  be,”  said  Saul. 

“Listen  now  to  my  father,  and  let  it  sink  deep  into 
your  mind,”  answered  Ben  Hanan.  Then  he  turned  to 
the  old  man,  “Tell  him  the  story.” 

The  grandfather  laid  his  work  aside  and  with  a  fervor 
evidenced  by  his  rapid  and  increasing  gestures,  plunged 
into  his  story. 

“Mark  Antony,  the  triumvir,  years  ago  established 
himself  in  Tarsus.  As  ruler  of  this  section  of  the  Roman 
Empire,  he  drew  around  him  the  great  generals  of  the 
Far  East.  He  did  not  drain  the  wealth  of  the  provinces 
by  taxation,  but  was  generous  with  the  funds  that  came 
to  his  hands.  Finally,  he  sent  word  to  Cleopatra,  the 
merciless  and  resourceful  queen  of  Egypt,  ordering  her 


20 


A  YOUTH  IN  TARSUS 


to  come  to  Tarsus  and  surrender  her  kingdom  into  his 
hands.  Months  went  by,  and  he  frequently  heard  of 
the  great  preparations  that  she  was  making  to  present 
herself  in  such  state  that  she  would  appear  as  an  equal 
and  not  as  a  vassal  paying  homage  to  her  ruler.  He 
thought  to  dazzle  her  with  the  glory  of  Rome’s  eastern 
government  and  he  aroused  the  interest  of  the  whole  city. 
Officers  strained  every  effort  to  raise  the  funds  needed; 
and  some  urged  that  a  special  tax  be  laid,  some  that  the 
wealth  of  the  Hebrews  be  confiscated — a  plan  which 
Antony  refused,  with  his  usual  high-mindedness. 

“Many  notables  were  gathering  for  the  event,  and 
it  became  a  question  of  the  city  preserving  the  ancient 
fame  of  Tarsus.” 

The  pride  of  the  old  man  in  his  narrative  had  brought 
a  glow  to  his  cheeks  and  his  thin  form  straightened  with  a 
momentary  return  of  a  vitality  long  passed.  He  continued : 

“I  felt  that  the  time  had  come  for  us  to  show  our 
loyalty  to  Tarsus,  and  our  appreciation  of  Antony’s 
impartial  and  liberal  treatment.  So,  going  among  the 
Hebrew  merchants,  we  raised  a  large  sum  for  the  com¬ 
pletion  of  beautiful  structures  already  under  way  along 
the  water-front  and  leading  to  the  governor’s  palace. 

“I  want  you  to  remember,”  the  old  man  stood  in 
pride  as  he  finished  his  story,  “the  candid  courtesy 
with  which  Mark  Antony,  whatever  his  weaknesses, 
received  us  and  our  donation.  In  token  of  his  apprecia¬ 
tion  he  sent  to  each  of  us  who  went  before  him  a  rescript, 
investing  each  of  us,  our  children,  and  their  descendants 
without  limitation,  with  the  full  rights  and  privileges  of 
Roman  citizenship,  establishing  us  forever  as  citizens 
of  the  Roman  Empire.” 


MARK  ANTONY’S  GIFT 


21 


Lifting  a  heavy  board  in  the  dais  on  which  he  had 
been  sitting,  the  old  man  took  out  a  parchment  carefully 
rolled  in  a  piece  of  leather. 

“Always  remember,”  the  grandfather  said  impres¬ 
sively  to  Saul,  unrolling  the  manuscript,  “that  you  are 
a  Roman  citizen  by  birth,  and  that  is  the  reason  you  have 
the  Roman  name  Paulus.  This  was  a  gift,  for  he  did  not 
send  it  until  after  Cleopatra  had  appeared  in  all  her  bar¬ 
baric  pomp  and  had  shown  herself  impressed  by  the  mag¬ 
nitude  of  the  power  of  Rome.  I  shall  never  forget  the 
gorgeous  scene  when  her  craft  was  rowed  to  the  pier  and 
she  was  led  into  the  shade  of  the  dower-crowned  columns 
and  along  the  glistening  way  to  the  steps  of  the  palace. 
True,  it  was  an  evil  day  for  Antony,  yet  the  queen’s  com¬ 
plete  and  gracious  surrender  to  him  was  enough  to  turn 
the  head  of  any  man.  Yea,  even  Solomon  lost  his  judg¬ 
ment  in  the  presence  of  such  splendor.” 

As  if  ashamed  of  his  pride,  the  old  man  took  the  parch¬ 
ment  again  from  the  hands  of  Saul  and  replaced  it  within 
the  dais,  immediately  seating  himself  and  beginning  his 
work.  The  father  returned  to  the  front  of  the  shop,  and 
Saul  too  resumed  his  work,  though  in  a  dreamlike  state, 
which  lasted  until  the  time  of  the  evening  meal.  When 
Ben  Hanan  appeared  again,  with  his  usual  austere  man¬ 
ner,  he  carefully  examined  Saul’s  work  and  found  a  place 
that  had  not  been  stitched  carefully. 

“This  must  be  finished  before  you  eat,”  said  he, 
pushing  his  fingers  through  a  place  in  the  seam.  “Would 
that  be  work  of  which  our  family  is  proud  ?  ” 

Saul  seized  the  piece  quickly  and  sat  down  to  his 
task,  and  Ben  Hanan  followed  the  grandfather  into  the 
living-room.  After  the  ceremonial  washing,  the  mother 


22 


A  YOUTH  IN  TARSUS 


asked  after  Saul,  and  almost  tearfully  pleaded  with  the 
father: 

‘^He  is  so  young,  so  new  at  the  work,  that  it  seems 
hard  to  demand  of  him  finished  and  perfect  work,  and 
I  know  that  he  is  hungry.”  She  turned  as  if  to  call  Saul 
in,  but  Ben  Hanan  laid  his  hand  on  her  shoulder. 

‘‘Do  not  let  your  affection  spoil  the  lesson  of  duty, 
Deborah,”  said  he  tenderly,  and  turned  her  again  to  the 
meal.  She  sat  down  obediently,  but  every  little  while 
kept  stealing  a  glance  to  the  door  of  the  workroom. 

The  family  were  nearly  finished  eating  when  the  door 
opened  and  Saul  came  in  brightly.  He  spoke  to  his 
father  while  pouring  the  water  on  his  hands. 

“I  finished  that  seam,  and  I  am  glad  I  did  it  now 
instead  of  waiting.  I  learned  that  I  must  watch  my  work 
and  not  take  it  for  granted  that  I  have  done  it  right.” 

Ben  Hanan  exchanged  a  meaning  glance  with  the 
mother.  She  looked  admiringly  at  Saul  and  noticed  the 
cut  on  his  forehead. 

“What  has  happened?”  she  almost  screamed  in  her 
fright. 

“Not  much  of  anything,”  answered  Saul,  glancing  at 
his  father  appealingly.  “It  does  not  hurt.” 

“It  is  all  right,  Deborah,”  the  father  assured  her. 
“He  has  told  me  all  about  it.  Some  trifling  thing  that 
happened  at  the  gymnasium.” 

“I  am  so  afraid  of  the  gymnasium,”  said  the  mother, 
“and  it  may  happen  again.” 

“Do  not  worry,”  said  the  father.  “It  will  not  happen 
again.” 

The  meal  was  finished,  and  the  family  were  sitting 
about  the  room  on  rugs,  when  Eleazer,  a  neighbor,  with 


MARK  ANTONY’S  GIFT 


23 


his  wife  and  his  little  daughter,  Tabitha,  ten  years  of 
age,  came  in  to  spend  a  social  hour.  Eleazer  and  Ben 
Hanan  were  soon  deep  in  conversation;  the  mothers  were 
busy  with  their  needlework  and  household  news.  Saul 
went  to  Tabitha,  who  was  working  on  some  dainty 
embroidery,  sat  down  close  beside  her,  and  began  teasing 
her  in  boyish  bashfulness  by  pulling  at  the  thread  she 
was  using.  She  resented  it  in  mock  anger  and  diverted 
his  tormenting  by  being  greatly  concerned  about  the 
wound  on  his  head. 

^‘How  it  must  hurt!”  she  said,  tenderly  touching  the 
wound. 

‘‘Mother  must  not  hear,”  said  Saul,  leaning  his 
head  close  to  hers,  “but  in  the  boxing  today  a  Roman 
boy  struck  me^  with  a  metal  weight  concealed  in  his 
cestus.” 

Tabitha’s  interest  in  his  story  was  far  too  great  for 
needlework,  and  she  dropped  it  in  her  lap  while  he  told 
her  all  about  the  episode.  They  sat  with  mouths  and 
ears  close  and  talked  in  subdued  tones. 

“lam  so  glad  that  you  forced  him  into  a  fair  contest,” 
she  said. 

“The  director  tells  me  I  am  not  heavy  enough  for 
the  boxing  contest,”  said  Saul  regretfully. 

“I  am  glad  of  it,  though  I  know  you  would  win,” 
said  Tabitha. 

“Still,  I  have  a  chance  to  get  into  the  foot  races,” 
said  Saul  with  a  superior  air,  “but  as  you  are  a  woman 
you  will  not  be  able  to  see  them.” 

“Then  I  will  hear  all  about  it,”  said  Tabitha  content- 
edly,  “and  I  may  hear  of  you  when  you  go  to  school  in 
Jerusalem.” 


24 


A  YOUTH  IN  TARSUS 


want  you  to  hear  from  me,  so  that  we  will  know 
each  other  when  I  come  back,”  said  Saul. 

“While  I  want  to  hear  from  you,”  said  Tabitha, 
coyly,  “you  will  not  care  about  us  in  Tarsus,  for  you  will 
find  beautiful  maids  in  Jerusalem.” 

“There  may  be  beautiful  women  there,”  said  Saul 
in  very  measured  tones,  leaning  his  head  over  closely  to 
Tabitha  and  looking  searchingly  into  her  eyes,  “yet  I 
will  come  back  to  Tarsus;  and  I  want  a  girl  of  this  city 
for  my  wife.” 

Tabitha  looked  at  him  with  wide-eyed  gaze,  then 
hurriedly  picked  up  her  work  and  bent  her  head  near  to 
it.  At  that  moment  Saul  was  called  by  his  father. 

“Let  us  speak  in  Aramaic,”  said  Ben  Hanan,  “that 
we  may  not  forget  our  mother-tongue.  Saul,  recite  the 
ten  words  in  our  own  language.” 

Saul  recited  for  awhile,  after  which  conversation 
became  general.  Rabbi  Ben  Arza  came  in  and,  without 
anyone  rising,  he  took  a  seat  among  them. 

“If  Saul  be  chosen  for  the  races,  I  want  you  all  to 
see  the  games,”  said  Ben  Hanan  to  the  men. 

“What  foolishness,”  said  the  grandfather,  wagging 
his  head,  “for  a  Jew  to  enter  an  animal-like  con¬ 
test!” 

“I  do  not  know  of  any  Jew  who  ever  took  the  time 
to  strive  for  the  empty  honors  of  these  contests,”  said 
the  rabbi. 

“What  profit,”  asked  Eleazer,  “can  there  be  in  mind 
or  purse  to  a  Jew  to  compete?” 

“You  are  talking  of  mere  custom  among  Jews,”  said 
Ben  Hanan,  “but  if  a  Jew  be  in  the  race  you  would  like 
to  see  him  win.  That  is  the  reason  I  have  arranged  for 


MARK  ANTONY’S  GIFT 


25 


seats  for  all  of  us  at  the  games,  for  I  believe  Saul  will  be 
in  the  races.” 

“We  may  feel  that  we  must  go,  because  of  your  urgent 
request,”  said  the  rabbi,  “but  if  we  can  feel  no  interest  in 
the  contest,  Ben  Hanan,  you  must  not  be  offended.” 

“Of  course,  of  course,”  Ben  Hanan  gave  one  of  his 
rare  smiles,  which  was  more  an  expression  of  shrewd 
thought  than  of  pleasure,  “but  if  I  am  not  greatly  mis¬ 
taken,  there  is  down  deep  in  every  Hebrew  a  sporting 
appreciation  of  the  man  who  strives,  and  especially  if 
he  should  win.” 

The  visitors  were  rising  to  leave,  and  Saul  went  over 
to  Tabitha  and  mischievously  pulled  out  some  of  the 
stitches  in  the  work  she  held  in  her  hands.  She  snatched 
it  away  from  him. 

“What  is  it  you  work  on  so  carefully  ?  ”  asked  Saul. 

“If  you  win  in  the  race,”  she  said  sweetly,  “some  day 
I  will  let  you  see  it.” 

The  men  and  women  lingered  long  in  their  parting, 
but  at  last  the  leave-taking  was  over.  The  lamps  were 
extinguished  after  the  mattresses  were  unrolled,  and  the 
family  lay  down  to  sleep. 


CHAPTER  III 

STAYING  TO  THE  END 

The  sun  was  appearing  along  the  high  peaks  of  the 
Taurus  Range  of  mountains  to  the  north,  bringing  them 
out  in  sharp  outline  against  the  purple  shadows  to  the 
west;  the  night  fog  was  scurrying  out  to  sea,  while  Saul 
hastened  to  the  Greek  school.  He  had  in  mind  the 
questions  he  had  been  asking  the  grandfather  and,  while 
loyal  to  his  training  in  the  Law  of  Moses,  he  had  a  great 
desire  to  find  out  what  were  the  views  of  the  liberal  and 
wise  Nestor. 

There  was  often  opportunity  to  ask  questions.  In 
that  day  of  intellectual  activity,  the  teacher  believed 
that  whatever  question  he  might  evoke  from  his  students 
was  an  evidence  of  advancement  and  a  key  to  the  trend 
of  thought  to  be  directed. 

The  first  of  the  students  to  hail  Saul  was  Gallio,  who 
came  to  meet  him. 

‘H  tore  myself  from  the  caressing  arms  of  Morpheus 
this  morning,  O  Jew,”  said  Gallio,  with  half-mocking, 
half-earnest  speech,  “to  be  here  early,  to  know  whether 
your  injury  was  severe.” 

“It  was  not  bad  enough  to  rob  you  of  your  gentle 
slumber,”  answered  Saul,  mocking  in  his  irony,  “for  we 
Romans  would  bear  much  worse  blows  and  not  whine.” 

“We  Romans!”  said  Gallio  in  surprise.  “Has  it 
made  you  beside  yourself?” 

“Nay,  be  not  anxious.”  Saul  still  kept  a  haughty 
manner.  “We  are  friends.  You  must  remember  that 


26 


STAYING  TO  THE  END 


27 


I  am  a  Roman  citizen,  but  to  call  me  a  Jew  is  not  offen- 

* 

sive. 

“Is  this  a  riddle  ?  If  so,  I  do  not  know  the  answer.” 
The  Roman  spoke  with  more  candor. 

“It  is  not  a  riddle,  but  a  plain  fact  with  which  I 
charge  your  memory,  along  with  the  recollection  of  our 
friendship,”  said  Saul  with  emphasis. 

At  this  moment  Nestor  came  in  among  the  other  boys 
assembled  and  walked  over  to  Saul  and  the  Roman.  He 
placed  his  hand  on  Saul’s  bare  head  and  glanced  at  the 
tiny  wound  on  his  face. 

“A  cut  from  some  dull  instrument,  but  not  serious,” 
said  Nestor,  as  if  talking  to  himself,  and  then,  as  if  for 
the  first  time  noticing  both  boys,  he  added,  “I  am  glad 
to  see  you  boys  in  friendly  conversation.” 

“Yes,  we  are  friends,  as  much  as  may  be,”  said  Saul 
with  sly  humor.  “In  the  words  of  Aratus,  ‘His  offspring 
are  we.’” 

“The  words  may  have  a  thrust  I  do  not  understand,” 
said  Nestor. 

“We  know  and  mean  to  remember,”  said  Saul,  and 
the  Roman  nodded  assent. 

“0  Nestor,”  asked  Saul,  “how  are  we  to  find  out 
the  true  words  or  who  speaks  them  about  the  Supreme 
Being  or  Spirit?” 

“That  is  a  difficult  question,”  replied  Nestor,  and  the 
boys  gathered  around,  for  they  knew  that  such  ques¬ 
tions  were  likely  to  bring  out  the  most  interesting 
answers.  “To  refuse  the  weight  of  authority  to  great 
thinkers  of  this  or  any  age  is  to  cast  adrift  on  an 
unknown  sea  in  a  starless  night;  and  to  follow  blindly 
and  implicitly  any  teacher  would  be  as  absurd  as  to 


28 


A  YOUTH  IN  TARSUS 


try  to  become  a  seaman  by  living  in  a  boat  that  is 
anchored.” 

“Then  what  is  the  solution,”  asked  the  Roman,  “if 
the  gods  are  not  to  be  trusted  ?  ” 

“I  said  nothing  about  doubting  the  gods,”  answered 
the  old  teacher  firmly,  for  he  well  knew  the  prejudices 
with  which  he  had  to  deal.  “  But  no  man  can  know  what 
the  gods  approve,  except  he  himself  has  earnestly  tried 
to  know  the  will  of  the  gods.  It  finally  comes  to  a  ques¬ 
tion  of  every  individual,  for  himself,  determining  and 
appropriating  the  knowledge  and  spirituality  that  shall 
control  his  life.” 

“What  has  been  revealed  is  the  end  of  revelation,” 
spoke  up  a  young  Greek. 

“Not  so,”  answered  Nestor  quickly,  “else  there  would 
be  an  end  to  the  joy  of  living.  Even  as  we  are  all  look¬ 
ing  forward  to  a  time  when  there  will  be  a  return  to  the 
Golden  Age,  or  a  new  and  better  age,  so  we  must  be 
acutely  sensitive  to  catch  any  revelation  that  may  direct 
us  to  serve  the  coming-in  of  the  better  age.  What  I 
would  impress  at  this  time  is  that  every  man  must  think 
rightly  for  himself,  which  means  that  he  must  first  know 
what  the  great  thinkers  have  found  out,  what  has  been 
abandoned  as  useless  in  that  thinking;  and  thus,  holding 
fast  to  that  which  has  been  found  substantial  and  eternal, 
he  must  strive  to  know  more  about  the  divine  nature.” 

“Can  we  know  what  is  right?”  asked  Saul. 

“Without  question,”  replied  Nestor,  “for  in  this 
exercise  of  the  mind  I  am  advising,  a  man  should  commune 
with  his  own  soul  and  not  yield  to  his  selfish  desires.” 

“How  will  we  know  what  to  accept  or  reject,  save 
someone  tell  us  ?  ”  persisted  Saul. 


STAYING  TO  THE  END 


29 


“No  one  can  tell  you  in  each  instance  what  to  accept; 
but  it  is  the  training  of  your  youth  and  the  courage  of 
your  mind  in  honest  and  unselfish  investigation  that  will 
tell  you,  or,  in  short,  that  will  reveal  to  you  the  highest 
and  best  things  if  you  think  on  themd^  Nestor  indicated 
that  the  questions  were  at  an  end  by  going  to  his  desk, 
and  the  boys  began  taking  notes  of  what  he  was  saying 
and  reading  to  them. 

When  school  was  dismissed,  the  boys  again  hurried 
to  the  gymnasium.  In  a  garden  near  the  gymnasium 
many  young  men  were  gathered,  drinking  wine  and  danc¬ 
ing  with  gayly  decorated  girls.  The  boys  stopped  near 
the  entrance  and  looked  on  for  a  moment,  watched  by  the 
athletic  director,  who  stood  farther  down  the  street, 
frowning  deeply.  Gallio  seized  Saul’s  arm  and  would 
have  dragged  him  in,  but  Saul  resisted,  so  the  Roman 
went  in  alone.  In  a  few  moments  he  returned  with  a 
goblet  of  wine,  which  he  urged  Saul  to  drink,  after  which 
they  would  join  the  wild  dance  of  boys  and  maidens 
who,  with  clasped  hands,  were  circling  around  a  foun¬ 
tain.  Saul  refused  firmly  and  the  group,  except  Gallio, 
made  their  way  to  the  gymnasium. 

The  director  met  them  at  the  entrance  and  asked 
immediately,  “How  many  went  to  the  wine-garden?” 

“Only  a  few  from  Rome  and  Athens,”  answered  one 
of  the  boys.  “They  said  it  would  make  no  difference 
to  you  if  they  missed  a  day.” 

“None  to  me,  certainly,”  replied  the  director,  “but 
a  great  deal  to  them.  An  athlete  must  keep  his  body 
clean  and  fit  to  be  a  god.” 

The  boys  stripped  for  their  exercises.  Before  begin¬ 
ning  to  wrestle  they  rubbed  themselves  with  oil  until 


30 


A  YOUTH  IN  TARSUS 


their  bodies  glistened.  They  were  in  pairs  and  each  was 
permitted  to  throw  dirt  and  sand  on  his  opponent,  so 
that  his  hands  would  not  slip.  While  wrestling  a  boy 
would  seize  a  handful  of  dust  and  spread  it  on  the  body 
of  his  opponent.  After  wrestling  they  would  look  as 
if  they  had  been  daubed  with  mud  to  change  their 
color. 

The  wrestling  was  of  two  kinds:  one,  simply  to  grab 
and  throw  the  other,  the  contest  being  decided  by  the 
first  one  down;  while  in  the  other  style  of  wrestling, 
practiced  chiefly  by  professionals,  the  object  was  to  throw 
and  hold  the  man  down  while  defense  could  be  made  by 
blows.  At  this  time  the  boys  were  engaged  in  the  simple 
wrestling,  and  the  director  went  up  and  down  the  line 
showing  them  how  to  grip  and  illustrating  the  art  of 
catching  an  opponent  unawares. 

After  a  short  session  at  wrestling,  the  director 
arranged  them  for  the  racing  contest.  There  were 
twelve  boys,  in  squads  of  four,  in  the  elimination  contest. 
Saul  was  among  the  first  four  racers  around  the  stadium. 
At  the  last  turn  to  the  home  stretch  he  leaped  forward 
with  a  desperate  effort  and,  straining  his  energy  to  the 
limit,  gained  the  lead  and  held  it  to  the  goal.  There  he 
dropped  panting  to  the  ground  and  watched  the  other 
racers  come  in  at  the  finish,  but  soon  recovered  and 
eagerly  stood  up. 

“Now,’’  said  the  director,  “all  who  would  like  to  take 
a  swim  hasten  to  the  pool.” 

All  except  two  ran  rapidly  to  the  pool,  while  the  direc¬ 
tor  carefully  watched  their  action.  One  of  the  boys  who 
had  remained  asked  him  who  would  be  chosen  for  the 
finals. 


STAYING  TO  THE  END 


31 


“The  boys  who  will  be  in  the  finals  are  among  those 
who  have  gone  to  the  pool,”  answered  the  director. 

Both  boys  started  to  run,  but  the  director  detained 
them,  saying,  “It  would  not  do  you  any  good  now,  for  I 
wanted  to  see  who  had  the  will  to  win,  and  therefore  did 
not  make  it  a  condition  that  you  should  swim.” 

The  director  hastened  to  the  edge  of  the  pool  and 
called  to  the  boys  struggling  to  outswim  one  another. 

“Do  not  struggle.  Take  it  moderately,  with  a  long, 
easy  stroke.” 

Saul  came  alongside  and  the  director  spoke  personally 
to  him. 

“Swim  low  in  the  water,  a  steady,  long  stroke.  Do 
not  try  to  speed  up,  then  your  swimming  will  be  of  advan¬ 
tage  to  you  if  ever  wrecked  at  sea.  Slower;  steady; 
recover  easily  from  the  stroke.  That  is  better.  This 
is  not  a  contest,  but  a  lesson  for  practical  use.” 

The  boys  swam  gracefully  past  and  the  director 
watched  them  carefully  for  some  time,  and  then  called 
them  out.  They  passed  him  on  their  way  out,  and  to 
each  he  spoke  some  word. 

“Do  you  feel  wearied  ?”  he  asked  Saul,  in  a  way  that 
hinted  he  would  think  it  only  natural. 

“Not  at  all,  now,”  answered  Saul.  “Are  we  to  run 
another  race?” 

The  director  smiled  and  told  the  boys  to  scrape  them¬ 
selves  clean  and  meet  him  at  the  gymnasium. 

The  boys  applied  to  themselves  and  to  each  other 
the  strigil,  a  common  and  very  necessary  instrument, 
inasmuch  as  they  had  no  soaps  with  which  to  cleanse  the 
body.  The  strigil  was  semicircular  in  shape,  almost  like 
a  hand  sickle  or  old-fashioned  reaping  hook,  except  that 


32 


A  YOUTH  IN  TARSUS 


it  was  bent  so  as  to  form  a  channel  with  two  edges,  and 
the  outer  end  was  curved  backward  so  as  to  conform  to 
different  parts  of  the  body.  The  boys  busied  themselves 
scraping  the  oil  and  dirt  from  their  bodies,  and  aided 
each  other  in  scraping  their  backs.  After  they  were 
dressed  they  lined  up  in  front  of  the  director. 

‘‘This  selection  is  made  not  only  because  of  fleetness 
of  foot,”  he  said  very  seriously,  “although  that  is  neces¬ 
sary,  but  in  consideration  of  the  fine  spirit  and  strong 
determination  of  the  racer  to  run  to  his  last  breath,  with 
his  full  strength  conserved  for  the  final  trial.  A  foot 
racer  is  not  a  mere  animal,  but  a  thinker,  who  must  be 
willing  to  sacrifice  himself  in  the  contest.  He  must  have 
not  only  courage,  but  the  will  to  win.  I  will  now  name 
those  who  will  contest  for  the  highest  honors  in  the  prin¬ 
cipal  race.” 

He  named  them  over,  and  indicated  that  they  step  to 
the  front  as  he  called  them.  He  first  named  two  Greek 
youths,  Lysander  and  Lysagoras,  and  a  Roman,  Grotius. 
Then  he  paused  as  if  in  doubt,  looked  at  Saul,  whose 
eagerness  shone  in  his  eyes,  and  motioned  to  him  to  take 
his  place  in  front  with  the  other  three. 

“We  have  two  Greeks,  a  Roman,  and  a  Jew  to  compete 
for  the  hardest  race,  1,500  pedes,”  said  the  director, 
“and  all  have  been  selected  on  merit  alone.” 

“You  need  have  no  fear,”  said  Saul.  “If  I  win,  not 
only  will  a  Jew  win,  but  also  a  Roman  of  Tarsus.” 

The  director  looked  on  him  approvingly,  smiled,  and 
the  boys  were  dismissed. 


CHAPTER  IV 
ROMAN  ENVY 

Saul  went  home  from  the  gymnasium  in  great  excite¬ 
ment  and  told  his  father  of  his  good  fortune.  Ben  Hanan 
listened  very  quietly  to  his  son’s  account  and  seemed 
absorbed  in  deep  thought.  David  danced  about  in  glee 
and  then  ran  out  to  the  street  to  tell  the  other  boys  of  his 
brother’s  good  luck. 

“If  you  win  this  race,”  said  Saul’s  father  after  David 
had  gone,  “and  if  the  rabbi  will  give  you  proper  words  of 
approval  you  may  go  with  us  to  the  feast  of  the  Passover. 
You  were  dedicated  at  your  birth  to  become  a  rabbi, 
and  if  you  live  up  to  the  high  resolves  we  have  made  for 
you,  there  may  be  a  great  name  for  you.” 

“I  know,  father,”  said  Saul  in  quiet,  boyish  hesitation, 
“but  I  sometimes  fear  you  have  builded  too  much  on  me. 
People  always  pity  me  because  I  am  small  for  my  age.” 

“Let  your  mind  tower  over  giants  of  strength,  and 
you  will  be  strong  where  they  are  weak,”  said  Ben  Hanan, 
looking  sternly  upon  Saul.  “You  must  not  allow  any 
fault  of  body  or  mind,  nor  any  number  of  voices  to  turn 
you  from  your  purpose.  Eix  your  goal;  win  it!  Now 
go  quickly  to  your  work  and  your  lessons  with  your 
grandfather.” 

In  the  workroom  the  old  grandfather  was  leaning 
against  the  wall  sound  asleep.  Saul  started  to  speak 
to  him,  hesitated,  and  then,  smiling  on  the  old  gentleman, 
sat  down  on  a  rug  and  began  sewing  the  pieces  of  cloth 
together. 


33 


34 


A  YOUTH  IN  TARSUS 


“Do  you  think  to  steal  upon  me  unawares?”  said 
the  grandfather  querulously,  arousing  from  his  sleep. 
“Do  you  try  to  make  me  think  you  have  been  working 
diligently?” 

“Not  so,  for  I  have  been  anxious  to  ask  questions,” 
Saul  replied.  “Nestor  said  that  all  people  were  looking 
forward  to  a  new  time,  a  Golden  Age  to  come;  but  I 
said  nothing  lest  I  should  make  a  mistake.” 

“True  enough,  these  people  look  forward  to  a  time 
when  morals  will  be  better;  and  in  truth  their  manners 
grow  corrupt,”  replied  the  grandfather,  “but  they  have 
no  such  assurance  as  those  of  our  faith,  that  the  Lord 
will  send  us  an  Anointed  One,  a  Messiah.” 

“Tell  me  who  is  to  be  the  Anointed  One,”  said  Saul. 

“That  I  cannot,”  answered  the  grandfather,  now 
busy  with  his  work.  “But  we  are  promised  by  the 
prophets  that  a  great  and  mighty  one  will  come  to  us  and 
lead  us  as  victors  over  our  enemies,  and  again  Israel 
will  sit  among  the  nations  of  the  world.” 

“Why  do  Jews  scatter  about  the  world?”  Saul 
dropped  his  work.  “Why  do  they  work  for  other  nations 
and  not  have  the  rule  over  even  Jerusalem?” 

“There,  now,  you  will  become  a  Greek  dreamer, 
unless  you  sew  those  things  into  the  mind  stitch  by 
stitch.”  The  grandfather  pointed  to  the  task  and  did 
not  resume  until  Saul  was  again  working.  “Our 
fathers  had  to  pay  the  penalty  of  violating  the  laws  of 
God,  and  we  were  driven  out  many  times.  Besides, 
Jews  have  never  learned  how  to  submit  in  prosperity  to 
one  another,  and  therefore  have  failed  in  every  attempt 
to  make  a  strong  government  for  themselves.  They 


ROMAN  ENVY 


35 


must  learn  from  obedience  to  foreign  rulers  how  to  give, 
demand,  and  enforce  authority.  The  pride  of  our  people 
makes  them  poor  in  establishing  any  government  among 
themselves.  When  the  time  comes,  the  Anointed  One 
will  lead  us  back  to  our  country,  and  Jerusalem  will 
become  the  seat  of  wonderful  government.” 

“Then  we  have  a  definite  promise  of  a  mighty  one  ?  ” 
Saul  asked. 

“Aye,  the  words  of  Isaiah  are  the  words  of  the  Lord — 
that  the  Prince  Immanuel  will  come.”  The  old  man 
dropped  his  work  and  looked  away  in  a  trance.  “And 
because  we  Pharisees  know  that  there  is  a  resurrection, 
I  long  that  I  may  be  laid  in  a  tomb  in  Jerusalem  to 
rejoice  in  my  spirit  in  that  great  Day.” 

“O  grandfather!”  cried  Saul.  “I  have  been  chosen 
for  the  first  four  in  the  foot  race  on  the  day  of  the  games.” 

“What  nonsense!”  The  old  man  complained  bit¬ 
terly.  “To  your  grave  there  will  be  a  mark  on  your 
brow  of  that  brutal  fighting.  Sad  days  these!  Our 
young  men  wear  hats  like  the  Greeks,  fight  like  the 
Romans,  and  fill  their  heads  full  of  the  useless  history  of 
other  nations!” 

“But  you  know,”  Saul  spoke  with  a  superior  air, 
“that  I  am  to  become  a  rabbi  to  win  Gentiles  to  our 
faith,  and  I  must  know  what  they  are  taught  to  believe.” 

“Very  absurd  idea,”  the  old  man  spoke  sorrowfully, 
“that  you  have  to  know  what  other  people  think  about 
when  your  whole  duty  will  be  to  tell  them  about  God. 
I  did  not  so  train  your  father,  Ben  Hanan,  but  he  thinks 
to  make  you  powerful  by  racing  like  a  Greek.  Let 
us  hope  that  you  will  not  become  a  professional  racer.” 


36 


A  YOUTH  IN  TARSUS 


At  that  moment  Ben  Hanan  came  into  the  room  and 
stood  listening  to  the  last  words  of  the  old  man.  He 
smiled  pleasantly. 

“Let  us  rather  hope,”  he  said,  “that  the  boy  will  be 
an  honor  to  us.” 

The  father  carefully  inspected  the  work  that  Saul 
had  done,  while  David,  the  younger  brother,  cuddled 
down  beside  Saul  and  waited  in  silence  until  his  father 
had  left  the  shop. 

“When  are  you  going  to  play  ball  with  me?”  he 
asked  as  soon  as  the  father  had  gone. 

“I  am  such  a  busy  person  that  I  can  hardly  say 
when,”  said  Saul,  with  the  air  of  a  man  burdened  with 
many  affairs.  “  In  the  mornings  I  must  attend  the  school 
of  Nestor  and  take  my  training  in  the  gymnasium.  The 
Roman  and  Greek  boys  have  the  rest  of  the  day  to  them¬ 
selves,  but  I  must  do  this  work  and  get  my  lessons  in 
the  law  from  our  grandfather,  and  take  special  lessons 
from  Rabbi  Ben  Arza.  You  will  find  out  when  you  are 
as  old  as  I  am  how  much  harder  is  the  task  set  for  a  Jew 
than  for  a  Gentile.” 

“Yes,  I  know,”  replied  David,  “for  mother  told  me 
I  must  not  tease  you;  but  you  know  so  much  more  about 
the  game  than  the  boys  I  play  with.” 

“I  would  play  this  evening,”  said  Saul,  touched  by 
his  little  brother’s  gentleness,  “but  I  have  to  go  for  a 
special  lesson  with  Rabbi  Ben  Arza.  Tomorrow  we 
will  play,  if  you  will  get  another  boy,  so  as  to  make  a 
three- toss  game.” 

“I  love  my  brother,”  said  David,  throwing  his  arms 
around  Saul’s  neck  and  kissing  his  cheek  in  the  simple 
custom  of  his  people,  “and  some  day,  when  you  come 


ROMAN  ENVY 


37 


back  a  rabbi,  I  will  be  doing  this  work  for  you.” 
Immediately  he  jumped  to  his  feet  and  ran  to  the  door, 
pulling  from  behind  it  a  boy  of  his  own  age  who  had  been 
waiting  for  him.  ‘‘He  will  play  with  us  tomorrow 
evening,”  he  shouted. 

“And  wx  will  learn  the  game  so  we  can  beat  the  other 
boys,”  said  the  boy  who  had  been  in  hiding. 

“It  is  a  big  thing  for  us,”  said  David  as  they  went 
out,  “for  Saul  is  in  the  first  four  who  run  in  the  big 
race.” 

The  room  became  quiet,  and  Saul  began  the  recitation 
of  the  Law  of  Moses  which  his  grandfather  demanded  of 
him.  With  patience  and  spirit  he  followed  in  what  to 
many  would  have  been  a  task,  but  which  he  mingled  with 
the  ambitions  instilled  by  his  father  to  become  a  teacher 
of  his  own  people  as  well  as  the  teacher  of  men  who  were 
not  of  his  faith.  He  had  come  to  believe  that  no  other 
career  could  compare  with  this  laid  out  for  him  to 
persuade  men  by  his  knowledge  that  faith  in  the  God 
of  Jews  was  more  to  be  desired  than  the  belief  or  mere 
acknowledgment  of  belief  in  the  gods  which  he  saw 
represented  in  the  statues  in  the  public  places. 

In  the  cool  shade  of  the  court  of  the  dwelling  set 
apart  for  the  sons  of  wealth  sent  from  distant  places  to 
gather  wisdom  from  Nestor’s  school  in  Tarsus,  mean¬ 
while,  Gallio  was  holding  forth  to  the  three  boys  who, 
with  Saul,  had  been  selected  to  race  for  the  honors  of  the 
first  four. 

“I  do  not  care  much,”  said  Gallio,  “for  being  shut 
out  of  the  races  by  the  director.  These  teachers  are  all 
right  in  their  ideas  of  strict  rules  of  conduct  for  you  people 


38 


A  YOUTH  IN  TARSUS 


of  the  East,  but  in  Rome  a  man  of  public  affairs  must 
know  how  to  mix  with  the  pleasure-seeking  men  of  wealth. 
I  only  cared  to  see  the  new  dance  which  the  girls  of  the 
wine-garden  were  giving.” 

‘‘He  seemed  to  fear  that  your  dissipation  would 
unfit  you  as  a  contender,”  said  Grotius. 

“I  know  their  fears,  but  they  do  not  know  how  strong 
we  men  of  Rome  are,”  returned  Gallio,  as  if  pitying  the 
director.  “Neither  women,  nor  wine,  nor  both  can 
spoil  any  except  some  weakling  that  has  come  up  from  a 
freedman.  My  younger  brother,  Seneca,  now  in  Alex¬ 
andria,  went  in  for  the  rules  and  the  philosophies  when  he 
was  here,  and  now  he  is  older  than  his  father.  He  hopes 
to  become  a  teacher  of  great  men.  He  worships  Jupiter 
and  all  the  gods,  but  Mars  and  the  emperor  will  be 
enough  for  me.  I  want  a  consulship  in  some  place  where 
life  is  worth  living,  away  from  the  making  of  new  rules 
of  morality,  and  not  too  much  knowledge  of  old  ones.” 

“Very  fine,  for  you,”  said  the  Greek,  Lysagoras, 
“but  you  may  find  out  you  are  not  strong  enough  to  play 
that  game.  You  lost  your  chance  in  the  races  because 
of  the  dancers.” 

“That  was  not  a  loss,  but  a  gain.”  Gallio  laughed 
heartily.  “You  may  yet  be  beaten  by  the  Jew,  Saul, 
and  what  could  be  more  of  a  loss  ?” 

“That  is  to  be  thought  of,”  said  Lysagoras,  “for  he 
runs  on  his  will  after  his  legs  have  grown  weak.” 

“You  are  even  now  beaten,”  said  Gallio. 

“Not  yet,”  said  Lysagoras,  “but  I  am  thinking  of  his 
staying  qualities  in  the  elimination  races,  and  I  must 
confess  he  has  the  best  chance  to  win  of  any  of  us,  even 
if  he  is  a  Jew.” 


ROMAN  ENVY 


39 


^‘Now  listen  to  me,”  returned  Gallio.  “I  am  not 
deceived  as  to  his  chances.  I  think  he  can  win  unless 
you  boys  use  cunning.  You  are  nearly  as  good  as  he  is. 

‘‘This  race  is  three  times  around  the  spina  of  the 
arena,  a  little  arena  compared  with  our  great  Maximus 
in  Rome.  Now  you,  Lysander,  spurt  and  take  the  inside 
at  the  start.  Saul  will  come  up  to  you  and  must  try 
to  pass  at  your  right.  You  swing  wide  before  you  get 
to  the  north  end  of  the  spina,  as  if  to  swing  around  the 
metae  there,  but  crowd  him  far  out.  This  will  give 
Lysagoras  a  chance  to  come  in  next  the  wall  and  swung 
wide  for  his  turn  after  he  has  passed  the  metae,  and  to 
gain  so  as  to  be  next  the  wall  on  the  back  course.  Let 
Saul  come  up  with  him  and  start  to  pass  on  the  outside. 
Then  Lysagoras  can  spurt  and  again  carry  Saul  out  wide 
before  he  reaches  the  south  end  of  the  spina  on  second 
round,  while  Grotius  will  hug  the  wall  and  make  a  narrow 
turn,  and  be  in  the  lead  at  the  north  metae.  There 
you  can  make  your  turn  to  suit  yourself,  Grotius,  and 
spurt  for  the  white  line  at  the  end  of  the  course.” 

“Would  that  be  according  to  the  rules?”  inquired 
Lysander  anxiously.  Gallio  gave  him  a  quick  look,  as  if 
to  see  whether  he  were  recalling  the  boxing  incident. 

“So  long  as  there  is  no  rule  against  it,  and  there  is 
none,”  Gallio  said  with  authority,  “there  can  be  no 
way  for  the  judges  to  give  the  race  except  to  the  one 
who  first  crosses  the  goal.” 

“But  would  it  be  honorable?”  Lysander  persisted. 
“Besides,  by  your  plan  no  one  but  Grotius  has  a  chance 
to  win.” 

“You  would  better  say  that  you  know  that  without  a 
plan  none  but  Saul  will  win.”  Gallio  looked  earnestly 


40 


A  YOUTH  IN  TARSUS 


at  each  boy  in  turn  and  asked  the  question  that  decided 
them: 

“Would  you  not  rather  make  some  sacrifice  than  to 
have  a  Jew  win?’^ 

“Then  let  us  agree/’  said  Grotius,  “though  I  must 
say  that  Saul  is  as  honorable  as  any  of  the  boys  I  know. 
I  will  run  the  race  as  you  say,  even  if  it  is  not  exactly 
the  way  I  would  wish  to  win.” 

“Neither  would  I  suggest  this  plan,”  said  Gallio 
with  seeming  frankness,  “were  it  not  that  he  must  be 
humbled.  He  likes  to  boast  that  he  is  a  Roman,  and 
here  is  a  chance  to  make  him  feel  that  there  is  something 
more  than  title  in  citizenship.  When  I  get  my  toga 
virilis  upon  my  return  to  Rome,  I  will  give  my  attention 
to  making  the  rights  of  citizenship  more  restricted. 
Remember  your  pledges  for  the  day  of  the  festival.” 


CHAPTER  V 
THE  WILL  TO  WIN 


Saul’s  life  was  a  very  busy  one.  True  to  the  teach¬ 
ings  of  his  people,  he  had  learned  a  trade,  the  trade  of 
his  father,  a  tent-maker;  true  to  the  boasts  of  the  Phari¬ 
sees,  he  had  been  instructed  in  the  written  law,  as  well 
as  the  traditions  of  his  people,  and  knew  the  hope  of 
resurrection.  At  that  period  of  history,  Gamaliel  had 
achieved  a  reputation  of  being  one  of  the  great  teachers 
in  Jerusalem,  following  in  the  footsteps  of  another  great 
teacher,  Hillel. 

The  historian  Josephus  states  that  there  were  ‘‘not 
fewer  than  three  million”  Jews  gathered  in  Jerusalem 
during  the  feast  of  the  Passover.  They  came  from  all 
parts  of  the  world,  the  young  men  to  see  the  Temple  for  the 
first  time ;  the  old  men  to  see  it  for  the  last  time,  welcoming 
the  possibility  that  they  might  pass  away  while  in  the 
city  and  be  buried  in  some  one  of  its  historical  tombs. 

For  months  before  the  pilgrimage  the  Jews  arranged 
their  affairs  for  this  great  event.  The  means  of  travel 
were  varied.  The  swarthy  dwellers  of  inland  cities 
came  in  caravans,  so  that  the  roadways  were  lined  with 
camels,  donkeys,  and  foot  travelers.  The  nations  from 
which  these  devotees  came  arranged  to  meet  the  unusual 
demand  for  accommodations,  including  ships,  and  the 
general  conduct  of  business  had  to  be  adjusted  to  await 
the  return  of  pilgrims. 

Ben  Hanan,  because  of  his  standing  as  a  merchant, 
had  been  able  to  make  ample  provision  along  the  route 


41 


42 


A  YOUTH  IN  TARSUS 


for  this  most  important  journey.  He  would  take  with 
him  his  aged  father,  now  growing  feeble,  but  joyfully 
looking  forward  to  seeing  once  more  the  beloved  Jerusa¬ 
lem.  Any  friend  who  might  suggest  to  the  old  man  that 
he  would  scarcely  be  able  to  withstand  the  hardships  of 
so  long  a  journey  received  the  confident  reply  that  of  a 
surety  he  would  hold  out  to  reach  the  city;  and  the  return 
did  not  matter. 

One  object  of  Ben  Hanan’s  ambition  was  to  place 
his  son  Saul  under  the  guidance  of  the  wonderful  teacher, 
Gamaliel,  in  order  that  a  rabbi,  trained  and  equipped, 
might  take  his  place  as  a  man  of  learning  in  competition 
with  the  teachers  connected  with  the  famous  university 
in  Tarsus.  It  was  his  purpose  to  make  of  his  son  a  skilful 
teacher,  who  should  defend  and  even  proselyte  for  the 
faith  of  Jehovah;  and  to  that  end  he  must  be  thoroughly 
versed  in  all  the  reasoning  and  rhetoric  of  the  finished 
scholars  of  Greece  and  Rome,  in  the  Stoic  and  Epicurean 
philosophies,  as  well  as  in  the  subtle  learning  of  his  own 
people. 

With  a  look  far  into  the  future,  Ben  Hanan,  from  the 
little  ceremony  of  dedicating  Saul  at  his  birth,  had 
planned  that  this  son  should  be  schooled  in  all  the  learn¬ 
ing  of  other  nations,  and  at  the  same  time  he  should  be 
imbued  with  the  relentless  zeal  of  the  prophets  for  the 
Law  of  Moses.  He  had  planned,  too,  that  this  favored 
son  should  not  be  spared  the  lessons  of  industry,  and 
should  be  animated  by  the  fixed  purpose  of  his  race  to 
continue  its  course  to  bring  the  world  into  harmony 
with  the  revelations  of  the  ages  of  prophecy.  In  short, 
his  son  must  be  not  only  a  contender  for  his  faith,  but  he 
must  be  possessed  of  all  the  polish  of  Grecian  diplomacy, 


THE  WILL  TO  WIN 


43 


together  with  full  knowledge  of  the  things  that  made  a 
Roman  citizen  of  value  to  his  nation. 

Among  the  things  which  Ben  Hanan  desired  for  his 
son  was  the  possession  of  a  strong  body.  Though  not 
of  great  stature,  he  must  have  well-trained  muscles  and 
be  schooled  in  that  co-ordination  of  mind  and  body 
accomplished  by  the  specialists  in  Greek  athletics.  It 
was  no  foolish  pride  in  him  that  would  be  satisfied  by 
the  victory  of  his  son  in  the  games,  but  he  wanted  the 
boy  to  have  the  confidence  that  would  come  from  contest 
with  others.  He  wished  to  take  to  Gamaliel  a  student 
capable,  if  the  day  should  come,  of  becoming  the  diplo¬ 
matic  leader  of  people  far  from  the  immediate  influences 
of  the  Temple.  Therefore,  he  greatly  desired  that  Saul 
should  be  a  winner  in  the  games,  in  order  that  he  might 
have  knowledge  of  the  people  and  the  confident  feeling 
of  one  who  strives  to  win  on  his  own  merits. 

The  day  of  the  races  came  at  the  close  of  the  course  in 
the  lectures.  The  young  men  would  then  return  to  their 
homes,  some  to  the  Far  East,  to  feed  the  growing  desire 
of  knowledge  among  their  people,  just  arousing  “from 
the  torpor  of  oriental  life.”  The  Romans  would  return 
to  their  homes,  to  lay  aside  the  cloak  of  youth  and  take 
on  the  cloak  of  manhood,  to  become  soldiers  in  the  service 
of  their  country,  administrators  of  affairs,  and,  above 
all,  to  assert  the  supremacy  and  dignity  of  Rome  as  the 
ruler  of  the  world.  The  boys  from  Greece  would  go  to  a 
more  contemplative  life.  Their  national  existence  offered 
little  of  attraction;  it  was  swallowed  up  in  the  Roman 
Empire.  They  had  the  glory  of  the  geniuses  of  centuries 
before,  a  subdued  but  never  wholly  suppressed  pride  in 
the  intellectual  life  their  great  men  had  given  to  the 


44 


A  YOUTH  IN  TARSUS 


world;  hence,  they  turned  to  the  study  of  letters,  art, 
and  philosophies.  Those  from  Egypt  had  little  to  boast 
of  in  their  homes,  except  very  ancient  glories,  now  sub¬ 
merged  in  the  Greek  culture,  except  for  the  strong  and 
growing  influence  of  the  Jewish  element,  which  had 
taken  over  the  control  of  some  small  cities  and  some  parts 
of  great  Alexandria. 

Not  only  would  the  winner  of  any  contest  in  the  games 
have  some  knowledge  of  the  people  of  different  parts  of 
the  world,  by  association  with  representatives  of  different 
countries  in  the  school,  but  his  name  would  go  out  to  the 
many  cities  from  which  these  students  came.  Ben 
Hanan  carefully  calculated  the  values  of  such  training 
for  his  son,  for  he  was  going  counter  to  Jewish  customs 
and  even  against  the  counsel  of  his  own  household.  It 
was  not  that  he  merely  hoped  his  son  might  be  a  winner 
in  the  games;  but  it  was  his  hope  that  the  boy  would 
become  a  man  who  would  be  a  leader  of  men  of  many 
nations  gathered  in  Tarsus.  Hard  though  he  seemed  to 
be  with  his  son,  yet  deep  in  his  heart  was  the  hungry 
ambition  for  that  son’s  success,  in  which  he  would  glory. 

The  chaplet  of  leaves,  in  imitation  of  the  crown  of 
sacred  laurel  given  at  the  Olympian  games,  was  of  no 
value  and  soon  faded,  but  it  denoted  the  victor.  That 
was  the  real  prize — victory.  Old  and  young  came  to 
these  games  to  enjoy  the  thrill  of  the  contests,  and  thus 
to  keep  alive  in  the  far-off  provinces  the  spirit  of  Rome, 
now  in  her  glory,  though  soon  to  wane. 

The  important  day  of  the  games  came,  and  the  men 
of  Tarsus  gathered  in  the  arena.  It  was  unusual  for 
many  Jews  to  be  present.  The  seats  were  filled  when 
the  master  of  ceremonies  led  the  parade  around  the 


THE  WILL  TO  WIN 


45 


arena.  The  proconsul,  with  a  guard  of  mounted  lictors, 
was  at  the  head  of  the  procession  in  a  richly  decorated 
chariot  drawn  by  four  beautiful  stallions,  prancing  as  if 
proud  of  their  place  of  honor.  Two  sets  of  brightly 
burnished  fasces,  symbols  of  Roman  power  and  authority, 
were  placed  in  the  chariot  so  that  the  proconsul  stood 
between  them.  Two  elephants  suggested  the  greater 
display  of  Rome.  Then  followed  two-  and  four-horse 
chariots,  which  would  compete  in  the  arena,  and  horse¬ 
men  riding  bareback,  who  would  exhibit  feats  of 
riding. 

The  boxers,  wrestlers,  and  foot  racers  followed  afoot, 
stripped  as  for  the  contests,  to  give  the  people  a  chance 
to  make  their  choice  of  winners,  for  the  populace  had  as 
much  enjoyment  in  making  wagers  on  the  results  as  in 
the  exhibition  itself. 

While  the  parade  was  in  progress,  Ben  Hanan  arrived 
with  his  father  and  Rabbi  Ben  Arza.  A  large  number  of 
Jews  had  been  at  the  entrance  since  the  gates  opened, 
waiting  until  Ben  Hanan  would  come,  as  he  had  told 
them  he  would,  to  enter  with  him.  They  had  reserved  a 
section  opposite  the  south  end  of  the  spina,  and  had  a 
close  view  of  the  white  mark  that  was  the  goal  of  the 
races.  They  attracted  much  attention  as  they  filed  in 
and  filled  the  seats.  Farther  to  the  north  and  on  the 
same  side  of  the  arena  were  many  of  the  young  men  from 
the  school,  who  were  getting  out  of  the  day  that  vast 
enjoyment  which  youth  has  always  been  able  to  extract 
from  any  parade,  great  or  small. 

‘‘The  Jews  have  come  to  see  their  champion  lose,” 
said  Gallio,  laughing  and  pointing  to  the  company  of 
Jews,  as  they  selected  their  seats  with  some  hesitation. 


46 


A  YOUTH  IN  TARSUS 


Ben  Hanan  had  a  seat  in  the  front  row,  with  his 
father  and  Ben  Arza  back  of  him.  Immediately  the 
rabbi  and  the  grandfather  began  a  conversation  in  which 
they  interested  most  of  their  friends,  turning  away  their 
faces  as  if  the  arena  had  no  interest  for  them. 

After  the  parade  there  was  a  two-horse  chariot  race 
which  aroused  the  interest  of  the  people,  but  none  of  the 
Jews  save  Ben  Hanan  and  one  or  two  others  observed  it. 
Then  followed  a  four-horse  chariot  race,  which  so  aroused 
the  people  that  the  confusion  of  cries  disturbed  the  very 
earnest  conversation  of  the  rabbi  and  the  grandfather. 

A  number  of  young  men  gave  an  exhibition  of  boxing 
which  enabled  the  two  conversationalists  to  get  deep 
into  some  controversy  as  to  the  interpretation  of  the  law; 
and  to  show  how  Httle  they  cared  for  the  sports  they 
turned  their  backs  toward  the  arena. 

The  master  of  ceremonies  was  announcing  that  the 
next  on  the  program  would  be  the  first  four  contestants 
for  the  honors  of  the  hardest  race  to  be  run,  three  times 
around  the  arena,  in  which  the  young  men  who  had 
quahfied  were  Lysander  of  Corinth,  Lysagoras  of 
Athens,  Grotius  of  Rome,  and  Saul  of  Tarsus. 

The  grandfather  turned  to  the  arena,  and  could  not 
hear  any  more  conversation. 

“I  maintain  the  exclusive  authority  of  the  Torah,’’ 
said  Ben  Arza,  plucking  at  Azel’s  sleeve  to  get  his 
attention. 

‘‘Saul,  my  grandson,  is  in  this  race,”  said  the  old  man, 
“and  the  Torah  is  safe.  How  small  he  looks  when 
stripped,  and  I  am  almost  ashamed  to  look  on  his  naked 
body!” 


THE  WILL  TO  WIN 


47 


“He  is  sturdy  and  no  doubt  strong,”  commented 
Ben  Arza,  giving  closer  attention. 

Ben  Hanan  was  so  rigid  that  he  plainly  disclosed  his 
great  anxiety  and  the  fierce  control  he  maintained  over 
his  emotions.  He  paid  no  heed  to  the  shouting  boys 
on  his  left.  Gallio  rose,  and  drawing  a  purse  from  his 
girdle,  swaggered  over  to  Ben  Hanan. 

“0  Jews,”  cried  Gallio,  shaking  the  bag  in  front  of 
Ben  Hanan,  “here  is  the  gold  sent  me  for  my  expenses 
on  my  return  home.  Should  I  lose  it,  I  would  have  to 
spend  many  more  weeks  in  Tarsus,  because  of  my  folly, 
waiting  for  another  remittance.  Yet  I  cannot  resist  the 
chance  to  wager  it  that  Saul  will  not  win  this  race,  if  so 
be  that  any  Jew  thinks  he  can  win.” 

Ben  Hanan  looked  at  him  closely  and  asked,  “Is 
your  name  Gallio  ?” 

“You  have  said  it,  father  in  Israel,”  returned  Gallio 
mockingly,  “and  would  that  induce  you  to  have  my 
company  in  Tarsus  ?  ” 

“Not  so,  my  son,”  Ben  Hanan  was  rising  while  he 
spoke,  “but  if  the  gold  remain  in  your  purse,  it  will  not 
cut  so  much  as  if  it  were  copper  on  your  hands.” 

Gallio  was  so  taken  aback  by  this  reply  that  he  could 
make  no  retort  and  went  back  to  his  companions  much 
crestfallen.  Ben  Hanan  left  the  company  and  hastened 
down  to  the  doorway  opening  on  the  race  course.  Saul 
was  warming  up,  as  were  the  others,  and  Ben  Hanan 
beckoned  to  him  to  come  nearer. 

“Son,  be  wise  and  careful.”  Ben  Hanan  showed  his 
deep  anxiety  in  the  stress  of  his  voice.  “I  have  just 
listened  to  Gallio,  offering  to  wager  against  you.  His 


48 


A  YOUTH  IN  TARSUS 


manner  is  so  certain  and  so  brazen  that  I  am  sure  there 
is  some  trick  planned  against  you,  which  he  knows. 
Use  every  art  that  the  rules  will  permit,  and  win,  that 
this  boastful  Roman  may  be  humbled.” 

The  master  of  ceremonies  was  calling  the  contestants 
to  their  places.  Ben  Hanan  hastened  back  to  his  seat. 

^‘You  will  not  chance  any  money?”  asked  the  old 
grandfather. 

^‘Nay,  more  than  money — my  hope,”  returned  the 
father. 

‘‘This  is  so  tiresome,”  said  the  old  man,  leaning  back 
in  his  seat,  “that  I  wish  I  had  left  before  this  race  was 
called.” 

The  boys  were  ranged  in  an  order  determined  by 
the  casting  of  dice.  Lysander  was  on  the  inside,  next 
the  spina,  then  came  Saul,  Grotius,  and  Lysagoras. 
A  broad,  white  line  extended  from  wall  to  wall  of 
the  arena  south  of  the  spina;  and  on  the  right  side 
this  line  was  the  starting-point,  on  the  left  side,  the 
goal. 

The  arena  was  oblong.  A  little  to  the  left  of  the 
center  of  the  long  way  was  a  low  wall,  extending  through¬ 
out  the  central  part,  leaving  a  wide  space  between  each 
end  of  the  wall  and  the  inclosing  walls  of  the  arena. 
This  central  low  wall  was  called  the  spina,  and  at  each 
end  of  it  were  three  small  pillars,  called  metae.  In 
chariot  races,  some  of  which  were  seven  times  around 
the  arena,  it  was  one  of  the  arts  to  make  the  turn  so  as 
not  to  lose  speed,  and  yet  to  come  back  into  the  course 
without  too  much  distance  being  covered;  and  often 
the  drivers  would  swing  out  before  reaching  the  end  of 
the  spina  and  swing  in  so  close  to  it  that  the  wheels  would 


THE  WILL  TO  WIN 


49 


be  wrecked  against  the  metae.  The  spina  was  narrow 
and  some  of  the  charioteer’s  problems  in  turning  at  the 
metae  confronted  the  foot  racers,  but  in  lesser  degree. 

High  walls  inclosed  the  arena.  From  the  top  of  these 
walls  the  seats  of  the  audience  rose  in  tiers  to  the  inclos¬ 
ing  outside  walls  of  the  whole  structure.  The  decadent 
days,  in  which  women  attended,  as  was  later  the  custom 
in  Rome,  had  not  come  to  Tarsus.  Here  the  Greek 
influence  prevailed,  and  the  audience  crowded  the  great 
seating  capacity,  to  enjoy  the  races  and  contests  in  which 
the  participants  esteemed  it  a  privilege  and  an  honor  to 
take  part.  The  Romans  held  to  the  view  that  slaves, 
captives,  and  hirelings  should  appear  in  the  arena  for  the 
amusement  of  the  people,  while  the  Greeks  excluded 
slaves  and  hired  performers.  Their  games  were  their 
expression  of  religious  regard  for  the  development  of 
the  body;  and  on  this  day  in  Tarsus  the  old  Greek 
admiration  of  beauty  and  passion  for  the  best  form  of 
athletics  prevailed.  The  wide  spaces  for  the  spectators 
were  crowded  with  all  classes  of  people,  including  the 
most  learned  and  the  highest  of  rank. 

The  director  of  the  gymnasium,  proud  of  his  position, 
stood  in  front  of  the  boys,  as  they  lined  up  in  running 
order,  and  spoke  a  few  last  words: 

“Let  everyone  do  his  best  and  remember  his  training. 
Remember,  this  is  the  hardest  race,  1,500  pedes.  You 
must  conserve  your  strength  and  not  waste  yourself  in 
vain  spurts.  To  have  run  in  this  race  and  lost  after  an 
earnest  effort  is  some  honor.” 

The  director  stepped  back,  slowly  lifted  a  white 
napkin,  and  paused  to  give  the  boys  a  moment  in  which 
to  adjust  themselves.  The  grandfather  leaned  forward 


50 


A  YOUTH  IN  TARSUS 


and  held  his  breath.  Ben  Hanan  rested  his  chin  on  his 
hands,  on  the  railing  in  front  of  him. 

The  director  dropped  the  napkin,  and  the  boys 
leaped  to  the  race.  Down  toward  the  first  turn  they 
sped.  Grotius  dropped  back  of  Lysander,  with  Lys- 
agoras  running  close  beside  Grotius.  If  Saul  attempted 
any  speed  Lysander  leaped  with  him,  for  Lysander  knew 
that  his  spurting  would  not  do  more  than  cause  him  to 
lose  the  race,  and  that  was  inevitable,  according  to  the 
compact.  He  crowded  Saul  wide  to  the  right,  as  if  to 
swing  in  close  to  the  metae  on  the  back  turn. 

At  the  turn  Lysagoras  was  in  close  to  the  wall  and 
Grotius  was  following  him.  Ben  Hanan  saw  that  the 
distance  for  the  swing  into  which  Saul  was  being  forced 
was  too  great,  for  already  his  lead  of  Lysagoras  and 
Grotius  was  nearly  taken  up.  Would  not  Saul  see  the 
trick?  Ben  Hanan  asked  himself. 

Lysander  was  pressing  Saul  out  farther  from  the 
wall.  Saul  slowed  up  for  a  few  paces  so  that  he  leaped 
from  behind  and  ahead  of  Lysander  in  making  the  turn 
at  the  north  metae.  With  a  short  spurt  Saul  came  in 
behind  Lysagoras  and  ahead  of  Grotius  who  was  saving 
himself  for  the  final  lap.  The  cheers  and  jeers  from 
the  vast  audience  showed  that  the  spectators  keenly 
appreciated  the  effort  to  crowd  Saul  into  loss  of  time  and 
that  his  finessing  for  gaining  his  place  in  the  race  aroused 
wild  enthusiasm. 

The  racers  settled  down  to  a  steady  pace,  warily 
watching  one  another,  and  keeping  their  relative  posi¬ 
tions — ^Lysagoras  leading  and  next  the  spina,  closely 
followed  by  Saul,  then  came  Grotius  and  Lysander.  In 
this  order  they  had  turned  the  north  metae,  and  were 


THE  WILL  TO  WIN 


51 


racing  down  the  last  half  of  the  second  lap  toward  the 
south  pillars.  The  audience  had  been  tense  and  silent. 
One  more  round  was  to  be  run,  the  desperate  struggle  to 
hold  to  the  end.  Spurting  was  dangerous  to  any  racer. 

Saul  speeded  up  a  few  paces.  Lysagoras  leaped  to 
keep  even  with  him,  and  began  crowding  him  out  for  a 
wide  swing  around  the  south  metae.  The  audience 
rose  as  if  impelled  by  one  mind  sensing  a  thrilhng  move 
about  to  be  enacted.  Saul  slowed  a  few  paces  and 
Lysagoras  slowed  in  time  with  him.  The  jeers  of  the 
audience  swelled  in  a  voluminous  snarl. 

Opposite  the  south  metae  Saul  slowed  his  pace  as  if 
to  drop  behind  Lysagoras  who  immediately  slowed  his 
pace.  Then  Saul  leaped,  spurting  in  front  of  Lysagoras, 
and  swung  in  close  to  the  metae  barely  missing  treading 
on  the  heels  of  Grotius  who  was  making  his  outward 
swing  on  the  farther  side  of  the  metae.  Saul  was  next 
the  spina,  Grotius,  coming  in  from  the  sweep  into  which 
his  momentum  had  carried  him,  was  a  little  in  advance. 

The  audience  had  watched  in  tense  silence  the  rapid 
maneuver,  then  joined  in  the  wildest  cheering.  Above 
all  the  roar  could  be  heard  the  high-pitched  voice  of  the 
grandfather,  screaming: 

^‘Run,  thou  son  of  Kish!  Run!’’ 

People  had  risen  from  their  seats  and  voices  were 
cheering  madly  for  Saul,  with  a  few  scattering  shouts  for 
Grotius.  Ben  Hanan  sat,  tense,  concentrated  to  a  pain¬ 
ful  degree,  his  chin  resting  on  his  hands,  his  eyes  shifting 
only  enough  to  follow  Saul.  The  grandfather  had  come 
down  to  the  balustrade  and  was  gesticulating  wildly  over 
the  arena.  He  had  torn  his  turban  from  his  head,  loosen¬ 
ing  the  folds,  and  it  was  now  merely  a  streamer  of  cloth, 


52 


A  YOUTH  IN  TARSUS 


which  he  swung  as  he  leaned  far  out  over  the  railing, 
crying: 

^‘Run,  run,  thou  son  of  Kish!  Run!  Fly,  fly, 
thou  gazelle,  fiy!’^ 

The  rabbi  also  was  leaning  over  the  railing,  shouting 
for  Saul;  and  the  rest  of  the  Jews  had  crowded  down  so 
close,  in  their  excitement,  as  to  endanger  those  who  sat 
in  the  front  seats,  nearest  the  balustrade. 

Along  the  spina  the  boys  were  running,  with  Grotius 
on  the  outside  slightly  in  the  lead.  This  was  the  coveted 
position  and  gave  him  the  choice  of  making  the  turn  at 
the  pillars  wide,  either  at  the  approach  or  on  the  farther 
side.  He  held  close  to  the  spina  and  allowed  his  momen¬ 
tum  to  carry  him  wide  beyond  the  metae. 

Just  before  they  reached  the  north  metae  Ben  Hanan 
left  his  seat,  and  ruthlessly  shoving  out  of  his  way  all 
who  opposed  him  strode  over  to  Gallio,  who  was  leading 
the  shouts  for  Grotius.  Gallio  looked  up  into  the  older 
man’s  face  and  saw  there  such  signs  of  a  pent-up  deluge 
of  hate,  vengeance,  and  energy  ready  to  burst  that  he 
started  involuntarily.  Ben  Hanan’s  fingers  were  twitch¬ 
ing  nervously.  Gallio  had  no  fear  of  men,  but  that  figure 
towering  over  him  was  not  man,  it  was  conscience,  and 
he  trembled.  As  he  ceased  shouting,  the  others  in  the 
company  became  quiet.  That  foreboding  figure  was  an 
incarnation  of  justice.  Ben  Hanan  laid  his  hand  on  the 
back  of  the  seat  and  faced  the  arena.  All  had  passed  so 
quickly  that  Saul’s  finessing  in  completing  the  turn  at 
the  north  metae  could  be  seen. 

When  Saul  neared  this  point  he  slowed  his  pace 
slightly  and  swung  in  so  close  that  his  shoulders  barely 
missed  the  pillars.  He  drew  a  fresh,  deep  breath  and, 


THE  WILL  TO  WIN 


53 


hugging  the  wall  closely,  gathered  himself  in  a  mighty 
effort  to  increase  his  speed  to  the  goal.  His  quivering 
muscles  responded  to  the  new  impulse  and  he  sprang 
forward  in  a  spurt  as  vigorous  as  if  it  were  the  first  part 
of  a  short  race. 

Lysander  and  Lysagoras  were  far  in  the  rear.  Grotius 
had  been  carried  on  a  wide  circle  by  momentum,  and 
Saul  was  now  in  the  lead.  His  exhausted  muscles 
responded  as  if  renewed  instantly  with  some  magical 
fluid  of  life.  Every  leap  was  co-ordinated  for  the  dis¬ 
tance,  as  if  in  that  brief  space  of  time  he  had  calculated 
the  number  of  steps  to  be  taken,  the  force  of  every  spring, 
and  the  speed  required.  The  multitude  exulted  as  they 
foresaw  his  revenge. 

Wildly  waving  his  streaming  turban  the  grandfather 
cried: 

‘‘Run,  lad,  speed  thee!  Run  as  Cushi  ran!  Run, 
thou  son  of  Kish!” 

Rabbi  Ben  Arza  had  loosened  his  outer  coat  in  his 
excitement  and  was  waving  it  and  shouting: 

“Speed  thee!  Speed  thee!  Swift  as  the  eagle! 
Saul,  Saul,  the  mighty!” 

The  other  Jews  grew  wilder  in  their  acclaims.  The 
local  pride  of  the  Tarsians  was  shown  in  their  shouts  of 
encouragement. 

The  footfalls  of  Grotius  running  close  behind  Saul 
sounded  like  thunderbolts  in  his  ears.  Time — time — 
he  had  lost  all  count  of  time!  It  seemed  to  him  that 
long  periods  passed  from  one  spring  until  his  other 
foot  would  touch  the  earth.  He  felt  as  if  he  were  not 
fully  touching  the  ground,  he  merely  skimmed  the  dust. 
He  dared  scarcely  breathe  lest  he  fail  to  leap  as  soon  as 


54 


A  YOUTH  IN  TARSUS 


his  foot  touched  ground.  His  strong  will  held  brain 
and  muscles  in  function,  his  spring  augmented  his 
momentum  toward  the  goal  almost  before  his  weight 
rested  on  the  supporting  foot. 

Ever  so  long  ago  he  had  turned  for  the  goal.  He  felt 
himself  flying  along  the  earth;  but  far,  far  in  the  dis¬ 
tance  was  that  longed-for  white  mark.  There  flashed 
through  his  mind  often-repeated  words  of  the  director: 

“Do  not  lose  control  of  yourself  v/hen  nearing  the  goal.’^ 

It  was  like  a  fresh  breath.  He  gripped  himself 
still  closer,  and  desperately  drew  a  new  impulse  from 
that  mysterious  reservoir,  the  will  to  win.  That  was 
better.  He  could  no  longer  hear  Grotius.  He  could 
think  to  time  his  spring  to  aid  his  flight.  Surely  the 
goal  was  near!  Was  that  a  flash  of  lightning  over  which 
he  leaped  ? 

He  fell  in  a  total  collapse  in  the  dust  beyond  the  goal. 
His  v/orld  had  gone  dark. 

The  director  waited  until  Grotius,  a  close  second, 
had  crossed  the  goal,  then  quickly  picked  up  the  crumpled 
body  of  Saul  and  carried  him  to  the  dressing-rooms, 
crooning  over  him  as  if  he  were  a  baby.  Tenderly  he 
bathed  Saul  with  cold  water  until  he  opened  his  eyes. 

“Now  I  know,’’  said  Saul,  gasping  between  words, 
but  smiling  up  at  the  director,  “that  was  not  a  stroke 
of  hghtning,  it  was  the  goal.  Has  Grotius  come  in  ?” 

The  director  laughed  and  nodded,  vigorously  rubbing 
the  twitching  muscles  of  Saul’s  legs,  rolhng  him  over  and 
over  and  back  again  until  nearly  normal  conditions  were 
restored,  all  the  time  saying: 

“In  spite  of  all,  you  won.  By  Hercules,  what  a 
heart  you  have!  You  won!” 


THE  WILL  TO  WIN 


55 


The  audience  had  seen  the  trick  which  had  been 
planned  to  defeat  Saul,  and  jeered  Lysander  and  Lysag- 
oras  as  they  neared  the  goal,  far  in  the  rear.  Men  were 
shouting  like  maniacs,  each  trying  to  outscream  his 
neighbors.  The  people  were  as  one  voice.  The  Jews 
were  submerged  in  the  vortex  of  enthusiasm.  Words 
were  not  used,  it  was  the  primitive  cry  of  victory. 

In  a  lull  of  the  noise,  Azel,  now  fired  with  the  zeal 
of  youth,  his  dignity  as  a  grandfather  having  slipped 
away,  was  shouting  to  no  one  and  to  anyone  who  would 
listen : 

^‘He  can  run!  He  is  a  son  of  Kish!” 

The  Romans  with  Gallio  joined  in  the  cheers  and 
shouts,  their  racial  prejudices  quite  forgotten.  Ben 
Hanan  still  stood  at  Gallio’s  side,  without  joining  in  any 
demonstration. 

‘‘Well,  Saul  made  a  wonderful  finish,”  said  Gallio 
to  him. 

“And  it  was  well  for  you,”  replied  Ben  Hanan,  with 
a  world  of  meaning  in  his  eyes  and  voice. 

He  walked  back  to  his  place,  evidencing  his  reaction 
only  by  a  relaxation  of  his  rigid  bearing.  Ben  Arza 
congratulated  him  warmly,  and  the  grandfather  con¬ 
tinued  to  repeat: 

“He  is  a  son  of  Kish!  ” 

The  judges  came  across  the  arena  toward  Ben 
Hanan,  with  the  naked,  quivering  body  of  Saul  between 
them,  supporting  him  as  if  it  were  an  honor  to  touch 
his  flesh.  At  a  signal  from  Saul  they  stopped  under  the 
place  of  Ben  Hanan  and,  amid  a  hush  that  was  the  utmost 
silence  of  a  multitude,  the  judges  solemnly  placed  the 
victor’s  crown  of  leaves  on  Saul’s  bowed  head. 


A  YOUTH  IN  TARSUS 


The  cheers  again  broke  out,  rumbling  like  deep  thun¬ 
der  along  the  great  distances  of  the  arena  and  back 
again.  The  judges  raised  their  hands  for  silence  and 
there  was  a  lull,  broken,  however,  by  the  high,  cracked 
voice  of  the  grandfather,  who  shrieked  to  Saul: 

^‘Thou  art  a  son  of  Kish!” 

When  quiet  was  obtained,  the  judges  presented  Saul 
to  his  father  as  the  victor.  Ben  Hanan  in  superb  dignity 
bowed  his  acknowledgment  to  the  judges  and  spoke 
evenly  to  Saul: 

^‘My  son,  you  did  run  well.” 

Those  simple  words,  so  quietly  spoken,  carried  a 
wealth  of  comfort  to  Saul.  The  kind  director  took  Saul’s 
arm  and  led  him  back  to  the  dressing-rooms.  The  crowd 
was  cheering  in  cadences  now,  but  Saul  did  not  hear  the 
great  chorus.  Exhausted  by  the  struggle,  his  mind,  as 
if  released  from  sympathy  with  his  body,  was  dwelling 
on  the  greater  prize  now  assured  to  him — his  life  in 
Jerusalem. 


PART  II 


In  yerusalem 


CHAPTER  VI 
UP  TO  JERUSALEM 

The  household  of  Ben  Hanan  was  busy  arranging  for 
his  momentous  journey  to  Jerusalem.  Clothes  for 
traveling  and  for  use  in  the  city  had  to  be  prepared, 
and  an  extensive  wardrobe  was  necessary  for  Saul, 
who  would  probably  remain  in  Jerusalem. 

Ben  Arza  plied  Saul  with  questions  in  review  of  his 
studies,  and  drew  from  his  recollection  of  his  own  school¬ 
days  many  intricate  problems.  He  gave  him  the  latest 
discussions  and  interpretations  of  the  scribes.  Ben 
Arza  thought  of  the  reflected  glory  there  would  be  in  his 
sending  to  Gamaliel  a  student  who  would  challenge  the 
attention  of  the  great  teacher. 

Because  Eleazar  would  accompany  Ben  Hanan,  the 
two  families  were  intimately  associated  in  the  bustle 
of  preparation.  Grandfather  Azel  superintended  the 
preparation  of  the  food.  He  compelled  the  women 
to  put  in  plenty  of  dried  fruits,  bread,  and  cheese,  and 
to  leave  out  the  delicacies. 

On  the  day  of  departure  the  people  gathered  at  the 
wharf  far  down  the  lake,  before  the  break  of  day,  to 
board  the  ship,  which  would  leave  early  so  as  to  catch 
the  morning  breeze.  The  lake,  lo  miles  long,  fed  by 
the  Cydnus  River,  lay  alongside  the  Mediterranean, 
from  which  it  was  separated  for  several  miles  by  low 
sandhills,  through  which  it  finally  broke  into  the  sea. 
Men  from  beyond  the  mountains,  some  with  their 
families,  all  in  distinct  groups,  together  with  friends  to 


59 


6o 


IN  JERUSALEM 


see  their  people  depart,  crowded  the  wharf  and  almost 
shut  the  ship  from  view. 

This  Egyptian  ship  was  1 50  feet  long,  with  one  large 
mast  a  little  forward  of  the  center,  to  which  was  attached 
a  single  large  square  sail,  while  on  the  smaller  mast  at 
the  bow  was  a  small  sail.  Two  huge  oars  protruding 
through  the  bulwarks,  one  on  each  side  of  the  center  of 
the  stern,  were  the  rudders.  It  was  on  its  return  to 
Egypt  from  Rome.  Like  all  ships,  it  was  sailed  only 
during  the  daytime,  and  seldom  out  of  sight  of  land, 
tieing  up  at  night  in  some  little  .harbor,  or  at  the  wharf 
of  some  seacoast  town.  This  primitive  craft  (there  were 
some  larger)  crossed  the  wide  stretches  of  sea,  going 
from  land  to  land  along  the  coast,  and  from  island  to 
island ;  even  from  Alexandria  to  Puteoli  or  to  Brundisium, 
the  ports  of  Rome.  The  corn  of  Egypt  was  necessary 
for  the  city  of  Rome. 

Knowing  that  it  was  the  time  when  pilgrims  set  out 
for  the  Passover  in  Jerusalem,  the  captain  had  put  in 
at  Tarsus  to  take  aboard  passengers,  as  far  as  Caesarea. 

In  the  dim  light  just  before  sunrise  the  commotion 
was  increasing.  Bundles  were  carried  aboard  and  con¬ 
fusion  of  packages  caused  confounding  of  passengers; 
frequent  and  noisy  inventories  of  his  baggage  by  each 
passenger  and  oral  rechecking  with  those  ashore  added  to 
the  babel.  Forgotten  messages  were  given  by  friends 
to  be  delivered  in  Jerusalem;  repeated  farewells;  admoni¬ 
tions  of  the  departing  to  those  remaining;  prayers  aloud 
by  those  remaining  for  the  departing  pilgrims.  Family 
and  friendly  groups  made  up  for  the  pilgrimage  remained 
segregated,  or  at  least  spent  much  effort  in  trying  to 
remain  together  and  separate  from  the  others.  Loud  and 


UP  TO  JERUSALEM 


6i 


long  lamentations  were  frequent,  after  the  manner  of 
orientals. 

The  sun  was  coming  up  over  the  eastern  hills,  spilling 
its  light  like  molten  silver  over  the  placid  lake.  To  the 
north  the  great  peaks  of  the  Taurus  Mountains  stood  out 
as  if  they  were  monarchs  waiting  to  receive  the  homage 
of  the  world;  the  deep  purple  shadows  trailing  away 
to  the  west  from  their  shoulders  were  their  royal  robes. 

A  gentle  breeze  rippled  the  lake.  The  captain  of  the 
ship  had  flogged  his  slaves  to  their  places  and,  whip  in 
hand,  stood  at  the  top  of  the  plank,  loudly  commanding 
his  passengers  to  come  aboard. 

^‘Find  out  GamalieFs  opinion,  if  tradition  must  not 
be  thrice  sifted,”  said  Ben  Arza  to  the  grandfather,  on 
the  wharf. 

‘‘If  strength  be  given  me  after  hearing  once  more  the 
Hallel  in  the  Temple,  that  will  I  do,”  said  the  grandfather, 
stooping  and  kissing  David’s  forehead. 

Again  and  again  the  captain  vainly  called  for  his 
passengers  to  get  aboard.  They  knew  the  customs  of 
the  country  and,  knowing  them,  continued  their  farewells. 
The  law  of  custom  was  that,  however  much  he  urged 
them,  they  would  still  take  their  time.  Deborah, 
her  sweet  face  tear-stained,  clasped  her  son  Saul  to  her 
bosom.  Though  he  was  small  for  his  age,  he  was  as 
tall  as  she.  He  leaned  his  head  on  her  shoulder;  and 
he  saw,  near  at  hand,  little  Tabitha,  through  her  tear- 
stained  veil  looking  her  heart  to  him,  and  holding  out  a 
little  roll  in  her  right  hand,  afraid  and  yet  wanting  to 
reach  it  to  him. 

Ben  Hanan  had  spqken  the  final  word  to  Saul  and 
was  leading  the  grandfather  up  the  gangplank.  Saul 


62 


IN  JERUSALEM 


dropped  his  arms  from  around  his  mother  and  ran  to 
Tabitha. 

promised  to  tell  you  what  I  was  making,  if  you  won 
the  race.”  She  hung  her  head  while  holding  out  the 
package  to  him.  “Here  it  is.  Take  it  with  you.” 

“My  prize  of  victory!  ”  cried  Saul,  taking  the  package 
and  starting  to  seize  her. 

Like  a  timid  fawn  yearning  for  the  stroke  of  its  master, 
but  trembling  with  fear,  she  shot  a  glance  at  Saul  that 
told  him  the  sweet  and  long  story,  if  put  into  words, 
and  leaped  behind  her  mother  away  from  him. 

Deborah,  looking  about,  saw  him  standing  as  if 
entranced  with  the  vision  of  Tabitha;  and,  while  she 
laughed  and  cried,  the  gentle  mother  took  his  arm  and 
hurried  him  to  the  ship. 

Slowly  the  ship  was  pushed  away  from  the  wharf  and 
its  prow  turned  toward  the  outlet  to  the  sea.  The 
early  morning  breeze  was  beginning  to  swell  the  big 
square  sail,  and  the  ship  began  to  drift  with  the  mists 
out  to  the  blue  Mediterranean.  So  slowly  did  the  ship 
move  that  for  a  long  while  farewells  were  called  back  and 
forth  from  ship  to  shore.  The  captain  and  his  crew 
had  to  be  harsh  with  the  passengers  to  keep  them  from  so 
crowding  to  the  shore  side  of  the  little  ship  as  to  threaten 
to  capsize  it.  Saul  had  climbed  to  the  highest  point  of 
the  elevated  structure  on  the  stern  of  the  ship  and  was 
waving  the  little  napkin  which  Tabitha  had  given  him,  a 
delicate  piece  of  needlework  with  grape  vines,  leaves, 
and  clusters  of  grapes,  embroidered  on  finest  linen. 

Through  days  of  favorable  winds,  and  calms  that 
held  the  ship  fast,  with  stops  at  several  places,  the  ship 
finally  arrived  at  Caesarea.  At  every  port  passengers 


UP  TO  JERUSALEM 


63 


insisted  on  being  taken  aboard,  until  the  margin  of 
safety  had  been  overreached,  and  no  one  so  much  as 
the  captain  hailed  with  joy  the  passage  of  the  ship  into 
Herod’s  great  artificial  harbor  at  Caesarea. 

The  Roman  governors  had  made  this  city  the  seat  of 
government  in  a  vain  effort  to  build  a  capital  that  would 
withstand  the  ravages  of  time  and  rival  Jerusalem. 

Ben  Hanan  led  his  party  into  the  older  section  of  the 
city,  to  the  house  of  his  friend,  Simeon,  to  whom  had 
been  intrusted  all  needful  arrangements  for  the  journey 
overland  to  Jerusalem.  It  was  well  that  such  arrange¬ 
ments  had  been  made  in  advance,  for  the  multitude 
gathering  wildly  demanded  every  means  available  for 
their  conveyance. 

It  would  take  them  nearly  three  days  to  make  the 
journey.  The  noonday  sun  would  get  so  hot  that  travel 
would  have  to  be  suspended  for  long  hours,  to  rest  the 
animals  and  await  the  cooler  evening  breezes.  The 
grandfather  was  mounted  on  a  horse.  The  father  rode  a 
camel,  with  much  luggage.  Saul  was  given  a  chance  to 
ride  a  donkey,  already  well  loaded  with  bundles.  Eleazar 
rode  a  horse. 

In  the  early  morning  Ben  Hanan  and  his  companions 
were  on  the  road,  well-defined  as  far  as  the  eye  could 
reach  by  pedestrians  and  animals,  forming  a  continuous 
procession  up  the  gently  sloping  hillsides  to  the  higher 
plateau.  The  spring  rains  had  brought  out  the  grasses 
and  flowers,  so  that  the  hills  and  plains  were  clothed  in 
beauty,  shortly  to  become  a  dull  brown  under  the 
withering  heat  of  the  rainless  season. 

Near  midday  they  reached  a  deep  and  narrow  defile 
along  which  the  road  hid  itself  from  view,  as  if  detouring. 


64 


IN  JERUSALEM 


to  come  out  on  the  plains  above  in  a  surprise  attack. 
There  was  a  spring  of  water  which  had  been  walled  up 
and  the  dirt  and  sand  had  been  cleaned  out,  so  as  to 
furnish  clear  water  for  man  and  beast. 

This  cleaning  of  wells  and  watering-places  had  been 
looked  after  by  priests  of  the  Temple,  at  least  thirty 
days  before  the  Passover,  on  all  the  ways  coming  into 
the  Holy  City.  It  was  a  part  of  the  duty  of  those 
governing  the  Temple  to  attend  to  the  wells  and  to 
repair  the  rude  walled  khans  in  which  the  pilgrims  slept 
along  the  roads. 

The  pilgrims  were  not  a  good-natured  lot  on  the 
journey,  for  they  felt  that  those  outside  of  their  own 
group  were  strangers  until  they  were  within  the  walls 
of  the  city,  and,  therefore,  in  some  way  (at  least  by  their 
presence)  contributed  to  the  inconveniences  of  travel. 
Saul  noticed  that  the  roadways  were  not  the  substantial 
paved  ways,  built  by  the  Romans  out  of  Tarsus. 

All  the  animals  and  men,  like  animals,  were  striving  to 
slake  their  thirst  from  the  rock-rimmed  drinking-places 
and  curbed  springs.  A  pilgrim  with  a  camel  was  drawing 
a  bucket  of  water,  while  another  was  upbraiding  him  for 
stirring  the  water.  They  simply  abused  each  other  in 
words,  without  any  fear  or  thought  of  blows.  While 
the  owner  of  the  camel,  holding  his  filled  bucket,  paused 
to  pour  forth  his  wrath  upon  the  owner  of  a  donkey, 
the  donkey  drank  the  vessel  dry.  This  brought  on  a 
great  state  of  anger,  for  the  camel-driver  held  to  the 
primitive  idea  that  the  owner  of  the  donkey  was  respon¬ 
sible  for  the  wrong  done  by  the  beast. 

The  midday  meal  had  been  eaten  and  the  grand¬ 
father  was  sleeping  in  the  shade  of  a  tree.  Saul  was 


UP  TO  JERUSALEM 


65 


industriously  keeping  the  flies  away  from  the  grand¬ 
father  with  a  bough.  Ben  Hanan  was  looking  out  over 
the  resting  pilgrims  who  made  up  an  irresistible  tide, 
flowing  up  over  the  hills  and  down  into  the  city  of  his 
fathers.  While  the  characteristics  of  the  race  showed  on 
all  the  faces,  the  common  expression  was  that  of  con¬ 
suming  zeal,  a  zeal  not  for  the  nation,  but  a  zeal  for  a 
religious  idea  which  found  its  expression  in  the  Temple 
and  the  customs  of  worship. 

Ben  Hanan  studied  the  motley  throng,  composed 
of  tradesmen  and  artisans  from  along  the  coasts  of  the 
Mediterranean,  sunburned  Semites  from  the  deserts  of 
the  northern  country,  and  well-groomed  merchants  and 
teachers  from  Egypt.  Then  his  gaze  rested  on  Saul  so 
earnestly  that  the  boy  went  over  to  hear  what  he  had 
to  say.  Saul  sat  down  by  his  father,  who  still  seemed  to 
be  thinking  on  his  son. 

What  a  strange  thing  it  is,  my  son,”  said  Ben  Hanan, 
laying  one  hand  on  Saul’s  shoulder  and  gesturing  with 
the  other,  ‘That  God  led  his  people  out  of  bondage, 
and  now  holds  them  in  the  hollow  of  his  hand.  Surely 
there  is  some  mighty  purpose  in  this,  in  which  Jerusalem 
and  this  Holy  Land  are  only  a  part,  even  a  small  part. 
Where  we  now  rest  the  armies  of  the  East  have  met  and 
battled  with  the  armies  of  Egypt,  crushing  the  Hebrews 
in  the  grinding.  Century  upon  century  war  has  swept 
back  and  forth  across  these  hills,  the  northern  and 
southern  countries  contending,  and  again  the  East  and 
the  West:  Greece  conquering  Egypt;  Rome  conquering 
the  world.  Why  should  these  people,  even  as  you  and  I, 
love  these  rocky  hills  ?  What  is  the  mighty  purpose  of 
God?  Why  this  persisting  pilgrimage  to  our  altars?” 


66 


IN  JERUSALEM 


“I  cannot  answer  now/’  said  Saul,  looking  up  into 
his  father’s  face  as  if  he  had  caught  the  acknowledgment 
of  the  longed-for  comradeship.  ^‘If  ever  I  think  I  have 
found  the  reason  or  how  to  discover  the  reason,  I  will 
bring  it  to  you  for  your  thought.” 

‘Mt  is  strange  how  such  thoughts  come  to  me  when¬ 
ever  I  am  among  these  quiet  hills.”  Ben  Hanan  lifted 
his  eyes  off  to  the  distant  coast  line,  across  the  shimmer¬ 
ing  heat  waves.  ‘‘There  is  something  in  the  clear  air, 
the  plain  hills,  the  distant  mountains,  the  great  stillness 
— something  here  seems  to  give  my  soul  wings;  my 
thoughts  fly  as  easily  as  those  high,  white  clouds  against 
the  bright  blue.  Then  look  you,  Saul,  on  these  people  1 
Some  so  coarse  as  to  offend  by  their  mere  presence; 
some  so  crafty  that  you  fear  to  meet  them;  others  show 
that  they  have  been  so  oppressed  that  they  cringe  when 
they  should  be  cheerful;  others  are  ruthless:  yet  all 
deny  themselves  to  make  this  pilgrimage.  Son,  learn 
you  the  mystery!” 

Ben  Hanan  gazed  tenderly  on  Azel,  sleeping  heavily, 
and  spoke  to  Saul: 

“I  fear  he  will  have  his  wish  to  sleep  the  long  sleep 
in  Jerusalem.” 

Saul  took  his  place  again  by  the  grandfather.  After 
a  while  the  old  man  aroused  and  in  a  sprightly  way  an¬ 
nounced  that  he  was  refreshed.  The  bundles  were 
packed  on  the  animals;  and,  mounting,  Ben  Hanan’s 
party  joined  the  long  line  winding  up  the  dusty  trail, 
up,  up;  and  then  they  came  to  hilltops  from  which 
could  be  seen  in  the  Far  East  the  mountains  beyond  the 
Jordan,  blending  in  with  the  sky,  while  between  rolled 
the  sea  of  air  that  flowed  in  ripples,  as  if  it  were  a  gossa- 


UP  TO  JERUSALEM  67 

mer  veil,  hiding  the  face  of  the  valley  from  view.  Other 
hills  near  at  hand  hid  the  nearer  side  of  the  valley. 

At  night  the  travelers  stopped  at  a  caravansary 
provided  for  pilgrims,  in  which  it  was  their  good  fortune 
to  find  a  place  to  unroll  their  matting  and  rest  for  the 
night.  And  all  night  long  they  could  hear  the  padding 
of  the  passing  camels  and  the  tinkle  of  their  bells,  as 
well  as  the  hoof  beat  of  donkeys  and  horses,  urged  on 
by  pilgrims,  in  their  anxiety  rushing  forward  during  the 
cool  hours  and  hoping  to  secure  better  appointments  in 
the  city  by  reason  of  arriving  ahead  of  others. 

Ben  Hanan’s  party  resumed  their  journey  in  the 
early  morning,  before  the  crowing  cocks  or  singing  birds 
had  hailed  the  coming  day.  Near  the  noon  hour  they 
rested  by  the  side  of  a  well  of  sweet  water,  and  partook 
of  their  refreshments  while  their  beasts  of  burden  ate 
and  rested.  The  last  ridge  was  in  front  of  them,  and 
then  they  would  drop  down  upon  the  valley  north  of  the 
Holy  City.  Ben  Hanan  and  Azel  slept,  but  Saul’s 
vivid  imagination  kept  him  awake. 

After  a  long  climb  up  the  side  of  the  hill  they  saw  at 
the  right  the  shoulder  of  a  still  higher  hill,  around  the 
base  of  which  their  way  led.  Just  when  reaching  the 
top  the  people  were  stopping  and  sinking  down  in  adora¬ 
tion. 

‘‘What  means  that  worship  ?”  Saul  asked  his  father. 

“We,  too,  may  join  in  it,  if  so  be  our  minds  and 
hearts  understand  and  feel  aright,”  said  the  father,  in 
the  mysterious  manner  of  eastern  speech. 

All  were  urging  their  animals  to  a  faster  pace. 
Grandfather  Azel  was  pushing  past  others,  so  that  it  was 
difficult  to  keep  up  with  him.  The  last  part  of  the  road 


68 


IN  JERUSALEM 


led  straight  up  the  steep  hill,  for  eager  travelers  had 
worn  a  way  by  the  shortest  cut  instead  of  following 
the  longer  bend  of  the  road. 

Reaching  the  top,  there  burst  on  their  view  the  city 
of  their  hearts.  The  sun  had  passed  the  meridian,  and, 
through  a  cloudless  sky,  revealed  the  glistening  marble 
of  Herod’s  palace  on  the  western  hill,  the  high-arched 
bridge  spanning  the  Tyropoeon  Valley  and  connecting 
the  western  hill  with  the  Temple  hill.  The  Temple 
reflected  the  bright  sunlight  with  added  brilliance.  In 
the  clear  air  of  that  land  even  the  courts  and  towers 
through  the  distance  gave  a  picture  in  perfect  detail. 
The  tower  of  Antonia  stood  out  as  if  it  were  a  sentinel 
on  guard.  The  great  walls  of  the  city  seemed  about  to 
burst  from  the  houses  crowding  against  them.  The 
flat-roofed  houses  clambered  against  one  another  on  the 
hillsides,  reaching  up  for  air  and  light  from  the  crowded 
space.  Tents  here  and  there  on  housetops  looked  as  if  a 
new  city  were  camping  on  top  of  the  more  solid  structure. 
Tents  and  arbors  had  been  placed  on  top  of  the  dwellings 
to  accommodate  the  throngs  at  this  feast. 

Saul  had  stopped  in  wonder.  Others,  in  veneration, 
had  dismounted,  and  pedestrians  were  already  on  their 
knees.  Saul  saw  his  grandfather  and  the  others  dis¬ 
mounting  and  he  quickly  joined  them.  All  kneeled 
and  bowed  their  heads  to  the  ground;  then,  lifting 
up  his  face.  Grandfather  Azel  began  intoning,  while 
the  rest  of  the  company  repeated  with  him: 

“Jerusalem  is  builded  as  a  city 
That  is  compact  together; 

Pray  for  the  peace  of  Jerusalem; 

They  shall  prosper  that  love  thee.” 


UP  TO  JERUSALEM 


69 


Remounting,  the  party  joined  the  long  line  stretching 
away  even  to  the  gates  of  the  city.  Weary  beasts  were 
prodded  to  a  faster  and  still  faster  pace.  The  faithful 
foot  travelers  gathered  their  skirts  higher  under  their 
girdles  and  quickened  their  steps.  Pious  exclamations 
were  heard  on  every  hand;  the  tone  of  anger  and  petu¬ 
lance  was  smoothed  by  a  common  feeling  of  joy;  eyes 
that  glowered  and  eyes  that  stole  glances  of  distrust 
along  the  journey  now  shone  with  light  and  enthusiasm. 
The  dust  of  passing  beasts  was  no  longer  a  cause  of 
vituperation,  as  it  had  been  on  the  other  side  of  the 
hills. 

Ben  Hanan’s  manner  had  been  growing  warmer 
toward  Saul  on  the  journey,  until  a  comradeship  had 
been  established.  Now,  waving  his  hand  toward  the 
city,  he  said  to  his  son: 

‘‘Rome  is  called  the  Eternal  City,  Athens  the  Beauti¬ 
ful,  but  Jerusalem  is  lovely,  the  center  of  the  worship  of 
the  one  true  God.” 

Coming  nearer  the  city,  there  were  places  in  the 
faces  of  the  small  cliffs  freshly  whitewashed,  and  once  in 
a  while  there  would  be  a  whitewashed  mound  near  the 
roadway. 

“I  thought  those  were  sepulchers,”  said  Saul  to  his 
father.  “Why  are  they  whitewashed  ? ” 

“You  know,  my  son,”  Ben  Hanan  replied,  “that  no 
one  can  go  into  the  Temple  service  who  has  not  been  clean 
for  at  least  a  week,  and  that  the  touching  of  a  dead  body 
or  burial  place  makes  one  unclean.  The  Levites  come 
out  thirty  days  before  the  Passover  and  whiten  all  the 
sepulchers,  so  that  any  pilgrim,  even  in  the  night  time, 
will  be  warned  and  will  not  have  to  touch  a  grave.” 


70 


IN  JERUSALEM 


The  widespread  cavalcade  choked  into  the  Damascus 
gate  and  filled  up  the  narrow  streets.  All  was  turmoil. 
Here  and  there  were  Levites  from  the  Temple,  answering 
questions,  directing  inquiring  pilgrims  to  their  friends, 
and  disposing  of  others  by  allotment  to  certain  houses. 
Every  householder  was  required  to  give  ail  possible  room 
to  pilgrims,  even  to  placing  booths  on  his  roof,  and  he 
would  sleep  in  the  streets  to  make  room  for  anyone 
coming  up  to  worship.  Here  and  there  among  the 
crowds  a  Roman  soldier  passed,  good-naturedly  doing 
police  duty  in  a  manner  of  superior  tolerance  toward 
these  people  in  their  fanaticism. 

The  slow,  forward  movement  of  the  crowd  was 
stopped  by  an  altercation.  A  heavily  loaded  donkey, 
carrying  provender  for  animals,  was  being  prodded  along 
by  his  driver,  and  in  the  jam  was  nibbling  from  a  pack 
carried  by  a  man.  The  man  turned  to  berate  the  driver. 
They  became  so  vehement  in  speaking  of  each  other,  and 
the  low  character  of  each  other’s  ancestors  back  to  the 
third  and  fourth  generation,  that  they  did  not  notice 
that  a  camel  was  eating  from  the  pack  on  the  donkey. 
An  aristocratic  rider  on  the  camel  replied  to  the  verbal 
abuse  of  the  donkey  driver,  who  gave  his  attention 
to  the  camel  rider.  In  the  interchange  of  choicest 
epithets  the  aristocrat  made  no  distinction  between  the 
donkey  driver  and  his  eloquent  antagonist,  so  both  of 
them  tried  to  express  their  low  opinion  of  the  man  out 
of  reach  on  the  camel.  Words  had  failed  them,  and 
they  began  spitting  at  the  man  on  the  camel,  the  most 
expressive  form  of  contempt  known  to  their  people.  Saul, 
from  his  experience  in  Tarsus,  expected  an  encounter, 
but  when  the  men  began  spitting,  he  laughed  loudly. 


UP  TO  JERUSALEM 


71 


^‘Stop  that,”  a  Roman  guard  cried,  roughly  turning 
around  the  two  men  on  foot.  “Fight  if  you  will,  but 
your  spitting  musses  up  the  street  to  no  purpose.” 

While  Ben  Hanan  slowly  led  the  way  through  the 
dense  crowd  Saul  was  alert  to  get  a  revealing  glimpse, 
at  any  street  crossing,  of  the  upper  part  of  the  Temple, 
now  high  above  them.  After  winding  in  and  out 
among  the  mass  of  people,  they  came  into  a  narrow 
side  street  in  front  of  a  plain  and  forbidding  double  door, 
high  enough  to  permit  a  camel  to  pass  through.  In  front 
and  on  each  side  of  the  doorway  were  tradesmen’s 
booths  setting  back  under  the  first  floor,  but  they  were 
not  occupied,  for  the  morning  hours  allotted  to  trade 
had  passed.  Repeated  knockings  brought  a  man  to  the 
other  side  of  the  small  door  set  inside  of  one  of  the  larger 
doors;  and,  after  the  names  of  all  in  the  party  had  been 
given  and  word  taken  back,  the  man  on  the  inside 
returned  and  opened  the  door  with  much  show  of  haste 
and  eagerness  to  welcome  them.  Ben  Hanan  and  all 
of  his  party  dismounted,  following  the  man  who  led  the 
animals  through  the  doorway  to  an  open,  inner  court. 
On  one  side  of  the  court  were  stalls  for  the  animals,  on 
another  side  the  storage-  and  workrooms,  and  on  another 
side  the  living-rooms. 

This  was  the  home  of  Ben  Gerber,  who  had  married 
Saul’s  sister  Martha.  He  was  also  a  tent-maker  and 
dealer.  Through  the  doors  of  the  living-apartments 
Martha  and  Ben  Gerber  rushed  to  welcome  their  kins¬ 
men  and  the  friend,  Eleazar.  In  the  privacy  of  this 
court  the  women  were  unveiled,  because  it  was  the 
citadel  of  the  family,  sacred  from  the  intrusion  of 
strangers.  The  warmth  of  the  greetings  was  typical  of 


72 


IN  JERUSALEM 


these  people,  who  expressed  all  the  emotions  of  life 
without  restraint. 

By  the  flickering  oil  lamps  the  conversation  flowed 
along  over  the  news  of  Tarsus  and  Jerusalem  until  a 
late  hour.  Martha  mothered  Saul  until  he  remon¬ 
strated  and,  to  emphasize  his  near  approach  to  manhood, 
told  of  his  winning  the  race. 

“But,  Saul,”  said  Martha,  “you  are  still  so  small. 
You  take  after  our  mother’s  people.” 

“It  is  not  bulk  that  counts  so  much  as  it  is  what  I 
have  the  will  to  do,”  said  Saul,  while  his  sister  smiled 
appreciation. 

“Aye,  I  have  made  all  the  arrangements,”  Ben  Gerber 
was  saying  to  Ben  Hanan.  “The  day  after  the  morrow 
we  will  go  to  the  Temple  for  our  paschal  lamb,  and  I 
have  already  bought  from  a  shepherd  a  fine  yearling 
for  the  offering.  Now  follow  me  to  the  guest  chamber 
and  rest  yourselves.” 


CHAPTER  VII 
GAMALIEL’S  SCHOOL 

Ben  Gerber’s  shop  was  a  busy  place  the  next  day. 
The  old  men  gathered  there  to  exchange  with  Azel 
the  news  from  the  different  sections  of  the  world.  Saul 
spent  the  day  in  the  streets. 

Now  that  the  great  feast  day  was  at  hand  and  the 
hospitality  of  Jerusalem  was  extended,  the  pilgrims  were 
becoming  reasonable  and  kindly  in  their  conduct  toward 
one  another.  Knowing  that  he  would  see  the  Temple 
the  next  day,  Saul  spent  his  time  in  seeing  the  place  of 
the  Tombs  of  the  Kings,  and  climbed  to  the  hill  whereon 
was  built  the  palace  of  Herod.  The  modification  of 
the  architecture  to  suit  the  Roman  idea  did  not  seem 
to  him  as  beautiful  as  that  of  Tarsus.  He  found  the 
gymnasium  in  the  Tyropoeon  Valley  which  Herod  had 
erected  and  which  was  shunned  by  the  greater  part  of 
the  Jews.  He  found  the  old  walls  of  Nehemiah  on  the 
south  side  partly  torn  down  and  included  with  the  newer 
walls.  His  fancy  was  inflamed  with  the  recollection  of 
the  story  of  that  great  leader  coming  back  and  feverishly 
driving  the  people  to  activity  in  the  rebuilding  of  the 
broken  walls;  and  he  almost  dramatized  himself  as 
doing  a  like  great  work  for  his  people. 

When  night  came  on  the  people  in  the  streets  crowded 
into  every  possible  place  to  rest  comfortably.  For¬ 
bearance  had  taken  the  place  of  the  fretfulness  of  the 
journey.  The  housetops  were  covered  with  weary 
slumberers  who  spread  their  own  mats  for  their  beds. 


73 


74 


IN  JERUSALEM 


Even  down  in  the  courtyards,  where  there  was  any  space 
not  occupied  by  beasts  of  burden,  men  found  a  place 
to  rest,  and  often  the  householder  went  there  to  sleep. 

Before  the  break  of  day  the  city  was  awake.  Food 
had  been  brought  by  most  of  the  pilgrims,  so  that  little 
preparation  was  necessary,  and  the  inhabitants  had  made 
arrangements  for  this  event  long  days  before  the  time  of 
the  feast.  In  the  dim  light  of  the  early  morning  men 
and  women  hastened  to  the  Temple  to  attend  the  early 
service,  but  Ben  Hanan  decided  to  take  Saul  to  Gamaliel. 
The  grandfather  resolutely  set  out  for  the  Temple. 

Gamaliel  had  a  school  which  was  simple  in  all  its 
appointments,  but  famous  among  the  Pharisees,  com¬ 
manding  the  respect  of  even  the  Sadducees,  who  bitterly 
resented  the  teachings  in  that  school.  In  fact,  the 
numerous  controversies  between  the  opposing  sects  were 
not  deemed  a  full  argument  until  the  disputants  had 
reached  the  stage  where  they  could  no  longer  express  the 
intensity  of  their  feelings  by  words,  and  resorted  to 
spitting  at  one  another.  This  unsanitary  but  common 
practice  was  deemed  a  fitting  close  to  an  earnest  sectarian 
argument.  In  front  of  a  plain  house  built  against  the 
walls  of  neighboring  houses,  with  steps  leading  up  to  the 
door,  flanked  by  Corinthian  pilasters,  and  decorated 
with  vines  and  grapes  over  the  doorway  Hke  a  synagogue, 
was  a  crowd  of  men  so  compact  that  it  was  almost 
impossible  to  pass  among  them  to  the  door.  They 
were  gesticulating  wildly,  as  was  the  manner  of  the 
people.  The  greater  number  wore  the  costume  of  white 
assumed  by  the  Pharisees,  but  a  few  zealous  Sadducees 
seemed  delighted  to  find  so  many  of  the  opposition  at 
one  place. 


GAMALIEL’S  SCHOOL 


75 


this  the  school  of  Gamaliel?”  Ben  Hanan  asked 
of  a  patriarchal  Sadducee. 

^‘Indeed  it  is,”  the  Sadducee  replied.  ^‘We  came 
here  to  face  some  of  the  leading  men  who  avoid  answering 
us  on  the  streets.” 

The  doors  of  the  school  opened  and  the  Pharisees 
went  in.  The  Sadducees  left,  gloating  that  their 
opponents  had  not  dared  withstand  their  argument 
until  the  proper  close  of  it.  Ben  Hanan  led  Saul  into 
the  room.  The  high  ceiling  and  four  pillars,  one  at 
each  corner  of  the  room,  gave  this  school  the  appearance 
of  a  temple.  Along  the  walls,  below  the  high  windows, 
were  racks  carrying  bulky  rolls  of  manuscript  written 
on  the  thick  sheets  of  parchment,  and  carefully  protected 
rolls  of  papyrus.  At  the  farther  end  of  the  room  was  a 
dais  extending  across  the  hall,  on  which  rich  rugs  were 
spread,  and  on  the  floor  of  stone  were  thick,  small  rugs 
arranged  in  rows,  on  which  the  men  were  sitting.  Ga¬ 
maliel,  in  a  spotlessly  white  robe,  was  seated  on  a  rug 
on  the  dais.  On  each  side  of  him  were  four  other 
teachers,  and  all  wore  headdresses  that  betokened  they 
were  priests  of  the  Temple.  Ben  Hanan  spoke  to  a 
young  Pharisee  at  the  door  and  told  him  he  wished  to 
speak  with  Gamaliel. 

Gamaliel  rose,  when  the  young  man  brought  him  the 
news,  and  went  to  meet  Ben  Hanan.  At  that  time  of  his 
life  Gamaliel  was  tall,  and  his  well-kept,  black,  luxuriant 
beard,  with  a  few  streaks  of  white,  seemed  to  glisten  and 
ripple  over  his  white  robe.  His  rising  was  easy  and 
full  of  dignity.  His  fine  face  and  piercing  eyes  glowed 
with  kindliness.  While  free  from  any  effort  at  posing, 
yet  his  carriage  was  graceful  and  princely. 


76 


IN  JERUSALEM 


‘‘I  am  Ben  Hanan  of  Tarsus,”  said  Saul’s  father, 
addressing  Gamaliel.  ‘‘This  is  my  son,  Saul,  who  has 
pursued  his  studies  under  Ben  Arza  to  fit  him  as  a  rabbi. 
I  bring  him  to  establish  him  in  your  school,  if  such  may 
be,  to  become  a  scholar.  Whatever  the  charges  and 
length  of  time  required,  provision  will  be  made  for  him. 
It  has  been  the  purpose  from  his  birth  to  place  him  under 
your  teaching.  Here  are  letters  from  Ben  Arza.” 

“Let  me  read  them,”  said  Gamaliel,  taking  them  and 
unrolling  the  record.  He  ran  down  over  the  list  of  items 
carefully  set  forth.  He  smiled,  in  a  manly,  winning  way, 
and  said: 

“Ben  Arza,  with  greater  pains  than  I  am  used  to 
seeing,  has  here  set  forth  the  time  and  record  of  your  son, 
upon  each  division  of  the  studies  of  the  Law  and  the 
Prophets,  giving  a  strong  recommendation.  We  are 
about  to  examine  others  today  for  admission  to  this 
school.  If  you  will  leave  him  with  us,  we  will  soon 
decide.” 

Gamaliel,  returning  to  the  dais,  told  the  assembled 
teachers  who  Saul  was,  spoke  briefly  of  his  family  and 
the  recommendations  of  Ben  Arza.  Ben  Hanan,  outside, 
leaning  against  one  of  the  pilasters  at  the  doorway,  was 
so  calm  and  rigid  that  passers-by  hardly  distinguished 
him  from  the  structure.  In  this  stern  calm  he  waited 
for  the  decision. 

The  council  of  Gamaliel’s  school  began  examining 
Saul  and  making  such  frank  comments  that  he  was 
greatly  embarrassed. 

“How  old  are  you  ?  ”  asked  Gamaliel  in  a  wonderfully 
rounded,  encouraging  voice,  just  when  the  questions 
had  become  most  disconcerting. 


GAMALIEL’S  SCHOOL 


77 


‘‘Sixteen  years,”  replied  Saul,  his  confidence  fully 
restored. 

“Very  small  for  his  age,”  Jochanan,  one  of  the  teach¬ 
ers  on  the  dais,  commented. 

“King  Saul  was  head  and  shoulders  above  his  fel¬ 
lows,”  Saul’s  eyes  were  flashing  as  he  spoke,  “and  David 
was  a  small  man;  yet  the  Lord  loved  David.” 

Gamaliel  smiled  and  the  teachers  about  the  room 
nodded  to  one  another  in  approval. 

“What  trade  would  you  learn?”  Jochanan  asked 
Saul. 

“I  am  even  now  a  tent-maker,”  Saul  answered  with 
pride,  “and  I  know  how  to  weave  the  cloth  for  making 
tents.” 

“He  that  has  a  trade  in  his  hands,”  said  Gamaliel 
to  the  teachers,  “to  what  is  he  like ?  He  is  like  a  vine¬ 
yard  that  is  fenced.” 

The  scribe,  deeming  this  a  good  saying,  immediately 
recorded  it. 

Then,  on  request  of  the  teachers,  who  had  now 
become  friendly,  Saul  recited  the  laws,  as  a  test  of  his 
preparation;  and  to  his  delight  one  asked  him  to  give 
the  law  as  to  anyone  persuading  him  to  follow  after 
strange  gods. 

“If  a  Gentile  persuade  you,  what  then?”  Jochanan 
asked. 

“A  Gentile  could  not  persuade  a  Pharisee,”  Saul 
retorted. 

“Will  the  ten  tribes  return  again?”  one  inquisitorial 
teacher  asked. 

“That  I  do  not  know,”  said  Saul,  “though  Rabbi 
Ben  Arza  has  told  me  that  according  to  the  traditions 


78 


IN  JERUSALEM 


they  will  not.  I  hope  to  learn  what  traditions  are  worthy 
of  belief,  if  I  may  sit  among  you.” 

^‘It  is  not  fair  to  question  the  lad  on  things  we 
debate,”  said  Gamahel.  ‘‘Let  the  youth  retire  and 
wait  outside  for  our  decision.” 

Saul,  going  to  his  father,  told  him  that  he  was  to 
await  the  decision.  Ben  Hanan,  with  only  a  slight 
change  of  his  statuesque  pose,  seized  Saul’s  hand  and  held 
it  so  tightly  while  they  waited  that  Saul  winced. 

“The  personality  and  fitness  of  the  applicant  are  now 
open  for  discussion,”  said  Gamaliel  after  Saul  had  left. 

“While  I  am  favorable  to  the  lad,”  said  Rabbi 
Jochanan,  the  chief  inquisitor,  “yet  I  am  bothered 
about  his  size.” 

“You  should  have  noticed  with  v/hat  erect  and  perfect 
poise  he  stood  the  while  of  his  examination,  and  how  he 
seemed  to  grow  in  stature  when  he  spoke  of  Saul  and 
David,”  said  Gamaliel.  “You  should  have  noted  the 
strong  carriage  of  the  lad;  his  supple  muscles  were 
graceful  in  every  movement,  like  the  muscles  of  a  moun¬ 
tain  gazelle  ready  to  lead  in  winged  speed.” 

“I  do  not  know  if  he  will  continue  a  student,”  said 
one  from  the  floor,  “but  those  strange,  heavy,  meeting 
eyebrows  of  his,  in  one  so  young,  and  the  quick  flash 
of  his  eyes  showing  the  power  of  a  speaker,  made  me 
wonder,  after  he  had  gone,  if  his  answers  were  from 
study  or  from  mere  power  to  divine  the  answer  expected 
by  the  question.” 

“I  am  glad  you  saw  that,”  said  Gamaliel.  “All  the 
time  the  lad  was  before  us  I  watched  those  expressive, 
large  eyes  of  his,  flashing  the  energy  of  a  mind,  that, 
seizing  each  question  as  if  it  were  a  swiftly  flying  mes- 


GAMALIEL’S  SCHOOL 


79 


senger  out  of  a  mysterious  country  on  its  way  to  an 
undiscovered  land,  instantly  made  it  his  captive.  There 
is  power  in  those  eyes;  beauty  and  strength  of  character 
are  denoted  by  his  nose;  his  thin,  sensitive  nostrils 
quivered  like  those  of  an  Arab  thoroughbred  ready  to 
dash  into  a  race.” 

‘‘We  need  not  only  brilliant  minds,”  said  Rabbi 
Surai,  “but  minds  that  will  persist  in  the  right,  not  the 
fickle  ones  who  please  for  a  little  while;  and  I  would  have 
your  opinion  in  that  respect,  O  Gamaliel!” 

“Had  you  followed  him  closely,”  Gamaliel  said  with 
fervor,  “you  would  have  seen  that  he  clung  closely  to 
the  ideas  already  fixed  in  his  mind;  and  then  his  firm 
chin  shows  that  he  is  prepared  in  his  nature  for  persisting 
in  his  purpose.  His  fine,  high  head,  long  and  thin, 
denotes  a  strong  brain  power,  with  great  imagination. 
I  liked  the  sweet  tenderness  of  his  lips,  along  with  the 
firmness  of  his  character.  But  let  us  now  take  the  vote. 
Our  scribe  will  prepare  for  the  ballot.” 

The  scribe  rose  with  slips  of  parchment  for  the  formal 
vote,  and  by  a  gesture  Jochanan  stopped  him. 

“Because  of  the  love  we  have  for  our  leader,  Gamaliel, 
and  because  of  the  love  he  has  for  the  lad,”  said  Jochanan, 
“I  am  of  the  mind  that  the  scribe  should  enter  the  lad’s 
name  without  even  a  vote  being  taken,  unless  someone 
should  wish  to  vote.” 

Immediately  everyone  was  shouting,  with  upraised 
hand,  “So  be  it!” 

“The  lad  awaits  your  message,”  said  Gamaliel  to 
the  scribe. 

When  the  scribe  made  his  announcement  to  Saul, 
he  added  that  the  boy  should  come  after  the  week  of  the 


8o 


IN  JERUSALEM 


Passover.  Ben  Hanan,  without  releasing  Saul’s  hand, 
bowed  to  the  scribe  and  silently  led  Saul  to  Ben  Gerber’s 
house. 

Martha,  Ben  Gerber,  and  Azel  were  impatiently 
waiting  for  Ben  Hanan  or  Saul  to  tell  the  news;  but 
Martha,  reading  in  Saul’s  eyes  the  story,  flung  her  arms 
around  him. 

^‘He  is  accepted  by  Gamaliel,”  said  Ben  Hanan  very 
quietly. 

‘‘Was  I  not  telling  you,”  said  the  grandfather,  rising 
from  his  rug  in  excitement,  “how  well  he  was  schooled  ? 
He  is  a  son  of  Kish.” 

Ben  Hanan  indulgently  smiled  at  his  father,  then  by 
his  gesture  all  were  seated  on  the  rugs  for  a  family 
conference. 

“I  have  provided  for  his  fees  and  clothes,  but  where 
should  he  lodge  ?”  said  Ben  Hanan. 

“That  cannot  be  a  question,”  said  Ben  Gerber,  “for 
this  is  our  house  and  he  is  our  brother.” 

“If  you  will  give  me  work  and  allow  me  the  same 
wages  you  pay  any  other  workman  doing  the  same 
amount  of  work,”  said  Saul  with  pride,  “then  I  will 
pay  my  way  with  you,  for  my  hands  are  skilled  in  your 
work.” 

“To  have  my  brother  under  Gamaliel,”  said  Martha, 
“is  so  much  of  an  honor  that  I  would  gladly  lodge  him 
free.” 

“That  is  a  gracious  offer,  Martha,”  said  Ben  Hanan, 
“but  the  boy  is  right,  for  Hillel  himself  has  said,  ‘Study 
which  is  not  combined  with  work  must  in  the  end  be 
interrupted,  and  only  brings  sin  with  it.’” 


GAMALIEL’S  SCHOOL 


8l 


^‘Let  this  be  the  understanding/’  said  Ben  Gerber. 
^‘Saul  shall  receive  the  same  wages  that  I  pay  others  for 
the  same  work,  and  he  will  live  with  us.  Our  food 
cost  will  be  divided  so  that  each  shall  pay  his  portion. 
Is  that  agreeable,  Ben  Hanan  ?” 

^‘It  is  as  Saul  says,”  said  Ben  Hanan,  waving  his 
hand  to  Saul. 

‘‘It  is  so  agreed,”  said  Saul,  reaching  over  and  shaking 
hands  in  the  Roman  fashion  with  his  brother-in-law, 
in  token  of  closing  the  contract. 


CHAPTER  VIII 
THE  PASSOVER 


After  they  had  taken  a  short  nap,  as  was  the  custom 
at  midday,  all  the  men  started  for  the  Temple  to  get  the 
paschal  lamb  for  that  night.  The  old  grandfather  in- 
^  sisted  that  he  would  go  with  them.  They  ascended  the 
stairway  that  led  up  to  Herod’s  bridge,  at  the  place  on 
the  western  side  of  the  Tyropoeon  Valley  where  the  way 
made  a  sharper  ascent  up  the  hill  on  which  stood  Herod’s 
palace.  This  led  them  to  the  only  western  entrance 
of  the  Temple  area,  being  on  a  level  with  the  court  of 
the  Gentiles. 

The  Temple  area  occupied  a  space  nearly  750  feet 
square,  on  the  elevation  of  the  eastern  hill  overlooking 
the  city  and  almost  as  high  as  the  western  hill  selected 
by  Herod  for  his  palace.  The  site  of  the  Temple  was  on 
the  very  threshing-floor  purchased  by  David,  on  which 
Solomon  had  erected  his  Temple  and  on  which  this 
Temple  had  been  reconstructed  by  Herod.  Entrance 
through  the  retaining  walls  by  ramps  led  from  the 
streets  on  the  south  side  of  the  area  into  the  outer  court 
of  the  Gentiles.  There  were  other  entrances  on  the 
north  side,  and  at  the  northwest  corner  of  the  high  level 
space  there  loomed  the  tower  of  Antonia,  overlooking 
the  courts  of  the  Temple. 

Saul  entered  with  the  company  through  the  western 
gate  of  the  outer  inclosure  from  the  viaduct,  and  passed 
along  the  magnificent  colonnade  of  four  rows  of  164 
Corinthian  columns,  extending  from  east  to  west  along 

82 


THE  PASSOVER 


83 


the  south  wall,  forming  three  aisles.  The  central  aisle 
was  45  feet  wide  and  the  adjoining  columns  100  feet 
high;  each  of  the  other  aisles  was  30  feet  wide  and  the 
columns  of  the  outside  rows  were  60  feet  high.  Beauti¬ 
fully  carved  beams  of  cedar  covered  the  top  of  this 
colonnade.  This  was  the  unhindered  expression  of 
Herod’s  love  of  magnificence  in  reconstructing  the 
Temple,  and  its  courts.  Though  he  had  made  it  much 
larger  than  the  old  Temple  of  Solomon,  it  was  only  by 
holding  to  enlargements  in  nonessential  parts  that  he  was 
able  to  gain  the  co-operation  of  the  Jews. 

At  the  eastern  end  this  colonnade  was  joined  by  a 
colonnade  of  three  rows  of  pillars,  running  north  and  south 
along  the  eastern  side  of  the  area,  with  two  walks  or 
aisles;  and  the  same  kind  of  a  colonnade  was  along  the 
north  wall.  The  entrance  from  this  bridge  on  the  west 
gave  a  vista  of  magnificence  seldom  equaled,  and  on 
coming  into  view  of  the  eastern  colonnade  and  part  of 
the  northern  colonnade,  the  perspective  gave  an  impres¬ 
sion  of  bewildering  distance,  because  of  the  symmetrical 
Corinthian  columns  under  the  great  cedar  beams  resting 
on  them.  Even  the  angles  at  the  eastern  wall  and  the 
northern  wall  blended  in  the  view,  giving  the  impression 
that  there  was  one  continuous  colonnade,  merely  turning 
gracefully  in  its  endless  course.  The  eye  was  so  trained 
to  grandeur  by  this  vista,  that  upon  turning  to  the  mas¬ 
sive,  fortress-like  walls  surrounding  the  courts  and 
the  Temple  proper,  the  high  walls  and  higher  towers  at 
each  of  the  eight  entrances  were  in  proper  propor¬ 
tions. 

The  soreg,  the  terrace  that  surrounded  the  walls  at 
the  base  on  all  sides  of  the  fortress  except  the  west,  was 


84 


IN  JERUSALEM 


1 5  feet  wide  and  was  reached  by  a  flight  of  fourteen  steps 
at  the  eastern  entrance,  and  a  further  flight  of  five 
steps  led  from  the  terrace  to  the  wide  east  gate  through 
a  tower  into  the  Women’s  Court.  On  the  outer  edge  of 
the  terrace  was  a  stone  balustrade  5  feet  high,  with  tablets 
at  the  side  of  each  entrance  warning  all  Gentiles  in  Greek 
letters  that  they  incurred  the  penalty  of  death  if  they 
passed  beyond  that  limit.  The  outside  dimensions  of 
the  immense,  inclosing  walls  were  462  feet  from  east  to 
west  and  367  feet  from  north  to  south. 

Ben  Gerber  led  the  way  to  the  eastern  gate,  and  Azel 
stopped  the  party. 

‘‘Let  the  wonderful  view  be  impressed  upon  your 
memory,  Saul,”  said  the  grandfather. 

All  stopped  in  admiration,  more  than  that,  in  adora¬ 
tion.  The  nineteen  steps  in  all  led  up  to  the  landing  on 
the  level  of  the  Women’s  Court;  and  at  the  farther  side 
of  that  spacious  court,  open  to  the  sky,  was  the  ascent, 
by  fifteen  semicircular  steps,  to  the  entrance  through 
another  wall  of  the  wide  and  high  gate  called  the  Gate 
Beautiful,  or  Nicanor’s  Gate.  Still  beyond  the  Gate 
Beautiful  rose  the  massive  altar  of  sacrifice,  47  feet 
square  at  the  base,  rising  25  feet  by  three  reducing  tiers, 
until  the  top  was  32  feet  square.  The  vista  stretched 
farther  and  ended  with  the  Temple  proper,  standing  on  a 
still  higher  platform,  reached  by  a  flight  of  twelve  steps, 
in  sections  of  four  steps  to  a  landing. 

The  Temple  itself,  polished  marble,  decorated  with  all 
of  the  art  then  known  rose  to  a  height  of  150  feet  above 
the  platform  level.  In  front  of  the  Temple  stood  a 
■screen  supported  by  two  beautiful  columns  ornamented 
with  gold,  and  taking  the  places  of  the  pillars  Jachin  and 


THE  PASSOVER 


85 


Boaz,  in  the  Temple  built  by  Solomon.  These  pillars 
were  30  feet  apart  and  the  screen  proper,  composed  of 
beams  and  stone  work,  extending  across  the  tops  of  the 
pillars,  was  ornamented  in  bronze  and  gold  with  a 
massive  grape  vine,  and  bunches  of  grapes  as  large  as  a 
man. 

Back  of  the  screen  was  the  opening  into  the  vestibule 
of  the  Holy  of  Holies.  The  wide  opening  to  the  vestibule 
was  without  doors,  but  elaborate  curtains  shut  out  the 
view  when  the  ritual  did  not  provide  for  its  use. 

It  was  this  scene,  extending  into  a  vista  of  terrace 
on  terrace  through  spacious  courts  and  wide  doorways, 
reaching  to  the  exquisite  glory  of  the  Temple  itself, 
that  held  in  trancelike  adoration  the  attention  of  the  old 
man  exulting  in  its  beauty,  as  well  as  the  young  man 
reveling  in  its  magnificence. 

After  lingering  long  at  the  scene  of  grandeur  they 
ascended  to  the  soreg  or  first  terrace,  where  they  removed 
their  sandals  and  placed  them  in  their  girdles,  for  no  one 
wore  shoes  or  sandals  within  the  Temple;  and,  ascend¬ 
ing  the  remaining  five  steps,  they  entered  the  Court  of 
Women. 

In  this  wide  Court  of  Women  was  the  great  place  of 
meeting.  Around  the  sides  and  above  the  first  stories 
were  balconies,  accommodating  large  numbers,  and 
since  few  seats  were  provided,  great  crowds  could 
gather.  There  were  thirteen  contribution  boxes,  cun¬ 
ningly  formed  as  inverted  ram’s  horns,  in  the  court, 
to  receive  the  contributions  for  Temple  purposes,  and 
this  caused  the  court  to  be  referred  to  also  as  the  treas¬ 
ury.  In  the  distance  was  the  great  doorway,  20  feet 
wide  and  30  feet  high,  at  the  top  of  fifteen  semicircular 


86 


IN  JERUSALEM 


steps,  opening  on  the  Court  of  Israel,  a  narrow  space 
set  off  by  a  railing  from  the  large  oblong  space  known  as 
the  Priests’  Court;  the  narrow  space,  the  Court  of 
Israel,  or  Men’s  Court,  extended  around  three  sides 
of  the  large  oblong  space  in  which  was  the  massive 
altar  of  sacrifice  of  uncut  stone,  with  the  incline  up  to 
the  south  side. 

Saul  stopped  in  the  Women’s  Court  again  to  gaze 
with  amazement  on  the  vista  through  the  wide  doors 
to  the  altar  of  sacrifice  and  to  the  Temple  in  the  distance. 

Since  applicants  were  admitted  in  groups  of  thirty 
to  receive  their  slaughtered  lambs  for  the  Passover, 
it  was  a  favor  of  the  priest  counting  the  number  to  permit 
his  friend  Ben  Gerber  to  take  Saul  with  him  into  the 
Men’s  Court  as  one  of  the  group  of  thirty. 

After  a  long  wait,  enjoyed  by  Saul  in  studying  the 
detail  of  the  great  inner  Priest’s  Court,  they  were 
admitted  through  a  partition  to  an  inclosure  on  the 
north  side  of  the  altar  of  sacrifice.  There  the  scene 
changed  from  beauty  to  the  drudgery  of  preparing  for 
the  observance  of  the  Passover.  Lambs  and  cattle 
were  tied  to  the  rings  in  the  floor,  waiting  their  use  in 
the  religious  ceremonies.  It  was  a  place  of  slaughter 
as  well  as  ceremony.  The  animals  were  slain,  their 
blood  sprinkled  on  the  corners  of  the  altar,  portions  taken 
for  the  sacrifice  and  (in  the  case  of  the  paschal  lamb) 
the  carcass  cleaned  and  taken  away  by  the  person  who 
would  use  it  for  observance  of  the  ancient  eating  of  the 
Passover.  Now  the  slaughter  took  place  in  the  Temple, 
while  in  the  past  each  family  prepared  the  lamb  to  be 
used. 


THE  PASSOVER 


87 


During  the  afternoon  the  lamb  was  roasted  in  the 
home  of  Ben  Gerber  on  spits  of  pomegranate  wood,  and 
all  arrangements  were  made  for  the  Passover.  The 
guests  who  joined  in  celebrating  the  supper  were  in  the 
house  by  the  going  down  of  the  sun.  The  doors  of  the 
room  were  shut;  men  and  women  reclined  on  their 
left  elbows  on  cushions  around  the  large  dining  mat 
spread  on  the  floor  for  the  occasion.  The  men  wore 
their  sandals,  their  robes  were  gathered  under  their  belts 
as  if  for  a  journey,  and  each  had  by  his  side  his  walking 
stick. 

Ben  Gerber,  as  host,  pronounced  the  blessing  on  the 
first  goblet  of  wine  provided  for  each  one,  and  it  was 
drunk  as  a  ceremony.  Then  a  basin,  a  pitcher  of  water, 
and  a  napkin  were  carried  around  so  that  each  partici¬ 
pant,  using  a  few  drops  of  water,  washed  and  wiped  his 
hands,  signifying  his  ceremonial  cleanliness  to  participate 
in  the  supper. 

After  the  ceremonial  washing  Ben  Gerber  called  on 
Grandfather  Azel  to  offer  prayer.  The  old  man  arose 
stiffly,  solemnly  raising  his  hands  almost  though  not 
quite  level  with  his  face,  pronounced  this  benediction 
provided  for  the  occasion : 

“Blessed  be  Thou,  the  Eternal,  our  God,  the  King  of 
the  world,  who  has  sanctified  us  by  Thy  commands,  and 
hast  ordained  that  we  should  eat  the  Passover.” 

Then  the  bitter  herbs  were  handed  around  with 
some  morsels  of  the  unleavened  bread.  A  second  cup  of 
wine  was  drunk  after  grace  had  been  said.  At  this 
point  Saul,  representing  the  youngest  male  of  the  family, 
asked  the  question  prescribed  by  custom : 


88 


IN  JERUSALEM 


^^Why  do  we  celebrate  this  day?” 

^^Now,  who  should  tell  the  story?”  said  Ben  Gerber 
in  mocking  doubt,  while  Azel,  looking  away,  tried  to 
appear  indifferent  but  nervously  plucked  at  his  garment. 

Grandfather  Azel  is  the  only  one  to  whom  the  honor 
belongs,”  said  Martha. 

“Oi  course,”  answered  Ben  Gerber,  warmly, 
only  asked  the  question  to  learn  if  anyone  had  any 
doubt.  Azel  will  now  tell  the  story.” 

In  telling  the  story  of  the  Hebrew  children  being  led 
out  of  Egypt,  and  the  night  of  the  escape,  the  grand¬ 
father  wove  legends  and  comments  into  the  account^ 
permitted  by  custom,  so  that  it  was  a  running  com¬ 
mentary  on  the  revered  traditions  of  the  Passover. 
Azel  put  all  the  fervor  of  his  ardent  old  age  into  the 
recital  of  the  story — his  voice  and  gestures  were  dramatic 
as  he  became  lost  to  surroundings  and  transported  to  the 
inspiring  theme  of  man  in  weakness  stumblingly  following 
the  guidance  of  Jehovah. 

The  meal  was  partaken  of,  including,  besides  the 
lamb,  bitter  herbs  and  unleavened  bread,  a  dish  filled 
with  a  sop  made  of  crushed  dried  fruits  mixed  with 
vinegar  into  which  the  bread  was  dipped.  Azel  asked 
Saul  to  recite  Psalms  113  and  114,  that  part  of  the 
Hallel  appropriate  to  the  stage  of  the  supper.  Stirred 
by  the  recital,  Saul  put  meaning  into  his  intonation  of  the 
Psalms.  The  meal  was  finished,  and  a  third  cup  of 
wine  was  served  followed  by  a  prayer.  A  fourth  cup 
was  served,  followed  by  the  benediction,  and  Saul 
recited  the  remainder  of  the  Hallel,  Psalms  115  to  and 
including  118. 


THE  PASSOVER 


89 


The  remains  of  the  lamb  were  placed  on  a  fire  that 
had  been  kept  going  to  burn  all  that  was  left  from  the 
feast.  All  rose  and,  with  Saul  leading  at  the  request  of 
Ben  Gerber,  joined  in  chanting  Psalm  136,  sometimes 
called  the  Great  Hallel.” 

The  hour  was  late.  The  men  gave  their  cloaks 
another  pull  up  under  their  girdles,  picked  up  their 
staves  as  if  about  to  set  out  on  a  long  journey,  and  the 
guests  departed.  Ben  Gerber  and  family  went  out  with 
the  guests  as  if  they,  too,  would  leave  on  the  journey, 
but  outside  the  door  returned  to  their  house. 


CHAPTER  IX 
EARLY  SERVICES 

The  next  morning,  being  the  Sabbath  of  the  Pass- 
over,  the  multitude  gathered  for  the  early  service  in  the 
Temple.  While  deep  night  was  still  on,  a  priest,  who  had 
been  on  the  watch  in  the  Temple,  ceremoniously  went  to 
the  chamber  of  priests,  lifted  a  square  stone,  and  took 
out  a  ponderous  key.  This  he  carried  and  gave  to  some 
sleeping  Levites,  who  opened  the  great  doors  of  the 
Temple. 

Even  at  that  early  hour,  the  mass  of  people  gathered 
was  so  great  as  to  cover  the  spaces  allotted  to  them. 
The  priests  and  Levites  aroused  to  sudden  activity,  and 
their  ghostlike  figures  hastening  in  the  dim  light  to  their 
various  duties,  gave  the  great  courts  the  appearance  of 
a  newly  awakened  hive  of  bees.  The  barefoot  people 
moved  about  noiselessly. 

The  slumbering  fires  at  the  top  of  the  great  altar  of 
sacrifices  were  renewed,  the  attendants  brought  up  wood, 
others  carried  water  to  the  basins  used  by  the  priests 
and  to  the  tables  on  the  north  of  the  altar,  where  the 
sacrifices  were  prepared  and  cleansed.  In  solemn  ritual 
a  priest  went  from  the  altar  of  incense  with  a  platter 
up  the  long  incline  of  the  altar  of  sacrifice  and  carried 
back  live  coals  to  start  the  fire  on  the  altar  of  incense. 

This  being  one  of  the  great  days,  the  people  were 
permitted  to  enter  the  Priests’  Court  to  within  i8  feet 
of  the  Holy  Place.  Silently  the  crowd  of  worshipers 
were  waiting  for  the  ritual  of  the  day. 


go 


EARLY  SERVICES 


91 


There  were  priests  and  Levites  assigned  to  every 
small  thing  to  be  done.  An  army  of  servers  was  pres¬ 
ent.  While  all  priests  would  not  be  on  duty  at  any 
one  time,  Josephus  says  that  there  were  2,500  priests 
authorized  to  serve  in  the  Temple.  The  division  of 
duties  was  such  that  at  the  altar  of  sacrifice  a  priest 
caught  the  blood  of  the  sacrifice  in  a  golden  bowl  and 
handed  it  to  one  of  six  priests  in  a  row,  who  passed  it 
from  one  to  another  until  it  reached  the  priest  standing 
at  the  corner  of  the  base  of  the  altar,  who  handed  the 
vessel  to  a  priest  carrying  a  bundle  of  reeds  like  a  small 
broom,  with  which  he  sprinkled  the  blood  on  each  side 
of  the  corner  of  the  altar.  Meanwhile,  the  ones  who 
offered  the  sacrifice,  either  in  person  or  one  for  several, 
symbolically  touched  the  sacrifice  with  his  hand. 

Before  the  morning  light  the  family  of  Ben  Gerber 
and  his  guests  had  gathered  in  the  Temple  for  the 
Sabbath  of  the  Passover.  Azel,  wearied  from  his 
journey  and  the  excitement  of  his  devout  attendance  at 
the  Temple,  was  present,  notwithstanding  the  fact  that 
his  sleep  had  been  cut  short  by  the  supper  of  the  night 
before.  The  great  whiteness  of  the  Holy  Place  loomed 
in  the  faint  light  of  the  night,  as  if  it  were  supporting 
the  heavens. 

With  his  keen  eyes  Saul  was  watching  a  priest  walking 
along  the  top  of  the  north  wall,  silhouetted  against  the 
misty  half-light  of  the  sky.  The  priest  disappeared  in 
the  tower  over  one  of  the  gates  and  shortly  reappeared 
at  the  very  top  of  the  tower.  He  stood  so  still  that  he 
looked  as  if  he  were  a  statue.  Saul  saw  the  priests 
gathering  just  within  the  Holy  Place,  at  the  altar  of 
incense,  on  which  the  fire  was  lighted,  and  with  the  lamps 


92 


IN  JERUSALEM 


of  the  golden  candlestick  relighted  revealing  Levites 
standing  by  with  rams’  horns.  One  priest  fed  the  fire 
with  small  sticks  of  wood,  another  stood  by  with  an 
elaborately  decorated  jar  of  incense  and  a  silver  ladle. 
Out  in  front  of  them  stood  the  high  priest,  this  being 
one  of  the  great  days  he  officiated,  in  all  the  glory  of 
the  white,  purple,  scarlet,  and  gold  of  his  jeweled  robes 
of  office,  silently  watching  the  statuesque  figure  on  top 
of  the  tower.  While  the  time  was  long,  the  intense 
stillness  made  it  seem  longer.  Now  the  crowd  had 
become  so  compact  that  it  would  seem  impossible  for 
them  to  kneel  in  the  service. 

Out  of  the  stillness  of  the  night  now  graying  into  dawn 
there  came  a  high-pitched  cry  from  the  priest  on  the 
tower,  ‘‘Barkail”  (the  morning  light  has  appeared). 

“Has  the  light  in  the  east  reached  Hebron?”  came 
in  a  rich,  sonorous  chant  from  the  chief  officer  of  the 
Temple  beside  the  high  priest  at  the  altar  of  incense. 

“It  has,”  responded  the  watchman  on  the  tower 
in  the  same  high-pitched  voice. 

“Go  and  fetch  a  lamb  from  the  chamber  of  lambs,” 
said  the  high  priest  in  his  deep  chant. 

Then  followed  a  pause  while  the  sunrise  poured  in 
the  first  bright  tints  of  dawn.  The  fire  on  the  altar  of 
incense  blazed  brighter,  the  priest  with  the  jar  poured 
the  incense  from  the  ladle  on  the  fire  and  the  smoke 
circled  in  a  high  column.  The  fragrance  of  the  incense 
was  settling  over  the  people.  The  Levites  sounded 
three  blasts  on  their  horns.  Crowded  as  they  were, 
the  worshipers  found  space  to  kneel,  bowing  their  heads 
to  the  floor.  Shortly  again  there  were  three  blasts; 


EARLY  SERVICES 


93 


the  people  rose.  The  flames  leaped  up  from  the  altar 
of  sacrifice;  and  the  priests  were  going  up  the  long 
incline  with  the  lamb  for  the  sacrifice  of  the  day. 

Again  three  blasts  sounded  from  the  horns.  The 
Levites  began  reciting  the  greater  Hallel  because  this 
was  the  great  day.  One  company  of  Levites  would 
recite  a  line  in  a  high-keyed  chant  and  then  another 
company  of  Levites  would  recite  a  line  in  a  deep  melo¬ 
dious  chant;  the  men  with  horns  v/ould  keep  in  time, 
as  well  as  fill  the  space  between  responses;  and  there 
were  women  with  long,  silvered  trumpets  who  joined 
in  the  intonation  of  the  chants.  The  people  joined  in, 
swelling  the  chorus  until  it  resounded  out  over  the  city, 
and  echoed  along  the  valleys  of  the  Kidron  and  Hinnom. 

The  morning  sun,  well  up  in  the  sky,  revealed  the 
facade  of  the  Holy  Place  in  all  its  splendor.  The  two 
columns  of  the  screen  and  the  gold-embellished  cross¬ 
beams  were  fiery  gold.  The  curtains  to  the  Holy  Place 
were  pulled  back  on  this  festal  day,  so  that  the  people 
might  see  the  interior  of  the  vestibule  with  its  three 
pieces  of  furniture,  the  altar  of  incense,  the  stand  of 
seven  golden  candlesticks,  and  the  table  of  shewbread; 
its  high  ceiling,  augmented  by  a  painting  of  the  firma¬ 
ment,  its  side  walls  decorated  in  subdued  colors  with 
symbols  of  deity,  the  wings  of  power.  At  the  back  of 
the  vestibule  the  two  parts  of  the  great,  heavy,  purple 
curtains,  3  inches  thick,  in  the  weaving  and  dyeing  of 
which  the  priest-workman  had  given  attention  to  every 
thread,  were  drawn  aside,  their  rich  folds  framing 
the  massive,  carved,  and  inlaid  doors  of  the  Holy  of 
Holies. 


94 


IN  JERUSALEM 


The  Holy  of  Holies,  in  the  ancient  Temple  the  place 
of  the  Presence,  the  Ark  of  the  Covenant,  and  the  Tables 
of  the  Law,  now  merely  a  vacant  room,  was  a  perfect 
cube  of  20  cubits,  but  still  venerated  as  a  most  sacred 
memorial  of  all  its  revered  associations.  Because  of 
their  enthusiasm  the  people  in  this  Presence  felt  no 


weariness. 


T 

( 


CHAPTER  X 
AZEL’S  VISION 

After  the  morning  services  Ben  Gerber,  noticing  that 
Azel  looked  very  worn,  urged  the  old  gentleman  to  forego 
the  sacrifice  that  was  to  be  offered  by  Ben  Hanan,  and 
return  to  the  house  for  rest. 

“What  madness  has  come  upon  you,  Ben  Gerber,” 
cried  the  old  man  in  mingled  anger  and  grief,  “that  you 
would  prevent  me  from  this  last  sacrifice,  and  to  be  with 
Saul  in  his  first  ?” 

Waiting  their  turn  the  company  of  Ben  Hanan,  with 
Ben  Gerber’s  family,  finally  entered  the  place  of  sacri¬ 
fice  north  of  the  altar,  where  they  had  received  the  paschal 
lamb  the  day  before.  Many  animals,  to  be  used  as 
sacrifices,  were  tied  to  the  rings  in  the  floor.  Ben  Gerber 
pointed  out  the  one  he  had  purchased  days  before  from 
a  farmer;  and  the  priest,  after  taking  a  slip  of  identi¬ 
fication  from  Ben  Gerber,  had  the  fat,  sleek  yearling 
male  calf  brought  forward.  Its  front  feet  were  tied 
to  its  hind  feet,  it  was  thrown  on  its  side  with  its  head 
toward  the  south,  face  toward  the  west.  The  priest 
drew  a  knife  of  special  kind  for  sacrifice;  another  priest 
was  ready  with  the  gold  basin  to  catch  the  blood.  Azel 
with  Saul  touched  the  animal,  while  the  rest  knelt. 
The  priests  near  at  hand  were  repeating  the  shorter 
Hallel.  The  priest  gave  a  particular  stroke  with  the 
knife,  the  blood  was  sprinkled  on  the  corner  of  the  altar 
after  being  passed  up  by  the  six  intermediate  priests. 
Every  detail  was  governed  by  regulation. 


95 


g6 


IN  JERUSALEM 


Grandfather  Azel  rose  with  joy  in  his  face  that  he 
had  participated  in  this  ritual,  so  full  of  deep  meaning 
to  him — a  renewed  covenant  between  him  and  Jehovah, 
a  dedication  of  his  grandson  to  the  life  of  a  teacher,  a 
cleansing  of  his  conscience  that  Jehovah  had  heard  and 
forgiven  him,  a  supreme  joy  that  once  more,  perhaps 
for  the  last  time,  he  had  faithfully  complied  with  the 
Law  of  Moses.  The  Temple  Beautiful  dazzled  his  eyes 
and  then  seemed  to  float  away  with  the  silvery  clouds 
in  the  blue  dome. 

Ben  Hanan  had  been  watching  his  father  closely 
and  sprang  in  time  to  catch  him  as  he  fell. 

They  bore  the  grandfather  out  of  the  Temple  and 
down  to  the  home,  where  he  tossed  in  fever  throughout 
the  day  and  night.  All  night  long  Saul  had  sat  by  his 
grandfather,  who  would  call  for  him  if  he  were  absent. 
Saul  had  tenderly  raised  his  grandfather’s  head  often 
during  the  night  to  give  him  a  sup  of  water.  The 
morning  light  was  just  stealing  through  the  latticed 
windows.  Ben  Hanan  had  come  in  and  was  sitting  on 
the  other  side  of  the  grandfather’s  mat,  listening  with 
troubled  brow  to  the  heavy  breathing  of  the  old  man. 
Suddenly  Azel  opened  his  eyes,  burning  brightly  from 
the  fever.  He  looked  and  saw  his  grandson,  then  turn¬ 
ing  to  Ben  Hanan  he  gazed  fixedly  upon  him. 

‘‘Deal  kindly  with  the  lad,”  the  old  man  gasped,  “for 
he  is  a  true  son  of  Kish.  Lay  me  away  beside  the  road 
coming  into  the  Damascus  Gate,  so  that  in  the  resurrec¬ 
tion  I  may  join  the  host  coming  back  to  the  Temple.” 

With  great  effort  the  old  man  raised  himself  on  his 
right  elbow,  placed  his  hand  on  Saul’s  head,  and  seemed 
unable  to  say  anything  for  a  while. 


AZEL’S  VISION 


97 


“Look  you,  Saul,”  the  old  man  cried  after  a  long 
silence,  pointing  to  the  window  through  which  the 
sunlight  was  pouring,  “  there  it  is,  eternal  in  the  heavens. 
I  lost  sight  of  the  Temple  while  at  the  sacrifice;  but 
there — there  it  is,  now,  translated  to  the  skies!  Great 
is  the  Lord  our  God!” 

He  fell  back,  gasped  a  few  times,  then  his  breath 
gently  left  his  body.  In  a  long  stillness  sat  Ben  Hanan; 
then,  bowing  his  head  in  his  hands,  he  sobbed  the  great 
sobs  of  a  strong  man  giving  over  to  his  grief. 

Saul  did  not  move  for  a  long  time.  He  felt  that  he 
was  sitting  beside  a  prophet  of  old.  At  last  he  yielded 
to  the  knowledge  of  his  loss  and,  throwing  himself  upon 
the  bosom  of  the  old  man,  wept  bitterly. 


CHAPTER  XI 

AT  GAMALIEL’S  FEET 

After  the  burial  of  Grandfather  Azel  and  the  week  of 
mourning  had  been  observed,  Ben  Hanan  bade  Saul 
farewell.  For  the  whole  of  a  long  day  Saul  sat  in  the 
upper  chamber  of  Ben  Gerber’s  house  in  deep  medita¬ 
tion.  He  was  brave  enough  to  endure  the  separation 
from  his  family;  he  felt  that  the  loss  of  his  grandfather 
was  inevitable;  and,  while  he  mourned  his  death,  Saul 
did  not  feel  it  was  a  cause  for  unreasonable  grief.  In 
the  great  confidences  of  the  home  life  Azel  had  told  him 
of  the  joy  he  expected,  if  he  served  his  time  faithfully  in 
the  body.  For  a  while  he  thought  of  Tabitha,  but  he 
turned  from  that  subject  with  a  firm  resolve  that  it 
should  wait  its  time.  He  was  thinking  of  the  impres¬ 
sions  he  had  received  from  all  this  new  life  and  the  new 
scenes;  what  would  be  his  place  in  the  affairs  of  life; 
what  would  be  his  goal.  Vaguely  he  knew  that  he 
would  be  a  rabbi,  but  what  should  he  do  to  discharge 
the  duties  of  such  office  so  as  to  accomphsh  any  great 
purpose  ? 

His  mind  followed  in  winding  detail  the  scheme  that 
would  take  him  back  to  his  home  as  a  teacher  of  men, 
and  vainly  he  tried  to  think  of  a  method  to  present  the 
Jewish  religion  in  an  attractive  way.  He  communed 
with  himself,  and  then  concluded  that  faith  was  the  only 
safe  reliance;  all  else  was  the  caprice  of  surroundings. 
It  was  not  an  idle  waste  of  time.  He  was  obeying  the 
great  impulse  of  his  nature  in  thinking  for  himself. 

98 


AT  GAMALIEL’S  FEET 


99 


When  he  reported  to  the  school  of  Gamaliel  he  was 
placed  with  boys  about  his  own  age.  In  a  few  days  the 
teacher  to  whom  he  had  been  assigned  reported  to 
Gamahel  that  Saul  was  only  being  held  back  by  the  boys 
in  that  class  and  that  he  should  be  placed  in  a  more 
advanced  class.  He  made  rapid  progress  under  the 
new  teacher,  or,  at  least,  so  it  seemed  to  the  teacher,  but 
Saul  was  earnestly  hoping  that  he  would  soon  come  to 
some  study  that  was  new  to  him.  Gamahel  would 
drop  in  on  the  class  once  in  a  while  and  his  practiced 
eye  saw  that  the  drudgery  of  reviewing  the  things  with 
which  he  was  familiar  would  kill  off  Saul’s  ambition. 
Thus  it  came  about  that  Gamahel  took  Saul  as  a  special 
scholar  and  gave  him  a  place  in  his  own  study. 

In  Gamahel’s  hbrary  Saul  found  the  writings  of 
Plato  and  Aristotle,  some  of  the  Dialogues  of  Socrates, 
and  wonderfully  interesting  letters  from  Philo  and  other 
teachers  in  Alexandria.  He  found  many  of  the  Roman 
laws  and  his  mind  was  quick  to  grasp  them. 

In  the  conversations  with  his  favored  pupils  Gamahel 
showed  the  broad  mind  for  which  he  was  famous.  In 
these  conversations  Saul  learned  the  simphcity  and 
depth  of  other  great  minds;  the  tests  to  be  apphed  to 
find  out  if  a  man  were  sincere  in  his  arguments;  to 
distinguish  between  the  man  who  simply  aped  the  learned 
and  the  man  who  sincerely  assimilated  knowledge  and 
desired  to  impart  it  to  others.  These  close  associations 
with  Gamahel  also  brought  Saul  into  the  discussions 
among  other  learned  men  and  especially  in  close  connec¬ 
tion  with  the  members  of  the  Sanhedrin  or  Jewish  senate, 
of  which  there  were  two  divisions:  the  lesser  or  local 
Sanhedrins,  composed  of  twenty-three  members,  and 


lOO 


IN  JERUSALEM 


the  one  greater  Sanhedrin,  composed  of  seventy-one 
members,  over  which  the  high  priest  presided. 

Long  before  Saul’s  time  a  class  of  men  known  as  the 
learned  or  the  scribes,  disassociated  from  priestly  orders, 
had  devoted  themselves  to  the  study  and  interpretation 
of  the  written  law  as  found  in  the  Torah  or  Pentateuch, 
and  the  traditions  or  the  unwritten  law  of  customs  called 
the  Halacha.  The  Pharisees  held  the  Halacha  to  be 
equally  authentic  and  binding  with  the  Torah,  but  not 
superseding  it,  merely  explaining  the  appHcation  of  the 
general  provisions  of  the  written  law,  and  the  Sadducees 
denied  any  authority  to  the  law  of  customs. 

Back  in  the  Maccabean  time,  the  leaders  or  the  no¬ 
tables,  closely  associated  with  the  government,  were  from 
the  priestly  orders  and  were  accused  of  neglecting  strict 
observance  of  the  law  because  engrossed  with  political 
affairs,  and  they  resented  any  such  belief  as  the  Pharisees 
held  because  it  would  embarrass  their  freedom  in  wars, 
politics,  and  deahngs  with  other  nations.  While  the 
original  cause  of  difference  had  disappeared  to  a  con¬ 
siderable  extent,  yet  the  animosity  between  the  two 
divisions  had  continued  and  the  difference  as  to  the 
authority  of  the  unwritten  law  continued.  A  marked 
difference,  arising  primarily  over  the  acceptance  or 
refusal  to  accept  the  unwritten  law,  was  that  the 
Pharisees  affirmed  a  resurrection  of  the  dead,  and  the 
Sadducees  denied  it. 

Herod  the  Great  deprived  the  Pharisees  of  the  power 
they  had  gained  in  the  Sanhedrin  by  the  simple  expedient 
of  killing  off  a  large  number  who  were  members  of  that 
body  and  appointing  others.  At  one  time  there  had 
been  open  war  between  the  sects  and  many  were  slain. 


AT  GAMALIEL’S  FEET 


lOI 


The  scribes,  through  all  the  changes,  had  devoted 
themselves  to  the  study  of  the  Torah  and  the  Halacha 
to  find  from  the  two  sources  an  interpretation  that  would 
govern  in  every  detail  the  lives  of  the  individuals  and 
all  the  services  of  the  Temple.  While  the  Torah  was 
so  sacred  that  no  word  of  it  could  be  changed  and  while 
its  terms  were  often  general,  yet  the  scribes  held  that  it 
was  the  supreme  law  and  that  it  must  be  applied  to  every 
detail  and  that  this  could  only  be  accomplished  by  resort 
to  the  law  of  customs,  the  Halacha.  The  law  of  customs 
was  written  out  long  after  Saul’s  time  and  is  said  to  be 
included  in  the  Mishna. 

There  were  many  who  insisted  that  the  law  of  customs 
had  been  given  by  Moses  and  handed  down  from  mouth 
to  ear  through  the  generations.  While  no  word  of  the 
Halacha  could  be  written,  yet  no  word  of  it  could  be 
varied.  The  scribes  who  received  the  unwritten  law 
had  been  selected  for  their  skilled  and  accurate  memories, 
even  the  Hebrew  word  meaning  “to  teach”  was  the  same 
as  “to  repeat.” 

From  the  time  of  Hillel,  the  grandfather  of  Gamaliel, 
the  influence  of  the  Pharisees,  from  whom  came  the 
great  body  of  scribes,  increased  in  the  Sanhedrin.  A 
scribe’s  judgment  had  all  the  weight  of  a  judge’s  decision 
among  the  people.  Not  only  were  the  scribes  selected 
from  among  devout  men  but  every  teacher  enjoined  upon 
them  the  strictest  observance  of  all  the  laws.  They  were 
held  in  high  esteem  by  the  people,  for  the  people  liked 
to  have  such  rules  as  would  keep  them  distinct  from 
other  nations. 

Those  who  were  active  in  the  studies  of  the  law 
gathered  in  schools  such  as  Gamahel  conducted,  meeting 


102 


IN  JERUSALEM 


at  times  in  the  court  of  the  pillars,  or  the  court  of  the 
Gentiles  adjoining  the  Temple  for  discussions.  While 
they  sought  to  find  a  rule  for  every  action  and  condition 
tending  to  a  more  complete  observance  of  the  Torah, 
they  were  zealously  deducing  rules  that  would  keep  the 
Jews  separate  from  the  Gentiles,  and  when  adopted  by 
the  Sanhedrin  these  rules  of  separation  affected  the  Jews 
of  the  Dispersion  who  were  liable  to  become  Hellenized 
in  their  far-off  adopted  countries. 

Saul  was  busily  occupied  during  this  period  of  his 
life,  for  he  had  rapidly  advanced  in  scribism  under 
Gamahel  until  he  was  taking  part  in  the  discussions 
besides  learning  the  unwritten  law.  He  was  at  work 
during  the  early  morning  hours  in  Ben  Gerber’s  shop, 
and  in  the  school  among  the  scribes  from  the  middle  of 
the  forenoon  until  past  midday.  It  was  seldom  that  he 
had  all  his  remaining  part  of  the  afternoon  from  the  shop, 
but  he  managed  to  attend  the  gymnasium  some  of 
the  time  in  order  to  build  his  strength  while  yet  a  young 
man.  In  his  eagerness  to  gain  all  advantages  to  be  had 
from  the  gymnasium  he  was  known  as  the  most  enthu¬ 
siastic  among  those  taking  exercises  there. 

In  the  freedom  of  discussion  permitted  in  the  school 
of  Gamahel,  a  scribe  older  than  Saul  proposed  a  question 
to  Gamaliel  whether  or  not  it  was  a  violation  of  the  law 
for  a  Jew  to  participate  with  Gentiles  in  athletics. 

‘‘I  have  noticed  that  our  young  brother  Saul,”  said 
the  scribe,  ‘‘often  goes  to  the  gymnasium  built  by 
Herod.” 

“How  find  you  the  directors  there  as  compared  with 
those  in  Tarsus  ?”  Gamaliel  good-humoredly  asked. 


AT  GAM.\LIEL’S  FEET 


103 


‘‘They  are  not  as  careful,  and  they  have  little  regard 
for  the  purity  of  athletics,”  said  Saul. 

“I  contend,”  said  the  older  scribe,  “that  it  is  con¬ 
taminating  for  a  Jew  to  attend  these  heathenish  places. 
It  leads  to  familiarity  with  their  statues  and  idols.” 

“I  do  not  agree  with  you,”  said  Gamaliel.  “I  often 
go  to  the  public  bath,  in  which  one  of  the  decorations  is 
a  statue  of  Venus,  and  I  feel  no  contamination.  The 
statue  was  put  there  for  ornament  and  the  bath  was 
not  constructed  for  the  statue.” 

Saul  centered  on  the  constant  interpretations  and 
repetitions  of  the  traditions  until  he  mentally  revolted 
against  the  system  of  endless  deductions  of  rules  of 
conduct  daily  engaging  the  sittings  of  the  scribes.  The 
reverence  demanded  by  all  teachers  from  their  pupils 
and  the  respect  Gamaliel  evoked  \\dthout  appeahng  to 
any  rule  of  conduct  raised  a  barrier  to  Saul  making  any 
protest  to  his  teacher.  He  thought  that  it  was  only 
within  his  own  soul  that  conflict  was  known. 

Gamaliel  had  asked  Saul,  in  a  casual  way,  to  search 
the  manuscripts  for  any  common  ground  or  common 
thought  between  the  Greek  philosophers  first  as  among 
themselves,  and  next  with  the  Jew’s.  Saul  having  made 
the  search  laid  his  conclusions  before  his  teacher. 

“You  wiU  note,”  said  Gamahel,  “that  the  thinkers 
of  every  age  among  aU  people  seek  the  origin  of  hfe  with 
the  idea  that  from  this  origin  flow’s  the  supreme  law’  of 
goodness.  Either  tediously  or  fantastically  they  arrive 
at  a  conclusion.  It  has  seemed  to  me  that  each  thinker 
for  himself  has  received  a  revelation,  more  or  less  instruc¬ 
tive  according  to  the  zeal  with  w’hich  he  sought  knowl- 


104 


IN  JERUSALEM 


edge,  that  gave  a  high  conception  of  the  destiny  of  man — 
linking  him  with  immortality.” 

‘‘My  soul  is  weary  and  I  am  strangely  disturbed,” 
said  Saul.  “I  do  not  doubt,  but  I  wonder  why  all  this 
toil  of  the  scribes  to  find  a  more  exacting  means  of 
observing  the  law  to  appease  God.” 

“Your  doubts  have  been  known  to  me  for  many 
days,”  said  Gamaliel,  speaking  with  that  sympathetic 
understanding  that  made  Saul  from  that  instant  a  hero 
worshiper.  “In  the  first  place,  there  comes  into  every 
man’s  life  a  period  of  doubt,  likely  due  to  physical 
development,  the  transition  from  youth  to  fixed  man¬ 
hood.  Happy  is  the  man  who  comes  through  strong 
and  clean.  In  the  next  place,  you  are  at  the  stage  of 
mental  development  where  you  are  tempted  to  abandon 
early  training  and  to  take  up  new  ideals.  This  is  critical, 
lest  impulse  drive  you  so  far  that  you  will  lose  the  way 
of  your  life.” 

“I  heed  the  warning,  O  Gamaliel,”  said  Saul  as  if  the 
kindly  sympathy  of  his  teacher  had  refreshed  him,  “but 
now  for  the  question  that  disturbs  me.  Why  does  the  Law 
demand  of  the  Jews  such  rigid  ceremonial  life  ?” 

“I  cannot  answer  that  question  fully,”  said  Gamaliel, 
“for  it  involves  more  knowledge  of  Jehovah’s  plans  than 
it  has  been  possible  for  me  to  obtain.  There  are  many 
sufficient  reasons;  chief est  is  that  by  this  plan  Jews  have 
a  consciousness  of  doing  the  things  that  will  please  God. 
Other  philosophies  speculate  upon  the  attributes  of  God, 
and  what  are  the  virtues  men  should  imitate,  but  such 
speculation  fails  to  establish  the  close  relationship  that 
the  observance  of  laws  has  fixed  between  our  daily  life 
and  Jehovah — the  very  narrowness  of  Jews  has  saved 


AT  GAMALIEL’S  FEET 


105 


to  them  through  the  centuries  the  high  thought  that 
Jehovah  is  the  origin  of  all  things.  With  the  authority- 
given  me  as  a  teacher  I  have  used  the  ineffable  name, 
Jehovah.” 

dear  teacher,”  said  Saul,  ^‘now  that  my  soul 
is  naked  before  you,  I  confess  a  desire  to  know  more 
than  the  mere  repetition  of  the  Halacha.” 

‘‘The  very  impulse  that  has  given  us  prophets,” 
said  Gamaliel.  “You  should  now  give  part  of  your  time 
to  the  study  of  the  history  and  the  prophets,  the  edify¬ 
ing  Scriptures,  the  Haggada — field  of  fruits  and  flowers 
that  surrounds  the  stone  wall  Halacha.  That  fervid 
imagination  of  yours  should  develop  in  Haggada  so  that 
you  can  give  to  our  people  the  poetry  and  imagery  nec¬ 
essary  to  their  sentimental  natures;  but  I  charge  you 
not  to  condone  any  failure  or  refusal  to  observe  the  law, 
nor  any  abatement  of  it — ^no,  not  one  jot  or  tittle,  whether 
it  be  the  written  law,  or  the  law  by  tradition.” 

“Will  that  not  lead  me  to  the  same  view  as  is  held 
by  the  Sadducees,  save  that  you  include  the  Halacha?” 
Saul  asked  earnestly. 

“Not  so  long  as  we  have  our  schools,”  said  Gamaliel. 
“It  is  the  business  of  the  scribes  to  search  the  Scriptures, 
to  apply  the  law  of  custom  to  the  interpretation  of  the 
Torah  so  that  the  law  keeps  up  with  changing  conditions, 
and  when  the  real  meaning  has  been  found,  we  secure  the 
approval  of  the  Sanhedrin  and  it  then  becomes  binding 
upon  the  priesthood  as  well  as  on  the  people.  A  rabbi 
and  scribe  must  retain  everything  he  has  received  just 
as  he  has  received  it  and  so  impart  it,  and  his  life  must 
exemplify  the  things  he  teaches  so  that  no  shame  shall 
come  upon  the  Word — as  a  goodly  lined  cistern  retains 


io6 


IN  JERUSALEM 


every  drop  of  water  emptied  into  it,  so  the  worthy  scribe 
retains  every  word  as  it  was  given  to  him.” 

Under  the  inspiration  of  Gamaliel,  Saul  applied  him¬ 
self  to  study  with  renewed  interest.  This  searching 
for  the  right  and  wrong,  or  casuistry,  made  the  work  of 
the  scribes  endless,  and  laid  many  burdens  of  observ¬ 
ance  on  the  people.  The  scribes  had  extended  many 
of  the  laws  so  that  the  priests  of  the  Temple  received  more 
for  their  support,  causing  some  grumbhng  among  the 
people. 

As  a  strict  Pharisee  Saul  wore  the  white  robe  with 
blue  fringe  affected  by  his  sect.  Also  he  wore,  especially 
when  in  or  about  the  Temple  and  often  on  the  streets, 
the  phylacteries  affected  by  the  scribes  and  Pharisees. 
The  phylacteries  were  small,  square  boxes  opening  like 
a  locket,  one  worn  on  the  inside  of  the  left  forearm  and 
one  was  worn  on  the  forehead,  and  they  contained  on 
parchment  four  passages  from  the  Torah — ^Exodus  13: 
i-io,  11-16;  Deuteronomy  6:4-9;  2,nd  Deuteronomy 
9:13-21 — all  on  one  shp  in  the  case  on  the  arm,  but  on 
separate  slips  in  the  case  on  the  forehead.  The  one  on 
the  arm  was  fastened  by  two  straps  wound  seven  times 
around  the  arm  and  three  times  around  the  hand,  and 
the  one  on  the  forehead  was  fastened  with  straps  hanging 
down  in  a  prescribed  way,  and  sometimes  fastened  with 
a  decorated  fillet. 

Saul  found  that  the  rigid  rules  applied  to  the  Halacha 
did  not  apply  to  the  historical  and  prophetical  parts  of  the 
Torah.  The  body  of  legends  and  traditions  associated 
with  the  non-legal  Scriptures  was  known  as  the  Haggada, 
and  the  term  included  the  method  of  interpretation. 
While  the  teaching  of  the  Halacha  was  concerned  with 


AT  GAMALIEL’S  FEET 


107 


carrying  into  effect  every  part  of  the  written  law,  and 
extending  the  law  to  every  new  condition,  on  the  other 
hand,  the  Haggada,  the  sayings,  gave  free  scope  to  the 
imagination,  invested  the  recorded  history  with  supple¬ 
mental  stories  explaining  motives  and  reasons,  casting 
the  glamor  of  romance  and  imagery  around  even  the 
dry  precepts  of  the  law,  released  the  imagination,  and 
gave  enough  freedom  to  fancy  to  satisfy  the  avid  senti¬ 
mentalism  of  the  oriental. 

It  was  in  this  part  of  his  study  that  Saul  learned  the 
legends  and  acquired  the  style  of  weaving  about  the  text 
new  combinations  characteristic  in  his  later  life  in  making 
his  appeals  to  mixed  peoples,  such  as  his  reference  to 
the  legend  of  the  magicians,  Jannes  and  Jambres,  oppos¬ 
ing  Moses,  or  to  the  legend  of  the  rock  that  gave  water 
to  the  wanderers,  following  them  in  the  wilderness. 

The  two  lines  of  thought  represented  by  the  Halacha 

« 

and  the  Haggada  went  along  together  and  constituted 
the  equipment  of  any  man  worthy  of  being  a  scribe. 

While  giving  much  of  his  time  to  study  and  prepara¬ 
tion  Saul  came  in  contact  with  the  practical  life  of  the 
people  through  prevalent  complaints  and  the  discussion 
among  the  scribes  of  the  changes  in  conditions  and  what 
would  be  necessary  to  meet  the  changes.  The  scribes 
had  taught  the  segregation  of  the  Jews  both  in  their 
eating  and  in  their  marriage  relations  with  the  idea  of 
making  the  lives  more  acceptable  to  Jehovah. 

The  taxes  exacted  by  Rome  became  symbols  to  the 
Jews  of  acknowledgment  of  a  heathen  religion;  the  tax- 
gatherers  were  cordially  hated.  The  complaints  of  the 
people  against  Rome  embarrassed  the  leaders,  because 
they  were  powerless  against  the  government  which  estab- 


io8 


IN  JERUSALEM 


lished  law  and  tranquility.  To  add  to  the  embarrass¬ 
ment  of  the  leaders  among  the  scribes,  an  organization 
called  the  Zealots,  composed  of  fanatics  and  desperate 
men  having  nothing  in  common  with  the  scribes, 
fomented  rebellion  and  caused  uprisings  against  officers 
of  the  government,  claiming  that  they  were  following  the 
teachings  of  the  scribes  and  Pharisees. 

In  this  distraught  condition  Saul’s  early  training  in 
Tarsus  gave  him  a  broader  view  of  affairs.  He  was 
judicial  when  others  were  excited,  he  was  loyal  to  Rome 
while  others  only  had  hate  for  the  Empire.  He  was 
tolerant  of  the  messianic  Haggada  prevailing,  but  insisted 
on  Jews  developing  their  own  religious  hfe  under  the 
freedom  granted  by  Rome.  The  many  questions  devel¬ 
oped  in  Saul  his  latent  qualities  of  statesmanship. 

While  on  his  way  one  day  to  meet  other  scribes  in 
the  court  of  the  Gentiles  for  a  discussion,  Saul  stopped 
at  the  school  to  leave  word  where  he  was  going.  He 
learned  that  Philo  of  Alexandria  would  visit  Gamaliel 
that  day. 

“Stay,  my  son,”  said  Gamaliel  to  Saul,  “and  meet 
this  interesting  scholar.” 

Philo  came  in  shortly,  his  kindly  face  showing  the 
lines  of  one  who  had  thought  deeply.  He  had  the  bear¬ 
ing  of  a  man  vdth  a  message  worth  hearing. 

“I  have  turned  aside  from  my  journey  to  Ephesus,” 
said  Philo,  the  great  haggadist,  to  the  assembled  school, 
“to  meet  my  respected  friend  and  fellow-laborer,  Gamal¬ 
iel;  and  I  take  this  opportunity  to  congratulate  you  on 
having  so  devout  and  so  advanced  a  teacher.  It  is  my 
pleasure  to  find  in  him  a  co-worker  in  the  interesting 
field  of  sorting  out  the  fundamental  things  among  the 


AT  GAMALIEL’S  FEET 


109 


great  teachers  and  philosophers  of  Greece  and  comparing 
them  with  the  basic  teachings  of  Moses.  There  is  a 
vast  deal  of  help  found  in  the  study  of  ancient  teachings 
in  Egypt.  I  believe  I  will  be  able  to  convince  eminent 
Greeks  that  the  correct  understanding  of  the  Logos  is 
the  foundation  of  unity  of  belief  in  the  Supreme  Being, 
and  that  idea  once  established  will  constitute  an  easy 
approach  to  the  universal  knowledge  of  Jehovah;  for 
all  men  instinctively  look  for  the  first  cause,  the 
beginning.” 

The  time  passed  rapidly,  for  Philo’s  words  were 
refreshing  and  inspiring.  He  brought  a  new  idea  of 
universal  love  in  his  story;  he  said  teachers  should 
bring  men  of  all  nations  first  to  the  comprehension  of 
God  as  Spirit,  and  that  then  would  be  the  proper  time 
to  win  them  to  the  accepted  form  of  worship. 


CHAPTER  XII 

ACCEPTING  RESPONSIBILITY 

At  the  end  of  two  years  Ben  Hanan  again  visited 
Jerusalem,  and  now  treated  Saul  with  much  more  con¬ 
sideration.  He  was  pleased  to  find  Saul  associated  with 
prominent  scribes;  he  spent  a  long  time  with  Gamaliel, 
who  urged  that  Saul  should  become  a  permanent  resi¬ 
dent  of  Jerusalem,  because  of  his  fitness  and  his  influence. 

^‘Our  world  centers  in  Tarsus,”  said  Ben  Hanan. 
‘‘There  are  now  half-a-million  people  in  our  city,  and 
no  one  has  been  fitted  to  cope  with  the  teachings  of  the 
Greeks  or  with  the  lax  morals  brought  us  from  Rome. 
His  work  lies  where  it  is  most  needed.” 

“At  least,”  said  Gamaliel,  “I  hope  for  the  time  that 
he  may  become  a  member  of  the  Greater  Sanhedrin. 
If  he  grows  in  judgment,  and  if  he  becomes  the  head  of 
his  own  family,  I  will  be  glad  to  stand  sponsor  for  him 
as  a  member  from  Cilicia.” 

“I  pray  that  I  may  not  become  vain,”  said  Ben 
Hanan,  humbly.  “My  greatest  wish  would  then  be 
realized.” 

Saul  was  growing,  not  tall,  but  sturdy.  His  face  had 
filled  out  along  character  lines  that  Gamaliel  had  noticed 
in  the  boy,  and  the  young  man’s  beard  gave  him  the  air 
of  the  added  strength  of  well-timed  maturity. 

It  was  at  this  visit  of  Ben  Hanan  that  Martha’s 
latest-born  was  named  Ahiram,  according  to  the  Jewish 
rites,  and  Saul  assisted  at  the  ceremony.  So  attached 
to  the  child  did  Saul  become  that  the  little  fellow  tried 


no 


ACCEPTING  RESPONSIBILITY 


III 


to  cling  to  Saul  two  years  later  when  the  young  rabbi 
left  for  his  home  in  Tarsus,  and  Saul  loved  the  child  as 
if  it  were  his  own. 

Not  only  was  Saul  prepared  by  study  of  the  law,  by 
service  in  the  Temple,  and  a  general  knowledge  of  other 
philosophies  but  he  was  compelled  to  take  a  thorough 
course  in  the  knowledge  of  diseases,  their  cure  and 
prevention.  He  knew  not  alone  the  remedies,  but  how 
to  prepare  them,  mostly  from  herbs;  and  he  was  versed 
in  all  the  well-known  means  of  caring  for  the  sick  and 
disabled.  As  a  rabbi  he  had  to  have  this  knowledge,  in 
order  to  teach  those  youths  who  would  never  have  the 
chance  to  come  to  Jerusalem  to  study,  as  well  as  to  dis¬ 
charge  the  duties  of  relief  and  visitation  imposed  on  a  rabbi. 

In  many  of  the  synagogues  there  were  men  who  could 
read  the  ancient  Hebrew  and  translate  it  into  the  Ara¬ 
maic,  the  language  used  by  the  Jews  of  Palestine  and 
by  nearly  all  Jews  in  addition  to  the  Greek.  The  Hebrew 
was  at  that  time  a  dead  language.  Saul  so  fitted  him¬ 
self  that  he  could  do  his  own  translating  and  would  not 
have  the  need  of  a  translator,  usually  provided  for  the 
leader  of  the  Sabbath-day  services. 

The  recital  of  all  the  preparation  of  a  rabbi  who  was 
sent  out  from  Gamaliel’s  school  may  seem  almost  endless, 
but  infinite  care  was  necessary  to  secure  and  maintain 
the  reputation  of  Gamaliel,  who  in  turn  maintained  the 
reputation  of  his  great  predecessor,  Hillel,  who  had  said: 
‘‘He  who  engages  in  business  cannot  become  a  sage; 
and  in  a  place  where  there  are  no  men,  strive  thou  to  be 
a  man.” 

In  four  years  Saul  had  covered  all  the  courses  laid 
down  for  five  years,  and  he  was  pointed  to  as  one  worthy 


II2 


IN  JERUSALEM 


of  emulation  in  study.  He  had  arrived  at  man’s  estate, 
a  young  man  of  twenty  sitting  in  the  council  with  men 
of  ripe  years.  His  tact,  his  wide  knowledge  of  men, 
his  naturally  kindly  disposition,  his  flaming  zeal  when 
aroused,  his  uncompromising  regard  for  truth  had  won 
him  a  place  in  the  esteem  of  all  he  met. 

He  had  been  set  apart  as  a  rabbi  in  formal  ceremonies, 
both  by  the  school  of  Gamaliel  and  the  Cilician  synagogue 
which  he  attended,  and  where  at  times  he  conducted  the 
services  or  gave  the  discourse  of  the  day. 

The  great  number  of  synagogues  in  Jerusalem  at  this 
time — there  being  over  four  hundred — ^was  a  curious 
commentary  on  the  devotion  of  a  people  complaining  of 
heavy  taxation  both  by  the  Roman  government  and  by 
the  Temple,  for  every  synagogue  had  to  be  supported, 
although  it  was  merely  a  place  of  assembly  for  the  par¬ 
ticular  class  of  people  who  foimd  congenial  associates 
in  the  one ’they  selected. 

The  Great  Sanhedrin  had  been  a  place  of  wonderful 
experience  for  Sauk  He  often  sat  in  the  outer  circle  of 
scribes,  just  outside  the  semicircle  of  members,  and 
Listened  to  the  debates  on  questions  of  great  importance, 
as  well  as  heated  controversies  over  mere  details;  and 
sometimes  he  had  been  called  to  fill  temporarily  the  place 
of  some  absent  member. 

It  was  the  highest  judicial  and  legislative  body  of  the 
Jews;  though  deprived  of  much  authority  without  the 
assent  of  the  representative  of  the  Roman  government, 
it  had  unlimited  power  concerning  rehgious  matters  or 
matters  pertaining  wholly  to  Jewish  law.  While  the 
Sanhedrin  was  always  identified  with  the  Temple  by 
having  the  high  priest  as  its  president,  yet  in  filling 


ACCEPTING  RESPONSIBILITY 


113 

vacancies  many  Pharisees  had  been  selected  because  of 
their  eminence  in  the  study  of  the  law.  At  times  the 
body  had  been  made  up  at  the  direction  of  the  represent¬ 
ative  of  the  ruHng  power  assuming  the  authority  to 
do  so,  but  this  occurred  only  rarely  in  history.  It  was 
a  self-perpetuating  body,  and  among  the  qualifica¬ 
tions  for  membership  in  it  was  that  the  candidate 
should  be  the  head  of  a  family  and  have  children  of  his 
own. 

Saul  had  become  so  interested  in  his  work  that  he 
regretted  the  approach  of  the  time  that  he  must  leave, 
especially  did  he  regret  the  separation  from  his  young 
nephew,  Ahiram,  for  between  them  a  warm  attachment 
had  grown  up.  In  anticipation  of  leaving  by  the  sea  for 
Tarsus,  Saul  had  gathered  quaint  little  presents  for  the 
members  of  his  family,  and  recklessly  he  invested  in  an 
expensive  necklace  of  Eg3q)tian  design  as  a  gift  to 
Tabitha. 

^‘You  are  now  a  man  among  men,”  said  Gamaliel 
to  Saul,  whom  he  had  summoned  to  a  conference.  ^‘A 
strange  mission,  for  which  you  are  fitted,  has  been  placed 
in  my  hands  to  fill.  Flavius  Gratus,  the  proconsul,  who 
is  now  in  the  city,  has  received  word  from  Damascus 
that  certain  Jews  of  this  city  are  stirring  up  an  insurrec¬ 
tion  in  Damascus;  and  the  powers  in  Rome  have  sent 
word  that  he  shall  send  someone  to  whom  the  Jews  will 
listen,  to  quell  the  rebellious  spirit  by  persuasion  before 
it  bursts  into  activity.” 

“But  I  am  too  young  a  man  to  intrust  with  such  an 
important  mission  as  this,”  Saul  urged. 

“I  would  not  send  you,  if  I  did  not  think  your  ability 
and  talents  were  equal  to  the  occasion,”  replied  Gamaliel. 


IN  JERUSALEM 


1 14 

‘‘Tell  me,  Saul,  are  you  in  a  hurry  to  return  to  Tarsus 
to  make  some  maiden  your  wife  ?” 

“Such  thought  did  not  make  me  so  answer,”  Saul 
spoke  frankly,  but  with  a  flush  that  told  his  hopes. 
“I  have  not  the  promise  of  anyone,  but  still  I  doubt  my 
ability  for  this  errand.” 

“Go,”  Gamaliel  said  with  great  earnestness,  “and 
the  success  of  your  efforts  there  will  give  me  the  grounds 
for  urging  your  name  before  the  Sanhedrin,  if  it  so  be  that 
your  eloquence  wins  in  Tarsus.  Besides,  you  should  be 
able  to  compare  the  beauty  of  Damascus  with  your 
home  land.  Let  us  go  to  the  proconsul  and  get  the 
information.  I  have  told  him  that  your  loyalty  to  Rome 
is  unquestioned.” 

“But  I  cannot  enter  the  service  of  Rome,”  Saul 
urged,  as  if  doubting  the  judgment  of  Gamaliel. 

“Do  not  so  consider  it,”  said  Gamaliel.  “The 
expenses  and  sending  you  are  entirely  my  concern. 
I  want  to  save  the  people  from  their  own  folly  and  for 
the  time  that  they  will  become  so  strong  in  faith  that 
the  righteousness  of  their  cause  will  prevail.  This  is 
not  for  Rome.  It  is  for  our  own  people,  and  the  calamity 
must  be  avoided  in  spite  of  our  own  people.” 

“I  will  go,”  said  Saul  with  resolution. 


CHAPTER  XIII 
FACING  OPPOSITION 

In  the  audience  with  Flavius  Gratus,  Saul  learned  that 
it  was  the  governor’s  desire  to  prevent  an  uprising  in 
Damascus  by  the  Jews;  in  fact,  that  he  was  in  strong 
sympathy  with  the  Jews;  that  if  the  trouble  started  in 
Damascus,  it  would  be  largely  due  to  agitators  who  had 
gone  from  Jerusalem,  and,  when  the  matter  would  be 
thoroughly  sifted,  he  feared  the  word  would  come  from 
the  emperor  to  suppress  all  activities  of  Jews  and  deny 
them  the  privileges  now  given  them. 

Saul  went  from  this  interview  to  the  Men’s  Court 
on  the  south  side  of  the  altar  of  sacrifice,  opposite  the 
inclined  approach  to  it.  He  was  alone.  This  place  had 
become  sacred  to  him  as  a  place  of  devotion.  The  fires 
of  the  altar  and  the  officiating  priest  were  in  full  view  in 
front,  and  to  his  left  rose  the  marble  front  of  the  Temple. 
He  felt  that  all  this  magnificence  was  an  effort  to  express 
the  adoration  of  the  individual  man  for  Jehovah.  He 
knew  that  his  days  of  preparation  were  over;  that  he 
was  to  plunge  into  a  mission  that  was  most  difficult; 
and  that  he  was  at  one  of  the  turning-points  in  his  life. 
He  needed  help  beyond  the  counsel  of  man  to  give. 

Prayer  has  been  defined  most  successfully  by  devout 
writers;  it  has  been  prescribed  by  every  ritual  of  religious 
organizations  among  idol  and  Christian  worshipers;  it 
has  been  encouraged  by  teachers  of  morals;  it  has  been 
ridiculed  by  the  cynics  of  every  generation  in  the  centu¬ 
ries  of  man;  it  is  laughed  at  by  the  thoughtless;  and  yet 


ii6 


IN  JERUSALEM 


it  remains  the  sacred  and  exalted  communion  of  the 
souls  of  great  men  and  of  the  great  souls  of  common 
men  with  the  Infinite.  It  may  not  change  the  laws  of 
nature,  it  may  not  turn  aside  disaster,  but  it  fills  the 
heart  of  the  devotee  with  courage  and  gives  him  that 
sense  of  freedom  from  fear  by  which  he  carries  on  to  the 
end  of  his  course. 

In  devotion  Saul  prayed  long  and  earnestly.  He  rose 
from  his  posture  with  his  resolution  confirmed  to  go  on 
and  meet  the  problems  of  his  life  in  confidence.  His 
mind  was  clear  of  any  doubts;  his  soul  had  made  a 
compact  with  the  Supreme  Being;  he  was  above  the 
annoyances  and  criticisms  of  jealous  or  short-sighted 
men;  his  vow  was  with  the  Most  High.  This  was  his 
dedication. 

The  arrangements  were  hastily  made,  including 
letters  of  credit  which  would  enable  Saul  to  secure 
animals  for  transportation.  He  bade  his  friends  and 
relatives  farewell.  He  followed  the  upper  road  and  came 
into  the  Damascus  road  at  the  upper  end  of  the  Sea  of 
Galilee.  There  he  crossed  the  Jordan  and  climbed  the 
hills  to  the  east.  He  left  Caesarea  Philippi  and  Mount 
Hermon  to  his  left.  The  way  was  long  and  tedious, 
taking  him  at  least  eight  days  to  reach  Damascus.  On 
the  high  plateau,  long  before  he  reached  the  city,  he 
could  see  the  course  of  the  river  Abana,  marked  by  the 
growth  of  trees.  The  peaks  of  the  Lebanon  Mountains 
seemed,  through  the  clear  air,  to  march  with  and  hover 
over  him.  Little,  yellow,  round  hills  lay  on  the  right, 
marking  off  the  desert  of  the  east.  In  a  cloudless  sky 
the  sun  swung  on  its  fiery  way,  as  if  it  would  burn  the 
rocks  that  lay  along  the  roadway.  Slowly,  so  slowly 


FACING  OPPOSITION 


117 

that  it  seemed  at  times  there  was  no  progress,  slowly, 
Saul  pushed  on  his  way.  Then  there  shot  up  out  of  the 
distance  the  poplar  trees,  the  palms,  the  housetops,  the 
walls  of  Damascus. 

Coming  into  the  oasis,  he  found  the  waters  of  the 
Abana  distributed  through  many  channels  hidden  by 
fruit  and  almond  trees,  and  a  riot  of  verdure.  The  great 
street  of  columns  stretched  away  into  the  distance, 
suddenly  checked  by  the  desert  that  drank  up  the 
abundance  of  water  sent  rushing  from  the  snowy  Lebanon 
Mountains. 

With  his  introductions  Saul  soon  had  a  meeting  of 
the  leaders  of  the  Jews,  and  told  them  of  the  great  love 
the  people  of  Jerusalem  had  for  their  kindred  scattered 
through  many  cities.  He  told  them  of  his  native  city 
of  Tarsus,  its  great  history,  but  not  as  old  as  Damascus; 
of  the  wanderings  of  the  Hebrews  from  the  days  of 
Abraham  and  how  Abraham  no  doubt  passed  through 
this  very  place  to  the  land  he  sought  to  make  his  own. 
Then  he  reminded  them  of  the  faith  of  Abraham  and  of 
the  promises  Jehovah  had  made  him. 

“Are  the  promises  of  God  to  be  doubted  ?  Have  you 
lost  faith  in  those  promises  ?”  Saul  asked  them. 

“We  are  faithful  to  the  Lord  our  God.  Why  question 
us  ?”  cried  out  Hyrcanus,  one  of  the  leaders  of  the  revolt¬ 
ing  section. 

“For  this  reason:”  said  Saul  with  such  suddenness 
that  replies  were  not  ready,  “We  learn  in  Jerusalem  that 
in  your  madness  you  would  rise  against  the  superior 
power  of  Rome  with  force  of  arms,  when  you  are  so 
puny  that  one  legion  of  the  countless  legions  of  Rome 
would  destroy  you  as  mere  brawlers. 


ii8 


IN  JERUSALEM 


‘‘Aye,  more  than  that,  you  would  bring  your  brethren 
in  Jerusalem  to  degradation;  our  Temple  would  be  taken 
from  us;  our  brethren  in  distant  cities  would  be  made  to 
suffer  for  your  madness;  the  privileges  of  worship  which 
we  have  now  would  be  taken  from  us;  our  captivity 
would  be  worse  than  the  captivity  of  our  fathers.  Have 
you  lost  faith  in  the  promises  made  to  us  ?  We  are  to 
be  a  mighty  nation  only  if  we  obey  God.  Concern 
yourselves  with  your  own  duties;  make  your  lives 
above  reproach;  live  the  law.  Join  with  all  Jews  in 
obedience,  and  thus  we  will  grow  strong  and  the  Lord 
will  make  clear  the  day  of  our  deliverance.  Hush  every 
voice  that  persuades  you  to  follow  after  the  ways  of 
futile  revolution.  Bear  the  burdens,  however  grievous, 
as  those  who  have  the  assurance  of  the  Most  High  God 
that  you  are  his  people.’’ 

Immediately,  the  agitators  began  their  cries  to  put 
him  out  of  the  synagogue,  but  he  stood  before  them  in 
silence,  with  such  dignity  that  none  dared  lay  hand  upon 
him.  After  the  first  tumult  had  subsided,  leading  men, 
merchants,  and  rabbis  took  up  the  argument  on  the 
side  of  Saul.  It  was  late  in  the  night  before  the  argu¬ 
ments  ceased. 

“I  must  not  leave  until  I  am  able  to  send  word  to 
the  revered  Gamaliel  that  all  is  well,”  said  Saul.  “And 
since  he  knows  who  are  the  leaders  among  you,  as  well 
as  those  who  have  come  up  here  to  stir  you  up,  I  can  only 
give  him  the  assurance  which  he  must  have  to  stay  the 
hand  of  Rome  by  having  the  solemn  pledge  of  these  men 
that  they  will  cease  and  will  live  orderly.  That  word 
must  be  evidenced  by  writing,  so  that  if  violated,  Gamal- 


FACING  OPPOSITION 


119 

iel  may  hand  to  the  Roman  authorities  the  names  of 
the  men  responsible.” 

Again  there  was  an  uproar,  but  after  much  discussion 
the  written  pledge  was  given  to  Saul  to  send  to  Gamaliel. 

Saul  took  the  northern  trade  route  over  the  mountains 
and  was  compelled  to  turn  aside  to  Antioch  to  get  animals 
to  carry  him  on  to  Tarsus.  During  his  brief  stay  in 
Antioch  he  visited  the  Gardens  of  Daphne  built  by  Herod, 
and  saw  the  beauty  and  the  madness  of  the  great  pleasure 
resort.  Money  had  not  been  spared  to  make  the  hills 
and  grottoes  rival  the  seductive  sensualism  of  dream  and 
fable.  There  he  found  dissipation  unrestrained  and 
pleasure  expressed  by  depravity.  The  Greek  art  which 
he  admired  was  here  made  coarse  and  common  by  its 
association  with  unbridled  passion.  And  with  all  the 
vulgarity,  Saul  was  touched  with  the  beauty  and  grace 
of  architecture  and  design:  the  vales  had  been  made 
into  bowers  of  blossoms  and  leaves;  the  miniature  lakes 
nestled  at  the  foot  of  hills  covered  with  tamarisk  bending 
to  the  slightest  breeze;  fountains  gushed  out  of  shaded 
rocks;  bronze  figures,  lewd  yet  graceful — the  artistic 
appreciation  of  Saul  eliminated  the  grotesque  and  vulgar. 
The  great  street,  lined  with  columns  as  far  as  the  eye 
could  reach,  was,  after  all,  only  a  way  leading  men  not 
to  think. 

Impatiently  he  made  his  way  around  the  gulf,  a 
distance  of  100  miles.  The  last  day  he  was  so  eager 
that  he  would  not  stop  for  the  usual  noonday  rest,  but 
urged  his  tired  animals  on,  against  the  protest  of  the 
owner.  Late  in  the  evening  he  entered  his  beloved 
Tarsus,  after  an  absence  of  four  years. 


PART  III 

A  Rabbi  in  'Tarsus 


'  '»'  •/ i  ''  ''•' 

\'  V  /':;• 


I 


CHAPTER  XIV 
THE  FAMILY  CIRCLE 


Saul,  the  youth,  had  left  Tarsus  in  the  early  morning; 
Saul,  the  man,  returned  in  the  shadows  of  the  evening. 
He  was  weary,  travel-stained;  the  day  and  hour  of  his 
arrival  were  not  known  to  his  family.  His  entry  into  the 
city  led  him  through  the  upper  part,  unchanged,  and  yet 
strange  to  him.  The  streets,  the  houses,  the  school  of 
Nestor,  the  arena,  the  palace  of  the  governor,  to  his 
eyes,  inflamed  from  the  burning  light  of  the  road,  were 
twisting  and  floating  in  the  grotesquely  changing  pro¬ 
portions  of  a  mirage.  The  booths  were  empty  along  the 
tradesmen’s  streets,  the  doors  were  closed,  the  streets 
were  almost  forsaken.  Through  the  latticed  upper  win¬ 
dows  lights  were  showing.  The  scenes  were  familiar 
to  him,  but  it  was  the  familiarity  of  boyish  memory; 
and  now  the  weary  man  tried  to  adjust  all  the  details 
back  into  their  proper  places,  along  with  his  knowledge 
of  other  cities. 

He  had  seen  Damascus,  the  queen  of  the  desert;  of 
course,  Jerusalem  was  indelibly  fixed  in  his  mind;  he 
had  recently  beheld  the  pomp  and  shame  of  Antioch, 
with  its  pleasure  resort.  He  felt  that  Tarsus  was  just 
as  he  had  left  it,  but  the  thrill  of  its  greatness  was  not 
what  his  fancy,  feeding  on  loyal  memory,  had  anticipated ; 
or,  rather,  other  scenes  now  claimed  a  place  for  com¬ 
parison;  and  still  it  was  his  beloved  Tarsus. 

Dismounting  and  settling  with  his  companion  from 
Antioch,  he  made  his  way  with  a  heavy  heart  through 


123 


124 


A  RABBI  IN  TARSUS 


the  booth  to  the  door  of  the  shop.  The  years  had 
slipped  away  from  him  in  the  short  time  of  his  heavi¬ 
ness  of  spirit.  He  was  once  more  the  lad  waiting 
for  the  door  to  open.  Repeated  knocking  brought 
Ben  Hanan,  bearing  a  lamp,  to  open  the  door.  Seeing 
it  was  Saul,  he  dropped  the  lamp  and  flung  his  arms 
around  his  son,  embracing  him  and  kissing  his  cheek. 
At  the  entrance  to  the  living-apartments  the  family 
crowded  about  him.  His  mother,  Deborah,  now  reached 
up  to  put  her  arms  about  him,  and  then  she  laughed  and 
cried  and  fondly  stroked  his  young  beard.  David, ^  a 
slender  lad,  tall  for  his  age,  waited  in  some  hesitation, 
then  greeted  Saul.  He  paused  only  a  moment  and  ran 
to  tell  his  chum,  Abiathar,  the  son  of  Eleazar,  that  Saul, 
his  brother,  had  returned.  A  shy  little  girl  whom  Saul 
could  not  recognize  waited  to  be  told  that  this  was  the 
elder  brother  whom  she  could  not  remember. 

‘‘You  should  see  him!”  David  was  saying  to  Abiathar, 
his  friend.  “He  has  such  a  fine  beard.  I  don’t  believe 
he  will  ever  play  ball  with  us  any  more.” 

“I  had  a  dream  about  him,”  said  Tabitha,  who  had 
been  listening  to  David.  “I  awakened  laughing  at  the 
funny  beard  he  had.” 

“The  oddest  thing  is  that  girls  always  dream  about 
things  they  want,”  said  Abiathar,  “or  they  tell  them  as 
dreams.” 

“You  are  a  barking  puppy,”  Tabitha  blushed,  “and 
I’ll  have  father  teach  you  a  lesson.”  Turning  to  David, 
she  asked,  “Did  he  come  up  directly  from  Jerusalem?” 

“I  didn’t  wait  to  find  out,”  David  replied,  “but  he 
is  so  sunburned  and  dusty  that  he  might  have  come 
back  by  way  of  Egypt.” 


THE  FAMILY  CIRCLE 


125 


‘‘But  Egypt  is  to  the  south.  He  would  have  had  to 
travel  over  the  world  to  come  home  that  way,”  said 
Tabitha. 

“He  looks  as  if  he  had,”  said  David.  “Come  over 
and  see  him  for  yourself.” 

“Not  so,”  said  Tabitha,  “until  he  has  rested,  and 
then  should  he  want  us  to  come,  he  will  let  us  know.” 

“Now  you  can  go  to  sleep,”  said  Abiathar,  teasingly, 
“and  perhaps  you  can  dream  that  he  came  here  right 
away.” 

Tabitha  gave  Abiathar  a  stinging  slap  for  reply. 

Saul  was  induced  by  his  gentle  mother  to  remove  his 
dusty  clothes,  bathe,  and  eat.  Then  he  was  willing  to 
talk  far  into  the  night  with  her,  but,  as  if  he  were  the 
lad  who  only  yesterday  had  left  Tarsus,  she  compelled 
him  to  go  to  sleep,  with  the  admonition  that  in  the 
morning  and  in  the  days  to  come  she  would  have  him 
tell  over  and  over  his  hfe  in  Jerusalem. 

Conversation  was  an  art  in  those  days.  A  person 
told  his  tale  to  inform  and  entertain  his  hearers.  The 
thread  of  the  story  was  not  broken  with  harsh  comments. 
Every  traveler  was  an  observer  on  his  own  initiative. 
Those  who  stayed  at  home  had  news  equally  important 
to  the  one  who  returned.  Conversation  was  not  a  series 
of  trivial  hop-skipping  of  superficial  comments,  inverted, 
subverted,  and  diverting  expressions.  It  was  an  inter¬ 
change  of  facts,  impressions,  and  well-grounded  opinions. 

Four  years  of  absence  gave  Saul  much  anxiety  to 
accommodate  himself  as  a  unit  in  the  smooth-running 
home  Hfe.  His  next  day  was  devoted  to  his  mother. 
She  not  only  had  an  interest  in  what  he  had  done  but 
all  the  Httle  details  of  Martha’s  home  life  were  as 


126 


A  RABBI  IN  TARSUS 


entrancing  to  her  as  if  she  were  a  child  listening  to  fairy 
stories. 

Above  all,  she  made  Saul  repeat  all  the  httle  incidents 
in  the  life  of  Ahiram,  Martha’s  youngest  son.  The 
mother  gloried  in  praising  Adonijah,  whom  Miriam  had 
married;  she  told  of  the  home  and  the  fine  business 
which  Adonijah  had  in  Salamis,  and  that  some  day 
they  would  go  over  to  C3T)rus  and  visit  them  in  their 
home. 

In  the  evening  the  whole  family  gathered  in  the 
living-room,  resting  on  the  soft  cushions,  and  spent  -  a 
long  time  gathering  up  the  missing  links  of  the  years. 
In  a  lull  in  the  conversation,  Saul  inquired  if  Eleazar  and 
his  family  would  come  in  during  the  evening. 

‘‘They  would  not  intrude  on  our  first  night  with  you, 
my  son,”  said  Ben  Hanan,  with  a  meaning  look  at  his 
wife.  “Neither  will  Ben  Arza  come,  for  he  well  under¬ 
stands  that  your  first  night  is  sacred  to  our  family  confer¬ 
ences.  They  know  and  observe  the  right  of  a  family  to 
its  own  Ufe.” 

“Perhaps  my  anxiety  to  see  everyone  as  soon  as 
possible  is  too  great,”  said  Saul.  “I  do  not  want  you 
to  feel  that  I  am  at  all  weary  of  dear  Httle  mother.” 
He  laid  his  head  in  her  lap. 

Deborah  smoothed  his  hair  as  caressingly  as  if  he 
were  the  small  boy  of  years  long  ago.  The  talk  ranged 
from  the  details  of  his  school  life  and  service  in  the 
Sanhedrin  to  the  sights  of  Damascus  and  in  the  vicinity 
of  Antioch.  Ben  Hanan  required  Saul  to  repeat  his 
experience  in  Damascus  and  was  anxious  to  know  that 
Saul  had  taken  every  precaution  in  sending  his  report 
to  GamaHel.  The  hour  was  late. 


THE  FAMILY  CIRCLE 


127 


“I  have  thought  matters  over/’  said  Ben  Hanan,  in 
a  new  tone  which  aroused  interest.  ‘‘I  find  that  the 
business  is  growing.  It  is  the  business  of  this  family, 
now  that  grandfather  is  gone.  He  enjoined  me  to  make 
such  preparations  as  I  now  propose;  in  fact,  have  made, 
in  part.  Saul  will  have  to  give  much  of  his  time  to  our 
people,  for  they  need  him,  and  they  expect  it  of  him 
because  of  his  preparation.  While  he  cannot  give  all 
his  time  to  the  business,  what  time  he  can  give  will 
relieve  me.  David,  do  you  want  to  grow  into  the 
business  ?” 

certainly  do,”  said  David. 

‘‘Then,  Saul,  the  time  may  come  when  you  may  need 
rooms  for  your  own  use.”  Ben  Hanan’s  voice  was 
^  softer  than  it  had  been.  “When  you  do,  remember 
that  I  have  purchased  a  parcel  of  land  adjoining  our 
home,  and  have  set  aside  a  fund  for  you  to  construct 
your  building,  of  course  to  be  charged  against  your  final 
interests  in  the  business.  Your  first  duty  is  to  teach 
as  much  as  possible.  Ben  Arza  wants  your  help.  If 
the  terms  suit  you,  then  you  will  know  how  to  order  your 
affairs,  unless  it  be  that  your  experience  in  Damascus 
lures  you  back  to  Jerusalem.” 

“My  life  lies  here  in  Tarsus,  and  my  debt  to  you 
cannot  be  paid  except  in  the  service  that  will  please  you.” 
Saul  spoke  as  if  it  were  a  vow. 

“I  am  glad  to  hear  you  say  so,”  said  Ben  Hanan, 
“for  in  my  talk  with  Ben  Arza  today  he  told  me  that  he 
would  like,  if  we  were  willing,  to  read  your  credentials 
to  the  congregation  next  Sabbath,  and  to  secure  the 
consent  of  the  council  of  the  synagogue  to  confirm  you 
as  rabbi.  I  thought  it  good.” 


128 


A  RABBI  IN  TARSUS 


‘‘That  is  so  quickly  done,  I  fear  it  may  be  offensive 
to  some  of  our  people,’’  said  Saul. 

“Our  people  have  patiently  waited  four  years  for 
this  event,”  said  Ben  Hanan. 

Saul  sprang  up  and  disappeared  for  a  brief  space  of 
time.  When  he  came  back  he  was  carrying  a  package 
in  his  girdle.  He  helped  his  mother  to  rise.  He  unloosed 
the  package  and  the  rich  folds  of  a  silk  veil,  mounted  on 
a  headdress,  rippled  down  almost  to  the  floor. 

“I  did  not  intend  to  bring  this  out  until  the  beginning 
of  the  Sabbath,”  Saul  said,  as  he  put  the  veil  on  his 
mother’s  head,  “but  I  want  little  mother  to  know  that 
she  has  as  handsome  a  veil  as  anyone,  when  Sabbath 
comes.”  ^ 

The  joy  of  the  mother  amply  repaid  Saul,  and  the 
admiration  of  the  rest  of  the  family  was  so  great  that  she 
scolded  them  for  trying  to  make  her  vain. 

They  did  not  neglect  the  custom  of  their  times,  even 
at  that  late  hour.  There  was  a  slight  pause,  and  Ben 
Hanan  asked  Saul  to  lead  in  the  prayer  of  the  evening. 
The  influence  of  the  custom  was  to  make  the  family 
loyal  to  one  another,  to  give  them  a  sense  of  consecra¬ 
tion  and  a  feehng  that  they  were  safeguarded  in  the 
struggles  and  uncertainties  of  hfe.  In  these  devotions 
there  was  no  feeling  of  compulsion,  no  humiHation;  but 
in  pride  and  joy,  from  the  eldest  to  the  youngest,  there 
was  a  feehng  that  the  prayer  was  a  privilege.  At  least, 
its  results  could  be  seen  in  the  joy  of  the  home  hfe,  and 
in  the  confidence  with  which  every  member  went  to  his 
tasks,  as  well  as  the  patience  with  which  he  met  adversity. 

Saul  recited  one  of  the  prayers  selected  for  the  evening 


service : 


THE  FAMILY  CIRCLE 


129 


“O  Lord,  Our  God!  Cause  us  to  lie  down  in  peace,  and  raise 
us  up  again  to  life!  O,  Our  King!  Spread  over  us  the  tabernacle 
of  Thy  peace;  strengthen  us  before  Thee  in  Thy  good  counsel,  and 
deliver  us  for  Thy  name’s  sake.  Be  Thou  for  protection  round 
about  us;  keep  far  from  us  the  enemy,  the  pestilence,  the  sword, 
famine  and  affliction.  Keep  Satan  from  before  and  from  behind 
us,  and  hide  us  in  the  shadow  of  Thy  wings,  for  Thou  art  a  God 
who  helpest  and  deliverest  us;  and  Thou,  O  God,  art  a  gracious 
and  merciful  King.  Keep  Thou  our  going  out  and  our  coming  in, 
for  life  and  for  peace,  from  henceforth  and  forever!” 

^^Eleazar  and  his  family  will  be  over  tomorrow  even¬ 
ing  with  us,”  softly  spoke  Deborah  to  Saul  as  they  parted 
for  the  night. 


CHAPTER  XV 
WOOING  TABITHA 


In  the  early  morning  Saul  went  into  the  workroom, 
where  David  sat  at  the  loom.  A  stranger  was  sewing 
the  tent-cloth. 

“This  is  a  heavy  task,”  said  David,  “but  father  says 
you  learned  it  and  that  I  must.” 

“I  am  glad  that  I  was  kept  at  it,”  said  Saul,  as  he 
took  a  seat  by  the  side  of  David  and  showed  him  how 
to  weave  the  tent-cloth  water  tight. 

“You  have  not  forgotten  how  to  do  it,  in  all  these 
years,”  David  said  in  admiration. 

“I  kept  in  practice  while  living  with  Ben  Gerber,” 
said  Saul.  “Who  gives  you  your  lessons  in  the  Law?” 

“Mother  teaches  me  some,  and  after  the  morning 
hour  I  go  to  school  to  Ben  Arza.  It  is  well  they  did  not 
try  to  make  a  rabbi  out  of  me,  for  I  do  not  take  to  so 
much  learning.  You  are  to  give  me  lessons,  and  that 
will  be  hard  on  both  of  us.” 

Saul  smiled  and  went  over  to  the  place  on  the  dais 
where  the  grandfather  used  to  sit.  He  saw  that  the 
same  cushions  were  there,  dusted  and  well-kept.  The 
workman  told  him  that  no  one  was  permitted  to  sit  there. 
Saul,  gently  lifting  the  largest  cushion,  saw  the  slab  his 
grandfather  had  raised.  He  lifted  it.  In  the  cavity 
lay  the  roll  he  had  seen  before.  Reverently  he  put 
things  back  in  place  and  went  to  the  front  booth,  where 
his  father  was  busy  with  customers.  Saul  lingered  until 
there  was  no  one  in  the  booth  save  his  father. 

130 


WOOING  TABITHA 


131 

‘‘I  thought  I  could  spend  some  time  learning  your 
ways  of  business,”  said  Saul. 

“It  would  be  better  for  you  to  visit  Ben  Arza  and 
Nestor  and  your  old  athletic  director.  You  ought  to 
get  yourself  thoroughly  back  into  Tarsus,  my  son,  before 
you  take  up  a  business  that  has  run  for  so  many  years  in 
a  certain  way  that  our  customers  would  leave  us,  if  there 
were  any  change.  I  want  you  to  visit  until  after  the 
Sabbath,  for  a  man  cannot  pick  himself  up  from  Jeru¬ 
salem  and  in  a  day  replace  himself  in  Tarsus  after  years 
of  absence.” 

Saul  went  to  the  synagogue  and  found  that  the  years 
were  telling  on  Ben  Arza,  but  the  joy  of  the  old  rabbi  at 
meeting  with  Saul  was  so  great  that  he  kept  repeating: 

“So  your  first  visit  out  of  the  house  was  to  see  me  ?” 

Saul  noticed  that  the  rabbi  tactfully  refrained  from 
discussing  any  of  the  manifold  questions  which  he 
remembered  he  had  loved  to  discuss  with  Azel,  but  told 
him  about  the  members  of  his  congregation. 

“You  will  want  to  know  what  my  understanding  of 
the  Law  is,”  said  Saul. 

“Have  you  consented  to  the  plan  your  father 
requested  ?” 

“Yes,  but  still  you  always  examined  me  carefully.” 

“That  was  before  you  went  to  Gamaliel.  Now  it  is 
enough  to  know  that  Gamaliel  has  commended  you. 
I  think  it  would  be  wise  for  you  to  meet  your  old  friend, 
Nestor.  I  think  much  of  him  and  he  asks  about  you.” 

This  was  a  new  note  in  Ben  Arza’s  life.  He  had 
made  friends  with  a  Gentile.  With  curiosity  as  to  the 
attitude  of  Nestor,  Saul  went  to  the  old  hall,  where  he 
had  often  listened  to  the  lectures,  and  found  Nestor 


132 


A  RABBI  IN  TARSUS 


before  a  class.  Saul  paused  and  looked  about  the  room, 
and  was  struck  with  the  beauty  of  the  surroundings. 
While  he  had  seen  more  grandeur  in  buildings,  the  riot 
of  statuary  in  Antioch,  yet  the  quiet  beauty  of  the  hall 
called  back  the  descriptions  by  Nestor  of  the  Parthenon, 
and  the  lesson  that  he  sought  to  give  of  simplicity  in 
expression.  Nestor  stopped  his  lecture  and  made  his 
way  to  Saul. 

would  not  have  known  you,”  said  Nestor,  ‘‘unless 
my  friend  Ben  Arza  had  told  me  that  you  had  returned. 
Come,  let  me  present  you  to  my  class.” 

“I  am  surprised  that  you  and  Ben  Arza  are  such 
friends.” 

“Not  more  than  we  are,”  said  Nestor,  smiling.  “We 
happened  to  meet  in  my  inquiries  about  you;  and  we 
found  that  each  of  us  has  an  honest  desire  to  know  God, 
he  coming  from  Sinai  and  I  from  Olympus.” 

Nestor  led  Saul  before  the  class  and  introduced  him 
as  a  young  Hebrew  who  had  once  been  in  the  school,  and 
since  had  been  a  student  under  the  greatest  Hebrew 
teacher,  Gamaliel.  Saul  responded  in  general  terms, 
telling  of  his  pleasure  and  advantage  in  having  been 
under  Nestor;  of  the  great  lessons  he  had  learned  from 
him  of  how  to  be  a  gentleman;  he  said  the  greatest  lesson 
learned  under  him  was  to  be  open-minded  and  tolerant. 

From  the  hall  Saul  went  to  the  gymnasium  to  meet 
the  director,  who  had  no  warning  of  his  visit. 

“Jew  that  you  are,”  said  the  director,  “yet  I  know 
that  you  have  been  under  me.  Do  not  tell  me  your 
name.  That  beard  puzzles  me.  You  were  a  lad — ^lay 
off  that  long  outer  coat.  Now  I  know  you.  Yes,  there 
is  that  tiny  scar  on  your  forehead.  Saul — ^aye,  Grotius 


WOOING  TABITHA 


133 


has  come  in.’  And  you  have  grown.  Let  me  feel  those 
muscles.  Fine,  but  not  in  training.  You  should  keep 
up  some  training,  for  you  have  wonderful  development 
that  should  not  be  allowed  to  grow  flabby.” 

‘‘I  have  come  back  to  live  in  Tarsus,  and  perhaps  I’ll 
come  to  the  gymnasium  once  in  a  while.” 

“Do  so  freely,”  said  the  director.  “I  will  keep  you 
in  condition  till  you  have  come  to  your  solid  manhood.” 

“Even  now  I  would  like  to  swim  in  the  pool  once 
more.” 

“I  was  about  to  take  a  plunge  myself,”  said  the 
director.  “Join  me.” 

After  swimming  in  the  pool  Saul  felt  refreshed  and 
that  he  was  more  nearly  able  to  fit  in  the  years  of  absence 
as  part  of  his  life  in  Tarsus.  He  remembered  the  quay 
where  he  used  to  loiter,  and  he  went  down  the  street 
which  had  been  decorated  by  Antony  at  the  reception  of 
Cleopatra.  Many  of  the  columns  were  still  standing, 
but  no  effort  was  made  to  keep  the  street  in  repair. 

At  the  wharf  were  camels  and  donkeys,  men  and 
goods,  a  small  boat,  slaves,  and  the  hubbub  of  merchants 
bartering,  as  if  he  had  been  absent  only  a  day.  To  add 
to  the  impression  of  the  brief  passage  of  time,  a  small 
company  of  Roman  soldiers  rode  up  to  the  wharf,  dusty 
from  travel,  and  unloaded  their  small  baggage;  the  soldier 
in  charge  of  the  company  directing  his  men  to  get  aboard 
the  boat. 

On  his  way  back  from  the  wharf  he  called  to  see  his 
old  friend,  the  Sadducee  boy,  but  he  had  gone  to  Ephesus. 
He  soon  became  accustomed  to  the  veiled  women  on  the 
streets,  for  some  were  veiled  in  Jerusalem,  and  he  remem¬ 
bered  that  all  honorable  women  wore  veils  in  Tarsus. 


134 


A  RABBI  IN  TARSUS 


Late  in  the  afternoon  he  returned  home;  it  had  been  a 
wonderful  day  to  him,  but  he  keenly  anticipated  the 
visit  of  Eleazar  and  family  that  night.  He  was  more 
worried  about  how  to  address  Tabitha,  what  she  would 
be,  what  would  be  her  attitude  toward  him,  than  he 
had  been  about  any  of  his  experiences  of  the  day. 

His  mother  had  laid  out  his  finest  robe,  cleaned  and 
white;  she  had  shaped  his  headdress  so  that  he  could 
wear  it;  and  he  knew  from  her  absence  that  she  was 
busy  preparing  an  extra  meal  for  the  evening.  His 
doubts  were  largely  removed  as  he  looked  at  his  finest 
robe,  for  certainly  Tabitha  would  be  impressed  with  his 
appearance,  and  she  would  be,  like  all  the  others,  glad 
to  welcome  him  back. 

The  meal  was  spread,  the  cushions  were  arranged 
for  all  to  recHne  while  they  ate.  He  was  so  impatient 
that  he  feared  the  guests  would  not  come.  In  due  season 
his  father  led  the  guests  in.  Saul  was  greeted  warmly 
by  Eleazar  and  his  wife,  but  Tabitha  hung  back  timidly 
and  softly  spoke  her  welcome,  without  lifting  her  veil 
as  her  mother  had  done.  The  young  girl  was  just  budding 
into  womanhood,  the  marriageable  age,  according  to 
custom.  She  had  grown  nearly  as  tall  as  Saul;  and, 
notwithstanding  her  veil  covered  the  lower  part  of  her 
face  and  shoulders,  it  could  be  seen  that  she  had  a  well- 
rounded  form.  She  moved  with  grace  and  had  the  rare 
charm  of  true  modesty.  Saul  was  disappointed  that  he 
could  not  see  her  face,  since  she  would  not  remove  her 
veil,  even  though  others  had  done  so,  in  the  sanctity  of 
the  family  circle.  Even  she  contrived  to  be  so  placed 
at  the  meal  that  her  mother  shielded  her  from  the  eyes 
of  Saul,  when  her  veil  was  thrown  back  while  eating.  She 


WOOING  TABITHA 


135 


evaded  entering  into  the  table  talk,  more  than  to  give 
the  shortest  and  most  direct  answers  to  any  questions. 
She  avoided  any  extended  replies  to  Saul’s  references  to 
their  life  before  he  left  the  city. 

Saul  had  tried  desperately  to  engage  Tabitha  in 
conversation  after  all  had  dined.  Finally,  taking  from 
his  girdle  the  napkin  which  she  had  given  him  when  he 
left,  he  unfolded  it,  saying  to  her: 

‘‘See,  I  have  always  had  a  sample  of  your  needle¬ 
work  with  me.” 

“It  was  not  well  done,”  she  replied,  very  evenly,  “for 
it  was  my  earliest  work.” 

“I  wish  I  might  see  your  last  work,”  said  Saul  eagerly. 

“It  is  hardly  proper  that  an  unmarried  girl  should 
display  her  handiwork,”  she  said  with  averted  eyes, 
“after  she  becomes  a  woman,  for  then  she  regards  it 
differently.  It  is  more  sacred  than  when  she  was  a 
child.” 

In  that  simple  statement,  more  by  the  tone  than  by 
the  words,  it  was  revealed  to  Saul  that  Tabitha  was  now 
a  woman,  and  he  knew  that  she  had  to  be  won  as  a 
woman.  Her  modesty  was  a  labyrinthine  fence  about 
her,  which  could  not  be  rudely  broken  down;  but  it  was 
plain  that  she  wished  to  be  approached  along  the  wind¬ 
ing  way,  without  disclosing  too  quickly  the  entrance  to 
the  path  that  led  to  her  guarded  self .  All  his  sustaining 
vanity  left  him.  Resentfully  he  thought  that  he  would 
pursue  the  subject  no  farther;  but  there  surged  back  on 
him  the  sweet  tenderness  of  her;  the  dignity  and  caution 
with  which  she  had  urged  her  rights;  the  delicacy  with 
which  she  had  let  him  understand  that  a  maiden  counted 
it  a  thing  of  value  to  be  won;  and  perhaps,  after  alb 


136 


A  RABBI  IN  TARSUS 


she  would  hesitate  to  give  him  the  favorable  answer. 
His  pride  was  hurt.  The  necklace  he  had  brought  from 
Jerusalem  could  rest  undisturbed. 

Thoughts  of  the  first  Sabbath  after  his  return  home 
gave  him  more  anxiety  than  had  any  of  the  preceding 
events  in  his  life.  While  he  expected  favorable  results, 
yet  he  felt  unduly  agitated.  The  synagogue  was 
crowded.  Even  on  the  side  set  off  by  a  screen  for  the 
women,  the  space  was  crowded.  The  people  stood. 
A  platform  extended  a  considerable  distance  from  the 
back  end  toward  the  front  across  the  room.  On  this  plat¬ 
form  were  the  only  benches  in  the  synagogue,  and  on 
these  benches,  facing  the  audience,  were  seated  the  mem¬ 
bers  of  the  local  Sanhedrin  of  Tarsus,  including  the 
council  of  the  synagogue. 

Near  the  front  of  the  platform  was  the  reading  stand 
or  pulpit  on  which  was  placed  the  roll  of  the  Law,  on 
two  rollers;  by  winding  the  long  belt  or  strip  onto  the 
right-hand  roller  and  off  the  left-hand  roller,  the  reader 
could  read  the  Hebrew  text — ^this  being  a  synagogue  of 
strict  Pharisees  the  Greek  text  was  not  used.  At  the 
back  end  of  the  bema,  or  platform,  was  a  curtain,  in 
imitation  of  the  Temple,  concealing  from  view  the 
reproduction  of  the  ark  of  the  covenant  and  rolls  of  the 
Law  and  of  the  Prophets. 

Ben  Arza  announced  that  Saul  would  read  the  lessons 
for  the  day,  and  would  not  need  any  interpreter,  for 
usually  an  interpreter  was  needed  to  translate  the 
Hebrew  into  Aramaic,  the  spoken  language  of  the  Jews. 
Saul  could  not  resist  trying  to  catch  a  glimpse  of  Tabitha 
through  the  screen,  but  their  veils  added  to  the  screen’s 
concealment  of  the  women.  The  duties  assigned  to  Saul 


WOOING  TABITHA 


137 


carried  also  the  pronouncing  of  the  benedictions,  the 
shema,  or  morning  prayer,  the  benediction  at  the  close 
of  the  reading,  and  the  translation.  He  had  gone 
through  with  this  program  many  times  before,  and  it 
was  easy  enough  for  him  to  follow  it,  almost  mechanically. 

‘^Say  what  is  in  your  mind,”  said  Ben  Arza,  when 
Saul  had  finished.  While  Saul  knew  that,  according  to 
custom,  he  was  expected  to  deliver  an  address,  in  the 
nature  of  an  account  of  his  time  spent  in  the  Holy  City, 
yet  he  hoped  to  escape  it,  for  he  thought  of  himself  as  a 
youth  in  the  congregation. 

He  arose  to  acknowledge  the  request  from  Ben  Arza 
and  when  he  turned  to  the  audience  the  faces  blended 
into  a  blurred  mass.  He  even  fancied  that  through  the 
lattice  he  could  see  a  pair  of  big  brown  eyes  smihng  at 
him  over  a  veil.  His  hands  were  cold,  his  lips  were  dry, 
and  he  felt  the  hot  blood  rush  to  his  face.  He  stepped 
forward  and  took  the  chair  provided  for  the  one  who  gave 
the  address,  although  the  reader  stood  when  reading. 
He  began  very  humbly,  hesitatingly  referring  to  his  early 
days  in  Tarsus,  and  how  it  had  been  on  his  mind  all  the 
time  to  return  and  take  up  his  life  among  his  own  people. 

The  spell  was  broken  and,  his  nervous  temperament 
now  controlled,  he  was  absorbed  in  the  telling  of  his 
story,  so  that  his  words  shot  forth  as  if  urged  by  a 
torrent  of  feeling. 

In  his  energy  he  forgot  the  time  and  place  and  arose, 
after  the  manner  in  the  Greek  school,  pouring  out  his 
soul  in  the  great  thought  that  the  time  was  now  at  hand 
for  every  effort  to  bring  men  to  observance  of  the  law 
and  to  make  the  sacrifices  of  repentance.  Then  it  came 
to  him  that  he  was  standing;  but,  without  any  embarrass- 


138 


A  RABBI  IN  TARSUS 


ment,  he  continued  his  talk  while  taking  his  seat.  He 
had  spread  the  spell  of  his  personality  over  the  people, 
and  they  murmured  in  approval  when  he  had  finished. 

At  the  close  of  Saul’s  talk,  Ben  Arza  came  forward 
and  announced  that  the  president  of  the  council  had  a 
word  to  say. 

‘‘My  word  is  short,  and  very  properly  Ben  Arza 
might  have  said  it  himself,”  said  the  president.  “It  is 
this:  We  have  asked  Ben  Arza  to  instal  Saul  as  an 
associate  rabbi  of  this  synagogue,  with  the  hearty 
approval  of  Ben  Arza.  If  anyone  has  aught  to  say 
against  it,  let  him  speak.” 

“Since  no  one  speaks,  we  will  take  it  that  the  congre¬ 
gation  approves,”  the  president  continued,  after  a  pause 
for  an  objection.  “Saul,  kneel,  and  Ben  Arza  will 
pronounce  the  benediction.” 

The  simple  ceremony  was  soon  performed,  for  it  was 
merely  a  confirmation  by  the  members  of  the  synagogue 
of  the  more  elaborate  examinations  and  ceremony 
through  which  Saul  had  passed  in  Jerusalem. 

The  following  week  Saul  plunged  into  the  details  of 
business.  He  found  that  his  father  had  been  so  scrupu¬ 
lous  in  keeping  accounts  that  he  knew  to  whom  he  had 
sold  goods  for  many  years,  the  prices  and  quality;  that 
he  had  a  perfect  knowledge  of  almost  the  exact  time  that 
a  customer  would  return  from  the  distant  mountains  or 
from  the  desert  for  a  duplicate  order.  He  had  com¬ 
plete  memoranda  of  sources  of  supplies  and  prices,  and 
of  those  who  exchanged  suppHes  for  the  manufactured 
goods.  Thus  began  Saul’s  schooling  in  business  affairs. 
On  the  day  of  the  middle  of  the  week  Ben  Hanan  told 


WOOING  TABITHA 


139 


Saul  to  prepare  himself  early  in  the  evening  to  sup  with 
Eleazar. 

“Do  you  think,  father,”  said  Saul  with  the  utmost 
frankness,  “that  I  may  pursue  Tabitha  with  justice  to 
her  and  to  myself  ?” 

“A  maiden  must  be  won,”  said  the  father,  “before 
the  business  of  talking  about  settlements  is  taken  up. 
Your  own  heart  must  guide  you;  and  you  will  scarcely 
think  her  worthy  in  after-years,  if  you  have  not  the 
desire  so  strong  to  make  her  your  wife  that  you  can  win 
her  to  your  way  of  thinking.” 

In  Eleazar’s  house  that  evening,  Tabitha  was  busy 
serving  the  meal.  She  had  tied  the  long,  loose  sleeves 
of  her  outer  dress  back  of  her  shoulders,  and  the  tight 
sleeves  of  her  under  garment  were  rolled  up  out  of  the 
way,  disclosing  a  beautiful,  rounded  arm.  She  had  laid 
aside  her  veil.  Her  large,  luminous,  brown  eyes  glowed 
above  her  olive-hued,  oval  face.  The  warm  blood  tinted 
her  skin  and  made  red  her  Hps,  of  delicate  shape.  Saul’s 
eyes  followed  her  as  if  in  hunger  they  were  feasting.  She 
was  a  brighter  vision  than  his  fancy  had  painted. 
Womanhood  was  glorified  in  her.  She  went  about  her 
tasks  in  a  quiet  way,  apparently  oblivious  to  the  burning 
eyes  with  which  Saul  watched  her  every  movement. 

Eleazar  proposed  that  all  should  go  up  to  the  house¬ 
top  to  enjoy  the  cool  breezes  of  the  evening  after  the 
meal  had  been  finished  and  the  dining  mat  had  been 
cleaned.  Saul  lingered  to  the  last,  helping  his  mother 
up  the  narrow  stairway.  At  the  top  he  looked  back  to 
see  if  Tabitha  had  come.  His  mother  said  she  wished 
he  would  go  back  and  get  her  veil,  as  she  feared  that 


140 


A  RABBI  IN  TARSUS 


later  the  night  air  would  be  cool,  but  that  he  need  not 
hurry. 

Tabitha  was  sitting  on  a  dais  with  some  of  her  work, 
as  if  she  intended  to  make  an  evening  of  it  by  the  lamp. 

“I  thought  you  would  come  with  us,”  said  Saul,  as 
he  took  his  mother’s  veil  from  a  small  table. 

‘‘I  could  not  see  to  work  up  there,  and,  besides,  they 
would  want  you  to  tell  them  again  and  again  about  your 
wonderful  Gamaliel,”  she  said,  in  even  tones. 

^‘Do  you  not  Hke  him?”  Saul  was  sitting  down 
beside  her  while  he  spoke.  ^ - 

‘‘Well  enough,”  replied  Tabitha,  “but  a  woman  has' 
many  things  to  think  of  besides  the  dividing  of  the  word.” 

“Let  me  speak  quickly,  lest  someone  interrupt  us.” 
Saul’s  words  came  with  the  stress  of  his  feehng.  “You 
know,  Tabitha,  I  carried  the  napkin  all  these  years, 
because  I  thought  of  you.  A  little  thing,  but  I  come 
back  to  win  the  hand  that  made  it!” 

“A  woman  wants  something  more  than  honors,  laws, 
and  discussions,”  Tabitha  spoke  as  she  stitched  precisely. 

“That  is  right,  and  a  man  needs  something  more 
than  a  knowledge  of  all  learning  and  wisdom  to  fill  his 
life  out  and  make  hving  a  joy.”  Saul’s  tense  voice  was 
the  note  of  love.  “All  that  is  for  you  and,  more,  I  want 
my  life  to  be  for  you.” 

“Until  you  said  in  the  synagogue  that  you  had  come 
back  to  live  here,”  her  voice  was  now  vibrant,  “I  did 
not  think  you  had  enough  love  to  hold  the  life  of  a  woman 
in  your  keeping;  but  when  I  saw  how  afraid  you  were  to 
go  on  with  your  talk  at  the  request  of  Ben  Arza,  I  was 
ashamed  lest  my  eyes  would  disclose  how  my  heart 
warmed  to  you.” 


WOOING  TABITHA 


141 

“I  did  see  your  eyes  through  the  screen,  through  your 
veil;  those  wonderful  eyes  of  yours,  limpid  as  the  depths 
of  the  sea,  bright  as  the  stars  of  night.”  He  was  sing¬ 
ing  the  song  of  his  passion  for  her.  “Here,  see!”  He 
drew  from  his  girdle  the  necklace.  “I  loved  you  when 
away  and  brought  this  to  seal  our  betrothal.” 

She  bowed  her  beautiful  head  of  shining  black  hair 
toward  him  to  receive  it  about  her  neck.  Trembling 
with  emotion,  he  slipped  it  over  her  head.  She  dropped 
her  work  and  leaned  over  on  his  shoulder.  A  new  world 
had  been  created  for  them,  or,  rather,  the  old  world  had 
been  revealed  to  their  exalted  vision  as  a  place  of 
wondrous  beauty.  Thoughts  flashed  from  soul  to  soul. 

“Let  us  go  up  to  the  roof,”  she  said  shyly.  “I  do 
not  think  it  is  too  dark  for  them  to  see  your  present, 
and  to  hear  what  we  have  to  tell  them.” 


CHAPTER  XVI 
A  LOVER-HUSBAND 

The  questions  of  marriage  settlements  were  adjusted 
by  the  parents  of  Saul  and  Tabitha,  so  that  she  had  a 
fund  that  would,  if  need  arose,  be  hers,  separate  from 
the  claims  of  her  husband;  but  the  management  of  it 
was  given  to  Saul,  as  was  the  custom.  The  banns  were 
announced  in  the  synagogue  many  days  before  the  time 
of  the  wedding.  Every  step  in  a  marriage  was  designed 
to  make  the  union  solemnly  binding.  While  divorce, 
as  a  mere  procedure,  was  easy  and  involved  little  detail, 
yet  back  of  the  marriage  was  such  strong  sentiment  of 
the  people  upholding  it  that  rarely  did  anyone  resort 
to  divorce,  having  the  fear  of  public  opinion  before 
him.  By  the  publicity  given  to  the  banns  there  was 
an  assurance  that  no  scandal,  no  concealment,  no 
secret  living  would  be  allowed  to  interfere  with  a  proper 
union. 

The  marriage  ceremony  of  Saul  and  Tabitha  followed 
in  due  course.  It  involved  a  procession  to  the  synagogue 
under  the  canopy  borne  by  four  attendants,  the  trumpets 
preceding,  the  bearer  of  palm  and  myrtle  branches  leading 
the  way,  and  attendants  scattering  wheat  and  some¬ 
times  small  coins,  in  token  of  plenty.  Standing  before 
the  altar  and  under  the  canopy,  the  marriage  contract 
was  read  to  the  bride  and  groom;  the  scarf  was  spread 
over  their  shoulders;  the  cup  of  wine  was  tasted  and 
the  cup  was  thrown  on  the  floor  and  broken,  in  memory 
of  the  vow  that  their  children  should  be  taught  to  labor 


142 


A  LOVER-HUSBAND 


143 


for  the  return  of  the  Hebrew  people  from  their  captivity ; 
the  ring  was  blessed  and  placed  on  the  bride’s  right  fore¬ 
finger  by  the  groom,  with  a  solemn  declaration  that  it 
was  a  symbol  of  their  union. 

The  joyous  procession  re-formed  and  conducted  the 
couple  to  the  groom’s  home;  the  bride  let  down  her  hair 
and  loosed  her  veil.  Then  followed  a  week  of  festivities, 
participated  in  by  the  friends  and  relatives,  though  the 
bridal  couple  celebrated  their  marriage  for  thirty  days. 
In  the  intimacy  of  home  life,  marriage  was  sacred,  and 
the  coming  of  children  was  hailed  as  a  special  favor  of 
God.  With  no  false  modesty  the  family  discussed  the 
intimate  affairs  of  life  as  matters  of  solemn  interest. 

Saul  built  his  house  as  his  father  had  provided;  took 
up  his  work  as  a  teacher,  and  strictly  followed  the 
strongest  injunction  laid  upon  a  rabbi — to  visit  the  sick, 
to  care  for  the  fatherless,  and  to  bury  the  dead.  He 
gave  a  few  hours  every  day  to  the  business  and  some 
special  attention  to  the  education  of  David.  His  classes 
were  eagerly  sought  by  the  youth,  so  that  he  had  to  limit 
his  services  to  those  old  enough  to  understand  the  higher 
teaching  for  which  he  was  fitted. 

The  devotion  he  showed  his  wife  was  such  as  to  attract 
the  attention  of  even  those  who  taught  the  sacredness  of 
the  family.  It  was  not  a  duty  that  called  him  to  his 
home,  but  the  great  love  he  bore  Tabitha,  which  grew 
into  worship  of  her  in  the  passing  days.  So  busy  was 
he  with  his  activities  as  rabbi  and  a  business  man  that 
it  was  a  wonder  he  had  any  time  for  his  home;  but 
resolutely  he  held  his  allotted  time  for  his  wife.  She 
even  chided  him  that  he  was  spoiling  her  with  his  many 
little  acts  to  relieve  the  tedium  of  her  duties. 


144 


A  RABBI  IN  TARSUS 


^‘Should  a  rabbi  who  is  needed  as  a  great  teacher 
give  his  time  to  run  his  wife’s  errands?”  she  asked. 

‘‘Should  my  love  for  you,  that  knows  no  bounds,  be 
denied  expression  for  the  sake  of  those  who  will  care 
little  for  the  sacrifice?”  and  this  question  closed  all 
argument  from  Tabitha. 

Nestor  invited  Saul  to  lecture  before  his  school  on 
the  source  of  the  Hebrew  idea  of  Jehovah.  Ben  Arza 
added  his  commendation  of  the  opportunity,  saying 
that  it  was  a  rare  thing  that  a  Jew  should  be  called  to 
speak  in  the  hall  of  a  Greek  school.  To  prepare  him¬ 
self  for  this  task  required  a  review  of  the  Greek  philos¬ 
ophers,  for  Saul  determined  that  he  would  present  the 
subject  in  such  light  as  would  make  the  understanding 
of  Jehovah  easy  for  the  Greek  mind.  Tabitha  firmly 
insisted  that  he  should  give  up  the  doing  of  small  tasks 
for  her  until  he  had  completed  his  preparations. 

Saul  was  surprised  at  the  number  of  leading  men 
present  on  the  day  he  addressed  the  students  under 
Nestor.  Nestor  made  clear  that  in  presenting  Saul  to 
make  this  address  he  was  going  outside  of  the  usual 
customs,  but  that  it  could  do  no  harm  to  hear  from  one 
who  had  been  a  student  in  this  school  concerning  things 
which  had  a  powerful  influence  in  all  parts  of  the 
world. 

When  Saul  arose  to  respond  he  felt  imbued  with  the 
spirit  of  the  philosophers  and  prophets.  He  was  not 
conscious  of  self,  but  thrilled  with  the  thought  that  here 
he  might  plant  the  seed  which  would  yield  a  bountiful 
harvest  in  the  years  to  come.  He  knew  that  he  was  to 
speak  to  Greeks  and,  with  a  subtlety  that  seemed  to 
come  unsummoned,  he  spoke  in  the  rounded  and  finished 


A  LOVER-HUSBAND 


145 


tones  of  a  Greek.  He  led  them  in  a  review  of  their  own 
philosophers  who  had  sought  the  one  great  and  Supreme 
Spirit  back  of  the  mysteries  of  creation;  he  pointed  out 
how  selfish  teachers  had  perverted  the  view  of  the  great 
men  of  Greece ;  he  passed  with  quick  but  biting  sarcasm 
the  idle  efforts  of  the  Gnostics  to  catch  the  unwary  by 
establishing  the  doctrine  of  a  multitude  of  spirits  inter¬ 
vening  between  man  and  the  great  First  Cause. 

Then,  with  a  trick  of  abruptness  he  had  shown  in 
Damascus  and  which  he  developed  later  in  life,  he 
asked : 

“What  do  you  seek  ?  God  over  all  ?  If  so,  why  do 
you  Limit  him  with  your  reason?  Your  spirits  will 
tell  you  when  you  have  known  God,  if  it  so  be  that  you 
earnestly  seek  him.  In  your  heart  being  convinced 
that  there  is  a  God,  from  whom  proceeds  life  and  every 
good  thing,  would  you  shut  your  eyes  to  further  visions 
of  his  power  and  how  to  reach  him  ? 

“The  Hebrew  mind  accepts  the  premise  that  there 
is  a  God  who  rules,  from  whom  life  proceeds,”  he  declared. 
“When  the  fathers  of  the  Hebrew  people  accepted 
this  premise  as  universal  knowledge,  with  unrestrained 
faith,  they  sought  to  bring  their  spirits  into  harmony 
with  God  by  searching  out  every  ultimate  good,  and 
found  that  it  was  embodied  in  the  God  of  our  people 
and  of  any  people  who  have  the  faith  to  accept  him. 
Hence,  faith  is  the  foundation  of  the  understanding  that 
the  Hebrew  people  have  of  the  Lord  our  God.  If  he 
were  the  creation  of  any  mortal  mind,  then  it  would  be 
found  that  there  were  faults  in  his  attributes.  He  is 
spirit;  personified  in  speaking  of  him,  to  make  him 
comprehensible  to  man.  In  all  the  ages  it  is  found,  by 


146 


A  RABBI  IN  TARSUS 


reasonable  and  fair  investigators,  that  the  Lord  God  is 
unmoved  from  the  seat  of  righteousness.  He  can  do  no 
wrong.” 

The  audience  listened  to  the  full  discourse  of  Saul  with 
candor  and  his  reputation  grew  in  Tarsus  so  that  on  any 
Sabbath  when  he  was  to  speak  in  the  synagogue  there 
were  many  Greeks  in  attendance. 

Ben  Hanan  was  overjoyed  at  the  progress  Saul  was 
making,  and  tried  to  keep  him  from  giving  too  much 
time  to  the  business;  but  Saul  urged  that  age  was  coming 
on  his  father  and  that  soon  there  would  be  additional 
demands  upon  his  own  earnings  in  his  own  family. 
Ben  Hanan  was  pleased  and  agreed  that  it  was  right 
that  Saul  should  try  to  increase  the  profits  of  the  busi¬ 
ness. 

Among  the  dealers  who  came  to  the  shop  of  Ben 
Hanan  was  a  tall,  robust  man  from  Cyprus,  by  the  name 
of  Barnabas.  He  had  heard  Saul  in  the  synagogue  and 
urged  him  to  come  to  Salamis. 

‘H  would  like  to  come,”  said  Saul  in  answer  to  the 
urging  of  Barnabas,  ‘To  visit  my  sister,  Miriam,  and 
meet  her  husband,  Adonijah;  but  I  cannot  leave  home 
until  my  child  is  born.” 

“If  soon,  it  would  be  well  to  wait,”  said  Barnabas. 

“Not  that  I  could  not  make  the  journey  before  that 
event,”  said  Saul,  “but  I  would  not  leave  my  wife  for  a 
day  until  the  babe  rests  in  her  arms.” 

Tabitha  tried  to  argue  against  Saul  excusing  him¬ 
self  from  the  synagogue  and  earnestly  endeavored  to 
convince  him  that  he  should  go  about  his  regular  duties. 
Even  his  mother  urged  him  that  every  care  would  be 
given  Tabitha. 


A  LOVER-HUSBAND 


147 


“It  matters  not  what  care  you  give  her,”  Saul  said 
with  finality.  “She  is  my  wife  and  I  am  only  giving 
her  the  attention  that  is  her  due.” 

When  Sauhs  first-born  son  arrived  there  was  not  only 
great  rejoicing  in  the  families  of  Ben  Hanan  and  Eleazar, 
but  from  outside  of  Jewish  circles  came  presents  and  good 
wishes.  Then  it  seemed  almost  impossible  for  Saul  to 
leave  the  side  of  his  wife  and  their  little  son,  whom  they 
had  named  Jonathan.  They  had  also  given  him  the 
Roman  name  of  Nestor. 

Saul’s  intense  devotion  to  Tabitha  seemed  to  grow 
with  every  passing  day.  The  floodgates  of  love  had 
been  opened  through  which  the  intensity  of  his  nature 
sought  expression. 

“Sometimes  I  fear  that  our  intense  love  will  consume 
itself  or  that  we  will  be  overtaken  by  tribulation,”  said 
Tabitha. 

“No  danger  that  it  will  consume  itself,”  said  Saul, 
“for  it  feeds  itself;  and  if  misfortune  overtake  us,  then 
we  will  have  lost  none  of  the  joy  of  life.” 

After  the  boy  had  grown  to  sturdy  babyhood,  Saul 
was  persuaded  by  Ben  Arza  and  Tabitha  to  accept  an 
invitation  to  Salamis  for  a  short  stay,  giving  a  series 
of  lessons  and  lectures  to  the  Jews  and  to  many  Greeks 
attracted  by  his  reputation. 

“My  heart  warmed  to  you,”  said  Barnabas,  after 
Saul  had  finished  in  Salamis,  “when  I  heard  you  in 
Tarsus,  and  I  was  resolved  then  to  have  you  come  to 
us  in  Salamis.  I  am  glad  that  you  came.” 

“I  shall  always  remember  your  kind  treatment,”  said 
Saul,  “and  I  hope  some  day  to  come  again,  but  now  I 
must  hasten  home.” 


148 


A  RABBI  IN  TARSUS 


Nestor  called  on  his  friend  Ben  Arza  to  learn  what 
were  the  qualifications  for  a  member  of  the  Greater 
Sanhedrin.  ^‘Do  you  think  of  listing  your  name  for  a 
membership  ?”  asked  Ben  Arza  with  a  laugh. 

^‘Not  so,”  said  Nestor,  “lest  I  fail  to  give  even  your 
ten  words  rightly.  It  seemed  to  me  that  Cilicia  should 
be  entitled  to  a  member;  and  if  I  gather  rightly  your 
law,  your  associate  Saul  is  now  qualified.  Suppose  that 
you  suggest  it  to  your  proper  dignitaries;  and,  in  my 
answer  to  a  letter  from  Gamaliel  asking  for  my  views 
on  the  influence  of  Philo’s  writings,  I  will  mention  that 
this  Saul  seems  eminently  qualified  to  represent  this 
section  of  the  country  in  your  greater  senate.” 

“That  will  I  gladly  do,”  said  Ben  Arza  warmly. 
“Saul  needs  something  to  take  him  away  from  Tarsus 
once  in  a  while.  He  is  so  desperately  in  love  with  his 
wife  that  he  may  stick  right  here  and  hide  his  ability 
needed  to  put  life  in  the  Sanhedrin.” 

So  it  came  to  pass  that  when  Saul’s  son  was  a  year 
old,  there  came  a  letter  from  Gamaliel,  telling  Saul  that 
at  the  next  Passover  the  Greater  Sanhedrin  would  meet 
and  that,  since  he  had  been  selected  as  the  new  member 
from  Cilicia,  he  must  be  present,  by  all  means.  Ben 
Hanan  took  the  letter  and  read  it  over  carefully  two  or 
three  times.  Then  he  went  out  and  closed  the  booth, 
though  it  was  several  hours  before  the  time  of  closing. 
He  sent  for  Ben  Arza,  Eleazar,  for  the  president  of  the 
local  Sanhedrin,  for  prominent  members  of  the  council 
of  the  synagogue.  He  hailed  a  baker,  a  butcher,  a  wine 
merchant,  and  commanded  a  greater  feast  than  had 
ever  been  served  in  his  house. 


A  LOVER-HUSBAND 


149 


When  he  came  back  Tabitha  was  in  the  midst  of  the 
most  tearful  expostulation  with  Saul. 

‘‘Would  you  allow  our  selfish  love  to  spoil  the  most 
splendid  opportunity  of  your  life  ?”  she  was  saying. 

Ben  Hanan  heard  the  question  and  gathered  the 
reason  for  it.  Before  he  could  speak,  Ben  Arza  hurried 
in  and  cried,  breathlessly: 

“What  mean  you  by  this,  Ben  Hanan  ?” 

“I  mean  that  we  should  rejoice,  for  the  Lord  has  done 
great  things  for  us.’’ 

“But  have  you  asked  Nestor  to  this  feast?”  Ben 
Arza  asked,  accusingly. 

“It  is  among  our  own  people,”  said  Ben  Hanan. 

“What  greater  friend  has  Saul  than  Nestor,  who 
threw  the  Roman  influence  in  the  scales  to  gain  this 
very  thing  for  Saul  ?”  said  Ben  Arza  with  passion. 

“I  will  hasten  to  ask  Nestor  myself  to  the  feast. 
If  he  will  come,  we  will  be  glad.”  Suiting  his  action  to 
the  word,  Ben  Hanan  left  at  once. 

Saul  was  so  amazed  that  he  simply  looked  at  all 
inquiringly,  without  saying  a  word.  Tabitha  was  over¬ 
joyed.  Deborah  was  holding  the  baby  and  tears  of 
joy  were  falling  down  her  face.  Rabbi  Ben  Arza  began 
talking  with  David  about  the  conditions  of  trade.  Saul 
felt  that  he  was  not  really  a  part  of  the  strange  tableau, 
he  was  on  the  outside,  looking  in  on  himself.  Argu¬ 
ment  had  ceased. 

Tabitha  induced  Saul  to  change  his  clothes  while  she 
assisted  Deborah  in  preparing  for  the  guests.  It  was  a 
time  for  him  to  think,  and  while  not  abating  his  intense 
love  for  his  wife  and  home  life,  he  fully  surrendered  to 


A  RABBI  IN  TARSUS 


150 

the  idea  that  it  was  his  duty  to  accept  the  wider  field  of 
service  and  to  forego  his  personal  feelings. 

Nestor  made  himself  at  ease  among  the  other  guests 
assembled  for  the  feast,  with  the  good-natured  adapta¬ 
tion  of  the  polite  Greek  gentleman.  Saul,  on  entering 
the  room,  went  directly  to  Ben  Hanan;  and,  folding  his 
arms  across  his  breast,  he  knelt  to  his  father  as  he  had 
done  in  childhood.  Placing  his  hand  on  Saul’s  head 
Ben  Hanan  recited  a  blessing,  so  low  that  none  but  Saul 
heard  it.  Then  Saul  accepted  the  congratulations  of 
the  guests  and  a  benediction  by  Ben  Arza.  Deborah  ' 
came  into  the  room  and  Saul  hurried  to  her  and  knelt 
for  her  hand  to  be  placed  upon  his  head. 

^‘Go  to  Tabitha,”  said  Deborah,  after  placing  her 
hand  on  his  head,  ‘Tor  her  blessing  should  be  given  to 
you  alone.” 

“Now  I  know  what  you  mean,”  said  Nestor  to  Ben 
Arza,  as  Saul  was  leaving  the  room,  “when  you  tell  me 
that  the  Hebrews  have  spirituahzed  the  every-day  things 
of  life.” 

The  feast  of  rejoicing  extended  far  into  the  night. 


CHAPTER  XVII 
THE  PASSING  YEARS 

Saul  journeyed  to  Jerusalem  at  the  next  Passover, 
and  took  his  place  among  the  members  of  the  Greater 
Sanhedrin,  now  acting  in  his  own  right  and  not  as  a 
substitute  for  an  absent  member.  The  meeting  with 
his  teacher  was  a  revelation  to  him  of  the  wide  knowledge 
Gamaliel  had  of  affairs  throughout  the  Roman  Empire, 
and  of  the  clearness  of  his  vision  as  to  the  relations  of 
Jews  to  the  government. 

^^Our  people  must  be  brought  to  the  highest  spiritual 
state  possible,”  said  Gamaliel,  ‘‘before  they  can  stand 
for  any  demand  of  rights  from  Rome  which  the  emperor 
does  not  willingly  grant.  Our  exclusiveness  arouses 
suspicion  in  every  land;  our  persistence  excites  animos¬ 
ity;  our  intolerance  of  other  religions  provokes  strong 
prejudices.  We  must  open  the  way  as  much  as  possible 
for  others  to  become  partakers  of  our  faith.  We  must 
concihate  the  nations.” 

Age  was  beginning  to  show  upon  Gamaliel  in  his 
rapidly  whitening  hair,  and  his  opinions  seemed  to  grow 
more  tolerant.  The  infinite  details  to  which  the  govern¬ 
ment  of  the  Temple  had  been  extended  were  more  dis¬ 
tinctly  impressed  upon  Saul’s  mind  than  in  his  former 
sojourn.  He  lodged  with  his  sister,  Martha,  and  her 
husband,  Ben  Gerber,  and  he  found  his  nephew  rapidly 
growing,  a  sturdy  little  fellow.  This  opportunity  to 
observe  the  life  of  another  family  brought  him  to  a  high 
appreciation  of  the  duties  prescribed  in  the  home  life 


152 


A  RABBI  IN  TARSUS 


of  his  people.  He  had  lived  under  such  complete  observ¬ 
ance  of  the  regulations  for  the  family  that  he  had  not  before 
thought  of  the  importance:  of  the  family  Hfe  in  the  scheme 
of  his  religion;  nor  had  he  before  paused  to  trace  the  far- 
reaching  influence  of  home  life  upon  the  Jewish  people. 

On  his  return  to  Tarsus  from  his  first  sitting  as  a 
member  of  the  Sanhedrin,  Saul  plunged  into  the  busy 
life  laid  out  for  him  with  even  increased  energy.^  The 
years  sped  along  rapidly.  David  had  married;  another 
child  had  come  to  Saul’s  home.  His  fame  as  a  speaker 
had  grown,  so  that  at  last  he  could  no  longer  resist 
another  invitation  to  go  to  Salamis.  He  visited  cities 
along  the  coast,  upon  their  urgent  request.  The  greatest 
difficulty  for  him  to  overcome  was  his  absence  from  his 
wife  and  family;  even  Ben  Arza  chided  him  with  being 
more  concerned  with  courting  Tabitha  than  with  the 
reality  of  a  home. 

Then  there  were  other  visits  to  Jerusalem  to  settle 
the  many  questions  of  approval  of  laws  brought  down  by 
tradition  so  that  they  would  have  the  authority  of  the 
Sanhedrin;  as  well,  there  were  questions  relating  to 
government.  Always  some  devout  men  were  urging 
such  steps  as  would  challenge  the  rule  of  Rome,  and 
irresponsible  agitators  stirred  the  people  with  false 
hopes — in  some  instances  pretending  they  were  the  men 
of  whom  the  prophets  had  spoken  as  the  deliverers  of  the 
children  of  Israel.  These  pretenders  had  to  be  dealt 
with  by  the  Sanhedrin  to  make  it  plain  to  Rome  that 
the  rights  given  the  Jews  would  not  be  used  in  rebellion 
against  the  Empire. 

Ben  Hanan  was  growing  old,  not  beyond  usefulness, 
but  he  was  not  so  active  in  the  conduct  of  the  business 


THE  PASSING  YEARS 


153 


as  in  former  years.  David  had  rapidly  developed  a 
genius  for  the  handling  of  the  business,  but  he  insisted 
on  having  the  advice  and  help  of  his  elder  brother. 

Nine  years  had  slipped  away  in  the  busy  life  of  Saul. 
Nestor  had  been  laid  away  in  a  tomb  on  one  of  the  hills 
overlooking  his  beloved  school.  Two  other  children 
had  come  to  Saul  and  Tabitha;  and  all,  except  the  first¬ 
born,  had  been  taken  away  by  a  fatal  epidemic. 

The  trade  caravans  were  increasing  in  numbers, 
coming  down  through  the  Cilician  gates  from  the  lands 
on  the  hither  side  of  the  desert,  adding  to  the  trade  of 
Tarsus  and  the  business  of  the  house  of  Ben  Hanan. 

Saul  had  not  attended  the  last  two  principal  meetings 
of  the  Sanhedrin  because  he  was  in  mourning  for  his 
children  and  he  would  not  leave  Tabitha  to  bear  her 
grief  alone. 


I 


/ 


I , 


:  I  ■ 


/ 


;'y 


-O' 


■) 


'i. 


■"'  'Mt, 

WMM’ 


,  ■,  ...  , . , 
■■■■  • '..  ' 


PART  IV 


The  Valley  of  Shadows 


’’'•  ‘  '  ■•;  ■  V..,'  •'•  V,’-  '.  ,6; 


'(> 


v,*  ■ 


..I « 


i;,, 


c 


iMlss! 


CHAPTER  XVIII 
THE  MOURNER 


The  letters  from  Gamaliel  had  grown  so  urgent  that 
Saul  had  promised  to  be  present  at  the  next  convocation 
of  the  Greater  Sanhedrin.  At  the  time  he  should  start 
Tabitha  was  taken  ill  with  a  strange  malady.  By  day 
and  by  night  Saul  waited  on  her,  but  the  most  attentive 
care  available  was  not  enough  to  save  her  life.  He  would 
not  go  to  the  Sanhedrin  after  her  death.  He  spent  the 
allotted  days  in  mourning  and  then  spent  many  other 
days  in  private  mourning.  The  call  of  duty  fell  on  his 
deaf  ears.  Silently,  solemnly,  he  went  about  the  lighter 
tasks  of  the  shop,  without  referring  to  his  grief.  His 
manner  was  such  that  neither  his  father,  nor  his  mother, 
nor  Ben  Arza  dared  speak  to  him  about  Tabitha.  He 
would  sit  long  hours  by  the  side  of  his  sleeping  son, 
gazing  on  his  face,  the  image  of  Tabitha.  He  would 
spend  the  hours  of  the  morning  sewing  tent-cloth  with¬ 
out  speaking  a  word.  His  eyes  were  dry,  strained,  and 
deep-set  from  the  intensity  of  his  emotion. 

To  the  request  for  his  help  in  the  synagogue  he  simply 
replied  to  Ben  Arza,  “Not  yet.” 

Then  Ben  Arza  dispatched  a  long  letter  to  Gamaliel, 
telhng  him  all  that  had  happened  to  Saul  and  his  fear 
that  Saul  would  lose  his  mind  in  his  great  grief;  he 
urged  that  Gamaliel  should  make  some  special  plea 
to  persuade  Saul  to  visit  Jerusalem,  that  haply 
new  surroundings  would  give  him  relief  from  his 


sorrow. 


THE  VALLEY  OF  SHADOWS 


In  the  course  of  time,  a  long  letter  from  Gamaliel  to 
Saul  set  forth  the  many  distressful  things  menacing  the 
welfare  of  the  faith,  and  that  it  would  be  necessary  to 
have  some  of  the  most  reliable  members  of  the  Sanhedrin 
in  a  long  session  to  settle  important  questions,  many  of 
which  were  doctrinal.  By  the  same  means  Martha  had 
sent  him  a  letter,  begging  him  to  make  their  house  his 
home  for  a  long  visit. 

In  the  family  conference  it  was  decided  that  Saul 
should  go.  David  would  take  care  of  the  business  and 
Deborah  would  be  pleased  to  care  for  Saul’s  little  son, 
Jonathan. 

Saul,  now  thirty  years  old,  had  the  appearance  of 
middle  age.  His  grief  had  robbed  him  of  the  kindly 
smile  that  had  been  characteristic  of  him.  His  eyes 
were  bright,  but  burned  with  suppressed  emotion.  In 
this  changed  demeanor  he  set  off  for  the  journey,  now 
grown  familiar  to  him. 

In  Jerusalem  he  made  his  home  with  his  sister.  After 
three  weeks  a  letter  came  from  his  father,  telling  him 
that,  within  a  week  after  he  left,  Jonathan  had  sickened 
and  passed  away  in  two  days. 

For  many  days  Saul  sat  in  the  upper  room  of  his 
sister’s  house,  where  years  before  he  had  brooded  a 
whole  day  on  his  first  visit  to  the  city,  imagining  troubles 
that  might  come  to  him.  Now  he  was  in  the  depths  of 
grief.  The  son  whose  face  recalled  the  beloved  mother 
had  been  taken  from  him.  His  burdens  were  many. 
He  turned  to  the  lamentations  of  the  fathers;  he  repeated 
the  psalms  and  prayers  of  resignation.  The  cold  com¬ 
fort  of  aU  commentaries  was  that  he  was  suffering  for 
some  sin  that  he  had  done,  and  yet  he  knew  that  he  had 


THE  MOURNER 


159 


lived  in  good  conscience.  The  law  taught  that  he  must 
expiate  the  sin,  he  must  repent. 

He  had  sounded  the  depths  of  grief.  The  only  relief 
for  him  was  to  become  absorbed  in  zealous  service. 
After  spending  the  allotted  days  in  mourning  for  his  son, 
he  grimly  resolved  to  do  all  in  his  power  to  lose  himself 
in  the  activities  of  hfe.  With  a  vow  to  summon  all  his 
strength  and  give  it  to  the  multitude  of  affairs  coming 
before  the  Sanhedrin,  he  had  his  hair  shorn  and  made 
his  sacrifices  in  the  Temple. 

He  wrote  a  letter  to  his  father,  saying: 

Saul,  the  son,  to  Ben  Hanan  and  Deborah,  wise,  patient  and 
forbearing  father  and  mother. 

The  blessings  of  Israel  be  on  you,  may  joy  be  your  portion 
and  may  I,  a  selfish,  grieving  son,  cast  no  shadow  on  you! 

It  was  well  that  I  came  here;  for  in  the  courts  of  the  holy 
Temple  my  mind  has  cleared  and  strength  has  been  given  me  to 
endure  all  affliction.  I  was  reading  what  the  rabbis  have  written 
on  the  loss  of  a  wife.  It  is: 

“If  death  hath  snatched  from  thee  the  wife  of  youth, 

It  is  as  if  the  sacred  city  were, 

And  e’en  the  Temple,  in  thy  pilgrim  days, 

Defiled,  laid  low,  and  leveled  with  the  dust. 

The  man  who  harshly  sends  from  him 

His  first-wooed  wife,  the  loving  wife  of  youth. 

For  him  the  very  altar  of  the  Lord 
Sheds  forth  its  tears  of  bitter  agony.” 

I  am  thankful  that  every  thought  of  mine  was  given  to 
Tabitha;  that  the  grief  has  been  so  great:  for  it  betokens  that 
in  no  hour  of  weakness  will  I  ever  forget  the  love  she  gave  me. 
And  Jonathan  was  her  very  image.  Again  I  thank  you  that  you 
have  given  me  the  faith  to  know  that  our  spirits  are  immortal. 
I  find  strange  things  here;  devout  men  without  faith;  leaders 
without  courage;  and  our  religion  subject  to  the  whim  of  politics. 


i6o 


THE  VALLEY  OF  SHADOWS 


I  do  not  know  when  I  shall  return,  but  tell  David  to  conduct  the 
business  as  if  I  had  no  interest  in  it,  for  now  it  does  not  matter 
to  me.  I  have  my  hands  with  which  to  live.  In  love  I  cherish 
you  and  little  sister,  David  and  his  wife.  Martha  and  Ben 
Gerber  send  their  love  to  you.  Commend  me  to  Ben  Arza.  I 
am  resolved  to  become  busy  in  affairs  and  lay  aside,  if  possible, 
this  sorrowful  countenance  and  be  worthy  as  your  son. 


Saul 


CHAPTER  XIX 
THE  NEW  WAY 

Saul  found  an  air  of  uncertainty  in  the  Sanhedrin;  a 
timidity  he  had  never  known  in  the  years  before  now 
delayed  action  upon  even  matters  of  mere  interpreta¬ 
tion.  Much  discussion  was  had  about  the  course  to  be 
pursued  with  the  Jews  who  were  giving  their  time  to 
the  new  teaching.  Saul  inquired  what  was  in  this  new 
teaching. 

‘‘It  is  the  doctrine  that  would  destroy  our  work,” 
said  Caiaphas,  who  was  presiding  at  the  time,  “and 
would  lead  men  away  from  support  of  the  Temple,  as 
their  leader  taught.” 

“Who  was  this  leader?”  asked  Saul. 

“He  was  a  deluded  man  from  Galilee  who  created  a 
great  furor  with  his  attacks  upon  the  law  and  the  worship 
in  the  Temple.  He  was  crucified  during  the  Passover, 
as  you  remember,”  rephed  Caiaphas. 

“I  have  not  been  here  for  three  years,”  said  Saul, 
“and  I  knew  nothing  of  it,  more  than  by  rumors  which 
did  not  agree.” 

“It  was  at  the  Passover  before  last,”  said  Caiaphas, 
“that  the  people  demanded  his  execution.  For  some 
time  after  it  his  followers  were  afraid  to  make  themselves 
known,  but  recently  they  are  becoming  bolder  and  are 
active  in  stirring  up  the  people  with  the  idea  that  he  was 
a  prophet  and  a  great  leader.  They  have  won  over  many 
to  their  way  of  thinking,  which  does  not  help  in  the 
devotions  of  the  Temple.” 

i6i 


i62 


THE  VALLEY  OF  SHADOWS 


“Why  do  you  not  bring  them  here  for  discipline?” 
Saul  urged. 

“We  hesitate  to  do  so,”  answered  Caiaphas. 
“Besides,  we  had  two  here  before  us  not  long  since,  and 
had  to  let  them  go.  It  is  hard  to  get  proof  against  them 
and  the  people  may  take  sides  with  them.  And  if  we 
stir  up  too  much  trouble  at  this  time,  the  Roman  govern¬ 
ment  may  change  its  policy  toward  us.” 

“Have  you  called  in  Gamaliel  on  this  question?” 
Saul  asked. 

“Yes,”  was  the  reply,  “and  we  find  that  he  relies 
more  on  the  justice  of  our  cause  than  on  the  use  of  force. 
He  it  was  who  led  us  to  release  the  others.” 

“Have  you  not  done  anything?  Do  you  intend  to 
let  this  schism  grow  to  the  destruction  of  true  worship  ?” 
Saul  cried  out  in  protest  against  the  indifference  with 
which  he  thought  they  were  treating  the  question. 

“We  had,  as  I  said,  two  fisherman  of  Galilee  before  us 
and  questioned  them,”  said  Caiaphas.  “They  were  so 
zealous  and  extravagant  that  it  seemed  an  act  of  kindness 
to  let  them  go,  after  we  had  warned  them  that  they  must 
not  any  longer  teach  in  the  name  of  their  prophet.  They 
had  a  poor  fellow  with  them  who  claimed  a  miracle  of 
healing  had  been  performed  upon  him,  and  the  people 
were  shouting  praises  of  the  healing.  We  did  not  dare 
to  offend  the  people.” 

“I  come  from  afar  to  meet  with  you,”  said  Saul,  “and 
to  help,  if  possible;  but  I  object  to  being  a  party  to 
compromises  with  error.  If  you  are  convinced  that  these 
men  are  subverting  the  law,  leading  our  people  away  from 
the  Temple,  then  we  must  act  promptly  and  courageously 
crush  out  the  false  teaching.” 


THE  NEW  WAY 


163 

“You  have  not  gone  through  what  we  have,”  said 
Caiaphas,  “else  you  would  hesitate,  lest  you  bring  your¬ 
self  in  danger  of  these  howling  fanatics.” 

“I  have  been  through  much,”  asserted  Saul,  vehe¬ 
mently,  “but  now  I  am  here  to  act  and  to  throw  myself 
into  this  work.” 

“Good,  good!”  shouted  many  members.  “Hail, 
Saul,  hail!” 

Saul  sprang  from  the  long,  black  night  of  his  grief 
into  the  fierce,  burning  day  of  action.  The  energy  that 
had  been  suppressed  demanded  immediate  tasks,  greater 
than  other  men  dared  to  attack.  His  brain  whirled 
onward  and  upward,  like  an  eagle  in  its  flight;  and,  like 
the  eagle’s  piercing  eye,  searching  out  the  valleys  and 
mountains  far  below,  his  vision  swept  the  depths  and 
heights  of  experience  and  prophecy  for  enemies. 

The  times  needed  a  voice  to  awaken  men,  teachers, 
and  priests;  he  could  almost  hear  the  call  of  his  fathers 
for  sacrifice  of  self,  for  one  who  dared  to  obey  the  laws, 
to  keep  sacred  the  worship  of  Jehovah.  The  love  and 
honor  he  had  for  his  beloved  teacher  should  not  deter 
him,  and  he  hastened  forth  from  the  Sanhedrin  to  confer 
with  Gamaliel. 

After  Saul  left  the  Sanhedrin  there  was  much  informal 
and  excited  talking  among  the  members,  and,  upon  a 
sly  signal  from  Caiaphas,  a  few  trusted  members  lingered 
to  speak  with  him  privately. 

“Send  men,”  craftily  said  Caiaphas,  “who  will  bear 
such  witness  as  you  know  we  must  have,  and  this  can 
readily  be  done  in  the  freedom  of  their  discussions  in  the 
synagogue.  Then  we  will  have  these  men  brought 
before  us  for  trial  in  such  a  way  as  to  arouse  the  consum- 


164 


THE  VALLEY  OF  SHADOWS 


ing  zeal  of  Saul,  without  laying  ourselves  open  to  the 
charge  of  instigating  the  accusations.’’ 

Saul  went  directly  to  Gamaliel  and  was  received  in 
the  tender,  fatherly  manner  of  the  white-haired  prince, 
which  won  for  him  the  adoration  of  the  younger  men  and 
the  esteem  of  the  elder  men.  The  kindly  interest  of 
Gamaliel  turned  Saul  from  his  purpose  for  a  little  while. 

“We  need  the  fearless  energy  and  the  wise  restraint 
you  have,  my  son,”  said  Gamaliel.  “In  these  times,  so 
perilous  to  our  people,  I  almost  shudder  to  think  what 
may  happen.” 

“Have  not  restraint  and  forbearance  gone  too  far 
with  these  agitators  of  new  doctrines  ?”  asked  Saul. 

“Not  from  my  point  of  view,  for  the  purposes  of 
God  cannot  be  frustrated  by  idle  words  which  have  the 
saving  grace  of  love,”  replied  Gamaliel. 

“They  claim,  I  am  told,”  urged  Saul,  “that  this 
Galilean  was  the  Messiah,  and  yet  he  made  no  effort 
to  lead  our  people.” 

“I  am  not  exactly  certain  as  to  what  would  be  the 
appearance  of  the  Messiah,”  said  Gamaliel,  thoughtfully, 
“whether  he  will  be  only  a  leader  of  the  people,  or  whether 
he  will  come,  as  some  of  the  prophets  seem  to  think,  as 
the  embodiment  of  Wisdom.” 

“We  would  know  our  ruler,  and  we  do  know  that 
Wisdom  is  a  spirit  or  influence  that  enters  into  the  hearts 
of  men,  not  a  personal  being,”  contended  Saul. 

“I  almost  agree  with  you,”  said  Gamaliel,  “and  yet 
there  comes  to  me  the  wonder,  in  my  advancing  years, 
if  we  are  not  too  sure  of  our  understanding  of  matters. 
Would  it  not  be  so  wonderful  as  to  be  the  mightiest 
expression  of  God,  if  the  spirit  of  Wisdom  were  mani- 


THE  NEW  WAY  165 

fested  to  us  in  all  its  purity,  in  the  form  of  man  ?  Still, 
it  seems  that  we  should  not  be  left  in  doubt.’’ 

“That  is  the  thing  that  arouses  me  to  action,”  said 
Saul.  “For  those  who  are  faithful  to  the  law  would  not 
be  denied  the  knowledge,  because  the  promise  is  to  us. 
And  these  agitators,  against  the  very  Temple  itself, 
denying  to  the  keepers  of  the  law  any  part  in  the  knowl¬ 
edge  of  the  coming  of  the  Messiah,  without  evidence 
attested  by  the  servants  of  the  law,  assert  that  he  has 
come  and  has  been  crucified.  They  lead  our  people 
away,  they  will  destroy  our  laws,  they  will  cause  the 
Temple  to  be  so  deserted  that  it  will  be  used  for  the 
profane  purposes  of  some  capricious  Roman  ruler.” 

“I  would  agree  with  you,  if  I  so  understood  them,” 
said  Gamaliel,  “and  yet  I  have  the  faith  to  beheve  in  the 
power  of  God  to  sift  out  the  true  from  the  false  in  the 
storm  of  passion.” 

“But  I  hold  that  the  servants  of  the  Lord  must  drive 
the  chariots  against  the  approaching  enemy,”  cried  Saul. 
“  My  youth  is  spent,  I  have  no  other  interest  than  to  serve 
the  Lord  with  all  my  strength  and  with  all  my  soul.  This 
desire  has  brought  me  up  out  of  the  Valley  of  the  Shadow, 
and  I  am  here  in  Jerusalem  to  give  that  service.” 

“And  may  Wisdom  dwell  in  your  heart!”  said 
Gamaliel,  placing  his  hand  on  Saul’s  head  in  blessing, 
as  he  had  often  done  in  the  schooldays. 

Saul  went  out  from  Gamaliel,  feeling  that  his  beloved 
teacher  had  permitted  his  tender  regard  and  great  sense 
of  fairness  to  make  him  too  weak  to  advise  in  this  situa¬ 
tion.  Walking  along  the  streets,  Saul  came  to  the  syna¬ 
gogue  of  the  Freedmen,  which  he  had  also  known  as  the 
Cilician  synagogue.  A  crippled  beggar  was  sitting  out- 


i66 


THE  VALLEY  OF  SHADOWS 


side  the  door,  but  did  not  extend  his  hand  for  alms  as 
was  the  usual  attitude  of  beggars  on  the  approach  of 
anyone.  This  interested  Saul  so  much  that  he  paused 
to  look  at  him. 

“Do  you  want  alms?”  said  Saul  to  the  beggar. 
“Then  hold  out  your  hand.” 

“I  am  not  asking  alms  today,”  replied  the  beggar. 
“I  am  waiting  for  the  man  who  is  speaking  in  the  syna¬ 
gogue  to  come  forth,  and  if  I  have  faith  like  the  others, 
he  may  heal  me.” 

“Think  you  a  man,  not  a  prophet,  could  make  your 
crooked  legs  straight  ?”  said  Saul. 

“Aye,  that  he  has  done  for  others,  I  have  heard,” 
said  the  beggar. 

“Who  is  this  man,  what  time  has  he  been  anointed 
for  the  working  of  wonders  ?”  cried  Saul,  as  if  to  confound 
the  beggar. 

“His  name  is  Stephen,  but  I  know  naught  of  his 
anointings.  We  beggars  accept  help  without  knowing 
if  it  is  from  great  or  small,”  said  the  beggar,  in  apology. 

Saul  entered  the  synagogue  and  listened  to  Stephen 
as  well  as  he  could.  The  crowd  was  so  dense  that  he 
could  not  get  close  to  the  speaker,  and  there  were  several 
men  who  were  constantly  interrupting  with  questions. 
He  could  see  Stephen  standing  on  the  platform,  a 
fine,  large  man,  middle-aged,  and  who  showed  in  his 
weathered  face  that  he  had  spent  much  of  his  time  in 
toil  and  in  the  drying  winds  of  Palestine.  He  was  patient 
with  every  questioner,  giving  him  an  earnest  look,  as 
if  to  answer  him  to  his  heart’s  desire.  It  was  near  the 
close  of  the  meeting  when  Saul  came  in  and  he  did  not 
hear  much  of  the  discussion.  He  noted  that  there  were 
many  soberly  weighing  the  questions  between  themselves. 


THE  NEW  WAY 


167 


Among  the  people  he  saw  some  men  who  were  known  to  be 
agitators  in  former  years  against  the  Roman  government. 

Next  morning,  on  his  way  to  the  Temple  for  his 
devotions,  Saul  observed  dimly  in  the  dawn  a  crowd 
assembhng  near  the  colonnade  on  the  east  side  of  the 
court  of  the  Gentiles.  He  went  over  to  see  what  was 
the  occasion  of  the  people  gathering  there  at  that  early 
morning  hour.  Priests  of  the  Temple  were  in  the  crowd 
and  they  helped  clear  the  way  for  some  cripples  who  were 
trying  to  get  to  the  farther  side. 

‘‘Why  the  gathering?”  Saul  asked  a  priest. 

“We  are  waiting  for  the  teachers  of  the  new  Way,” 
the  priest  replied. 

“Why  do  the  cripples  push  forward  ?”  Saul  asked. 

“Because  these  teachers  often  heal  the  sufferers  by  a 
touch  or  even  a  look  or  a  prayer,”  the  priest  replied. 

“But  is  it  not  your  place  to  worship  yonder,  in  the 
Temple?”  Saul  asked  severely. 

“Yes,”  replied  the  priest,  “but  here  we  learn  a  new 
lesson  that  seems  to  fill  a  great  place  in  our  hearts  that 
has  been  empty.” 

“Then  you  are  deserting  the  faith  of  your  fathers,” 
said  Saul. 

“Not  at  all,  only  replenishing  and  increasing  that 
faith,  for  these  tidings  are  a  great  consolation  to  anyone 
who  has  longed  for  deliverance  from  a  sense  of  guilt. 
We  will  go  into  the  Temple  and  attend  our  duties  there, 
when  it  comes  time  for  our  watch,”  replied  the  priest,  as 
he  turned  to  listen  to  someone  who  was  speaking  from 
the  center  of  the  group. 

Saul  listened,  hoping  to  hear  what  the  new  teacher 
would  say,  but  all  he  could  hear  was  the  wild  declamation 
of  a  man  telling  the  story  of  how  he  had  been  healed 


THE  VALLEY  OF  SHADOWS 


1 68 

simply  by  lying  in  the  street  so  that  the  shadow  of 
Peter,  when  passing,  fell  on  him.  With  a  sneer  of  disgust 
Saul  crossed  the  broad  court  and  ascended  the  steps 
leading  up  to  the  entrance  of  the  Temple. 

The  morning  light  was  growing  brighter;  the  doors 
WTre  being  opened;  the  sunhght  rapidly  flooded  the 
spacious  court;  and  the  vista  through  the  eastern  gate, 
through  the  Women’s  Court,  up  the  stairway  to  the 
Gate  Beautiful,  through  the  massive  Gate  Beautiful  to 
the  altar  of  sacrifice,  stretched  away  to  the  blazing  brass 
and  gold  of  the  Holy  Place,  rising  in  its  serene  whiteness 
as  if  it  were  an  index  to  a  vision  of  the  worlds  beyond. 

The  beauty  and  gtandeur  of  the  scene  revived  the 
reverence  with  which  he  had  often  stood,  as  now,  in 
worship  of  Jehovah.  He  had  removed  his  sandals  and, 
glancing  toward  the  eastern  colonnade,  he  saw  the  stately 
figure  of  Stephen,  whom  he  had  seen  the  day  before  in 
the  synagogue,  surrounded  by  men  while  he  proceeded 
on  his  way.  Saul  thought  to  replace  his  sandals  and 
join  the  multitude,  but  he  remembered  he  was  on  his 
way  to  his  devotions  and  to  turn  back  now  worfid  be  to 
violate  his  vows. 

In  the  meeting  of  the  Sanhedrin  that  day  he  told  of 
his  experience  and  complained  that  no  effort  was  made 
to  gather  the  evidence  against  these  men  who  were  lead¬ 
ing  even  the  priests  of  the  Temple  away. 

‘‘Not  only  must  we  have  proof  that  will  satisfy  us,” 
said  Caiaphas  in  reply  to  Saul’s  complaints,  “but  it 
must  be  so  strong  that  the  procurator  will  not  feel  that 
he  should  interfere.  Once  the  cleaning-up  of  this  heresy 
is  begun,  we  must  follow  it  until  the  work  is  well  done. 
It  has  grown  every  time  that  we  have  meddled  with  it 
in  only  half-way  measures.” 


CHAPTER  XX 
STEPHEN’S  DEFENSE 

In  the  passing  days  Saul  often  came  upon  crowds 
listening  to  some  teacher  giving  a  harangue  on  the  sins 
of  the  times;  promising  to  all  who  suffered  release  from 
their  woes,  if  they  would  accept  the  good  news  and 
become  followers  of  the  Way.  Many  sick  and  lame 
stood  up  as  witnesses,  declaring  they  had  been  restored, 
but  Saul  believed  they  were  hirelings  or  deceived  them¬ 
selves.  He  saw  poor  sufferers  who  had  traveled  long  dis¬ 
tances  from  the  country  to  be  healed  by  the  teachers  of 
the  Way.  He  inquired  if  the  healers  asked  or  received 
any  money  or  gifts  for  their  services,  but  found  there  was 
no  evidence  that  the  healing  was  for  gain. 

He  learned  that  they  were  living  in  groups  and  had 
their  goods  in  common,  that  they  rarely  went  to  the 
Temple  service,  though  they  did  not  say  anything  against 
it,  claiming  they  had  not  time  for  devotions  in  the  Temple 
after  they  told  their  story  and  gave  necessary  help  to 
others.  The  rapidly  growing  popularity  of  the  teaching 
alarmed  him.  As  soon  as  a  man  announced  his  belief 
and  went  through  some  sort  of  a  baptismal  ceremony, 
such  as  the  Essenes  observed,  he  began  immediately  to 
talk  to  others  as  if  he  were  a  teacher.  Saul  concluded 
that  it  was  not  only  a  dangerous  thing  but  that  the 
unusual  zeal  of  converts  would  spread  it  beyond  all  con¬ 
trol  unless  immediately  checked. 

Then  came  a  day  when  Saul  was  hurried  from  his 
devotions  in  the  Temple  to  the  Sanhedrin,  for  the  very 

169 


THE  VALLEY  OF  SHADOWS 


170 

Stephen  he  had  seen  was  to  be  tried.  Saul,  upon  entering 
the  Hall  of  Hewn  Stone,  was  surprised  to  find  all  vacan¬ 
cies  in  the  Sanhedrin  had  been  filled.  The  seventy 
members  sat  on  rugs  in  a  semicircle,  facing  a  long  dais, 
on  which,  facing  the  members,  were  seated  three  rows 
of  the  most  learned  men  then  in  the  city,  with  the  high 
priest,  Caiaphas,  on  a  slightly  raised  seat,  as  the  presiding 
officer  in  the  center  of  the  group  of  learned  men.  At 
each  end  of  the  dais,  thus  being  at  each  end  of  the  semi¬ 
circle  of  members,  was  a  scribe,  standing  to  make  the 
count  when  any  vote  was  taken. 

Two  Temple  guards  entered,  leading  Stephen,  on 
whom  they  had  put  the  dark  cloak  of  mourning,  as  was 
the  custom.  They  placed  him  in  the  center,  facing  the 
semicircle  of  members.  Two  witnesses  came  in  and 
were  enjoined  to  tell  the  truth. 

The  first  said: 

^^This  man  ceases  not  to  speak  words  against  this 
holy  place  and  the  law;  for  we  have  heard  him  say  that 
this  Jesus  of  Nazareth  shall  destroy  this  place  and  shall 
change  the  customs  which  Moses  delivered  unto  us.’’ 

The  second  witness  said: 

‘‘My  brother  has  said  as  I  would  say  it,  word  for  word.” 

The  witnesses  retired  without  being  questioned  by 
Stephen.  Indifferent  to  his  surroundings,  he  stood 
erect,  his  massive  head  thrown  back,  his  eyes  rapturously 
fixed  in  a  vision  and  his  body  tense,  as  if  he  heard  voices 
of  rare  sweetness,  speaking  an  absorbing  message  to 
him  alone. 

Caiaphas,  fearing  that  a  spell  was  being  cast  over  the 
Sanhedrin,  spoke  out  harshly  to  Stephen,  calling  his 
attention  to  the  witnesses: 


STEPHEN’S  DEFENSE 


171 


“Are  these  things  so?’^ 

Stephen  turned  in  dignity,  by  his  bearing  showing  that 
he  had  no  fear  of  the  august  assembly,  and  addressed 
the  high  priest,  at  times  turning  to  the  members  of  the 
Sanhedrin.  He  began  with  the  history  of  Abraham, 
pointing  out  that  the  promises  were  made  him  while  he 
was  yet  in  Mesopotamia,  that  he  should  be  led  into  a 
land  that  would  be  shown  him.  In  simple,  clear  phrases 
he  followed  the  journey  of  Abraham,  ascribing  to  the 
God  of  Glory  all  the  things  which  Abraham  did;  that 
he  had  been  led  to  this  land,  in  which  he  had  no  inherit¬ 
ance,  not  so  much  as  a  place  to  set  his  foot.  But  the 
promise  was  made  that  he  and  his  children  should  have 
it  for  their  possession. 

Then  he  told  the  story  of  Joseph:  how  his  brethren, 
because  of  jealousy,  had  sold  him  into  Egypt;  but  that 
he  rose  in  power  until  in  the  famine  Jacob,  his  father, 
came  into  Egypt;  of  the  suffering  which  came  to  the 
Hebrews  in  Egypt. 

His  story  was  familiar  to  his  hearers;  but  it  had  a 
charm  from  his  lips,  holding  them  with  intense  interest, 
notwithstanding  their  suspicions  that  he  would  pervert 
it.  Stephen  moved  along  with  the  story  of  Moses,  and 
gave  them  a  shock  with  his  reference  to  the  incident  of 
Moses  defending  the  Hebrew  abused  by  his  task-master, 
even  to  the  slaying  of  the  Egyptian.  He  paused,  deliber¬ 
ately  surveying  the  teachers  seated  with  Caiaphas,  sweep¬ 
ing  with  searching  gaze  the  whole  of  the  Sanhedrin;  then 
he  spoke  with  impressive  emphasis : 

“He  supposed  that  his  brethren  understood  that  God 
by  his  hand  was  giving  them  deliverance;  but  they 
understood  it  not.” 


172 


THE  VALLEY  OF  SHADOWS 


Caiaphas  frowned  and  the  members  gave  hard  looks 
at  Stephen;  but  as  if  they  were  in  hearty  accord  with 
him  he  continued  the  story  of  Moses;  his  sojourn  in  the 
wilderness,  and  the  call  that  came  to  him  to  be  the 
messenger  of  God  to  his  people  in  Egypt. 

Breaking  away  from  his  recitation  of  the  story,  he 
said,  with  such  force  that  all  his  hearers  felt  the  shame: 

“This  Moses  whom  they  refused,  saying.  Who  made 
thee  a  ruler  and  a  judge  ?  him  hath  God  sent  to  be  both 
a  ruler  and  a  redeemer,  with  the  hand  of  the  angel  that 
appeared  to  him  in  the  bush.” 

At  this  declaration  the  teachers  began  muttering  to 
one  another,  protesting  that  this  was  not  the  interpreta¬ 
tion.  Saul  was  restrained  from  breaking  out  in  resent¬ 
ment,  only  because  he,  being  a  younger  member,  was 
compelled  by  courtesy  to  wait  for  the  elders  to  express 
themselves.  Before  anyone  could  recover  himself  suffi¬ 
ciently  to  reply,  Stephen  had  swept  on  to  the  wonders 
performed  by  Moses,  and  then,  with  an  intensely 
dramatic  pause,  quoted  Moses  as  saying: 

“A  prophet  shall  God  raise  up  unto  you  from  your 
brethren,  like  unto  me.” 

Caiaphas  turned  to  comment  on  this  to  one  of  the 
teachers  near  him,  shaking  his  head  in  protest.  The 
members  of  the  Sanhedrin  were  bewildered,  but  stub¬ 
bornly  refused  to  admit  to  themselves  that  there  was 
any  force  in  the  quotation.  Stephen  followed  quickly 
with  a  reference  to  the  worship  of  the  golden  calf  in  the 
wilderness  and  the  captivity  that  was  the  penalty.  At 
his  reference  to  the  tabernacle  in  the  wilderness  and  the 
building  of  the  Temple,  Caiaphas  licked  liis  dry  lips  in 


STEPHEN’S  DEFENSE 


173 


feline  rage,  as  if  now  were  the  time  to  spring  upon  him; 
the  admission  would  be  made. 

Stephen  referred  to  the  tabernacle  and  the  years  it 
had  served;  that  Solomon  built  the  Temple  after  the 
plans  of  David.  Then,  with  a  thrust  that  cut  under 
and  through  all  the  elaborate  ceremony  in  and  worship 
of  the  Temple,  he  cried: 

^‘Howbeit,  the  Most  High  dwelleth  not  in  houses 
made  with  hands;  as  saith  the  prophet: 

“  ‘The  heaven  is  my  throne, 

And  the  earth  the  footstool  of  my  feet; 

Did  not  my  hand  make  all  these  things  ?’” 

The  boldness  of  this  declaration,  based  on  the  Scrip¬ 
tures  so  familiar  to  them,  threw  the  whole  Sanhedrin  into 
such  amazement  that  for  a  short  space  of  time  no  one 
could  answer  nor  voice  his  anger.  Before  they  could 
recover  from  this  stroke,  Stephen  with  blazing  courage 
cried  out,  as  if  a  prophet  announcing  doom: 

“Ye  stiffnecked  and  uncircumcised  in  heart  and  ears, 
ye  do  always  resist  the  Holy  Spirit;  as  your  fathers  did, 
so  do  ye.  Which  of  the  prophets  did  not  your  fathers 
persecute?  and  they  killed  them  that  showed  before  of 
the  coming  of  the  Righteous  One.” 

Stephen  had  been  speaking  to  the  members  with 
such  superior  power  that  they  seemed  to  squat  into  the 
floor  as  he  thundered  at  them.  Turning  to  Caiaphas, 
he  fastened  his  intense  gaze  upon  him  until  the  high 
priest  let  his  eyes  fall.  Then  he  finished  his  indictment 
with  the  assumption  of  an  authority  over  his  judges 
before  him:  “Of  whom  ye  have  now  become  betrayers 


174 


THE  VALLEY  OF  SHADOWS 


and  murderers;  ye  who  received  the  law  as  it  was  ordained 
by  angels  and  kept  it  not.” 

After  a  short  time  of  silence  from  the  bold  energy  of 
Stephen’s  attack,  the  priests  and  teachers  on  the  dais 
joined  quickly  by  the  members  facing  them,  hissed, 
growled,  and  spat  at  him.  Caiaphas  let  the  tumult 
continue  for  a  little  while,  until  some  began  calling  for 
the  vote. 

^‘Not  today!”  said  Caiaphas,  with  assumed  impartial 
air.  “The  law  is  that  we  must  not  vote  on  a  death 
penalty  the  same  day  of  the  trial,  and  we  are  here  to 
follow  strictly  the  law.  You  are  now  dismissed  to  meet 
at  this  time  tomorrow,  to  consider  arguments  and  cast 
your  votes.  Meanwhile,  the  guards  will  keep  the  accused 
in  charge.” 

The  guards  came  through  the  doors  of  the  council- 
room  and  led  Stephen  away;  the  members  and  teachers 
in  great  excitement  rose,  spitting  at  Stephen,  who  walked 
out  between  his  guards  as  if  he  were  a  king  being  escorted 
to  his  throne.  Saul,  in  righteous  indignation,  was  shak¬ 
ing  his  fist  at  Stephen,  when  he  caught  the  calm  eye  of 
Gamahel,  looking  at  Stephen  as  if  himself  aloof  from 
the  pandemonium. 


CHAPTER  XXI 
THE  LAW  VOTES 

Saul  left  the  Temple  area  by  one  of  the  gates  leading 
down  through  the  ramp  to  the  lower  street  on  the  south 
side.  He  was  in  deep  thought  about  the  trial,  and  in 
his  reasoning  he  ascribed  the  new  doctrine  to  the  party 
known  as  the  Zealots,  now  stirring  up  the  people  to 
rebel  against  the  priests  and  leaders,  who  had  failed  (as 
it  was  charged)  to  gain  anything  for  the  people. 

“I  am  surprised  to  meet  you  here  at  this  time,”  said 
Barnabas  in  his  big,  hearty  way,  hailing  Saul,  who  was 
passing  without  noticing  him. 

“No  more  than  I  am  to  see  you  away  from  your 
beloved  Cyprus,”  said  Saul. 

“I  have  concluded  to  live  here,  and  have  sold  all  my 
possessions  in  Cyprus,”  Barnabas  replied.  “You  have 
changed  much  since  last  I  saw  you.” 

“A  great  grief  came  to  me.  Tabitha  passed  away  and 
my  only  living  son  died  since  I  came  here,  a  few  weeks 
past.”  Saul  spoke  as  if  he  were  detached  from  the 
experience.  “And  I  have  just  come  from  the  Sanhedrin, 
where  I  have  listened  to  the  trial  of  a  man  by  the  name 
of  Stephen,  in  which  it  was  disclosed  what  a  great 
danger  this  new  doctrine  called  the  Way  is  to  all  our 
sacred  institutions.” 

“Not  so  bad  as  that,”  said  Barnabas,  “for  it  seems 
to  me  that  it  brings  hope  into  the  lives  of  men.” 

“Hope  of  what?”  Saul  showed  his  old  fiery  spirit. 
“This  man  would  defy  death.  In  fact,  he  convicts  him- 


175 


176 


THE  VALLEY  OF  SHADOWS 


self  of  death  by  declaring  against  the  ordinances  of  the 
Temple,  and  he  smiles  confidently  while  saying  it,  as  if 
we  were  impotent.  Such  zeal  carries  men  beyond  reason 
and  makes  them  forget  their  religion.” 

‘‘I  would  not  go  so  far  as  to  say  that,”  Barnabas 
replied,  ‘Tor  the  glad  tidings  that  we  can  have  a  sure 
forgiveness  of  sins  and  the  assurance  of  a  resurrection, 
by  example  and  beyond  any  question,  are  enough  to  make 
men  pause  and  consider  the  man’s  life  and  claims  through 
whom  such  great  things  come.” 

“Tell  me  not  that  you  are  one  of  them,”  said  Saul 
fiercely.  “I  have  determined  to  know  no  friend  until 
I  have  driven  these  false  teachers  from  the  land.” 

“And  you  would  not  listen  to  a  friend  who  loves  you 
enough  to  make  much  sacrifice  for  your  welfare?” 
Barnabas  asked,  earnestly. 

“No  one  could  persuade  me;  I  would  listen  to  no  one; 
I  will  not  pity  nor  spare  him,”  said  Saul,  with  increasing 
fervor. 

“But  I  pity  you.  Your  zeal  would  deny  the  Right¬ 
eous  One,  even  if  he  were  in  your  presence.  Know  this, 
that  love  has  come  into  the  world  and  it  may  envelop 
you.  Farewell!” 

“I  charge  you,”  said  Saul,  with  measured  words, 
“that  you  abstain  from  these  things;  and  that  if  you 
are  led  into  them,  may  you  escape  me,  your  friend,  for 
I  am  now  pledged  to  drive  out  this  heresy,  regardless  of 
friends  or  consequences  to  them  or  to  myself.  Now, 
as  friend,  farewell!” 

Saul  went  on  his  way  with  resolute  stride,  forbidding 
in  his  majesty  of  righteous  conviction.  Barnabas  stood 
watching  him  in  pity;  then,  shaking  his  head  sorrowfully, 


THE  LAW  VOTES 


177 


he  went  on  his  way  to  a  meeting  of  the  followers  of  the 
Way  in  the  court  of  the  Gentiles.  There  he  was  told 
by  a  priest  of  the  Temple  all  that  had  occurred  concern¬ 
ing  the  certainty  of  Stephen’s  fate,  which  would  be 
followed  by  persecution  to  stamp  out  the  teaching  of  the 
things  that  had  been  said  and  done  by  the  Nazarene. 

Saul  went  to  his  sister’s  house  and  was  so  silent  dur¬ 
ing  the  evening  meal  that  even  young  Ahiram’s  questions, 
which  usually  aroused  Saul  to  immediate  reply,  did  not 
bring  him  into  the  conversation.  He  slept,  or  rather  he 
lay  down  on  the  bed  to  sleep  where  his  grandfather  had 
passed  away.  The  moonlight  streamed  through  the 
latticed  window  as  had  the  sunlight  when  Azel  saw  his 
vision  of  the  Temple.  The  high  tension  of  his  nerves 
gave  Saul  visions  of  the  Temple  laid  low,  the  woe  that 
would  come  to  the  people,  and  then  the  words  of  the 
rabbis  came  back  to  him: 

If  death  hath  snatched  from  thee  the  wife  of  thy  youth, 

It  is  as  if  the  sacred  city  were, 

And  e’en  the  Temple,  in  thy  pilgrim  days. 

Defiled,  laid  low,  and  leveled  with  the  dust. 

His  grief  was  more  poignant  than  it  had  been  in  the 
days  when  his  stunned  senses  failed  to  recognize  fully 
his  loss.  In  his  desperate  efforts  to  take  his  mind  from 
thought  of  Tabitha  he  reviewed  the  trial  of  the  day,  and 
dark  and  portentous  plans  crowded  his  reasoning.  Dur¬ 
ing  the  long  night  his  mind  so  painfully  and  actively 
concentrated  on  his  loss  of  Tabitha,  and  on  the  possible 
loss  of  the  Temple,  that  he  could  not  sleep.  Worn  and 
haggard  he  took  his  way  in  the  early  morning  to  his 
favorite  place  in  the  Temple  to  gain  some  composure  of 
mind  in  his  devotions. 


178 


THE  VALLEY  OF  SHADOWS 


The  Sanhedrin  had  assembled  promptly  and  the 
members  were  waiting  for  the  guards  to  bring  Stephen 
in,  when  Saul  entered.  Gamaliel  was  on  the  dais;  the 
three  rows  for  teachers  were  filled.  Caiaphas  assumed 
a  more  judicial  air  than  on  the  day  before,  and  the 
members  of  the  Sanhedrin  were  grimly  silent,  in  sym¬ 
pathy  with  the  attitude  of  their  president.  The  guards 
entered  with  Stephen,  who  gave  no  indication  of  fear  or 
of  interest  in  the  assemblage.  Saul  noted  the  concen¬ 
trated  gaze  of  Gamaliel  on  Stephen,  as  if  he  were  search¬ 
ing  out  some  secret  of  his  soul. 

Stephen  was  placed  in  the  center  of  the  assembly, 
first  facing  Caiaphas;  and  then,  on  direction  of  the 
high  priest,  Stephen  turned,  facing  the  members  of  the 
Sanhedrin.  He  looked  off  and  over  them,  as  though 
they  were  not  sitting  there  on  the  floor  ready  to  spring 
for  his  life  when  the  time  would  come  to  vote. 

“Has  anyone  anything  to  say  for  the  accused?’^ 
Caiaphas  inquired. 

After  a  long  silence  Gamaliel  rose,  as  if  to  leave. 

“Have  you  no  word  for  us?”  said  Caiaphas  to 
Gamaliel,  and  aside,  to  another  teacher,  he  gave  a  look 
of  cunning  self-congratulation. 

“I  was  leaving  before  you  voted,  so  as  not  to  inter¬ 
fere  with  your  proceedings,”  said  Gamaliel.  “Now  that 
you  have  called  attention  to  me  and  thereby  to  my 
well-known  views,  I  will  repeat  what  I  said  when  you 
had  the  two  fishermen  before  you : 

“Refrain  from  these  men,  and  let  them  alone;  for  if 
this  counsel  or  this  work  be  of  men,  it  will  be  overthrown; 
but  if  it  is  of  God,  ye  will  not  be  able  to  overthrow  them; 
lest  haply  ye  be  found  even  to  be  fighting  against  God.” 


THE  LAW  VOTES 


179 


Apparently  changing  his  mind  about  leaving,  he  took 
his  seat. 

SauFs  lips  were  moving  silently  while  Gamaliel  spoke. 
Caiaphas  called  for  the  vote,  which  was  taken  by  each 
one  standing  until  the  scribes  announced  that  all  had 
been  counted.  The  first  call  was  for  those  who  voted 
‘‘not  guilty,”  but  none  arose.  Then,  at  the  call  for 
those  who  would  vote  “guilty,”  Saul,  as  the  youngest 
member,  was  required  to  vote  first. 

Saul  arose,  bursting  out  vehemently  in  the  quotation 
from  the  law,  while  looking  Gamaliel  unflinchingly  in 
the  face: 

“You  shall  not  consent  unto  him, 

Nor  listen  to  him; 

Neither  shall  your  eye  pity  him, 

Neither  shall  you  spare. 

Neither  shall  you  conceal  him: 

But  you  shall  surely  kill  him . 

You  shall  stone  him  with  stones  that  he  die; 

Because  he  has  tried  to  draw  you 
Away  from  the  Lord  your  God.” 

Gamaliel  bowed  his  head  while  Saul  recited  and  Saul 
saw  diamond  drops  trickling  down  on  GamalieFs  silvery 
beard;  but,  undeterred  by  Gamaliel’s  unpretentious  dis¬ 
play  of  feeling,  Saul  stood  resolutely  as  if  inspired  to 
lead  in  the  vote  that  he  felt  in  his  soul  was  righteous. 
The  others  rose  rapidly  until  every  member  was  standing. 

“The  judgment  of  the  whole  Sanhedrin  is,”  said 
Caiaphas,  in  a  dry,  solemn  voice  to  Stephen,  after  the 
scribes  had  announced  the  vote,  “that  you  be  stoned  to 
death.” 

To  all  appearances,  Stephen  had  not  heard  the 
words,  for  his  eyes  were  fixed  on  a  vision  above  him. 


i8o 


THE  VALLEY  OF  SHADOWS 


Extending  his  outstretched  arms  toward  his  vision,  he 
exclaimed : 

“Behold,  I  see  the  heavens  opened,  and  the  Son  of 
Man  standing  on  the  right  hand  of  God.’’ 

The  members  of  the  Sanhedrin  instantly  became  a 
howling,  jeering  mob.  They  plucked  at  his  garments; 
they  spat  at  him;  and  they  were  about  to  make  the  place 
of  judgment  the  shambles  of  execution.  On  call  from 
Caiaphas  to  proceed  according  to  the  law,  the  chief  officer 
of  the  Temple  came  in  with  twelve  priests,  already 
selected  by  lot  for  the  task;  and  they  led  Stephen  to  the 
place  of  stoning.  Saul,  in  his  zeal,  went  with  them. 

They  led  Stephen  outside  of  the  city  and,  placing  him 
with  his  back  close  to  the  edge  of  a  cliff  over  the  upper 
Kidron,  they  took  off  their  outer  garments  and  threw 
them  down  in  front  of  Saul,  who  stood  at  the  side  to 
see  that  no  mercy  should  be  shown. 

The  priests  selected  the  stones  suitable  for  their 
purpose  from  among  the  many  rocks  at  hand.  Stephen 
stood  up  and  commended  his  soul  to  his  Lord.  They 
ordered  him  to  kneel,  so  that  he  would  be  an  easier 
object  for  their  marksmanship.  As  he  knelt,  he  made 
them  more  angry  by  saying  in  prayerful  tones : 

“Lord,  lay  not  this  sin  to  their  charge.” 

The  twelve  strong  men  flung  the  stones  at  the  head  of 
the  bowed  patriarch  with  such  force  as  instantly  to  crush 
out  his  life.  By  examination  they  made  sure  that  he 
was  dead,  and  left  for  the  city.  Looking  back  from  near 
the  entrance  to  the  city,  Saul  saw  men  tenderly  gathering 
up  and  bearing  away  the  body  of  Stephen  and  he  was 
almost  sure  that  he  saw  the  large  frame  of  Barnabas 
among  them. 


f 


CHAPTER  XXII 
RUTHLESS  ZEAL 

Men  who  had  been  sent  out  by  the  high  priest  came 
before  the  Sanhedrin  during  the  next  few  days  with 
reports  that  while  the  followers  of  the  Way  no  longer 
met  in  the  synagogues  (save  in  the  smaller  ones)  they 
were  meeting  by  appointment  in  private  houses  and 
that  some  of  them  were  leaving  the  city. 

“Why  do  you  not  arrest  them  and  bring  them  here  ?” 
Saul  demanded. 

“Because  we  are  only  guards  from  the  Temple  and 
have  not  the  authority  to  do  so  without  special  direction/’ 
said  the  leader  of  the  guards.  “By  the  time  we  return 
and  get  the  authority  from  the  high  priest,  the  men  and 
women  escape  from  the  city  or  go  in  hiding.  We  need 
one  in  authority  over  us.” 

After  waiting  until  others  had  an  opportunity  to 
speak,  no  one  having  volunteered,  Saul  stepped  forth. 

“Give  me  the  authority  to  lead  the  guards,”  said 
Saul,  “and  I  will  search  out  these  people  from  their 
places  of  hiding.  I  will  take  them  from  their  homes  and 
drag  them  from  their  synagogues ;  only  I  must  know  that 
you  will  not,  through  fear,  revoke  my  authority.” 

“It  shall  be  so,”  said  Caiaphas.  “Let  all  speak.” 

The  scribes  took  the  vote  of  the  Sanhedrin  and  found 
no  dissenting  voice.  Then  Saul  was  given  any  number 
of  guards  he  might  demand,  from  time  to  time.  He 
started  out  with  only  three,  but  shortly  increased  the 
number  to  more  than  a  score;  for  he  would  drag  forth 

i8i 


i82 


THE  VALLEY  OF  SHADOWS 


those  accused,  sending  them  to  prison  in  charge  of  guards, 
and  hasten  with  the  remaining  guards  to  the  next  place. 

His  first  two  days’  work  filled  the  cells  that  could  be 
used  for  prisons  in  the  Temple  walls.  Guards  became 
exhausted  from  following  him  in  his  rapid  search.  He 
tore  mothers  wdth  babes  from  their  houses  and  would 
listen  to  only  one  plea,  renunciation  of  the  Nazarene. 

A  panic  seized  the  followers  of  the  Way,  and  those 
who  could  leave  made  their  escape  out  of  the  city.  All 
through  the  night  silent  figures  hastened  out  on  the  roads, 
some  to  the  cave  country  in  the  west,  but  principally  to 
the  north,  so  as  to  be  as  far  as  possible  from  the  city  at 
the  break  of  day.  They  fled  to  the  cities  of  Samaria  and 
Galilee,  spreading  the  news  of  the  persecution,  carried 
on  with  frightful  and  remorseless  energy  by  the  man, 
Saul  of  Tarsus.  Some  fled  leaving  members  of  their 
families  in  prison,  others  were  compelled  to  leave  some 
members  of  their  families  who  could  not  make  the 
flight. 

Saul  had  found  a  work  suited  to  his  dark,  brooding 
mood.  The  synagogues  had  been  swept  clean  of  the 
teachers  of  the  Way  and  he  had  set  guards  to  seize  them 
if  they  returned. 

He  had  in  a  few  days  changed  the  whole  atmosphere 
of  the  city  from  one  of  bitter  endurance  of  the  sect  to 
an  open  persecution  of  any  member  found.  He  diligently 
sought  for  the  men  hailed  as  teachers  and  apostles;  but 
they  were  carefully  guarded  from  his  spies  and  guards  or 
had  scattered  through  the  country;  some  were  concealed 
even  in  the  houses  of  the  priests  of  the  Temple. 

The  more  exhausting  his  labors,  the  better  it  suited 
his  mood.  He  was  changed  from  teacher  and  adviser 


RUTHLESS  ZEAL 


183 


to  a  warrior  of  his  faith.  The  strain  of  the  blood  of 
Saul,  the  son  of  Kish,  raced  through  his  veins;  he  gloried 
in  the  wailing  pleas  for  mercy  that  fell  upon  his  unheed¬ 
ing  ears;  he  felt  that  the  God  of  his  fathers  looked  down 
in  approval  on  him,  as  the  one  to  crush  the  enemies  of 
the  true  faith. 

There  came  a  time  when  few  could  be  found  to  drag 
forth,  either  to  prison  or  to  humiliating  renunciation. 
Saul  felt  that  his  work  had  been  well  done. 

Then  came  the  news  from  nearby  and  distant  towns 
and  cities  that  the  fugitives  were  active,  not  only  in  their 
teachings,  but  bitter  in  stirring  up  hatred  against  the 
administration  of  the  Temple.  From  the  cities  of 
Samaria,  from  Tyre  and  Sidon  it  was  reported  that  the 
fugitives  had  come  among  them;  and  from  Tiberias 
and  Caesarea  Phihppi  came  the  word  that  the  roads 
leading  to  Damascus  were  dusty  with  caravans  of  fleeing 
proselytes,  who  were  telhng  their  story  to  every  wayfarer. 
At  Saul’s  request,  Caiaphas  called  a  meeting  of  the  San¬ 
hedrin  to  listen  to  his  plans. 

‘‘We  have  driven  out  the  agitators  of  this  new 
religion,”  said  Saul,  in  speaking  to  the  Sanhedrin,  “until 
they  dare  not  show  their  heads  in  Jerusalem.  But  now 
they  have  fled  to  other  cities,  and  I  hear  that  they  are 
making  for  Damascus,  apparently  with  the  purpose  of 
establishing  in  that  city  a  center  of  their  activities.  I 
hear  that  they  are  organized  in  cities  on  the  way,  in 
which  they  have  left  leaders.  All  our  work  will  be  for 
naught,  if  we  stop  with  what  we  have  done  here.  We 
should  send  someone  with  authority  to  overtake  them 
and  send  them  back  here  as  prisoners,  so  that  they  can¬ 
not  lead  astray  our  people  in  other  cities.” 


184 


THE  VALLEY  OF  SHADOWS 


‘‘Who  will  go  Caiaphas  spoke  as  if  someone  of  the 
many  members  present  would  volunteer. 

While  no  one  offered  to  go,  almost  every  member 
had  a  word  of  strong  approval  for  Saul’s  plan,  and  wound 
up  his  remarks  by  saying  that  it  would  need  a  man  of 
ability  and  zeal,  and  one  so  situated  that  other  duties 
would  not  compel  his  speedy  return. 

“Strange  that  in  all  this  discussion,”  said  Caiaphas, 
“no  one  seems  willing  to  volunteer  for  the  work,  nor  to 
mention  the  one  man  who  is  best  prepared  and  best  suited 
for  this  heroic  task.” 

While  making  this  speech,  Caiaphas  cast  a  quick 
glance  at  Saul  and  all  the  members,  following  his  eyes, 
gazed  fixedly  at  Saul,  to  his  embarrassment,  although 
outwardly  he  remained  unmoved. 

“I  speak  the  voice  of  the  Sanhedrin,”  said  Caiaphas, 
breaking  the  silence,  “when  I  say,  Saul.” 

“So  be  it!”  cried  the  members  in  one  voice. 

“This  is  such  an  important  undertaking  that  I  will 
not  enter  upon  it,  unless  I  am  given  letters  of  unques¬ 
tioned  authority  and  credit  to  carry  on  the  plans,  even 
in  Damascus,”  said  Saul. 

“It  shall  be  so,”  said  Caiaphas.  “The  scribes  will 
prepare  the  letters  and  you  shall  have  such  force  as  you 
want  to  take  from  here,  with  such  help  from  the  other 
cities  as  you  may  need.” 

“Then  I  will  go,”  said  Saul.  “I  must  leave  in  the 
early  morning.” 


CHAPTER  XXIII 

TESTIMONY  OF  NEIGHBORS 

Before  it  was  yet  day  Saul  rode  out  through  the  gates 
of  the  city  with  the  ten  selected  guards  from  the  Temple 
and  equipment  on  donkeys  for  a  journey  of  eight  days. 
The  guide  in  charge  of  the  animals  was  familiar  with  the 
roads  leading  through  the  cities  of  Palestine  to  Damascus. 
Saul,  having  heard  that  there  were  many  proselytes  in 
Shechem  (in  the  speech  of  his  fathers),  ordered  that  the 
first  stop  should  be  in  that  city.  The  guide  protested 
against  trying  to  reach  Nablus  or  Shechem,  a  journey 
of  fourteen  hours,  on  the  first  night,  because  he  said  it 
would  wear  the  animals  down  at  the  very  beginning;  but 
Saul  said  it  was  necessary  for  him  to  reach  Shechem 
during  the  night  time. 

Even  though  arriving  late,  Saul  aroused  the  leading 
men  of  the  synagogue  in  Shechem ;  and  from  their  report 
he  was  able  to  seize  six  men  in  the  early  morning  and 
start  them  back,  under  guard,  to  Jerusalem.  He  then 
turned  aside  to  Nazareth,  whence  had  come  the  man  who 
was  the  cause  of  this  uprising. 

In  the  squalid  city  he  found  no  one  sufficiently  active 
to  attract  his  attention.  Even  the  rabbi  seemed  too 
dull  to  give  any  information;  but  anxious  eyes  were 
watching  him  from  behind  doorways,  as  Saul  rode  down 
the  principal  and  illy  kept  street  of  the  little  city. 

In  Tiberias  Saul  was  told  that  many  travelers,  who 
appeared  to  be  fleeing  in  haste,  had  passed  that  way  a 
few  days  before.  The  only  people  he  could  find  in  the 

i8s 


i86 


THE  VALLEY  OF  SHADOWS 


city  who  avowed  themselves  followers  of  the  Way  were 
a  caretaker  of  the  synagogue  and  a  half-witted  shoe¬ 
maker,  proud  of  the  distinction  of  being  sent  to  Jerusalem. 

In  Capernaum  the  rabbi  himself  told  Saul  that  the 
young  man  Jesus  had  been  among  them  for  many 
years,  a  gentle-mannered  man,  attracting  many  by  his 
sincerity. 

“We  accepted  him  as  a  man,”  said  the  rabbi,  in  reply 
to  Saul’s  question  about  any  followers  of  Jesus.  “So 
clean  and  wholesome  was  he,  so  intimately  and  sympa¬ 
thetically  did  he  enter  into  our  everyday  life  in  acts  of 
kindness  and  helpfulness,  that  we  failed  to  note  that  he 
had  any  followers,  except  a  few  companions  who  hung  on 
every  word  he  uttered.  He  did  not  seem  to  us  to  be 
teaching  a  new  religion  so  much  as  urging  men  to  carry 
out  in  their  lives  the  things  that  all  of  us  know  to  be  at 
the  foundation  of  our  own  religion.  We  cannot  believe 
that  he  taught  any  dangerous  doctrines.” 

“Let  us  forget  this  man  Jesus,  since  he  no  longer  can 
teach,”  said  Saul,  in  an  effort  to  avoid  discussion. 
“Have  you  not  seen  fugitives  from  Jerusalem,  passing 
this  way  to  Damascus  ?” 

“Now  I  do  remember  quite  a  company  passing 
through,  just  yesterday,”  replied  the  rabbi,  raising  his 
voice  so  that  it  could  be  heard  by  a  young  man  who  was 
listening  intently.  “They  were  inquiring  where  they 
would  strike  the  road  to  Tyre.” 

While  Saul  set  off  impatiently,  at  the  head  of  his 
company,  the  young  man  who  had  heard  the  conversa¬ 
tion  with  the  rabbi  left  the  village  on  horseback,  by  a 
goat  path  which  was  a  shorter  route  to  Caesarea  Philippi. 
Saul  had  led  his  company  several  miles  on  the  road  to 


TESTIMONY  OF  NEIGHBORS 


187 


the  east,  toward  Tyre,  when  he  met  a  caravan  on  its 
way  back  from  the  seacoast  to  Damascus.  The  man  in 
charge  of  the  caravan  assured  Saul  that  he  had  not  met 
any  travelers  on  the  way,  but  that  all  the  travel  was 
toward  Damascus.  Fretting  over  the  loss  of  time,  Saul 
turned  back  and  was  for  pushing  on  to  Caesarea  Philippi 
without  stopping;  but  the  guide  convinced  him  that 
their  badly  jaded  animals  should  not  be  crowded. 

In  the  early  morning  they  set  off  for  their  next  stop, 
at  Caesarea,  for  Saul  had  heard  that  there  were  many 
of  the  old  disciples  of  Jesus  in  that  locality,  because  he 
had  once  taught  there.  Their  way  led  them  down  to  the 
well-watered  valley  of  the  Jordan,  through  luxuriant 
growths,  of  which  lower  Palestine  could  not  boast.  The 
wealth  of  the  yellow  wild  mustard  in  bloom,  the  anemones 
and  poppies  in  their  brilliant  reds  and  royal  purple,  and 
the  rich  green  grasses  clothed  the  hills  and  slopes  gor¬ 
geously;  the  eucalyptus,  oleander,  and  walnut  trees, 
with  here  and  there  a  grove  of  olives,  made  it  a  scene  of 
beauty;  and  over  all  the  old  monarch,  Mount  Hermon, 
was  watching.  So  intent  was  Saul  on  his  mission  of 
vengeance,  so  annoyed  by  the  delays,  that  he  had  no 
appreciation  of  the  beauty  about  him. 

The  ruler  of  the  city  of  Caesarea  was  exceedingly 
gracious  to  Saul,  and  with  the  extreme  hospitality  of  the 
East  took  the  greatest  interest  in  providing  for  SauTs 
comfort  and  the  entertainment  of  his  company.  The 
young  man  from  Capernaum  had  arrived  ahead  of  Saul 
and  was  watching,  as  if  hstless,  all  that  took  place. 
As  soon  as  Saul’s  company  had  followed  the  city 
magistrate  away,  the  young  man,  mounted  on  a  fresh 
horse,  left  hurriedly  toward  Damascus. 


i88 


THE  VALLEY  OF  SHADOWS 


‘‘Your  animals  look  so  gaunt  that  I  will  have  my  own 
herdsman  take  them  to  my  best  pastures,”  said  the 
magistrate,  “and  they  will  be  fresh  on  the  morrow.” 

“They  need  it  badly  enough,”  the  guide  grumbled. 

“But  will  we  be  able  to  get  them  for  an  early  morn¬ 
ing  start  ?”  Saul  asked,  anxiously. 

“My  own  stock  will  be  with  them,  and  in  years  my 
herdsman  has  not  failed  to  bring  them  in  at  break  of 
day,”  replied  the  magistrate. 

Saul  quickly  inquired  about  any  fugitives  from 
Jerusalem. 

“Now  I  do  remember  that  several  families  passed 
through  here  a  few  days  ago,  on  their  way  to  Damascus, 
but  they  were  so  poor  that  I  paid  little  attention  to 
them,”  said  the  magistrate.  “You  should  see  the 
rabbi.” 

After  a  meal,  prolonged  by  the  magistrate’s  excessive 
hospitality  until  late  in  the  evening,  Saul  was  able  to 
see  the  old  rabbi,  who  plead  that  he  would  have  to  make 
the  interview  short,  because  in  his  old  age  he  went  to 
bed  early.  The  rabbi  was  so  uncertain  about  the  people 
he  had  seen  passing  through  the  city  that  Saul  could 
get  no  information  out  of  him.  He  admitted  that  he 
had  known  the  man  Jesus  at  one  time  and  had  heard 
him  several  times,  talking  to  small  groups  of  people. 

“He  was  a  fine  young  man,”  said  the  rabbi,  “tall 
and  strong,  and  always  in  good  humor,  yet  he  never 
uttered  an  idle  word.  He  was  about  your  age,  but  his 
face  was  free  from  care  and  inspiring  to  look  upon.  We 
liked  him  very  much  and  his  influence  upon  our  young 
men  was  for  the  very  best.” 

“Are  there  any  of  his  followers  here?”  Saul  asked. 


TESTIMONY  OF  NEIGHBORS 


189 


hardly  know  how  to  answer  that  question/’  said 
the  rabbi,  apparently  greatly  puzzled,  ‘‘for  he  seemed 
satisfied  with  telling  people  the  things  that  helped  them 
in  their  fives  and  was  indifferent  as  to  whether  anyone 
became  his  follower.  If  you  had  asked  me  if  anyone 
had  been  influenced  by  him  in  this  city,  I  would  reply 
that  a  great  many  had  come  under  his  kindly  spell.  I 
heard  that  he  was  killed  in  Jerusalem,  and  we  who  knew 
him  could  never  understand  why.” 

“His  followers  in  Jerusalem  are  preaching  against  the 
Temple  and  seek  to  do  away  with  the  law,”  said  Saul. 

“Of  course  that  is  bad,”  said  the  rabbi,  “for  the 
Temple  is  a  wonderful  building,  erected  by  Herod  mostly 
for  his  own  glory;  but  off  here  we  have  no  Temple,  and 
it  would  seem  impossible  to  do  away  with  the  law,  for 
the  Sanhedrin  makes  so  many  new  laws  that  no  body  of 
men  could  very  well  do  away  with  them.” 

“I  am  almost  of  a  mind  to  have  you  sent  to  Jerusalem 
for  investigation,”  said  Saul. 

“Send  me  to  Jerusalem  for  investigation?”  The 
old  rabbi  laughed.  “  Why,  son,  I  am  entitled,  on  account 
of  my  service  for  my  people,  to  question  those  who  keep 
themselves  in  Jerusalem.  You  are  beside  yourself  and 
only  serve,  in  your  madness,  the  men  who  five  off  the 
fat  of  the  altar,  while  we  struggle  to  get  the  necessities 
of  fife  and  pay  our  taxes  to  Rome  and  our  tithes  to  the 
Temple.  Go  on  your  way,  but  let  me  alone  in  my 
placid,  old  age.” 

After  most  diligent  search  that  night,  Saul  was  not 
able  to  find  any  victims  in  Caesarea  Philippi  to  send  back 
to  Jerusalem;  nor  could  he  find  anyone  who  was  deeply 
interested  in  his  mission.  In  the  morning  he  waited 


I 


THE  VALLEY  OF  SHADOWS 


190 

impatiently  until  long  after  sunrise,  before  the  herdsman 
came  in,  who  had  a  tale  to  tell,  how  in  the  night  a  bear, 
or  some  other  wild  beast,  had  come  down  and  scared  the 
animals  so  that  they  scattered  in  every  direction.  The 
magistrate  gave  the  herdsman  a  scolding  and  threatened 
him  with  punishment,  if  he  did  not  bring  in  the  animals 
of  his  guest.  Saul  tried  to  hire  other  animals,  but  it 
seemed  impossible  to  find  any  for  hire  to  go  to  Damascus. 
Late  in  the  day  the  herdsman  appeared  with  the  animals, 
and  Saul  insisted  that  the  guide  should  saddle  to  start 
at  once. 

“Leave  me  at  this  hour  of  the  day  cried  the  magis¬ 
trate.  “My  name  would  be  ruined.  I  would  never  dare 
to  set  foot  in  your  city  nor  to  go  outside  these  walls. 
The  Lord  would  look  down  on  me  in  anger,  woe  is  me! 
I  want  to  be  kind  to  the  guest  in  my  house  and  he  turns 
upon  me  as  an  enemy  and  will  not  partake  of  my  poor 
fare.  Stay  until  the  evening  meal  is  ready  and  when 
you  have  eaten  I  will  let  you  go,  though  I  will  never 
escape  the  curse  of  sending  away  a  guest  in  the  night.” 

The  evening  meal  was  lavish  and  the  magistrate  held 
Saul  in  conference  until  a  late  hour.  Then  Saul,  decid¬ 
ing  he  must  be  on  his  way,  aroused  his  company  after 
much  delay,  so  that  he  was  ready  to  start  at  midnight. 
The  magistrate  was  pleading  with  him  to  wait  until  the 
morrow,  but  Saul  rode  away  in  the  night. 

“Did  the  young  man  from  Capernaum  get  a  good 
horse?”  the  magistrate,  with  a  sly  twinkle  in  his  eye, 
asked  of  his  herdsman  after  Saul  rode  away. 

“Aye,  the  best  I  could  find  in  the  city,”  said  the 
herdsman. 


CHAPTER  XXIV 

DARKNESS  TO  LIGHT 

In  the  early  morning,  worn,  weary,  and  dusty  travel¬ 
ers,  some  riding,  some  dragging  blistered  feet,  were 
coming  into  the  groves  and  shady  places  of  Damascus 
from  their  forced  march  along  the  sandy  roadway.  They 
cast  anxious  looks  back  over  the  plains  and  were  happy 
that  no  clouds  of  dust  disclosed  their  pursuers.  For 
all  along  the  road  the  day  before,  the  young  man  from 
Capernaum  had  ridden,  warning  them  that  Saul  was  in 
pursuit. 

They  had  fled  to  Damascus  to  escape  the  persecution 
of  the  priests  of  the  Temple,  to  a  city  that  was  not  con¬ 
trolled  by  the  Jews.  They  knew  that  followers  of  the  Way 
who  had  preceded  them  would  open  their  homes  to  them. 

Saul  had  climbed  the  hills  out  of  the  valley  of  the 
Jordan  and  was  many  miles  behind  the  fleeing  refugees. 
He  had  reached  the  plains  leading  from  the  slopes  of 
Lebanon  away  and  down  to  Damascus.  He  urged  his 
company  along  with  feverish  haste  among  the  rocks  on 
the  higher  levels.  He  fretted  at  the  delay  for  breakfast 
and  rest  for  the  animals.  The  guide  was  immovable, 
for  he  argued  that  he  knew  the  long  distance  across  those 
burning  sands  and  that  the  animals  had  to  rest  and  to 
be  fed.  When  the  journey  was  resumed  Saul  urged  his 
horse  on  so  fast  that  the  guide  came  up  with  him  and 
remonstrated. 

‘‘The  sun  will  beat  down  on  us  across  this  plain,  so 
that  we  will  all  be  exhausted  and  our  animals  unable  to 


192 


THE  VALLEY  OF  SHADOWS 


carry  us  through/^  said  the  guide.  ‘‘You  must  not 
try  to  go  faster  than  I  permit.  Your  horse  is  even  now 
growing  weary.” 

So  slowly  did  they  seem  to  move,  notwithstanding 
hour  upon  hour  of  travel,  that  the  great  peaks  of  the 
Lebanons  apparently  stood  as  closely  over  them  as  in 
the  early  morning.  The  sun  was  high  in  the  heavens 
and  beat  down  in  fierce,  burning  rays  through  the  clear 
sky;  the  rocks  along  the  way  looked  as  if  they  had  been 
scorched  to  blackness  by  the  sun’s  rays,  and  the  yellow 
hills  to  the  east  stood  out  as  if  they  had  been  cast  from 
bronze  by  the  heat  for  sentinels  of  the  desert. 

The  air  quivered  from  the  heat;  in  the  distance,  to 
the  north,  was  a  shadowy  line  of  darker  hue,  marking 
the  course  of  the  Abana  flowing  down  from  the  snowy 
Lebanons  to  the  oasis  of  Damascus. 

“Could  we  not  push  forward  a  little  faster  and  reach 
water  before  nightfall  ?”  Saul  asked  the  guide. 

“We  will  reach  a  good  camping  place,  if  we  do  not 
overdrive  our  animals,”  the  guide  replied. 

While  his  horse  plodded  along,  Saul  raged  over  the 
slow  progress  and  planned  how  he  would  carry  out  his 
campaign  in  Damascus.  His  life  had  not  been  spent  in 
the  hills;  he  missed  the  people  of  the  city;  the  glittering 
wastes,  dancing  in  the  heat  waves,  oppressed  him.  The 
dulness  he  had  found  in  the  small- town  rabbis  and 
magistrates  made  him  angry;  the  complaisant  hospitality 
of  the  local  people  he  had  met  irritated  him.  Their 
world  was  so  small  that  they  cared  little  about  the  results 
of  great  movements.  Even  the  tolerance  of  Gamaliel  came 
back  to  him  as  annoying,  and  he  reasoned  that  he  had  done 
the  right  thing  in  going  counter  to  such  forbearance. 


DARKNESS  TO  LIGHT 


193 


Saul  felt  disappointed  in  failing  to  send  back  more 
prisoners;  but,  he  reasoned  to  himself,  he  would  gather 
in  great  numbers  of  those  fleeing  to  Damascus  and  stamp 
out  the  foolish  teachings  of  the  Way.  He  congratulated 
himself  that  in  Damascus  he  would  have  them  as  the 
fowler  held  his  captives  in  a  net.  He  would  bring  them 
in  fear  to  the  judgment,  begging  for  mercy,  these  deluded 
followers  of  the  good-natured,  misguided  man  of  starve¬ 
ling  Galilee.  He  urged  his  horse  forward,  leading  the 
cavalcade.  No  breath  of  air  was  stirring;  his  lips  were 
dry  and  impatiently  he  hurried  on,  when  he  heard  the 
guide  coming  forward  to  check  him  once  more.  He 
felt  that  the  guide,  like  all  men  and  conditions,  sought  to 
restrain  him.  He  was  resolved  to  press  on.  No  one 
should  detain  him. 

The  bright  sun  was  instantly  shut  out.  Saul’s  head 
dropped  on  his  breast.  He  was  falling  from  his  horse 
just  as  the  guide  came  alongside  and  caught  him,  so  as 
to  let  him  down  gently.  Others  hastened  up  and  lifted 
Saul’s  head,  to  relieve  him.  His  face  was  bloodless.  His 
open  eyes  were  set  in  a  gaze  that  seemed  to  the  guards 
as  if  he  were  in  a  trance.  For  a  little  while  Saul  was 
immovable,  his  limbs  rigid  and  cold;  then  he  looked  into 
the  sky,  over  which  floated  a  few  scattered  small  clouds 
and,  reaching  out  his  hands,  he  strove  to  lift  his  head.  His 
parted  lips  and  intensely  staring  eyes  frightened  his 
companions.  They  lifted  his  head  a  little  higher  and 
propped  him  up  with  their  coats.  A  Temple  guard 
hurried  up  with  a  water  bottle  and  sought  to  give  him 
a  drink,  but  Saul  brushed  it  aside,  holding  up  his  hand 
in  token  of  silence.  All  the  time  Saul’s  eyes  were  fixed 
on  one  spot  where  was  floating  a  filmy  cloud,  to  him  alone 


194 


THE  VALLEY  OF  SHADOWS 


a  vision  of  ineffable  love,  shining  into  his  eyes  above  the 
brightness  of  the  sun. 

Sitting  up,  without  taking  his  eyes  from  the  place  in 
the  sky  on  which  they  had  been  fixed,  Saul  called  out 
in  a  loud  voice : 

“Who  art  thou.  Lord?” 

The  guards  heard  only  an  unintelligible  sound  as  if 
in  reply,  but  Saul  heard  a  remarkable  message,  a  wonder¬ 
ful  message,  which  he  repeated  over  and  over  to  wonder¬ 
ing  multitudes,  to  proud  Pharisees,  to  barbarians,  to 
scholars,  even  to  slaves,  to  howling  mobs,  to  rulers  of  tho 
people,  and  sent  it  echoing  along  the  centuries: 

“I  am  Jesus,  whom  thou  persecutest.” 

It  was  the  stupendous  event.  From  it  flowed  anew 
life,  filled  with  the  spirit  of  sweet  reasonableness.  Saul 
had  been  in  the  divine  presence.  He  had  seen  face  to 
face  his  Lord  and  Master.  He  had  become  acquainted 
with  infinite  Love. 

He  lay  for  a  long  time  gazing  into  the  heavens,  after 
the  vision  had  gone,  as  if  by  his  concentration  to  call  it 
back;  but  he  knew  from  the  revelation  that  he  must  go 
on  his  way  and  it  would  be  told  him  what  to  do.  He 
reached  out  his  hand  for  help  to  rise  and,  being  hfted 
to  his  feet,  he  found  he  could  not  see.  His  companions 
led  him  to  his  horse  and  helped  him  to  mount.  While 
they  led  his  horse  the  rest  of  the  way,  Saul  in  darkness 
pondered  the  wonderful  thing  that  had  come  to  him. 

In  Damascus  the  word  spread  rapidly  among  the 
fugitives  that  Saul  had  come,  but  that  he  was  helpless. 
A  woman  waited  on  him,  but  he  would  neither  eat  nor 
drink.  For  three  days  she  heard  him  mumbling  peni¬ 
tent  prayers,  and  she  heard  him  frequently  repeating 


DARKNESS  TO  LIGHT 


195 


the  name  of  Jesus,  to  whom  he  addressed  his  supplica¬ 
tions  as  ‘‘Lord  Jesus.’'  She  was  one  of  the  followers  of 
the  Way  and  hastened  to  tell  a  devout  old  patriarch, 
one  Ananias,  about  it. 

“I  have  heard  of  him,”  said  Ananias,  in  reply  to  the 
woman’s  third  report  to  him,  “that  he  did  much  evil  to 
the  saints  in  Jerusalem,  and  that  he  came  here  to  follow 
up  his  persecutions.  Still  I  doubt  him.” 

“You  should  hear  his  piteous  pleadings  to  the  Lord 
Jesus  for  forgiveness,”  said  the  woman.  “He  neither 
eats  nor  drinks,  and  he  is  blinded.” 

“Offer  him  food,”  said  Ananias,  “and,  if  he  refuse  it, 
offer  him  drink;  and,  if  he  refuse  drink  also,  ask  him  what 
he  would  have.  Ask  him  if  he  would  go  into  a  house  of 
one  who  believes  on  the  same  Jesus.  I  will  commune  on 
the  matter  and  wait  your  answer.” 

Ananias  spent  a  long  time  in  communion  with  his 
Lord  over  the  question  and  knew  that  the  answer  was 
for  him  to  go  and  lead  the  man  aright. 

“When  I  talked  to  him  after  the  manner  you  said,” 
the  woman  told  him  hurriedly,  after  she  had  again  seen 
Saul,  “he  would  not  let  me  go  until  I  led  him  into  such 
a  place  as  you  would  desire  him  to  be.  When  I  told 
him  about  you,  he  charged  me  if  I  loved  my  Lord,  that 
I  bring  you  quickly.  He  is  so  eager  to  hear  you  that  he 
trembles  in  his  anxiety,  lest  you  may  be  delayed,  and 
refuses  drink  and  food  until  he  sees  you.” 

When  Ananias  came  into  the  room,  Saul,  reaching  out 
his  hands  gropingly  finally  touched  the  cloak  of  the 
patriarch.  Seizing  it,  he  pulled  Ananias  down  by  his 
side.  Eagerly  he  grasped  every  word  the  kindly  old 
patriarch  spoke. 


196 


THE  VALLEY  OF  SHADOWS 


‘‘But  can  he  forgive  me?”  Saul  cried  out,  after 
Ananias  had  told  of  the  wonderful  mercy  that  had  been 
shown  to  others. 

“He  is  Eternal  Love,  and  I  am  sent  to  tell  you  about 
him  and  the  things  you  may  do,  if  you  love  and  obey 
him.” 

Ananias  gave  the  message  as  if  every  word  were  a 
precious  jewel,  to  be  weighed  and  valued  by  itself. 

“With  all  my  heart  and  soul  and  mind  I  do  believe 
and  will  obey,”  said  Saul. 

“Jesus  who  appeared  to  thee  in  the  way,”  said 
Ananias,  rising  and  laying  his  hand  on  Saul’s  head,  as 
if  he  were  a  child,  “hath  sent  me  that  thou  mayest  receive 
thy  sight  and  be  filled  with  the  Holy  Spirit.” 

Looking  up  at  Ananias,  Saul  found  that  the  darkness 
had  gone  and  light  was  everywhere.  He  followed 
Ananias  and  insisted  on  conforming  at  once  to  all  or¬ 
dinances  which  were  required  of  other  followers  of  the 
Way. 


PART  V 


Meditation  and  Preparation 


CHAPTER  XXV 
IN  ARABIA 


Under  the  kindly  care  of  Ananias,  Saul  was  refreshed 
and  restored  in  mind  and  body.  He  spent  days  listening 
to  the  story,  from  the  lips  of  the  old  patriarch,  of  the 
interesting  life  of  the  man  and  teacher,  Jesus  of  Nazareth. 
Even  the  miracles  which  he  had  performed  seemed  to 
Saul  more  an  exhibition  of  Divine  Love  than  of  super¬ 
natural  power;  at  least,  the  end  attained  always  seemed 
to  be  the  one  objective  toward  which  all  the  teaching 
tended,  love  of  fellow-men  and  of  God. 

Saul  did  not  see  in  the  miracles  any  doubt  of  the 
power  necessary  to  perform  them,  but  he  marveled 
greatly  that  everyone  exalted  the  principle  of  Divine 
Love  rather  than  the  display  of  power.  From  this  he 
passed  on  in  his  contemplation  to  consider  the  person¬ 
ality  of  Jesus,  and  found  that  in  his  life  there  was  not 
any  demarcation  between  the  display  of  this  wonderful 
love  and  the  claims  of  his  being  the  one  sent  to  win  men 
back  to  the  great  fact  that  God  is  spirit  and  must  be 
worshiped  in  spirit  and  in  truth.  He  was  astonished  to 
find  that  the  old  truths  contained  the  principle  for  which 
Jesus  labored;  only  now  it  was  clear  to  Saul  that  the 
narrow  vision  of  men  had  built  around  the  old  truths 
insurmountable  barriers,  which  prevented  devout  men 
from  coming  to  a  full  understanding  of  the  revelation  of 
truth  by  the  life  of  Jesus. 

Saul,  in  his  awakening,  learned  that  these  teachings 
of  the  Way  set  aside  the  casuistry  of  the  priesthood; 


199 


200 


MEDITATION  AND  PREPARATION 


that  by  this  life  given  in  humiliating  sacrifice  came  the 
assurance  of  the  resurrection,  beyond  the  mere  philo¬ 
sophical  hypothesis  of  clever  thinkers.  The  clouds  were 
swept  away  by  the  simple  story  of  that  most  interesting 
life;  and  men,  untrained  in  logic,  unlearned  in  the 
intricacies  of  legends,  were  able  to  speak  with  convincing 
power  of  the  certainty  of  salvation  and  of  fife  everlasting. 

Ananias  carefully  repeated  many  of  the  teachings  of 
Jesus,  and  Saul,  with  his  life- trained  memory,  quickly 
rehearsed  them  and  treasured  them. 

‘^Are  there  any  records  of  his  sayings?”  Saul  asked. 

^‘No.  Strange  as  it  may  seem  to  you,  he  gave  freely 
of  his  spirit,  but  gave  little  concern  to  form,”  said 
Ananias.  ^^We  have  his  Hfe,  his  love,  his  sacrifice,  and 
his  promise.  Many  of  those  who  walked  with  him  are 
or  were  in  Jerusalem.”  Ananias  paused,  and  in  silence 
looked  on  Saul. 

^‘Miserable  is  my  life  for  the  wrongs  I  have  done,  not 
knowing  they  were  evil,”  said  Saul. 

“  Grieve  not,  but  rejoice  that  even  now  the  revelation 
of  the  truth  has  come  to  you,”  said  Ananias,  with  all  the 
tenderness  of  forgiveness.  “They  will  gladly  receive 
you.  I  was  about  to  say  that  those  who  walked  with 
him  are  in  Jerusalem,  and  we,  who  are  so  far  away, 
zealously  treasure  any  word  he  spoke.  The  time  and 
place  that  he  uttered  a  saying  can  be  remembered,  but 
it  is  his  spirit  in  our  lives  that  shows  us  the  way  to  receive 
his  promises  and  how  to  five  close  to  God.” 

“Will  you  again  tell  me  the  story,”  said  Saul,  “that 
I  may  not  miss  any  part  of  it  ?” 

“I  will  gladly  repeat  it  until  you  are  sure  you  have 
all  that  has  come  to  me,  and  just  as  I  received  it,”  said 


IN  ARABIA 


201 


Ananias,  “but  he  did  not  give  it  as  a  formula.  He  gave 
his  life  to  redeem  men.” 

Ananias  did  not  weary  in  retelling  the  story,  but  Saul 
often  interrupted  to  say  that  the  revelation  he  had 
already  received  had  made  things  plain. 

A  sweet  peace  came  to  Saul,  such  as  he  had  never 
known.  His  grief  was  absorbed  in  the  revelation  which 
he  had  received.  The  mystery,  the  meaning,  the 
magnitude  of  the  manifestation,  the  revelations  of 
power  and  of  love  overwhelmed  him.  In  deepest 
thought  he  tried  to  adjust  himself  to  the  marvelous 
simplicity  of  a  love  greater  than  the  world  had  ever 
known. 

The  radical  change  in  his  viewpoint  gave  him  anxiety 
lest  ever  again  error  should  rule  in  his  heart.  If  worthy 
of  such  miraculous  display,  then,  he  reasoned  to  him¬ 
self,  he  should  devote  himself  to  the  spreading  of  the 
knowledge  he  had  obtained  among  the  sons  of  men. 
Heretofore  he  had  dealt  with  such  problems  of  life  as 
depended  upon  his  personal  efforts  to  solve.  Now, 
there  was  a  new  question:  the  solution  of  the  life  here 
and  hereafter,  from  the  exalted  plane  of  his  direct  contact 
with  the  Eternal  One,  who  had  given  him  the  message 
to  be  carried  to  others. 

Saul  felt  the  responsibility  that  had  come  to  him  and, 
feeling  that  responsibility,  he  felt  the  need  of  being  sure 
that  he  was  a  capable  messenger.  Association  with 
men  who  knew  Jesus  would  not  help,  for  his  mission  had 
come  from  a  higher  authority. 

In  solitude  and  contemplation  Saul  resolved  to  become 
a  fit  instrument  for  the  boundless  work.  He  wrote  and 
dispatched  a  letter  to  his  family: 


202 


MEDITATION  AND  PREPARATION 


To  Ben  Hanan  and  Deborah,  my  beloved  parents,  from  Saul, 
their  son.  The  Blessings  of  eternal  life  be  on  you.  I  have  had 
the  most  wonderful  experience,  which  has  changed  my  whole 
manner  of  life,  but  it  is  not  possible  to  tell  you  in  this  letter  from 
Damascus.  I  desire  that  in  time  you  may  know  the  great  joy 
that  has  come  to  me  and  the  life-task  before  me.  Shortly  I  go 
into  some  out-of-the-way  place  which  I  do  not  now  know,  and 
will  remain  there  for  a  period,  the  length  of  which  I  do  not  know; 
but  rest  assured  that  all  is  well  with  me.  After  such  time  as  may 
be  determined  by  circumstances  and  a  power  higher  than  we  are, 
I  will  return  to  you.  My  former  admonition  to  David  is  renewed. 
I  would  have  you  give  my  love,  greater  than  ever  before,  to  all 
the  family  and  friends.  Saul 

After  days  of  conversation  with  Ananias  and  those 
he  found  in  Damascus  of  the  Way,  Saul  joined  a  caravan 
for  the  peninsula  of  Sinai.  The  caravan  turned  aside 
from  the  usual  route  to  deliver  merchandise  in  the 
strange  city  of  Petra,  surrounded  by  sandstone  cliffs  and 
reached  only  by  a  tortuous  passage  through  the  clefts  of 
the  rocks.  In  times  long  past,  temples  and  tombs  had 
been  hewn  in  the  face  of  the  pink-colored  cliffs.  The 
dwellers  had  little  communication  with  the  outside  world, 
save  as  herdsmen  came  in  from  the  surrounding  plains 
and  mountains,  or  when,  on  rare  occasions,  a  caravan 
came  in  with  merchandise.  It  suited  Saul’s  mood  to 
sojourn  in  this  solitude,  among  these  simple  people. 

Saul  found  among  these  strange  people  the  rehcs  of 
older  rehgions  and  a  mixture  of  many  forms  of  worship. 
In  their  superstition  they  had  adopted  a  few  modern 
ideas  that  had  come  to  them  from  the  Greeks  and  from 
the  schools  of  Alexandria  so  that  it  was  not  possible  to 
say  of  what  belief  they  were,  nor  to  find  any  fundamental 
theory  in  their  scheme  of  thinking.  The  sandstone  walls 


IN  ARABIA 


203 


were  an  insuperable  barrier  to  enemies  and  hid  the  city 
from  those  who  did  not  know  the  narrow  entrance  to 
this  isolated  habitation. 

He  found  that  there  was  a  good  demand  for  tents  and 
immediately  went  to  work  at  his  trade.  He  would  often 
spend  much  of  the  day  in  deep  thought,  such  as  to  cause 
the  natives  to  fear  that  he  was  possessed  of  evil  spirits. 
One  old  man,  an  authority  among  these  people,  was 
brave  enough  to  venture  into  the  workroom,  while  Saul 
sat  in  one  of  his  trancelike  states,  and  to  interrupt  him. 

“The  man  who  thinks  much  to  himself  is  either 
dangerous  to  himself  or  has  much  to  be  forgiven;  or  per¬ 
chance  a  great  grief  will  rob  a  man  of  his  interest  in  the 
things  about  him,’’  said  the  patriarch,  Amur  ben  Hassen, 
to  Saul. 

“I  know  that  my  ways  seem  strange  to  you,”  Saul 
replied,  “but  I  have  much  to  think  out  and  much  to  solve. 
My  griefs  are  past,  but  it  will  take  me  a  long  time  to 
readjust  myself  to  a  wonderful  vision  which  I  had;  and 
I  have  come  here  to  think  it  all  out.  Do  you  have  any 
confidence  in  visions?” 

“I  did  not  until  I  heard  Philo  speaking  in  Alexandria 
the  last  time  I  was  there,”  said  Ben  Hassen.  “He  made 
it  plain  that  there  are  visions  and  dreams  which  should 
be  studied  and  interpreted,  not  by  any  rules  of  sooth¬ 
sayers,  but  by  meditation  of  the  one  to  whom  they  have 
come.” 

“Philo  is  a  great  thinker,”  Saul  replied,  “but  he 
seemed  to  me  to  spend  much  of  his  time  trying  to  accom¬ 
modate  the  Jewish  religion  to  Greek  thought  instead  of 
bringing  the  Greek  mind  to  accept  the  truth  of  the  Lord 
God.” 


204 


MEDITATION  AND  PREPARATION 


^‘Then  I  take  it  your  vision  had  something  to  do  with 
your  religion,”  Amur  ben  Hassen  said,  after  a  long  pause. 

‘‘Some  day  I  will  tell  you  about  it,”  said  Saul. 
“Just  now  it  is  too  sacred  to  discuss,  until  it  has  been 
interpreted,  as  you  say  Philo  suggests.  I  wish  I  might 
have  heard  him.” 

“I  expect  shortly  to  have  a  copy  of  his  work,”  said 
Ben  Hassen,  “because  I  arranged  with  a  scribe  to  make 
me  a  copy  and  some  day  it  will  be  here.” 

“And  what  interests  you  so  much  in  his  work?” 
Saul  asked. 

“All  my  life  I  have  tried  to  think  out  God,”  said  Ben 
Hassen  with  the  far-away  look  of  a  seer.  “It  seemed  to 
me  that  Philo’s  work  might  help  me.  So  you  can  now 
understand  why  it  is  that  I  want  to  become  your  friend.” 

During  the  passing  days  Saul  found  plenty  of  work 
to  occupy  his  time.  The  glorious  nights  became  more 
and  more  his  hours  of  reflection.  The  clear  air  of  the 
desert  hfted  him  closer  to  the  stars;  the  solemn  stillness 
permitted  the  voices  of  meditation  to  become  sweetly 
audible.  He  felt  that  the  great  walls  surrounding  the 
city  were  the  walls  of  a  new  temple,  in  which  the  altar 
of  sacrifice  and  ceremonials  had  been  taken  away,  so  that 
he  could  commune  with  the  heavens  themselves.  Not 
only  was  he  in  harmony  with  the  Psalmist  who  lifted  his 
eyes  to  the  hills  whence  came  his  help,  but  he  lifted  his 
eyes  to  the  heavens,  where  dwelt  Love,  reaching  out  to 
him  and  to  any  man  a  helping  hand. 

His  vision,  the  story  told  by  Ananias,  his  years  of 
schooling  under  the  law,  the  ages  of  preparation  of  his 
people,  the  dark  ignorance  of  the  world  outside  the  be- 
Hevers  in  Jehovah,  the  ritualism  that  had  been  satisfac- 


IN  ARABIA 


205 


tory  to  him  and  which  was  sacred  devotion  to  the  great 
body  of  Jews,  the  bitterness  and  selfishness  of  aU  people, 
led  him  to  the  true  conception  of  the  deep  significance  of 
the  life  of  the  Son  of  Man.  As  the  days  passed,  there  grew 
in  his  mind  a  firm  opinion  and  a  spiritual  conviction  that 
there  had  been  shown  to  the  world  the  way  for  man  to 
lay  hold  on  the  peace  of  mind  that  comes  to  him  who 
knows  that  it  is  well  with  his  soul  and  his  God. 

He  had  a  curious  experience  in  the  course  of  his 
meditations.  In  the  light  of  his  newly  acquired  knowl¬ 
edge,  he  reviewed  the  trial  of  Stephen  and  the  part  he 
had  taken  in  the  martyr’s  death.  He  sought  to  make 
plain  to  himself  that  he  had  to  bear  a  full  share  of  the 
guilt.  Yet  the  grace  that  had  been  shown  him  and  the 
voices  of  his  meditation  banished  any  sense  of  guilt. 
He  knew  the  wrong  that  had  been  done  by  him,  not  only 
to  Stephen,  but  to  the  lowly  and  sincere  followers  of  the 
Way;  and,  nevertheless,  his  exalted  vision  of  the  affairs 
of  the  new  life  forgave  the  deluded  zeal  with  which  he 
had  acted,  on  condition  that  he  would  extend  to  others 
the  same  generous  forgiveness  which  he  had  received. 

In  this  soul-searching  investigation  Saul  concluded 
that  the  scheme  of  love  newly  manifested  among  men 
was  something  more  than  kindness  to  men  and  forgiveness 
of  wrongs;  it  was  the  very  spirit  of  Jesus  in  the  heart. 

The  mere  physical  life  of  Jesus  was  not  of  much 
concern  to  Saul;  that  was  merely  a  man’s  life,  but  the 
spirit  that  so  permeated  every  act  of  Jesus  as  to  point 
to  the  Supreme  Source  of  love  fastened  in  his  mind  the 
authenticity  of  the  claims  of  Jesus  that  he  and  the  Father 
were  one,  renewing  in  striking  distinctness  the  force  and 
meaning  of  the  midday  vision.  At  times  he  was  so 


2o6 


MEDITATION  AND  PREPARATION 


filled  with  the  beauty  and  simplicity  of  the  truth  which 
had  flooded  his  soul  that  he  was  almost  resolved  to  return 
at  once  and  proclaim  to  the  Jews  in  Jerusalem  the  things 
of  which  he  had  been  a  witness.  When  he  visuahzed 
the  misguided  zeal  with  which  he  had  urged  the  Sanhedrin 
on  to  action,  he  reahzed  that  he  had  represented  the 
desire  of  others,  and  that  he  must  prepare  himself  to  the 
fullest  extent  to  pass  through  severe  trials  and  perhaps 
persecutions.  As  the  days  of  his  exile  grew,  so  his 
inspiration  led  him  to  such  lofty  heights  that  he  could  not 
in  words  of  common  experience  tell  the  wonders  he  beheld. 

The  old  patriarch,  Amur  ben  Hassen,  would  sit 
silently  through  long  hours  in  the  shop,  while  Saul  worked 
and  pondered,  the  highest  and  most  delicate  evidence  of 
friendship.  They  sometimes  walked  at  night  to  some  of 
the  lofty  stone  platforms  against  the  face  of  the  cHffs, 
where  there  had  been,  in  ages  gone  by,  altars  of  sacrifice. 
In  the  moonlight  they  would  sit  in  silent  communion, 
looking  up  to  the  star-bedecked  canopy,  as  if  they  were 
priests  waiting  a  voice  out  of  the  heavens.  In  a  way 
they  did  hear  voices,  that  is,  they  sought  and  found 
revelation. 

Saul  had  told  the  story  of  his  vision  on  the  way  to 
Damascus  and  had  told  Ben  Hassen  the  purpose  of 
Jesus  among  men,  and  what  that  life  meant  to  the  world; 
and  Ben  Hassen  believed  it,  with  the  reservation  that 
it  all  seemed  so  simple  that  it  was  hard  to  understand 
that  God  would  do  things  with  no  greater  demonstration 
of  his  unlimited  power.  The  books  had  come  and  Saul 
eagerly  and  somewhat  impatiently  read  them. 

Philo  is  only  trying  to  build  a  system  out  of  dis¬ 
jointed  parts,”  Saul  explained  to  Ben  Hassen.  ‘Ht  is 


IN  ARABIA 


207 


as  if  lie  had  taken  a  stone  shaped  for  the  Temple  in 
Jerusalem  and  sought  to  build  it  in  with  stones  taken  from 
the  Parthenon  and  the  heathen  pillars  from  Baalbek, 
to  make  a  substantial  and  beautiful  structure.  It  is 
essentially  a  man-made  system.  It  lacks  the  simplicity 
and  beauty  and  perpetuity  of  the  Divine  Plan.” 

‘‘I  thought  while  listening  to  him,”  said  Ben  Hassen, 
‘That  it  was  all  very  wonderful;  but  since  you  have  told 
me  the  other  story  my  mind  is  not  satisfied  with  it.  I 
wish  now  that  I  had  the  load  of  spice  I  gave  to  have  it 
copied.  Still,  his  treatment  of  dreams  is  worth  a  great 
deal.” 

“He  shows  that  he  never  had  any  visions,”  said  Saul. 
“A  man  knows  the  difference  between  a  dream  and  a 
vision,  and  once  a  man  has  a  vision  he  can  so  ponder  on 
it  that  great  things  will  come.  A  dream  comes  when  the 
mind  is  lost  in  slumber  and  unloosed  fancy  jumbles  the 
impressions  in  unrelated  connections.  To  depend  on 
the  interpretation  of  dreams  mixes  the  judgment  of  a 
man  with  vain  fancies.” 

Before  Saul  left  Petra,  Ben  Hassen  had  become  a 
convert  to  SauPs  teaching  and  in  his  own  way  taught  the 
new  doctrine  to  his  people. 

In  the  solitude  of  the  desert  Saul  had  for  two  and  a 
half  years  pondered  the  great  experience  that  had  come 
to  him  and  the  teaching  he  had  received  from  Ananias. 
He  had  readjusted  his  method  of  reasoning  and  life  in 
harmony  with  the  revelations  and  the  knowledge  sacredly 
committed  to  him.  He  returned  to  Damascus  to  take 
up  a  new  life,  or  rather,  to  live  out  a  life  that  would  be  in 
conflict  with  his  former  teachings,  although  he  held  it 
to  be  a  fulfilment  of  them. 


CHAPTER  XXVI 
REJECTED  OF  MEN 

Saul  found  it  more  difficult  to  get  out  of  Petra  than 
it  had  been  to  get  in.  After  long  waiting,  he  heard  of 
a  caravan  which  would  pass  on  the  main- traveled  road 
on  its  return  from  the  gulf  to  Damascus;  and  he  was 
compelled  to  camp  on  the  main  road  for  several  days  to 
meet  the  caravan.  Ananias  welcomed  him  on  his  return, 
and  immediately  Saul  plunged  into  the  warmest  con¬ 
troversies  in  the  synagogues.  Many  followers  of  the 
Way  held  aloof  from  him,  because  they  feared  that  it 
was  a  plot  to  catch  them  as  prisoners  for  his  persecution. 
While  they  could  not  question  the  soundness  of  his  views, 
they  could  not  at  first  believe  that  he  had  so  changed  as 
to  be  trusted. 

In  his  boldness  and  new-found  zeal,  Saul  sought  to 
win  the  Jews  to  the  new  teaching.  In  the  midst  of  his 
most  earnest  discourses  some  Jew  would  spit  out  epithets 
such  as  ‘Traitor,”  “turn-coat,”  and  “apostate.”  With 
patience  and  earnestness  he  tried  to  convince  those 
interrupting  him  of  the  truth  as  he  saw  it.  He  was  so 
well  grounded  in  all  the  Scriptures  and  lore  of  the  Jews 
that  they  were  confounded  when  they  tried  to  meet  his 
arguments.  He  was  winning  many  from  among  them 
to  his  message  and  relentlessly  drove  his  opponents  into 
comers,  from  which  the  only  replies  were  taunts.  His 
enemies  became  active  in  attending  his  meetings  and 
spitting  out — literally — their  hatred  upon  him.  His 
friends  rallied  to  his  side,  for  the  followers  of  the  Way 

208 


REJECTED  OF  MEN 


209 


had  come  to  have  the  greatest  confidence  in  Saul.  His 
strong  personality  allowed  no  indifference  to  prevail; 
his  honesty  of  purpose  and  fearlessness  gathered  around 
him  devoted  friends,  or  made  implacable  enemies. 

After  weeks  of  his  activity  the  Jews  determined  to 
drive  Saul  out  or  to  slay  him.  They  went  to  the 
ethnarch,  or  governor,  of  the  city  with  stories  that  this 
man  Saul,  who  had  been  sent  to  take  the  followers  of  the 
Way  back  to  Jerusalem  so  as  to  remove  any  danger  of 
revolt,  had,  for  some  reason,  turned  traitor  and  was  now 
a  leader  of  the  men  who  were  stirring  up  trouble  that 
would  lead  to  revolt.  They  received  authority  to  take 
him. 

^Hf  in  taking  this  wild  fellow,”  said  the  ethnarch, 
‘Tt  should  become  necessary  to  take  his  life  in  overcom¬ 
ing  him,  then  your  commission  will  free  you  of  any 
charge.” 

“He  may  try  to  escape  us,  once  he  hears  that  we  seek 
him,”  said  the  leader  of  the  Jews  who  had  come  to  make 
the  complaint. 

A  slave  in  the  household  of  the  ethnarch  was  listening. 

“In  that  case,”  said  the  ethnarch,  “you  may  set 
watches  at  all  the  gates  and  I  will  send  word  to  the 
captain  of  my  guards  to  help  you.” 

“Go  to  my  captain,”  said  the  ethnarch,  speaking  to 
the  slave,  “and  tell  him  strictly  all  I  have  said,  and  that 
the  watch  must  be  set  at  once.” 

The  Jews  immediately  put  their  own  men  on 
watch  and  the  slave  hastened  to  deliver  his  master’s 
message  to  the  captain  of  the  guard;  but  on  the  way  he 
repeated  the  news  to  Ananias,  who  called  a  meeting  of 
the  leaders.  They  resolved  that  Saul  should  be  sent 


210 


MEDITATION  AND  PREPARATION 


out  of  the  city  at  once.  One  of  the  converts,  a  guard, 
lived  in  a  house  on  top  of  the  city  wall;  and  it  was 
arranged  that  at  midnight  Saul  should  be  let  down  from 
the  guard’s  house  by  a  rope  outside  the  walls.  In  the 
shrubbery  near  a  bridge  a  horse  was  concealed,  on 
which  he  could  make  his  escape  to  Jerusalem. 

In  the  dark  night  Saul  was  let  down  outside  the  walls 
and  found  the  horse  and  supplies.  On  his  journey  over 
the  road  which  had  been  forbidding  to  him  the  last  time 
he  had  passed  that  way,  fretful  and  angry,  Saul’s  thoughts 
now  turned  to  peaceful  contemplation  of  the  world  opened 
to  his  vision.  The  great  distances  now  were  small,  in 
comparison  with  the  sweep  of  his  plans;  the  snow- 
crowned  Lebanons,  in  their  majesty,  fitted  in  harmoni¬ 
ously  with  the  magnitude  and  the  message  of  Jesus. 
Saul  found  that  the  towns,  valleys,  and  hills  along  the 
Jordan,  familiar  to  Jesus,  now  emphasized,  by  their 
very  ordinary  appearance,  the  great  love  of  man  and  the 
spiritual  consecration  of  the  Great  Teacher,  who  sought 
men  with  hearts  and  souls,  burdens  and  discouragements. 
While  passing  the  place  of  the  execution  of  Stephen,  near 
Jerusalem,  he  recalled  the  gentle  words  of  the  martyr 
and  saw  anew,  in  a  glorified  halo  cast  by  the  setting  sun, 
the  rapture  on  Stephen’s  face  when  the  executing  priests 
were  about  to  cast  the  fatal  stones. 

While  his  sister  and  Ben  Gerber  were  warm  in  their 
greetings,  they  had  an  air  of  reserve  which  seemed  to  chill 
their  reception.  Saul  felt  that  it  was  not  the  time  to 
tell  his  story  to  them,  that  he  came  to  win  their  hearts 
by  his  glad  tidings  and  not  through  their  pity  for  him. 
He  hunted  up  the  disciples,  again  meeting  openly,  and 
tried  to  join  in  their  assemblage;  but  many,  recognizing 


REJECTED  OF  MEN 


2II 


him,  drew  away  in  silence  and  fear.  He  told  them  of 
the  great  work  he  had  been  doing  in  Damascus  for  the 
Way  and  how  he  had  been  driven  forth.  Still  they  did 
not  trust  him.  The  cold  manner  of  the  disciples  was 
anguish  to  his  soul.  He  was  going  out  of  the  synagogue, 
drooping  with  sorrow,  when  he  felt  a  hand  on  his  shoulder, 
and,  turning  around,  he  beheld  the  kindly  face  of 
Barnabas. 

believe  in  you,”  said  Barnabas.  ‘^Come  with 
me  and  tell  me  all  about  what  has  happened.” 

In  the  house  where  many  of  the  disciples  were  living 
Saul  told  Barnabas  of  the  vision  and  the  revelations,  of 
his  sojourn  in  Arabia  and  his  experience  on  his  return 
to  Damascus. 

‘‘The  time  has  come,  Saul,  for  which  I  have  longed,” 
said  Barnabas.  “  Now  I  can  serve  you  and  you  can  serve 
our  cause.  Tomorrow  I  will  take  you  to  Peter  and 
James,  that  they  may  hear  your  story.” 

For  two  weeks  Saul  conversed  with  Peter  and  James, 
telling  them  of  his  vision  and  inspiration,  as  well  as  the 
message  that  he  would  deliver  to  the  world.  After 
listening  carefully  to  all  that  Saul  had  to  say,  the  apostles 
gave  him  their  full  approval  and  he  began  speaking  in 
the  synagogues.  While  the  Jews  were  opposed  to  him, 
they  feared  to  say  much  to  him,  because  they  knew  that 
he  might  reply  to  them  with  the  story  of  their  part  in  the 
persecutions.  They  urged  the  Greek  converts  •  to 
Judaism,  or  Hellenists,  and  those  who  had  returned  to 
Jerusalem,  to  heckle  Saul;  and  they  even  plotted  to  take 
his  life.  When  this  news  came  to  the  leaders  of  the  Way, 
they  urged  Saul  to  flee,  but  he  told  them  he  would  prefer 
to  stay  and  meet  whatever  fate  was  in  store  for  him. 


212 


MEDITATION  AND  PREPARATION 


They  became  so  insistent  that  he  believed  they  feared 
his  presence  would  bring  trouble  to  them.  He  appealed 
to  the  apostles,  and  they  urged  him  to  flee. 

“I  will  consider  until  tomorrow,”  said  Saul,  ^^and 
then  give  you  my  reply.” 

In  the  early  morning  Saul  went  to  his  favorite  spot 
in  the  Temple,  to  engage  in  devotions  and  meditation. 
He  felt  keenly  the  desire  to  send  him  away;  it  was  almost 
a  rejection  by  his  friends  of  the  Way.  To  him  the 
Temple  was  sacred;  it  was  a  place  set  apart  for  worship; 
it  was  the  outward  expression  of  the  hopes  of  Israel. 
The  Law  of  Moses  did  not  detract  from  the  character 
and  divinity  of  Jesus,  but  culminated  in  him.  To  follow 
the  established  worship  was  a  privilege  of  a  Jew  which 
he  felt  in  no  manner  destroyed  his  faith  in  the  Messiah. 

Saul  appreciated  the  worship  in  the  Temple  and  of 
Jehovah,  as  the  highest  expression  of  man’s  desire  to 
know  God.  Neither  then  nor  at  any  other  time  did  he 
forget  that  as  a  Jew  he  was  entitled  to  worship  God, 
only  he  added  that  to  him  had  come  a  closer  communion 
with  God.  In  such  frame  of  mind  he  spent  a  long  while 
at  his  devotions,  seeking  thereby  to  solve  the  question 
of  whether  he  should  stay  and  take  the  consequences,  or 
follow  the  advice  of  his  brethren  of  the  Way. 

With  the  bursting  of  the  dawn  upon  the  Temple  there 
came  to  Saul  a  better  understanding.  If  he  stayed,  he 
would  stir  up  trouble  before  a  knowledge  of  his  purpose 
to  serve  faithfully  had  been  fully  established  among  the 
followers  of  the  Way.  If  he  left,  in  Tarsus  he  would 
receive  the  schooling  of  patience  and  learn  the  lessons  of 
tolerance  in  meeting  his  own  family  and  former  associates. 
Then  it  came  to  him  that  his  zeal  had  a  slight  touch  of 


REJECTED  OF  MEN 


213 


personal  ambition,  at  least  to  the  extent  that  he  would 
gladly  become  a  martyr,  to  no  good  effect.  The  time 
and  place  gave  him  a  revelation  of  the  spirit  of  sweet 
reasonableness  with  which  he  had  been  endowed  and 
which  he  must  show  forth  in  his  own  life.  In  Tarsus 
not  only  would  he  learn  to  bear  patiently  the  doubts  of 
his  own  family,  but  there  were  those  who  were  not 
Hebrews  to  whom  he  could  tell  the  wonderful  story,  a 
story  for  all  the  sons  of  men. 

Once  more  in  his  life  Saul’s  vision  cleared  as  if  scales 
dropped  from  his  eyes,  for  now  it  was  revealed  to  him 
that  he  would  serve  a  purpose  in  going  back  to  Tarsus; 
he  would  be  the  bearer  of  glad  tidings  to  the  Gentiles. 
The  dark  doubts  that  had  been  in  his  mind  because  his 
brethren  had  urged  him  to  leave  were  dissolved;  and 
instead  of  banishment  he  would  go  out  into  a  wider 
field — he  now  knew  that  he  would  be  the  apostle  unto 
the  Gentiles. 

With  spirits  restored,  Saul,  coming  down  the  steps 
to  the  outer  court  of  the  Temple,  met  the  same  priest 
he  had  scolded  at  the  time  of  Stephen’s  teaching  for 
being  a  listener  to  the  teachers  of  the  Way,  instead  of 
serving  in  the  Temple.  The  priest  felt  encouraged  to 
speak  to  Saul,  on  account  of  his  noticeably  jubilant  air. 

These  are  early  morning  devotions,”  said  the  priest. 
“So  early  that  those  who  will  hunt  you  today  would 
hardly  expect  you  to  be  here.” 

“I  am  not  fearful,”  said  Saul,  looking  closely  at  the 
priest.  “Would  you  report  me  ?” 

“I  would  protect  you,  since  I  know  what  you  teach,” 
said  the  priest.  “As  your  zeal  once  excelled  Gamaliel’s, 
so  now  your  faith  exceeds  his,  or  his  when  living.” 


214 


MEDITATION  AND  PREPARATION 


‘^What  are  you  saying?”  asked  Saul,  grasping  the 
priest’s  arm. 

“Did  you  not  know  he  died  last  year  ?”  said  the  priest. 

“I  did  not.  Tell  me  about  it,”  Saul  urged. 

“He  seemed  to  have  lost  all  interest  in  things  and 
his  body  shrunk  away.  His  funeral  was  peculiar,  for 
he  directed  that  none  of  the  expensive  preparations  for 
burial  should  be  indulged,  but  that  it  should  be  as  plain  a 
funeral  as  if  he  were  the  poorest  man  in  Jerusalem.  He 
even  would  not  allow  that  a  robe  should  be  provided  for 
him,  but  directed  that  the  clothes  he  wore  daily  should 
be  his  shroud.” 

“I  owe  him  much,  but  chiefly  I  would  have  asked 
forgiveness  for  thinking  that  he  was  too  lenient  with  the 
men  brought  before  the  Sanhedrin,”  said  Saul,  mourn¬ 
fully.  “He  was  a  great  and  good  man.” 

“He  was  so  tender  of  the  common  people  that  he 
sought  by  his  cheap  funeral  to  shame  the  rich,  in  their 
extravagance.  But  hasten  hence,  enemies  seek  you.” 
Saul  looked  at  him  questioningly  and  the  priest  added, 
“I  am  your  brother,  but  I  do  not  say  much  to  anyone.” 

When  Saul  met  the  disciples  that  morning  he  told 
them  that  he  was  ready  to  go  to  Tarsus. 

“I  have  come  to  trust  in  the  ways  of  my  Lord  and 
Master,”  said  Saul  to  the  leaders.  “The  word  has  come 
to  me  that  all  is  well  with  us.  Henceforth  I  shall  take 
these  glad  tidings  to  the  Gentiles  as  well  as  to  the  Jews, 
for  it  has  been  revealed  to  me  that,  with  patience  in  all 
things,  I  should  wait  the  time  and  the  season.” 

The  disciples  concealed  him  during  the  day  and  by 
night  left  the  city  to  put  him  aboard  a  boat  bound  from 
Caesarea  to  Tarsus. 


CHAPTER  XXVII 

LEARNING  PATIENCE 

Again  entering  Tarsus,  after  his  years  of  absence, 
Saul  felt  the  anguish  of  the  years  weighing  down  his 
heart.  He  returned  once  more  unannounced;  even  the 
wharf  from  which  he  had  often  sailed  reminded  him  of 
the  hopes  of  his  youth,  gone  forever;  the  family  dear  to 
his  heart  and  hallowed  by  the  observance  of  laws  and 
traditions  within  its  sacred  circle  would  hkely  be,  to 
some  extent,  embarrassed,  if  not  alienated;  then  there 
were  memories  which  he  could  not  banish — his  past  was  a 
part  of  himself  which  even  divine  power  would  not  blot  out. 

Other  passengers  eagerly  crowded  ashore  as  soon  as 
the  cables  were  fastened,  but  Saul  Lingered,  gazing  with 
anxiety  on  Tarsus.  So  heavy  was  his  heart,  so  keenly 
did  he  feel  the  disappointment  he  would  be  to  his  family 
and  friends  that  it  was  only  by  a  great  effort  that  he 
resisted  the  suggestion  of  the  captain  of  the  boat  that 
likely  he  would  wish  to  take  further  passage.  He 
marveled  at  this  timidity  as  he  wandered  almost  aim¬ 
lessly  toward  his  home.  He  had  not  known  doubt  nor 
hesitation  when  threatened  with  death  in  Damascus  and 
in  Jerusalem.  He  did  not  fear  the  scoffing  nor  the  ridi¬ 
cule  of  the  old  friends  among  the  rabbis  in  Jerusalem. 
But  now,  in  the  city  of  his  youth,  his  feet  stumbled  as  if 
lacking  a  mind  to  direct  them  on  the  way. 

What  value  would  all  his  rich  experience  have  to 
those  who  could  not  be  made  to  understand  ?  No  doubt, 
in  kindness,  his  family  and  friends  would  bear  with  him; 


215 


2i6 


MEDITATION  AND  PREPARATION 


even  now  he  plainly  saw  that  they  would  not  really  hear 
what  he  had  to  tell  them.  How  could  he  offend  the  love 
of  his  people  by  breaking  with  them  ?  Then,  as  he  neared 
the  familiar  street  leading  to  his  home,  his  soul  cried 
out  in  agony  for  more  of  the  spirit  of  sweet  reasonable¬ 
ness  with  which  to  do  and  bear  his  part  until  the  fulness 
of  the  time.  He  found  himself  lacking  in  the  applica¬ 
tion  of  the  faith  in  his  heart  to  the  everyday  life.  In 
alarm  he  found  himself  almost  doubting  the  efficiency  of 
the  love  newly  revealed  from  on  high  to  stand  the  trials 
of  life. 

The  years  had  brought  changes  in  the  appearance  of 
Saul.  He  was  now  in  his  thirty-fifth  year,  and,  in  the 
reckoning  of  the  calendar  adopted  at  a  later  time,  it  was 
36  A.D.,  making  him  about  five  years  younger  than  Jesus 
of  Galilee.  The  intense  emotions  to  which  he  had  sur¬ 
rendered  in  the  loss  of  his  wife  and  children;  the  fierce 
zeal  with  which  he  had  plunged  into  the  drive  against 
the  followers  of  the  Way;  the  shock  with  which  he  met; 
his  days  of  meditation;  the  long  period  in  Arabia — ^the 
sunburning  there  and  the  sunburning  on  his  trips  across 
the  deserts;  the  great  earnestness  with  which  he  had 
entered  the  work  of  teaching  the  new  Way  in  Jerusalem; 
the  great  disappointment  he  felt  at  being  urged  to  retire 
to  Tarsus — all  these  had  left  lines  on  his  face  which  in 
other  men  would  have  represented  many  years  of  active 
life.  His  beard  now  covered  his  face,  and  his  hair  was 
beginning  to  grow  thin  on  his  forehead.  Those  peculiar 
eyebrows  had  grown  heavier;  while  his  eyes  had  not  lost 
their  luster,  they  had  a  steadier  vision  and  seemed  to  be 
looking  into  the  very  depths  of  the  human  heart,  in 
tenderness  and  in  sympathy.  The  heavy  lines  of  his 


LEARNING  PATIENCE 


217 


face  told  a  story  of  suffering,  his  eyes  showed  the  hunger 
of  his  soul  for  companionship. 

He  found  his  brother  David  in  the  booth,  who,  in  his 
young  enthusiasm,  threw  his  arms  about  Saul  and  gave 
him  welcome.  In  the  workroom  his  father  was  superin¬ 
tending  the  craftsmen,  of  whom  there  were  several.  Ben 
Hanan  looked  Saul  over  carefully  and  then  gave  him 
hearty  welcome. 

“1  knew  that  you  would  return,”  said  Ben  Hanan. 
‘‘Go  in  and  meet  your  mother.” 

“My  son,  my  son,”  Deborah  exclaimed,  hysterically 
throwing  herself  into  his  arms. 

It  was  a  long  time  before  conversation  was  begun. 
The  mother  would  not  listen  to  anything  from  him  until 
he  had  gone  to  a  room  she  had  kept  waiting  for  him. 
There  were  his  garments  which  he  had  left  three  years 
before  and  some  of  the  things  Tabitha  had  made  for  their 
home.  He  felt  all  the  loss  of  her;  his  love  was  as  great 
as  ever  before,  but  in  his  soul  was  a  peace  that  quieted 
lamentations.  David  had  taken  up  his  home  in  the  house 
Saul  had  built  and  he  hastened  to  offer  Saul  rooms  in  it. 

“It  is  as  I  wished,”  said  Saul.  “You  continue  to 
use  it.” 

The  family  gathered  for  the  evening  meal  and  Saul 
told  the  story  of  his  life  since  he  had  been  away.  The 
ominous  silence  of  Ben  Planan,  the  quiet  and  unquestion¬ 
ing  way  in  which  the  family  listened  aroused  Saul  to 
give  more  details. 

“Has  not  this  any  interest  for  you  ?”  Saul  exclaimed. 

“Much  more  than  we  show,”  said  Ben  Hanan.  “You 
are  of  this  family  and  we  will  do  all  and  bear  all  for  your 
sake,  but  we  had  heard  much  of  this  before  you  came. 


2i8 


MEDITATION  AND  PREPARATION 


Your  place  is  here  among  us,  but  we  have  the  right  to 
urge  that  you  do  not  bring  shame  upon  us  because  of 
your  beliefs.  At  least,  I  ask  that  for  a  season  you 
refrain  from  making  these  statements  in  public,  here  in 
Tarsus.  You  have  spent  much  time  in  thinking  over 
your  experience;  now  take  some  time  in  meditation  and 
life-restoring  activities.’’ 

^‘What  I  propose  to  do,  that  I  must  do,”  said  Saul, 
‘‘but  out  of  regard  for  you  I  shall  abstain  for  a  while  from 
any  discussion;  and,  if  it  would  be  better,  I  may  leave, 
to  avoid  any  feeling  of  shame  to  you.” 

“I  could  not  endure  you  being  driven  forth,”  said 
Ben  Hanan,  noticing  the  tears  in  Deborah’s  eyes.  “We 
had  resolved  to  make  you  happy  in  this  home,  if  such 
can  be;  and  to  have  you  with  us  for  our  consolation. 
Your  mother  has  grieved  much  about  you,  and  age  has 
come  upon  me.  David  is  now  more  efficient  in  the 
business  than  ever  I  was.” 

“I  have  not  neglected  the  commandment  to  honor 
my  father  and  mother,”  said  Saul,  “and  I  will  do  all  I 
can  to  make  your  life  pleasant.” 

“Bravely  spoken,  but  I  can  see  that  your  heart  is  set 
on  other  things.”  Ben  Hanan  spoke  kindly.  “Ben 
Arza  is  so  feeble  that  he  needs  some  help;  and  at  least 
you  could  give  him  aid  in  teaching  the  young,  out  of 
regard  for  the  years  he  spent  upon  you.  Such  work  may 
help  you  in  coming  back  to  a  reasonable  view  of  life.” 

“I  would  not  have  you  think  that  I  have  become  an 
apostate,”  said  Saul.  “I  can  believe  all  that  I  was  ever 
taught  and  follow  every  law  and  rule  I  ever  learned; 
still,  I  now  know  and  believe  this  other  wonderful 
explanation  of  Hfe  and  our  purpose  in  history.  I 


LEARNING  PATIENCE 


219 


promised  you  on  our  first  trip  to  Jerusalem,  out  there 
in  the  hills,  that  if  ever  I  thought  I  learned  the  great 
meaning  of  our  long  and  strange  history,  I  would  bring 
it  to  you  for  your  thought.  I  will  remain  for  a  season 
and  it  may  be  that  you  will  consider  what  I  have  said.’’ 

‘‘Then,  the  Lord  be  praised,  you  are  not  an  outcast,” 
said  Ben  Hanan,  “but  there  is  yet  a  chance  for  your 
mind  to  become  normal.” 

In  private  talk  with  David,  it  was  agreed  between 
him  and  Saul  that  no  further  word  would  be  spoken  to 
their  father  about  the  matter  until  the  father  opened 
the  subject.  Ben  Arza  had  grown  old  rapidly  and  he 
was  glad  to  have  Saul  to  help  him.  When  Saul  wanted 
to  tell  him  about  the  Way,  the  old  rabbi  said: 

“Not  now.  My  days  are  too  few.  I  have  heard 
about  you,  but  I  could  not  argue  with  you  and  I  would 
not  listen.  I  am  living  along  through  these  days  because 
I  have  Lived  the  same  way  all  my  life,  and  shortly  the 
end  will  come.  I  am  now  ready.” 

Among  all  his  former  friends  Saul  found  a  barrier 
against  any  discussion.  They  showed  him  great  love 
and,  by  concerted  action,  treated  him  as  if  his  mind  were 
not  sound,  as  if  it  were  agreed  that  no  one  should  permit 
him  to  tell  his  story. 

There  were  many  Greeks  who  had  accepted  the  behefs 
of  the  Jews  and  who  gave  allegiance  to  the  idea  of 
Jehovah,  but  they  had  refused  to  submit  to  the  ordi¬ 
nances  and  customs  of  the  Jews;  and  they  were  commonly 
called  “God-fearers,”  sometimes  called  “Hellenists,” 
although  the  more  strict  use  of  the  latter  term  designated 
those  Jews  who  had  been  born  abroad  and  who  had 
remained  true  to  the  faith,  while  having  adapted  them- 


220 


MEDITATION  AND  PREPARATION 


selves  to  foreign  customs.  Some  of  the  “God-fearers,” 
having  heard  of  Saul’s  experience,  sought  opportunities 
to  talk  with  him  secretly.  While  wilHng  to  tell  them 
the  story,  Saul  felt  keenly  the  slight  being  put  upon  him, 
even  by  their  desire  to  hear  him  secretly.  He  chafed 
under  the  good-humored  tolerance  with  which  his  own 
people  laughingly  dismissed  any  reference  by  him  to  his 
experience.  Opposition  he  could  dare,  argument  he 
could  meet,  but  ridicule  was  unendurable.  It  was 
undermining  his  great  earnestness;  it  was  chilHng  his 
soul;  it  w^as  destroying  his  sense  of  proportion. 

P"or  a  considerable  period  of  time  Saul  took  up  the 
work  of  making  tents.  He  found  himself  restored  to  his 
faith  in  himself  and  in  his  new  cause,  while  planning 
for  action.  After  many  days  of  silence  he  began  teach¬ 
ing  for  Ben  Arza,  but  he  shrewdly  observed  that  the 
old  rabbi  would  seem  to  sleep,  while  the  classes  were 
being  heard  and  instructed ;  and  yet,  when  he  awakened 
he  was  alert,  as  if  he  had  been  pretending  sleep.  He 
wanted  to  revolt  against  this  concerted  suppression  of 
the  subject  nearest  his  heart,  but  he  accepted  it  as  a 
part  of  his  schooling  as  a  fit  messenger  to  those  who  would 
not  hear,  although  they  had  ears.  So  faithfully  did  Saul 
work  at  his  trade,  so  silent  had  he  become,  that  Ben 
Hanan  was  worried. 

“What  did  Gamaliel  say  of  these  people  teaching  the 
Way,  as  you  call  it?”  Saul’s  father  asked,  after  some 
months  had  passed. 

“He  advised  to  leave  them  alone,  and  let  it  appear 
whether  time  proved  them  right  or  wrong,”  Saul  replied. 

“That  Vv^as  a  wise  conclusion,”  said  Ben  Hanan.  “It 
is  unfortunate  that  you  did  not  follow  his  advice.  Then 


LEARNING  PATIENCE 


221 


you  would  not  have  become  so  wrought  up  as  to  lose 
your  calm  judgment,  when  you  had  your  stroke  on  the 
way  to  Damascus.” 

“I  felt  that  Gamaliel’s  judgment  was  so  conservative, 
so  finely  balanced,”  said  Saul,  with  feeling,  ^‘that  he 
could  not  see  the  danger  to  the  Jewish  faith.  Now  I  am 
convinced  that  he  saw  the  truth  as  I  have  come  to  know 
it,  but  did  not  have  the  courage  to  embrace  it.  Much 
learning  had  made  him  uncertain  of  his  ability  to  discern 
the  truth.” 

‘‘Did  this  man  Jesus  leave  any  book  of  prophecies?” 
Ben  Hanan  asked. 

“His  was  not  a  life  of  writings,  but  a  life  of  revelation 
of  the  Divine  Spirit,”  Saul  answered. 

“Now  that  you  think  over  all  the  events,”  said  Ben 
Hanan,  “do  you  not  think  it  strange  that  one  who  was 
to  be  the  fulfilment  of  prophecy  should  fail  to  announce 
himself  to  all  of  us,  so  that  there  could  be  no  doubt  that 
he  was  the  One  looked  for  ?” 

“He  did  that  in  the  divinely  grand  way  by  coming 
as  a  man,  thereby  forever  appealing  to  men,”  said  Saul. 
“He  was  a  man,  even  as  I  am,  and  made  manifest  God’s 
love  of  man,  as  well  as  the  Infinite  Grace  by  which  we 
may  become  joint  partakers  of  eternal  life.” 

“But  what  will  happen  to  men  in  their  moral  rela¬ 
tions,  if  they  are  once  led  to  believe  this  new  doctrine 
and  rely  solely  on  what  you  call  grace,  neglecting  the 
careful  living  we  enjoin  under  the  law?”  Ben  Hanan 
asked  as  if  it  were  conclusive. 

“All  that  was  required  under  the  law  as  right  living, 
and  more,  will  be  required  of  those  who  follow  him,” 
Saul  replied. 


222  MEDITATION  AND  PREPARATION 

“You  only  now  answer  my  former  question/’  said 
Ben  Hanan.  “He  left  no  writings  and  therefore  no 
laws  to  be  violated.  You  now  see  the  absurdity  that 
is  so  plain  to  me,” 

--  “All  that  is  required  as  to  a  pure  life  by  the  law,  and 
in  addition  a  life  so  pure  that  the  law  could  not  define 
it,  is  what  he  left  for  our  guidance.  His  spirit  entering 
into  our  Hves  gives  us  a  higher  standard  of  morality  than 
all  the  laws  which  were  ever  written.  For  that  reason 
I  can  live  in  obedience  to  the  law  and  yet  not  find  myself 
satisfied  with  it;  even  having  obeyed  the  Jewish  law, 
I  have  greater  inspiration  from  his  life  to  do  the  right 
and  just  thing  and  strive  to  reach  the  high  standard  set 
by  Jesus.”  Saul  was  about  to  continue  when  his  father 
waved  his  hand  in  gesture  to  cease. 

“Let  us  stop,”  said  Ben  Hanan.  “I  only  ventured 
so  much,  thinking  that  in  this  time  you  would  have 
returned  to  reason.  Again  let  it  be  understood  that  the 
subject  is  a  closed  book  in  our  household.” 

During  this  short  discussion  David  had  been  very 
busy  inspecting  cloth  close  by,  apparently  indifferent  to 
what  had  been  said. 

“I  wish  that  you  would  go  with  me  to  the  wharf,  to 
examine  some  bales  of  cloth  I  am  about  to  buy,”  said 
David  to  Saul,  after  the  father  had  left  the  room. 

“I  heard  all  that  you  said,”  David  spoke  kindly  to 
Saul  when  they  reached  the  wharf.  “You  surely  know 
that  father  has  advanced  so  far  in  years  and  has  had  his 
whole  life  so  wrapped  up  in  your  success  as  a  rabbi  that  it 
is  cruel  to  try  to  turn  him  aside  from  his  fixed  views. 
Look  what  it  required  to  change  you,  and  you  are  a  young 


man. 


LEARNING  PATIENCE 


223 


David,  I  cannot  longer  endure  this  kind  but  firm 
repression  by  the  family  and  by  friends  against  the  expres¬ 
sion  of  myself/’  said  Saul,  in  an  outburst  of  rage.  ‘‘The 
people  are  laughing  at  me.  They  fiendishly  enjoy 
smiling  at  me,  as  if  I  were  half-witted.  As  much  as 
I  love  father,  I  cannot  help  feeling  that  this  galling 
treatment  is  his  plan.  I  will  not  longer  stand  it.  I 
/  cannot.” 

“And  yet  you  have  taught  in  the  synagogue  and  still 
observe  the  law,”  David  urged.  “Why  not  show  your 
confidence  in  your  belief  and  in  your  message  by  waiting 
the  proper  time  and  occasion?” 

“You  speak  with  wisdom,  David,”  Saul  replied,  “but 
this  message  must  go  to  all  people,  and  I  feel  that  I  am 
set  apart  to  carry  it,  at  any  cost.  You  do  not  reach  the 
height  from  which  I  am  looking.” 

“All  that  you  have  said  appeals  to  me,”  said  David, 
“and  I  have  a  plan  that  will  prove  my  word.  The  busi¬ 
ness  has  grown  because  I  have  encouraged  the  people  of 
Cilicia  to  exchange  their  cloth  and  their  products  for 
our  goods  made  up,  which  they  take  farther  into  the 
country  and  sell.  If  you  would  go  out  over  the  country 
on  business  for  the  house,  you  would  get  away  from  here 
and  have  a  chance  to  travel.” 

“The  plan  suits  me,”  said  Saul. 

“One  thing,  it  seems  to  me,  you  should  have  in  mind,” 
David  urged  timidly,  “and  that  is  to  talk  to  a  few  men 
in  each  place  privately  about  your  message,  until  you 
have  established  a  belief  in  their  minds;  and,  by  reason 
of  their  influence  in  the  community,  they  will  aid  you 
in  reaching  others.  You  depend  too  much  on  your 
ability  to  speak  in  a  crowd,  and  it  would  seem  to  me  that 


MEDITATION  AND  PREPARATION 


224 

you  would  profit  greatly  by  being  able  to  convert  men 
in  personal  contact.” 

“For  the  present  your  plans  are  good,”  Saul  replied, 
as  if  resigning  himself  to  the  inevitable,  “but  when  the 
time  comes,  I  will  go  out  unhampered  by  business.” 

“Then  I  will  manage  it  with  father,”  said  David, 
“but  you  must  bear  in  mind  that  this  is  business  and 
I  hope  that  you  will  be  able  to  show  such  results  that 
you  may  be  kept  at  it.” 

A  few  days  after  the  conversation  between  Saul  and 
David  the  booth  was  crowded  with  men  who  had  come  in 
with  cloth  and  raw  material  to  sell  and  exchange.  So 
many  had  come  in  at  one  time  that  David  found  himself 
oversupplied,  and  other  merchants  profited  by  getting 
some  of  the  trade.  The  people  came  without  any  warn¬ 
ing  and  would  not  be  able  to  return  for  several  months. 

That  night  David  proposed  that  Saul  should  be  sent 
throughout  the  province  of  Cilicia  and  even  to  cities  out¬ 
side,  to  make  contracts  for  the  purchase  of  supplies  and 
the  time  of  delivery,  and  to  enter  into  agreements  of 
sales  of  the  product  and  time  of  delivery. 

“Those  people  will  never  sell  until  they  have  come 
to  market,”  said  Ben  Hanan. 

“Even  if  they  would  not  make  final  sale  at  the  time,” 
said  David,  “still  it  would  increase  our  trade  and  avoid 
such  a  glutting  of  the  market  as  we  had  today.” 

“But  Saul,  could  you  give  your  attention  to  the  busi¬ 
ness?”  Ben  Hanan  asked  the  question,  implying  his 
doubts. 

“I  would  try  to  do  so,”  said  Saul,  very  humbly. 


CHAPTER  XXVIII 
A  BUSY  SALESMAN 

Saul,  being  equipped  with  a  riding  and  a  pack  animal, 
went  forth  on  his  journey  as  a  merchant.  The  reputation 
of  the  house  established  by  Azel  was  so  fine  that  he  was 
able,  in  the  nearby  towns,  to  make  a  good  showing  of 
business.  David  wrote  him  to  continue  his  tour,  for 
his  results  were  satisfactory;  and,  having  gone  to  more 
distant  places,  Saul  was  able  to  make  better  terms. 
David  wrote  him  again  to  continue;  and,  unless  anxious 
to  return,  that  he  should  not  take  the  time  to  come  back 
to  Tarsus  between  his  visitations  to  different  centers, 
but  might  find  some  way  of  employing  his  time,  if  he  had 
to  wait  for  business.  David  assured  Saul  that  they  were 
well  pleased  with  the  Undertaking,  from  a  business 
point  of  view. 

Thus  it  came  to  pass  that  Saul  had  many  oppor¬ 
tunities  to  talk  over  the  great  message  that  had  come  to 
him  with  men  of  the  cities,  and  with  the  families  that 
followed  their  herds  and  flocks  from  pasture  to  pasture. 
In  the  years  that  were  passing  he  had  grown  so  strong 
in  influence  with  leading  men  that  often  he  was  persuaded 
to  address  the  congregations  of  the  synagogues  in  many 
places,  or  assemblies  where  there  were  no  synagogues. 
He  felt  all  the  time  that  he  should  not  make  the  spreading 
of  the  glad  tidings  his  principal  occupation,  both  because 
he  was  under  obligation  to  attend  to  business,  and  because 
the  time  had  not  come  to  him  in  which  to  make  a  militant 
stand  as  the  apostle  to  these  people. 


225 


226 


MEDITATION  AND  PREPARATION 


In  many  places  small  groups  became  so  intensely 
interested  that  they  asked  how  they  could  keep  this 
message  alive.  Saul  suggested  the  plan  of  organizing 
in  the  form  of  the  synagogue  government,  as  the  simplest 
and  the  one  with  which  they  were  familiar.  He  found 
many  Greeks,  scattered  through  the  small  settlements, 
who  gladly  accepted  the  message;  and  there  were  some 
reliable  men,  with  whom  he  sat  down  to  teach  the  words 
as  he  had  received  them.  He  traveled  even  out  toward 
Damascus,  but  stopped  in  the  mountains,  where  he 
was  received  gladly  among  a  peculiar  people  who  held 
to  some  of  the  heathen  practices,  making  his  labors 
very  great,  to  keep  them  from  grafting  the  glad  tidings 
on  the  wild  growth  of  their  own  religion.  They  wanted 
to  ascribe  the  powers  of  divinity,  as  shown  in  the 
miracles,  to  their  own  god,  to  give  the  divine  nature  of 
the  family,  and  especially  the  mother  of  Jesus,  to  their 
principal  goddess.  In  his  kindly  disposed  efforts  to 
guide  them  aright,  he  met  with  the  simplicity  and  persist¬ 
ence  of  superstition. 

From  this  experience  Saul  gained  a  new  knowledge  of 
men,  and  he  learned  the  great  patience  required  to 
eradicate  centuries  of  belief  from  the  minds  with  which 
he  had  to  deal.  Not  only  was  the  experience  helpful 
in  his  conception  of  the  methods  necessary  to  present 
the  message  so  as  to  impress  it  upon  the  Jewish  mind 
but  it  gave  him  a  clearer  view  of  the  effect  that  the  glad 
tidings  would  have  upon  the  gentile  world. 

Saul  told  the  people  he  brought  into  the  new  thought 
that  they  should  seek  every  opportunity  to  confer  with 
the  men  who  had  been  with  Jesus  during  his  life,  and 
told  them  the  names  of  the  apostles  who  could  be  found 


A  BUSY  SALESMAN 


227 


in  Jerusalem.  Leading  men  were  selected  from  time 
to  time  to  visit  the  apostles,  to  question  them  on  the 
message  Saul  had  delivered,  and  they  returned  to  their 
own  people  with  full  confirmation  of  the  teachings  of 
Saul.  In  like  manner,  there  were  men  from  Cilicia  and 
Asia  meeting  the  teachers  who  had  become  prominent  in 
Antioch.  The  news  spread  slowly  to  Jerusalem  that 
someone  had  been  doing  a  great  work  in  the  lands  far 
away  from  the  large  cities. 

After  six  years  of  life  among  the  outlying  settlements 
Saul  returned  to  Tarsus.  He  had  been  successful  in 
the  plan  of  establishing  trade  relations,  so  that  now 
David  had  enlarged  the  business.  Saul  was  now  trained 
in  travel  and  in  meeting  vicissitudes  in  the  hills  and  on 
the  plains.  He  was  as  bronzed  as  any  of  the  tribes 
of  the  desert;  he  knew  their  lore,  their  lives,  and  their 
hopes.  He  had  learned  that  men  of  the  great  solitudes 
thought  deeply  upon  every  scrap  of  knowledge  that 
came  to  them;  that  under  the  impulse  of  trade  and 
travel,  opened  by  the  government  of  Rome  by  its 
wonderful  roadways,  there  was  an  awakening  of  the 
people  from  the  lethargy  of  the  Orient,  which  had 
engulfed  even  the  Greeks  who  had  settled  throughout 
the  region. 

On  his  return  to  Tarsus,  Saul  refused  to  enter  into 
discussion  with  his  own  family,  but  went  among  the 
“God-fearers”  with  his  message.  He  did  not  at  once 
seek  audiences,  but  he  sought  out  individuals  who  had 
influence  and  whose  characters  suited  them  as  hearers 
of  his  message.  All  the  time  he  helped  David  to  gain 
a  clear  understanding  of  the  new  customers  of  the  house. 
Friendly  Jews  came  to  ask  Saul  questions  and  they 


228 


MEDITATION  AND  PREPARATION 


joined  with  the  Greeks  in  learning  the  glad  tidings  as 
delivered  by  Saul. 

The  number  of  converts  grew  rapidly  until  the  hearers 
sought  to  have  Saul  speak  to  the  whole  people,  and  they 
urged  him  to  go  to  the  synagogue.  This  he  refused, 
saying  that  in  any  other  place  than  Tarsus  he  would 
gladly  do  so. 

Two  years  of  SauTs  teaching  i;n  Tarsus  had  brought 
about  such  changes  that  he  now  met  regularly  with 
converts  who  had  observed  the  regulations  and  ordinances 
for  full  membership.  At  times  he  would  conduct  the 
Sabbath  worship  for  Ben  Arza  in  the  synagogue,  without 
any  reference  to  his  other  teachings.  Ben  Hanan  would 
sit  on  the  bema  with  the  council  on  such  occasions, 
drinking  in  every  word  uttered  by  Saul,  even  if  it  were 
only  the  reading  of  the  familiar  Scriptures. 

The  father  of  Saul,  now  passing  into  the  ripe  old  age 
of  one  who  has  spent  an  active  life,  could  not  understand 
the  persistence  with  which  his  son  clung  to  his  new 
thought;  and  least  of  all  could  he  understand  how  Saul, 
the  rabbi,  could  be  the  leader  of  the  Way.  The  dignity 
with  which  Saul  carried  himself,  the  tenderness  he  showed 
to  all  the  family,  the  restraint  he  imposed  on  himself 
in  any  discussion  of  his  teachings  before  the  family, 
and  the  peculiar,  peacefully  dominating  attitude  with 
which  he  went  and  came  so  puzzled  Ben  Hanan  that  he 
yearned  for  the  courage  to  speak  boldly  to  his  son,  as 
of  old. 

There  was  something  that  kept  Ben  Hanan  at  a 
distance,  there  was  a  wide  space  of  thought  that  separated 
him  from  Saul.  Ben  Hanan,  curiously,  felt  as  if  he  were 


A  BUSY  SALESMAN 


229 


the  youth  and  Saul  the  patriarch,  to  whom  he  feared 
to  disclose  his  questions,  lest  they  seem  ridiculous. 

The  little  mother  was  not  afraid  of  Saul.  She  did 
not  care  for  his  doctrines — he  was  her  son,  there  was  no 
other  question  worth  while.  David  gave  his  sympathy 
to  Saul  and  his  thought  to  the  business,  now  growing 
still  greater.  In  a  few  words,  he  urged  and  encouraged 
Saul  to  take  more  time  for  his  converts,  while  admonish¬ 
ing  him  to  keep  from  discussing  the  subject  in  the 
household. 

While  Ben  Hanan  was  sitting  in  the  booth  one  day, 
watching  the  customers  from  distant  places,  an  old 
man  came  up  to  him  and  asked  if  he  was  connected  with 
the  business. 

‘‘I  have  given  my  life  to  this  business,  which  my  son 
now  runs,”  said  Ben  Hanan. 

‘^Then  you  are  the  father  of  Saul,”  said  the  old  man. 

‘^He  is  my  son,”  said  Ben  Hanan,  simply.  “He  has 
taken  up  some  peculiar,  disturbing  views.” 

“In  that  we  differ,”  said  the  old  man,  warmly.  “I 
must  see  him  before  I  leave,  to  have  him  settle  some 
questions  which  have  arisen.” 

“Tell  me  how  you  can  bring  yourself  to  accept  his 
theories,”  said  Ben  Hanan. 

“I  can  give  you  no  better  answer  than  to  say  that 
the  story  he  tells  brings  peace  and  hope  into  our  hearts,” 
said  the  old  man.  “You  should  be  proud  to  have  a 
son  who  can  bring  so  much  joy  to  men.  Out  there  in 
the  hills  are  men  and  women  whose  lives  were  bounded 
by  the  hills  and  to  whom  there  had  been  no  hope.  He 
brought  glad  tidings  that  filled  their  hearts  with  love 


230 


MEDITATION  AND  PREPARATION 


and  hope  and  faith.  Instead  of  thinking  ourselves 
outcasts,  because  we  could  not  live  obedient  to  the  Law 
of  Moses,  we  now  know  what  is  right  and  just  and  have 
the  witness  within  us  that  we  are  right  with  God.’^ 
Ben  Hanan  did  not  reply,  but  he  fell  into  deep  medita¬ 
tion.  He  heard  David  tell  the  old  man  on  his  way  out 
that  Saul  was  speaking  that  night  in  one  of  the  lecture- 
rooms  in  the  Greek  school. 


CHAPTER  XXIX 
ANTIOCH  CALLS 

Saul  was  giving  instruction  to  a  large  audience 
assembled  in  the  lecture-room.  After  he  had  finished 
his  discourse  the  meeting  was  open  for  general  questions 
and  discussions,  according  to  the  custom.  Many  had 
risen  to  give  their  views,  and  then  the  old  man  from  the 
hills  who  had  been  talking  with  Ben  Hanan  spoke,  with¬ 
out  rising  from  his  place  on  the  floor. 

“We  have  heard  this  message  from  Saul  on  the  other 
side  of  the  mountains,  and  I  am  directed  to  get  his 
opinions  on  some  questions,  for  our  local  government, 
which  I  will  do  privately.  I  speak  now  for  another 
purpose.  If  you  have  a  just  appreciation  of  his  ability, 
and  if  you  place  any  proper  value  on  the  tidings  that  he 
carries  to  men,  why  do  you  either  hold  or  allow  him  to 
stay  in  Tarsus  ?  Why  do  you  not  send  him  forth  ?” 

Before  anyone  could  reply,  a  large  man  rose  from  the 
deep  shadows  of  a  farther  corner  of  the  room  and  made 
his  way  down  to  the  front.  Saul  sprang  forward  to  meet 
and  embrace  Barnabas,  who  had  thus,  unannounced, 
made  his  appearance  in  Tarsus.  Saul  told  the  people 
who  Barnabas  was,  and  that  he  owed  his  own  acceptance 
by  the  apostles  to  Barnabas’  kindly  interest  and  help. 

Barnabas,  on  being  introduced,  told  the  people  of 
the  wonderful  work  that  had  been  done  in  Antioch.  He 
said  the  work  had  grown  so  great  that  it  was  beyond  the 
power  of  those  who  were  leading  to  keep  up  with  it; 
that  word  had  been  coming  to  the  followers  of  the  Way 


231 


232 


MEDITATION  AND  PREPARATION 


in  Antioch  and  in  Jerusalem  of  the  wide  distribution  of 
the  tidings  by  Saul. 

‘‘The  time  has  come  in  Antioch  when  we  must  have 
a  fearless  and  able  advocate  of  our  faith,”  said  Barnabas. 
“While  there  is  no  persecution,  yet  influential  men  are 
criticizing  us  and  many  scoff  at  us.  I  have  come  to 
persuade  Saul  to  work  with  us  in  Antioch,  and  I  feel  that 
the  great  occasion  for  which  he  has  been  fitted  has  come. 
The  words  spoken  by  our  brother  from  the  far  country 
are  almost  a  prophecy,  at  least  they  agree  with  the 
plans  we  had  made  in  Antioch.” 

Instantly  the  whole  assembly  was  noisy  with 
approval.  Saul  alone  was  solemn  and  silent.  While 
looking  upon  the  audience,  now  wild  in  enthusiasm,  he 
was  thinking  of  the  timidity  of  the  disciples  when  he 
had  returned  to  Jerusalem  from  Damascus,  anxious  to 
throw  his  whole  energy  into  the  teaching  of  the  Way. 
The  bitter  disappointment  he  then  felt,  because  they 
would  not  accept  his  labors  among  them;  the  fear  they 
expressed  that  his  former  persecutions  would  be  held 
against  him  and  the  faith  by  those  who  had  suffered,  all 
came  back  to  him.  They  had  not  shown  that  confidence 
in  the  divine  forgiveness  which  he  had  realized  in  his  own 
heart.  The  joy  of  the  crowd  left  him  untouched.  True, 
he  reasoned  to  himself,  he  had  received  a  vision  in  the 
Temple  that  had  given  him  courage  and  faith;  and,  after 
all,  he  questioned  if  the  work  that  he  had  been  doing 
among  the  people  was  not  a  fulfilment  of  the  promise 
that  he  should  be  the  apostle  to  the  gentile  world.  In 
a  flash  of  the  future  and  a  rapid  review  of  the  past  Saul 
felt  that  likely  his  idea  of  projecting  himself  into  the 
famous  work  as  a  leader  was  not  in  the  plan  of  his  Lord 


ANTIOCH  CALLS 


233 


and  Master.  Barnabas,  with  his  keen  sympathy,  sur¬ 
mised  the  conflict  in  Saul’s  mind;  and,  gently  laying  his 
hand  on  Saul’s  shoulder,  led  him  to  one  side. 

“Speak  what  is  in  your  heart,”  said  Barnabas. 

“I  feel  humble  and  thankful,”  said  Saul.  “Is  this 
an  appeal  to  my  vanity  or  a  call  to  sacrifice  and  duty  ? 
Will  the  brothers  in  Jerusalem  still  doubt  me  ?” 

“Would  I  make  this  journey  merely  to  gratify  your 
vanity?”  Barnabas  asked,  with  a  searching  look  into 
Saul’s  eyes.  “In  the  fulness  of  time  all  things  work  out 
the  Divine  Plan;  and  this  is  another  step.  Your  years 
of  growing  faith  and  unselfish  labor  have  fitted  you  for 
the  place.  I  feel  that  I  am  a  messenger  of  him  who 
loved  you.” 

Turning  to  the  people,  who  had  become  quiet  while 
waiting  the  decision,  Saul  said  to  them: 

“I  will  go  with  Barnabas.  My  absence  may  put 
your  love  to  sore  test;  but  the  years  have  gone  by  so 
rapidly  that  I  must  use  every  energy  to  make  up  for 
lost  time  by  delivering  this  message  wherever  it  can  be 
carried.  You  must  carry  on  the  work  at  home,  keeping 
the  words  I  have  delivered  to  you  (as  revealed  to  me)  free 
from  error,  and  in  your  teaching  may  the  spirit  of  love 
inspire  you.  I  must  give  up  the  joy  and  comforts  of 
home  and  friends,  to  go  whithersoever  duty  calls.  Fare¬ 
well!” 

The  people  broke  into  lamentations  and  blessings. 
They  had  learned  to  trust  him  as  one  near  and  dear  to 
them.  In  the  shadows  of  the  entrance  the  aged  Ben 
Hanan  hastily  left,  so  that  no  one  should  see  him.  The 
old  man  from  the  hills  came  forward  to  speak  with  Saul 
and  Barnabas  and  insisted  on  taking  them  to  Antioch, 


234 


MEDITATION  AND  PREPARATION 


since  it  would  be  a  difference  of  only  two  days  in  his 
homeward  journey. 

Saul  wanted  Barnabas  to  lodge  with  him  that  night, 
but  he  had  already  agreed  to  lodge  with  an  old  friend  from 
Cyprus.  As  Saul  approached  his  home  it  seemed  to 
him  that,  notwithstanding  the  night  was  dark,  there  was 
a  warm  glow  of  light  about  him,  at  least  the  shadows  were 
lifting.  When  he  entered  the  house,  he  was  surprised 
to  find  all  the  family  waiting.  In  his  greetings  were  the 
cheery  notes  of  youth,  his  eyes  were  bright,  his  move¬ 
ments  were  quick  and  strong. 

^‘Father,”  Saul  said,  “in  the  morning  I  leave  for 
Antioch.  How  long  I  shall  be  away  I  cannot  say,  but 
I  am  pleased  to  go,  as  well  as  to  follow  whatever  course 
may  be  marked  out  for  me.  David,  the  business  is 
yours,  with  only  the  burden  of  taking  care  of  father  and 
mother,  which  you  would  do  anyway.  Mother,  always 
remember  my  great  love  for  you.  Now  I  must  pack  a 
roll  for  traveling.” 

“Not  so  fast,  lest  we  have  a  word  to  say,”  said  Ben 
Hanan.  “While  I  do  not  understand  what  you  teach, 
I  have  come  to  understand  it  is  not  harmful.  We  have 
not  accepted  your  faith,  but  we  have  come  to  believe 
that  it  is  no  mere  fancy  of  a  disordered  mind,  as  we 
thought  at  first  when  you  returned.  If  it  is  true,  as  you 
say,  then  it  brings  a  wonderful  opportunity  to  men;  and 
if  it  is  not  true,  it  does  not  make  men  sinners.  While  I 
have  not  the  faith  to  believe  what  you  teach,  I  have 
learned  that  your  own  soul  is  clean  and  strong.  Even 
as  you  gathered  yourself  together  and  won  the  race,  in 
your  youth,  when  it  seemed  you  had  lost  it;  so  now, 
notwithstanding  my  doubts,  you  have  the  moral  courage 


ANTIOCH  CALLS 


235 


and  spiritual  power  to  endure  and  perhaps  to  conquer. 
Our  son,  Saul,  will  always  be  in  our  prayers.  Now  make 
up  your  bundles,  but  come  to  us  in  the  morning,  even  if 
we  are  asleep,  and  bid  us  farewell.  For  reasons  which 
you  understood  I  have  not  asked  you  to  lead  in  the 
evening  prayer,  but  tonight  we  wait  for  you  to  perform 
that  service.” 

Saul  was  so  overcome  with  emotion  that  he  could  only 
wipe  away  the  tears;  and,  after  a  long  wait,  he  threw 
himself  on  the  floor,  and,  with  his  head  in  his  mother’s 
lap,  repeated  the  prayer  of  his  childhood. 


CHAPTER  XXX 
RELIEF  OF  FAMINE 

At  the  break  of  day  Saul  was  fastening  his  bundles  on 
the  horse  furnished  by  the  friend  from  the  hills,  while 
Ben  Hanan,  Deborah,  David,  his  wife  and  children,  stood 
close  by  to  bid  him  farewell.  Saul  clasped  his  aged 
mother  for  the  last  kiss  and,  straightening  up,  stood  as 
if  in  a  trance  a  vision  had  been  given  him. 

‘‘She  waits  for  thee,”  said  Deborah,  smiling  up  in 
his  face. 

“Did  you  see  her?”  Saul  asked. 

“No,  but  I  knew  that  you  saw  Tabitha,”  said 
Deborah.  “You  looked  just  like  you  did  that  morning, 
when  you  first  left  for  Jerusalem,  and  she  gave  you  the 
napkin.” 

The  old  man  of  the  hills  came  up  with  the  rest  of  his 
train,  which  Barnabas  had  already  joined.  They  rode 
out  of  Tarsus  toward  Antioch.  After  days  of  travel  they 
reached  their  destination.  During  the  long  days  of  that 
slow  method  of  travel  Saul’s  active  mind  swept  far  and 
wide  and  back  and  forth  over  all  his  experiences  and 
knowledge,  into  the  greatest  depths  and  up  to  the  dizziest 
heights  of  possibilities. 

The  unrestrained  conduct  of  the  mere  pleasure- 
seekers,  the  levity  of  the  Greeks,  gave  to  the  city  of 
Antioch  an  atmosphere  of  insincerity.  Being  the  capital 
of  the  province  of  Syria,  it  was  the  residence  of  many 
officials  of  Rome.  It  was  on  the  Orontes,  15  miles  from 
its  mouth,  and  sailing  ships  came  up  from  the  sea  in  one 

236 


RELIEF  OF  FAMINE 


237 


day.  A  nearer  seaport  was  Seleucia,  5  miles  across  the 
land.  On  the  uplands  5  miles  westerly  from  the  city 
was  the  Grove  of  Daphne,  in  which  was  a  shrine  sacred 
to  Apollo  and  Artemis,  a  resort  for  those  indulging 
unbridled  passions — even  a  Roman  general  imposed  a 
severe  penalty  upon  any  soldier  visiting  the  place.  The 
population  of  Antioch  was  principally  Syrian,  with  many 
Greeks,  and  some  Jews,  whose  ancestors  had  settled 
there  in  the  days  of  Seleucus  by  v/hom  they  had  been 
granted  privileges  as  merchants,  who  had  always  been 
active  in  the  commercial  life  while  maintaining  syna¬ 
gogues  in  which  their  faith  and  teachings  were  kept 
alive.  At  this  time  the  city  was  prosperous  and  had  a 
population  of  200,000. 

Agrippa  I  had  followed  the  execution  of  James,  the 
brother  of  John  and  son  of  Zebedee,  in  Jerusalem,  by 
persecuting  the  disciples  so  that  many  fled  to  Antioch; 
and  there  they  had  established  a  strong  organization. 
In  the  very  midst  of  the  lightness  and  frivolity  there 
were  many  earnest  men  and  women  who  gladly  accepted 
the  life  and  hope  and  faith  of  the  glad  tidings. 

Saul  plunged  into  the  work  with  all  his  ardent  nature, 
well  knowing  that  sensualism  dulled  many  ears  that  he 
wished  to  reach.  Even  the  general  indifference  of  the 
mass  of  the  people  was  mixed,  cynically,  with  high- 
sounding  phrases  of  morality,  as  if  it  were  a  mark  of 
superiority  for  people  to  scoff  at  their  own  wickedness. 
Among  the  learned  (there  were  many  who  gave  Antioch 
fame  among  scholars)  were  those  who  subscribed  to  the 
highest  code  of  morals,  but  held  that  indulgence  was 
permissible  to  them  because  of  their  knowledge  of  higher 
morals;  they  did  not  hypocritically  hide  their  excesses, 


238 


MEDITATION  AND  PREPARATION 


but  openly  claimed  the  license  of  satisfying  any  desire 
that  did  not  violate  any  civil  law.  The  pliable  character 
of  the  native  Syrians  was  molded  by  the  licentious  Greeks 
of  the  city. 

Saul  presented  Jesus  in  such  heroic  hues  that  he 
challenged  the  attention  of  many  who  had  been  indiffer¬ 
ent;  he  brought  to  the  consideration  of  even  indifferent 
hearers  a  crashing  reahzation  of  the  sacrificial  life  of  Jesus 
and  that  through  him  had  come  the  fulfilment  of  the 
longings  of  the  human  soul  through  the  ages.  He  gave 
to  the  people  the  promises  of  life  through  the  abundance 
of  the  love  of  God  as  shown  in  the  supreme  sacrifice  of 
Jesus.  Without  wasting  time  in  argument  Saul  assumed 
that  men  were  religious  by  nature,  and  that  they  sincerely 
in  their  spirit  desired  to  reach  the  highest  ideal.  In  his 
matchless  style  he  portrayed  the  Christ  as  the  Son  of 
God  who  had  as  the  Son  of  Man  excelled  all  other  heroes 
in  the  submission  to  humiliation  that  he  might  open  the 
way  for  all  men  to  receive  life  everlasting  and  live  in  the 
joy  of  striving  for  the  perfection  found  in  the  Christ. 

Saul  did  not  proceed  along  lines  of  developing  a 
theory,  but  he  gathered  truths  together  and  hurled  them 
as  if  they  were  thunderbolts.  He  met  all  the  claims  of 
teachers  who  had  worked  out  a  system  of  morals  by 
declaring  that  one  right  with  God,  he  who  accepted  and 
followed  Christ,  had  the  spirit  of  righteousness,  and  would 
know  it,  from  which  knowledge  not  only  would  the 
follower  of  Christ  seek  the  lovely  and  beautiful  things  of 
life,  but  he  would  always  be  anxious  to  do  and  follow 
the  right.  Saul  told  over  and  over  about  the  sweet 
reasonableness  of  Christ  and  how  his  suffering  for  men 
would  hold  those  who  believed  in  him  in  such  strong 


RELIEF  OF  FAMINE 


239 


bonds  of  adoration  that  they  would  not  be  led  astray 
by  selfishness  or  passion. 

The  power  with  which  Saul  taught  gave  a  new  zeal 
to  the  followers  of  the  Way  in  Antioch  and  his  restless 
spirit  forced  others  into  renewed  activity.  He  organized 
the  followers  of  the  Way  so  that  they  sought  and  brought 
men  into  the  meetings.  His  exaltation  of  Christ  and 
his  frequent  use  of  the  Greek  name  for  his  Lord  and 
Master  made  the  name,  Christ,  familiar  among  the 
idlers  of  the  streets,  so  that  jesters  thought  it  rare  wit  to 
call  the  followers  of  the  Way  ‘Christians”  in  derision. 
Saul  eagerly  sought  men,  irrespective  of  their  former 
beliefs.  Jews  there  were  in  numbers  who  accepted  his 
teachings  and  there  were  many  Greeks  who  came  under 
his  spell.  One  there  was,  Titus,  who  followed  the 
apostle  through  the  years. 

In  the  midst  of  Saul’s  activities,  Agabus,  so  wise  that 
he  was  called  a  prophet,  came  up  from  Jerusalem  and 
told  the  story  of  the  poverty  of  the  brethren  in  that  city. 
He  said  that  a  great  famine  was  coming  on  all  the  land 
next  year,  as  it  would  be  a  time  of  great  drought,  accord¬ 
ing  to  the  cycle  of  years,  following  the  present  summer,  in 
which  there  had  been  a  shortage  of  rain. 

“It  is  unfortunate,”  said  Agabus  to  Barnabas  alone, 
“that  Saul  is  so  popular  here.  He  was  badly  treated 
in  Jerusalem  and  will  hardly  feel  like  doing  much  for  us, 
I  fear.” 

“You  do  not  know  him  nor  understand  the  spirit  of 
him,”  said  Barnabas.  “We  will  leave  it  to  him.” 

At  the  meeting  of  the  congregation  Saul  cut  short  his 
own  address  and  called  on  Agabus  to  tell  his  story  to  all 
the  people.  After  Agabus  had  told  the  story  of  impending 


240 


MEDITATION  AND  PREPARATION 


famine  and  the  persecution  which  the  followers  of  the 
Way  had  suffered  under  Herod  Agrippa,  Saul  made  the 
most  impassioned  plea  his  friends  had  ever  heard,  for 
contribution  to  a  fund  for  relief.  The  collection  was 
liberal,  but  Saul  urged  that  a  fixed  amount  be  contributed 
every  week  until  it  would  be  needed. 

“They  are  the  people  who  have  made  it  possible  for 
this  word  to  bring  hope  into  your  lives,”  said  Saul. 
“This  is  not  the  only  persecution  they  have  suffered. 
I  myself  did  all  the  hurt  I  could  to  them  in  the  time 
before  I  knew  the  truth.  You  are  not  rich,  but  ewery 
week  you  may  give  as  much  as  you  can  spare  and  when 
the  famine  comes  we  will  save  our  own  brothers  and  per¬ 
haps  the  lives  of  many  who  do  not  believe  as  we  do. 
And  why  not  ?  If  we  believe  that  Jesus  gave  his  life  to 
bring  salvation  to  us,  we  should  give  to  save  any  life.” 

All  that  summer  of  45  a.d.  and  during  the  winter,  the 
church  in  Antioch  collected  the  funds  and  stores  for  the 
relief  in  Jerusalem.  It  was  along  at  this  time  that  Peter 
visited  Antioch,  and  he  was  pleased  to  see  the  work  that 
Saul  was  doing.  Early  in  the  following  summer  the 
news  came  of  the  famine,  made  acute  by  the  short  crops 
of  the  year  before.  So  zealous  had  Saul  been  in  prepar¬ 
ing  for  this  event  that  all  the  leading  men  of  the  Chris¬ 
tians  insisted  that  Saul  should  be  one  of  the  messengers 
to  take  the  relief  and  Barnabas  the  other.  Saul  insisted 
on  taking  with  him  the  Greek  convert,  Titus.  Barnabas 
agreed  with  Saul,  not  understanding  the  larger  purpose 
in  his  mind.  Not  only  had  the  “fulness  of  time”  come, 
but  Saul  had  caught  slight  murmurings  of  Jews  who  had 
become  believers,  that  Gentiles  were  being  admitted  to 
all  the  benefits  of  Christians,  without  observing  the  Laws 


RELIEF  OF  FAMINE 


241 


of  Moses.  He  resolved  that  the  Jews  of  Jerusalem  should 
know  not  only  that  the  Gentiles  accepted  the  glad  tidings 
but  with  Titus  present  it  would  be  an  evidence  that 
Greeks  who  had  believed  were  contributing  to  the  relief 
of  the  brothers  in  Jerusalem  in  their  time  of  distress. 

There  was  great  rejoicing  when  the  three  from  Antioch 
brought  the  relief  and  aided  in  its  distribution.  Saul 
and  Barnabas  went  up  to  the  Temple  often,  and  there 
was  slight  murmuring  among  the  Jews  of  the  Way  that 
it  was  a  wonder  that  Saul  did  not  take  iTtus  into  the 
Temple,  for  he  seemed  to  think  as  much  ofthis  Gentile 
as  he  did  of  the  chosen  people  who  had  come  out  for 
Jesus. 

Some  of  these  complaints  having  reached  Saul,  with 
a  heavy  heart,  he  had  a  conversation  with  Barnabas 
about  it. 

^‘It  seems  that  I  will  never  be  understood  in 
Jerusalem,”  said  Saul.  ‘‘Even  now  they  complain 
because  I  have  brought  Titus  who  is  not  of  the  circum¬ 
cision,  and  I  thought  to  show  them  the  breadth  of  the 
love  of  Jesus.” 

“Let  that  pass,”  said  Barnabas,  “for  Peter  was  as 
much  opposed  to  Gentiles  as  any  of  them,  and  at  Joppa 
he  had  a  vision  of  a  sheet  let  down  from  the  sky  filled 
with  all  manner  of  beasts,  unclean  under  the  law,  and 
he  heard  a  voice  commanding  him  to  rise  and  eat.  He 
replied  that  he  could  not  eat  any  unclean  thing,  and  the 
voice  told  him  that  he  should  not  call  unclean  what  God 
had  made  clean.  And  the  interpretation  was  that  he 
should  go  unto  the  centurion,  Cornelius,  who  received 
the  Holy  Spirit  and  was  baptized  by  Peter.  Now  let  us 
avoid  raising  the  question  here,  but  go  our  way.” 


242 


MEDITATION  AND  PREPARATION 


^‘This  confirms  my  vision  and  my  mission  to  take  the 
glad  tidings  to  the  Gentiles,  first  I  believe  that  the  Jews 
should  always  have  the  message,  but  the  Gentiles  should 
not  be  neglected,”  said  Saul.  “I  feel  the  urge  more  than 
ever  to  do  all  possible.” 

“This  question  is  not  fully  settled,”  said  Barnabas, 
“but  in  due  time  it  will  be  settled  right.  We  have  the 
authority  of  Peter,  and  you  have  the  confirmation  of 
your  own  vision,  and  that  is  sufficient.  I  wish  I  could 
persuade  my  cousin,  John  Mark,  to  go  back  with  us. 
If  it  seems  well  I  believe  our  work  lies  outside  of  Antioch, 
and  I  am  sure  that  it  is  well  for  us  to  return.” 


t 


-  y-'i  t'l 

. 

r*'. 


» 


/ 


i. 


■  t' 


PART  VI 


Herald,  Leader,  Marty 


] 


I 


r 


t 


V  .. 


I 


i 


/ 


ji  I 


y.' 

a-v 


^  ■» 


Vi. 


■‘x ’ 

V'::fJ| 


t 


A 


yr' 


CHAPTER  XXXI 
ANTIOCH  IN  PISIDIA 


Barnabas  had  been  at  the  head  of  the  relief  distribu¬ 
tion,  for  Saul  felt  that  his  place  was  to  act  in  such  a 
manner  as  to  attract  the  least  attention  to  himself  while 
in  Jerusalem.  When  ready  to  leave,  Barnabas  received 
the  grateful  thanks  for  the  relief  given,  and  he  expressed 
the  hope  that  he  and  Saul  would  be  able  to  make  a 
journey  through  Cyprus  with  the  message.  The  elders 
of  Jerusalem  thought  well  of  the  plan,  and  to  their  ques¬ 
tion  why  he  did  not  go  at  once,  Barnabas  answered; 

^‘We  have  gained  great  power  in  Antioch  by  earnest 
prayer  of  the  whole  congregation  before  we  make  a  final 
decision,  and  then  we  act  as  a  unit.  This  plan  of  work  may 
take  us  to  distant  places,  and  we  want  all  the  help  that 
can  be  given.  We  will  lay  it  before  the  congregation.” 

Barnabas  and  Saul  on  setting  sail  for  Antioch  took 
John  Mark  with  them.  He  had  been  in  the  confidence 
of  the  leaders  in  Jerusalem  so  that  he  had  been  carrying 
on  the  teaching  of  the  Way,  but  he  was  sensitive  to  the 
doubt  prevailing  because  he  was  a  Jew  with  the  rights  of 
a  Roman  citizen.  He  was  anxious  to  join  in  the  journey 
through  Cyprus. 

Barnabas  and  Saul  reported  to  their  congregation  in 
Antioch  all  that  had  taken  place  in  Jerusalem.  They 
laid  out  their  plans  of  taking  the  glad  tidings  to  Cyprus, 
and  Saul  urged  that  they  should  not  return  from  that 
journey  whatever  the  results,  but  they  ought  to  have  a 
free  course  to  go  unto  other  people,  wheresoever  the 


245 


246 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


Spirit  or  circumstances  directed.  He  rehearsed  his 
experiences  in  Cilicia. 

The  Christians — they  were  now  proud  of  the  name 
first  applied  to  them  in  jest — after  prayerful  considera¬ 
tion  approved  the  plan  and  provided  the  funds  for  Barna¬ 
bas  and  Saul,  accompanied  by  John  Mark  as  helper,  to 
make  the  journey  as  far  as  they  found  hope  and  strength 
to  go.  They  solemnly  anointed  them  as  heralds  of  the 
glad  tidings  to  new  lands.  Barnabas  and  Saul,  with 
John  Mark  as  their  attendant,  set  out  early  in  March, 
47  A.D.,  for  the  port  of  Seleucia,  whence  they  sailed, to 
Salamis. 

The  quiet  and  reserved  manner  to  which  John  Mark 
was  accustomed,  among  the  leaders  in  Jerusalem,  was 
in  striking  contrast  to  the  nervous  zeal  shown  by  Saul, 
although  Barnabas  bore  it  all  in  a  tolerant  way.  Saul 
seemed  so  anxious  to  land  that  he  paced  the  deck  of  the 
vessel,  as  if  he  were  speeding  the  travel.  He  was  now 
forty-six  years  old.  Strong,  rugged,  nervous,  he  could 
brook  no  delay;  kind,  honest,  fearless,  zealous,  he  under¬ 
stood  sympathetically  before  a  speaker  finished  his 
sentences.  Words  were  poor  vehicles  of  thought  for 
him,  because  they  required  time  to  utter  and  inade¬ 
quately  conveyed  his  meaning.  His  brain  teemed  with 
plans,  images,  situations,  arguments,  possibilities,  and 
eventualities.  While  his  face  showed  the  suffering,  the 
deep  thought,  and  the  exposure  through  which  he  had 
passed,  his  eyes  were  luminous  with  spirituality  and  his 
kindly  smile  extended  and  invited  sympathy.  The 
peace  which  passe th  understanding”  had  brought  faith 
and  love  into  his  soul.  He  walked,  talked,  and  acted 
as  one  inspired.  His  purpose  in  life  was  now  fixed,  and 


ANTIOCH  IN  PISIDIA 


247 


he  was  pleased  that  the  opportunity  was  presented  for 
his  great  work. 

They  landed  at  Salamis,  making  their  way  through 
the  towns  of  the  island.  Wherever  they  went  Barnabas 
vouched  for  Saul,  giving  him  credit  by  his  own  deprecia¬ 
tion.  The  personality  of  Barnabas  won  friends  to  hear 
them  and  Saul  charmed  and  convinced  hearers.  They 
reached  Paphos,  where  Sergius  Paulus,  the  proconsul, 
lived.  Like  all  cities  of  any  prominence,  Paphos  was 
overrun  with  teachers  of  necromancy,  astrology,  and 
dealers  in  charms.  Against  this  superstition  Saul  hurled 
all  his  invective  and  arguments,  attracting  the  attention 
of  Sergius. 

A  certain  Jew,  Barjesus,  had  been  gaining  a  livelihood 
from  his  magic  and  his  pretenses  of  power,  so  that  he 
had  become  a  privileged  character  in  the  residence  and 
at  the  receptions  of  the  proconsul.  Sergius  Paulus, 
having  sent  for  Barnabas  and  Saul,  was  listening  to 
their  explanation  of  their  teachings,  when  the  Jewish 
magician,  Barjesus,  at  the  side  of  the  proconsul,  inter¬ 
rupted  by  saying: 

‘‘This  doctrine  has  been  laughed  out  of  Jerusalem, 
where  they  say  it  originated.” 

Saul  turned  on  Barjesus  with  such  awful  anger  that 
the  sorcerer  trembled  from  the  knowledge  of  the  falsity 
of  his  own  claims.  Saul  exposed  him  to  all  present, 
closing  his  remarks  with  a  curse  that  he  should  be  blind  for 
a  season.  In  the  presence  of  Sergius  Paulus  the  sorcerer 
groveled  and,  begging  for  mercy,  groped  about  sightless. 

The  issue  of  this  incident  before  Sergius  Paulus  was 
twofold:  The  proconsul  accepted  the  words  of  Saul 
graciously;  and  Saul  took,  from  that  time  forth,  his 


248 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


Roman  name,  Paulus  or  Paul.  Paul  discovered  that  he 
had  power  greater  than  he  had  ever  thought  would  come 
to  him.  He  felt  that  it  had  come  as  a  further  witness  to 
his  mission  in  life;  and  that  it  carried  an  added  responsi¬ 
bility  that  it  should  not  be  cheapened  or  lost  in  use  for 
personal  fame,  but  that  it  should  be  used  for  beneficient 
and  holy  purposes. 

Upon  the  urgent  demand  of  Paul  the  three  men  set 
sail  for  Perga,  in  Pamphylia.  While  John  Mark  did 
not  openly  protest,  he  urged  a  more  leisurely  trip  back 
through  Cyprus  and  then  that  they  sail  from  Salamis. 
Paul  closed  the  discussion  by  pointing  out  the  delay. 
He  urged  that  it  was  now  the  early  summer  and  that 
soon  the  people  would  be  leaving  the  low  coast  towns 
during  the  hot  period. 

It  was  possible  to  make  the  passage  to  Perga  in  one 
day,  with  favorable  winds;  but  after  they  had  rounded 
the  western  coast  of  Cyprus  and  had  turned  on  the  direct 
course,  a  little  west  of  north,  the  wind  died  down.  For 
a  long  time  they  made  slow  progress.  Near  midday 
a  strong  wind  almost  from  the  west  drove  them  rapidly 
on  their  way.  The  wind  increased  to  a  hurricane  by 
nightfall,  while  they  were  many  miles  from  the  Pamphy- 
lian  coast.  The  sailors,  struggling  to  hold  the  ship  in  its 
course,  took  in  sail.  All  hands  were  lending  whatever 
help  they  could  give.  The  heavy  seas  washed  the  deck. 
Paul  was  helping  to  lash  an  extra  spar,  to  prevent  it 
being  carried  away,  when  an  extraordinary  wave  swept 
him  and  the  spar  overboard.  The  ship  righted  and  sped 
on  its  course  in  the  dark.  Search  was  made  in  the  dark¬ 
ness,  but  he  could  not  be  found.  The  gale  drove  the 
ship  to  the  coast. 


ANTIOCH  IN  PISIDIA 


249 


All  night  long  Paul  was  buffeted  by  the  waves. 
Shortly  after  he  had  been  dashed  into  the  sea,  he  encoun¬ 
tered  the  spar  that  had  been  washed  overboard  with  him. 
He  clung  desperately  to  it  through  the  long  night.  The 
storm  abated  in  the  morning,  but  the  sea  was  still  rough. 
His  great  strength  was  sorely  taxed.  Often  the  spar  would 
be  torn  from  him  and  he  would  have  to  recapture  it. 
His  friends  were  hunting  for  him,  but  failed  to  find  him. 
In  the  afternoon  a  ship  crossing  his  path  rescued  him, 
just  when  his  strength  was  failing.  His  rescuers  put 
back  to  the  coast  and  found  his  ship.  His  companions 
rejoiced,  for  they  had  given  up  all  hope  of  saving  him. 

Exhausted  from  his  long  exposure  and  terrific  strain, 
Paul  was  taken  to  Perga,  6  miles  up  the  Oestrus  from  its 
mouth.  Perga  and  the  coast  of  Pamphylia,  in  the 
summer  season,  were  hot  and  forbidding.  The  inhabit¬ 
ants  who  could  afford  a  trip  were  leaving,  or  about  to 
leave,  for  the  mountains  of  Pisidia,  to  escape  the  pestilen¬ 
tial  mosquitoes  and  the  widely  prevalent  malaria.  Thick 
swarms  of  mosquitoes  enveloped  Paul  while  he  lay  help¬ 
less.  John  Mark  bitterly  protested  against  staying  in 
the  miasmatic  atmosphere  and  longed  for  the  pure  air 
of  the  Judean  hills.  Before  Paul  had  recovered  from  his 
exposure  he  had  a  severe  attack  of  malaria.  Between 
the  violent  paroxysms  of  the  attacks,  Paul  agreed  that 
they  should  leave  the  low  country  at  once,  and  urged 
that  they  should  hasten  into  the  mountains  of  Pisidia. 

“You  are  not  fit  to  endure  the  hardships  of  mountain 
travel,”  John  Mark  urged  upon  Paul.  “Besides,  if 
Barnabas  and  I  come  down  with  the  same  disease,  we 
could  not  care  for  you.  I  am  minded  to  return  to 
Antioch  and  resume  at  a  propitious  season.” 


250 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


“The  mountain  air  will  give  me  relief,”  Paul  replied, 
“and  we  should  push  on  to  Antioch  of  Pisidia.  While 
this  trouble  will  linger  with  me,  yet  I  promise  to  be  of 
as  little  burden  as  possible.” 

“I  will  not  go  on  to  certain  failure,”  said  John  Mark, 
“and  likely  be  a  party  to  your  death.  If  you  will  not 
go  back  with  me,  then  I  will  return  to  Jerusalem.” 

“Go,  if  such  be  your  cowardly  spirit,”  said  Paul. 

John  Mark  turned  back;  and  Barnabas  procured 
pack  and  riding  animals  and  equipment  for  their  journey 
beyond  the  mountains.  Often  on  the  journey  they  had 
to  stop  while  Paul  suffered  from  the  acute  attacks  of 
malaria,  from  which  he  would  recover  in  a  day.  The 
attacks  would  come  on  him  about  every  third  day,  in 
chills  which  shook  his  frame  and  an  unquenchable  thirst, 
followed  by  a  high  fever  in  which  he  would  become  deliri¬ 
ous.  He  knev/  the  disease  from  his  experience  among 
the  people  of  Tarsus,  and  he  knew  that  the  poison  in  his 
blood  would  not  yield  to  ordinary  remedies. 

Paul  and  Barnabas  resolutely  pushed  over  the  high 
ranges,  enduring  the  vicissitudes  of  their  primitive  method 
of  traveling.  Robbers  beset  the  way.  On  one  occasion 
a  band  of  robbers  was  camped  close  to  the  crossing  of 
a  stream,  where  Paul  and  Barnabas  were  compelled  to 
stay  for  the  night.  Paul  and  Barnabas  made  up  imita¬ 
tions  of  bodies  lying  close  to  their  camp  fire,  by  spreading 
their  extra  robes  over  the  rocks;  then,  wrapping  them¬ 
selves  in  their  cloaks,  they  lay  down  a  short  distance 
away.  They  slept  in  watches.  During  the  night  the 
robbers  came  and  were  stealing  up  to  attack  the  images, 
when  Paul  and  Barnabas  leaped  upon  them.  The  sudden 
attack  alarmed  the  robbers,  who  surrendered  their 


ANTIOCH  IN  PISIDIA 


251 


knives  to  Paul  and  Barnabas.  Then  Paul  stood  guard 
over  them  until  daylight  and  plied  them  with  the  story 
of  the  Jews  and  his  own  experience.  They  gave  a  pledge, 
which  even  as  robbers  they  would  keep,  not  to  attack 
Paul  and  Barnabas  again. 

In  Pisidian  Antioch  Paul  and  Barnabas  found  a 
synagogue  which  they  attended  and,  after  being  present 
one  or  two  Sabbaths,  they  were  called  upon  to  give  their 
message  to  those  assembled.  Paul  had  been  suffering 
from  his  recurrent  attacks  of  acute  malaria,  coming 
almost  regularly  every  third  day.  A  Greek  physician 
by  the  name  of  Luke  was  called  to  attend  Paul,  and  he 
became  interested  in  his  patient  and  in  his  teaching. 
The  “God-fearers,”  at  Luke’s  suggestion,  came  to  the 
synagogue  to  hear  the  glad  tidings,  to  such  an  extent 
that  the  Jews  became  jealous  and  stirred  up  the  people 
against  the  travelers. 

The  heralds  left  the  synagogue,  to  continue  their  work 
among  the  Gentiles.  Then  the  Jews  aroused  the  wives 
of  the  magistrates  and  other  women  of  high  standing, 
with  stories  that  this  religion  was  founded  on  a  question¬ 
able  birth  of  a  man,  and  would  become  a  disgrace  to  the 
people  who  were  gathering  from  the  surrounding  country 
to  hear  Paul.  A  mob  was  gathered  to  drive  Paul  and 
Barnabas  out  of  the  city;  the  Jews  joined  in  the  persecu¬ 
tion  and  drove  the  teachers  out. 

The  travelers  had  been  in  Antioch  of  Pisidia  for  nearly 
three  months,  and  had  met  people  from  other  and  dis¬ 
tant  cities.  They  had  sent  forth  men  so  pleased  with  the 
new  words  that  far  in  advance  of  them  the  news  had 
spread,  even  to  places  the  heralds  would  never  reach. 
Yet  the  missionaries  were  driven  from  the  city  by  a 


252  HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 

howling  mob,  threatening  death  and  hurling  stones  after 
them.  The  friends  of  Paul  and  Barnabas,  anticipating 
that  such  a  condition  would  arise,  had  extended  to  them 
invitations  to  other  cities.  Tradesmen  carried  the  news, 
so  that  there  were  many  through  the  east,  watching  to 
give  the  travelers  welcome. 

While  Paul  and  Bariiabas  were  being  driven  out  of 
Antioch,  a  driver  of  a  caravan  offered  to  give  them 
passage  to  Iconium  in  his  train;  but  Paul  said  they 
would  first  go  to  Lystra  with  their  own  outfit,  because 
their  journey  would  be  frequently  interrupted  by  the 
acute  malarial  attacks  which  would  seize  him,  compelling 
them  to  wait  a  day  until  he  would  recover.  The  man 
with  the  caravan  hastened  on  to  Iconium. 


CHAPTER  XXXII 

THEKLA  OF  ICONIUM 

Onesiphorus,  a  shoemaker  of  Iconium,  having  heard 
many  times  about  the  man  who  had  for  years  been  travel¬ 
ing  in  the  mountains  and  teaching  wonderful  things,  was 
intently  listening  to  the  caravan  driver  telling  about 
Paul  and  Barnabas  being  driven  out  of  Antioch  of  Pisidia. 
The  driver  gave  a  detailed  description  of  them  and  of  the 
animals  they  had.  He  said  he  offered  to  bring  them  to 
Iconium  but  they  said,  because  the  smaller  man  of  the 
two  was  sick  at  times,  that  they  would  have  to  travel 
slowly.  The  smaller  man,  he  said,  wanted  to  go  to  Lystra. 

Onesiphorus  set  off  at  once  for  the  place  where  the 
road  divided,  some  40  miles  distant,  to  intercept  the 
travelers  and  bring  them  to  Iconium  before  they  went  to 
Lystra.  He  arrived  at  night  where  the  road  divided, 
one  part  leading  to  Iconium  and  the  other  to  Lystra. 
He  took  his  station  by  the  side  of  a  Roman  milepost, 
where  he  stood  so  rigidly  looking  toward  Antioch  that 
he  seemed  to  be  a  part  of  the  monument.  Late  in  the 
evening  he  wrapped  his  cloak  about  him,  because  of  the 
chill  winds  from  the  mountains,  for  it  was  now  No¬ 
vember.  A  Roman  messenger  passing  stopped  to  ask 
the  large,  silent  figure  if  he  were  a  guard  or  a  bandit. 
Onesiphorus  made  no  reply.  During  the  night  he  rested 
by  the  side  of  the  road,  lest  Paul  should  pass. 

In  the  morning  Onesiphorus  refreshed  himself  with 
food  from  his  sack,  and  drink  from  his  water  bottle, 
while  his  horse  strayed  toward  a  spring  a  long  distance 


253 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


254 

away.  Statuesquely  he  watched  the  road  from  Antioch. 
Near  midday  he  saw  two  travelers  approaching,  who 
answered  the  description  the  caravan  driver  had  given. 
Paul  was  riding  a  small  horse  and  Barnabas  was  walking 
behind  a  donkey  loaded  with  their  supplies.  The  dust 
of  the  highway  enveloped  them,  so  that  they  could  not 
be  seen  distinctly.  Paul  was  recovering  from  one  of  his 
attacks  and  his  wan  face  was  yellow  from  the  sunburn 
and  the  disorder  afflicting  him. 

“Are  you  not  Paul  and  Barnabas  ?”  said  Onesiphorus, 
after  greeting  them. 

“We  are,  and  who  are  you?’’  Paul  replied. 

“I  am  Onesiphorus  of  Iconium,  a  shoemaker,  and 
I  come  to  urge  you  to  bring  your  message  to  us.  All 
night  I  have  waited.  My  friends  want  to  hear  the  tid¬ 
ings  you  bear.  My  house  shall  be  yours  as  long  as  you 
will  tarry  with  me.” 

“Such  eagerness  should  be  satisfied,”  said  Barnabas 
to  Paul,  who  wearily  nodded  his  head  in  assent,  and  they 
journeyed  to  Iconium. 

The  shop  of  Onesiphorous  was  in  a  little  court  off  from 
a  side  street.  The  wall  of  the  house  of  Theokleia,  a 
widovv^  of  noble  family,  was  the  boundary  of  one  side  of 
the  court  used  by  Onesiphorus.  He  worked  under  an 
awning  in  front  of  his  living-rooms.  The  top  of  the  flat- 
roofed  house  of  Theokleia  overlooked  the  court,  immedi¬ 
ately  beneath  a  window  of  an  upper  room  occupied  by 
her  daughter  Thekla.  Paul  and  Barnabas  established 
themselves  with  Onesiphorus.  Paul  immediately  began 
tent-making,  while  Barnabas  looked  after  the  affairs  of 
their  mission.  They  held  forth  in  the  synagogue  on 
Sabbaths  and  many  came  to  talk  with  them  in  the  shop. 


THEKLA  OF  ICONIUM 


255 


Thekla,  who  was  engaged  to  be  married  to  Thamyris, 
a  wealthy  young  man  of  noble  birth,  was  in  a  hammock 
on  the  roof  of  her  home  one  sunny  afternoon;  and  she 
listened  closely  to  Paul,  explaining  his  teachings  to  men 
while  he  worked.  He  was  telling  the  men  that  the  hope 
of  a  life  eternal  and  the  living  of  a  clean  life,  full  of  acts 
of  kindness,  after  the  manner  of  Jesus,  were  the  simple 
requirements  of  those  who  would  believe  and  accept  the 
“glad  tidings”;  that  the  resurrection  was  a  fact.  A 
Greek  asked  if  this  included  women.  Paul  explained 
that  Jesus  included  women  in  every  part  of  his  life, 
because  they  had  immortal  souls.  Thekla  was  stirred 
by  this  statement,  for  only  that  day  she  had  had  an 
argument  with  her  mother  about  Thamyris  being  a 
regular  visitor  to  the  house  of  Aspasia,  the  brilliant  dancer 
and  leader  of  the  public  women  of  questionable  character. 

“A  wife  should  not  be  foolish,”  Thekla’s  mother 
had  said.  “Thamyris  is  too  well  bred  ever  to  bring 
Aspasia  into  his  home,  and  the  home  is  your  world. 
What  your  husabnd  does  outside  of  your  home  should  be 
no  concern  of  yours.” 

Thekla  spent  day  after  day  at  her  window,  listening 
to  Paul  and  Barnabas,  teaching  all  who  came  into  the 
shop  of  Onesiphorus.  She  refused  to  come  down,  even 
at  the  request  of  Thamyris,  for  she  had  heard  strange 
things,  that  opened  her  eyes  to  larger  and  fuller  life. 
Aspasia  had  come  to  the  shop  to  have  some  work  done, 
and  from  her  screen  Thekla  had  seen  and  heard  her. 
After  listening  to  Paul  telling  the  story  of  forgiveness  of 
the  woman  whom  the  Jews  were  about  to  stone,  Aspasia 
tearfully  asked  if  such  as  she,  who  danced  in  the  nameless 
orgies  of  the  temple  of  Artemis,  sold  herself  to  the  nobles, 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


256 

yet  abhorred  the  life,  could  have  back  the  peace  of  her 
earlier  life. 

“To  you  now,  as  to  women  during  his  life,  he  brings 
the  hope  of  the  new  life,  and  forgiveness  if  you  obey  and 
follow  him,^’  said  Paul. 

“I  dare  not  hope,’’  said  Aspasia.  “I  am  the  toy  of 
nobles  who  strive  more  to  please  me  than  they  do  their 
wives,  yet  my  sex  revolts.” 

Thekla,  from  timid,  unquestioning  obedience,  grew 
defiant  in  disobeying  her  mother’s  commands  to  cease 
listening  to  the  strangers.  The  possibilities  that  through 
this  teaching  would  come  a  new  vision  to  the  women  of 
the  East  thrilled  Thekla  with  a  longing  to  help  her  sex. 
The  lofty  purity  of  Paul’s  teaching,  the  beauty  of  the 
Christian  life,  inspired  her  to  seek  more  knowledge. 

Thamyris  and  Theokleia  agreed  that  the  man  Paul 
must  be  driven  out;  for  Thekla  had  already  twice 
refused  to  marry  Thamyris  on  an  agreed  day.  Thamyris 
met  a  grain  buyer  from  Antioch,  who  told  him  that  the 
Jews  had  driven  Paul  and  Barnabas  out  of  that  city. 

The  winter  months  were  past,  and  again  Thamyris 
urged  Thekla  to  fix  a  day  that  they  would  be  married. 
She  refused.  He  tried  to  divert  her  mind  from  interest 
in  Paul’s  teaching  by  taking  her  to  a  special  celebration 
in  the  temple  erected  to  Artemis.  The  dancers  circled 
about  the  altar  in  wild  and  graceful  figures;  the  priest 
was  gorgeously  arrayed;  but  she  saw  Aspasia  and  her 
dancing  girls  waiting  back  of  the  pillars,  in  hiding,  when 
Thamyris  insisted  that  it  was  time  for  her  to  go,  because 
the  dancing  to  follow  would  be  given  by  the  hetairai  for 
men,  and  it  would  not  be  proper  for  honorable  women  to 
be  present. 


THEKLA  OF  ICONIUM 


257 


^‘Then  the  services  in  this  temple  are  so  vulgar  that 
you  would  not  have  me  see  them  ?”  Thekla  asked. 

‘‘It  is  according  to  the  customs  of  the  ages,”  Thamyris 
replied,  in  a  tone  of  finaHty,  “and  it  will  continue,  even 
if  some  rail  against  it.  Our  people  resent  the  maudlin 
sentiment  of  this  meddler,  Paul.” 

“Sneers  will  not  destroy  the  hope  he  gives,”  Thekla 
said. 

“There  are  only  two  kinds  of  women,”  said  Thamyris, 
mockingly.  “One  is  the  hetairai,  who  never  dare  think 
on  purity;  and  the  other  is  the  matron,  who  must  not 
think  on  impure  things.  We  safeguard  our  civilization 
by  keeping  the  two  classes  separate.” 

“Not  to  safeguard,  but  to  gain  the  license  you  allow 
to  men,”  Thekla  replied,  hotly.  “Your  hetairai,  from 
their  knowledge  of  men,  gain  freedom  of  expression  and 
access  to  knowledge ;  while  you  reserve  for  your  homes  the 
dull  morality  of  satiated  passion.”  She  left  in  such  anger 
that  Thamyris  did  not  dare  to  offer  to  accompany  her. 

The  complaints  of  Thamyris  to  the  magistrate,  an 
officer  of  local  selection  permitted  by  Rome  in  the  far 
eastern  cities,  that  Paul  was  casting  a  spell  over  the 
women  of  the  city,  to  keep  them  from  marrying,  caused 
an  order  to  be  issued  for  the  arrest  of  Paul.  During  a 
banquet  in  the  Roman  style,  given  by  Aspasia,  a  clamor 
arose  in  the  street  below,  as  she  reclined  at  the  table, 
holding  a  goblet  of  wine,  from  which  Thamyris  was 
sipping.  She  leaped  from  the  table-couch  and  laughingly 
ran  to  the  window.  In  a  moment  she  screamed  in  fright. 
Thamyris,  hurrying  to  her  side,  saw  officers  leading  Paul 
and  Barnabas  toward  the  jail,  followed  by  a  shouting, 
hooting  mob. 


258 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


had  that  done,  to  stop  Paul  from  turning  the 
heads  of  our  noble  women,’’  said  Thamyris.  “He  cast 
spells  over  women,  making  them  beheve  they  have  the 
same  right  to  think  as  men.  Now  he  will  not  fool 
them  any  more.” 

“You  bigoted  fool,”  Aspasia  cried,  with  tears  in  her 
eyes.  “Your  lust  is  your  guide.  He  does  bring  hope, 
even  to  me,  and  only  a  high-bred  brute  would  do  as  you 
have  done.” 

Thamyris  laughed  in  her  face  and  playfully  took  her 
in  his  arms  to  carry  her  back  to  the  banquet  table.  She 
turned  on  him  Hke  a  wild  animal  at  bay;  and,  in  a  torrent 
of  words,  set  upon  him,  striking  and  scratching  at  his 
face  until  he  fled ;  then,  in  her  rage,  she  drove  her  guests 
out  of  the  house. 

The  news  spread  rapidly  that  Paul  and  Barnabas 
had  been  placed  in  stocks  in  the  prison.  Thekla  heard 
Onesiphorus  telling  his  friends  what  had  happened ;  and, 
although  he  lowered  his  voice,  she  heard  him  say  that  it 
was  done  at  the  behest  of  Thamyris.  That  night  she 
bribed  the  porter  of  her  mother’s  house  with  her  bracelets 
to  let  her  out  of  the  house;  and  in  hke  manner  she  bribed 
the  jailor  with  a  silver  mirror  to  let  her  into  the  jail. 

All  night  long  she  lay  at  the  feet  of  Paul,  who, 
although  cramped  by  the  cruel  stocks,  told  her  the  glad 
tidings  in  his  most  interesting  manner.  In  the  morning 
Thamyris  and  Theokleia  hastened  to  the  prison  at  the 
break  of  day  to  take  Thekla  away.  She  refused  to  for¬ 
get,  or  to  cease  her  interest  in  the  things  Paul  had 
taught.  They  took  her  before  the  magistrate,  with 
whom  they  had  made  arrangements,  and  he  threatened 
her  with  proceedings.  She  calmly  told  him  to  proceed. 


THEKLA  OF  ICONIUM 


259 


Nonplussed,  they  took  her  home,  but  her  sweet  patience 
and  firmness  balked  them  in  all  arguments. 

That  day  the  officers  led  Paul  and  Barnabas  to  the 
city  gates,  while  a  mob  followed,  pelting  them  with  small 
stones  and  striking  them  with  sticks.  Thekla,  from  the 
window  of  her  mother’s  home,  in  which  she  was  a 
prisoner,  watched  in  grief  and  anger  the  expulsion  of 
men  who  gave  higher  hopes  and  better  courage  to  the 
people.  Then  and  there  she  resolved  that  under  no 
circumstances  would  she  wed  Thamyris. 

In  the  passing  days  her  mother,  the  family  of 
Thamyris,  and  friends  tried  to  change  her  mind.  They 
even  brought  a  sorcerer,  who  claimed  he  could  undo  the 
spell  which  Paul  had  cast  over  her;  but  she  insisted  that 
there  was  no  spell,  that  she  was  merely  awakened  to  the 
fact  that  she  had  a  soul,  and  had  a  desire  to  tell  to  others 
the  story  of  the  soul  and  its  rewards. 

After  many  days,  Theokleia  and  Thamyris  were 
advised  by  the  priest  of  the  temple  of  Artemis  to  let 
Thekla  escape,  then  Thamyris  should  overtake  her  on 
the  plains  and  by  force  make  her  submit  to  his  passion, 
thereby  breaking  the  spell  cast  by  Paul.  Her  mother 
made  life  unbearable  for  Thekla  and  contrived  to  allow 
her  to  escape,  under  the  impression  that  if  she  would  go 
to  Antioch  she  would  meet  Paul.  Thekla  fled  with  her 
own  maid,  hoping  to  find  Paul  in  Antioch  of  Pisidia. 
Thamyris,  pursuing,  overtook  her  on  the  plain,  to  carry 
out  the  brutality  advised  by  the  priest;  but  her  strong 
will,  saintly  purity,  and  newly  awakened  soul  conscious¬ 
ness  made  him  desist,  and  she  journeyed  to  Antioch. 

In  Antioch  the  people  were  gathering  for  a  great 
festival  conducted  by  Alexander,  the  high  priest  of  the 


26o 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


native  religion,  in  honor  of  the  Roman  governor,  who 
was  visiting  the  province;  though  Queen  Triphaena 
was  still  recognized  as  participating  in  at  least  the 
honor  of  governing  the  land.  Games,  parades,  and 
many  forms  of  entertainment  would  be  given  in  the 
arena.  Thekla,  coming  into  Antioch  at  this  time,  met 
Alexander,  who  thought  she  was  one  of  the  dancers, 
because  (according  to  the  custom  of  her  country)  she 
did  not  wear  a  veil.  In  greeting  her  he  tried  to  kiss  her 
against  her  will,  as  he  would  any  dancer.  She  fought 
him,  knocked  off  his  priestly  hat  and  scratched  ,his 
face.  This  so  enraged  Alexander  that  he  took  her  before 
the  governor,  on  the  accusation  of  sacrilege;  and  the 
governor,  forthwith,  condemned  her  to  be  offered  to  a 
lioness  and  to  be  exhibited  as  a  victim  in  the  parade. 

She  asked  if  Paul  were  in  Antioch,  but  was  told  that 
he  had  not  returned.  Then  she  declared  before  all  the 
people  that  she  was  under  a  vow,  on  a  mission  of  ‘The 
God.’’  The  women  set  up  such  a  cry  when  she  said  she 
was  on  a  mission  that  Tryphaena,  the  queen,  took  pity 
on  her  and  became  responsible  for  her,  so  that  she  would 
not  be  subject  to  the  brutality  of  the  soldiers — a  license, 
by  custom,  gave  them  the  women  victims  for  their  lust.. 

Tryphaena,  both  from  the  high  character  of  Thekla 
and  from  a  dream  about  her  own  deceased  daughter,  of 
nearly  the  same  age,  became  enamored  of  Thekla.  The 
next  day  Thekla  was  produced  and  was  compelled  to 
ride  in  the  parade  on  top  of  a  cage,  in  which  was  the  only 
lioness  which  Alexander  had  for  the  festival.  In  the 
parade  were  elephants  and  bears  and  all  the  entertainers. 
Among  the  dancing  girls,  on  a  wheeled  platform  repre¬ 
senting  a  bower,  was  Aspasia,  who  was  surprised  at 


THEKLA  OF  ICONIUM 


261 


seeing  Thekla  so  situated.  At  first  she  gloated  that 
Thekla  had  been  brought  so  low ;  but  when  she  saw  that 
the  cage  carried  a  banner  inscribed  with  the  word, 
“sacrilege,”  her  heart  filled  with  pity,  for  she  knew  what 
fate  awaited  Thekla.  The  lioness  reached  her  tongue 
through  the  bars  and  licked  Thekla’s  bare  feet  during 
the  parade. 

After  the  parade  Tryphaena  again  took  Thekla,  until 
the  time  she  would  be  required,  and  spent  the  night 
listening  to  her  story  of  the  great  mission  she  wanted  to 
undertake,  in  carrying  the  glad  tidings  to  the  women  of 
Galatia  and  of  the  East.  Tryphaena  refused  to  give 
Thekla  up  to  the  soldiers,  who  came  for  her  the  next 
day,  and  would  not  surrender  her  until  Alexander  came 
in  person,  with  orders  from  the  governor. 

Thekla  was  led  to  the  arena,  stripped  of  her  clothes, 
and  wore  only  a  cincture,  which  was  required  by  Roman 
law  to  be  furnished  to  any  such  victim.  The  audience 
had  forgotten  its  sympathy  of  the  opening  day  for 
Thekla  and  now  howled  for  the  sport.  She  was  led  to 
the  gate  of  the  arena  by  Tryphaena  and  there  the  guards 
took  her  and  bound  her  to  a  stake,  in  front  of  the  crowd, 
who  howled  with  delight.  Thekla  sagged  down  on  the 
thongs,  shamed  and  hopeless.  Then  she  spoke  a  prayer, 
in  a  low,  clear  voice,  with  such  feeling  that  a  solemn 
stillness  settled  over  the  wild  audience,  now  eager  to 
hear  the  words,  the  cry  of  her  soul: 

“My  Lord  and  my  God  behold  me,  the  shame  of 
women  is  uncovered  in  me,  and  I  stand  in  the  midst  of 
all  the  people.  Remember  me  in  this  hour.” 

Many  women  in  the  benches  began  screaming  at  the 
governor  to  let  her  go.  The  lioness  was  turned  into  the 


262 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


arena,  and,  as  it  approached  her,  the  women  created  a 
panic,  clambering  over  the  seats  in  an  effort  to  reach  the 
governor.  The  lioness,  released  from  its  cage,  dashed 
across  the  arena  until  close  to  the  unconscious  victim, 
then  slowly  approached,  as  if  getting  ready  to  spring. 
Thekla  had  closed  her  eyes  in  terror;  but  the  lioness, 
recognizing  the  body  as  that  of  her  companion  of  the  day 
before  by  the  sense  of  smell,  refused  to  attack  her  and 
tenderly  licked  Thekla’s  bare  feet. 

Alexander  in  great  rage  called  for  two  bulls.  Keepers 
drove  the  lioness  to  her  cage.  Guards  brought  the  two 
bulls  and  hitched  them  by  chains,  one  to  the  feet  and 
the  other  to  the  head  of  the  outstretched,  unconscious 
Thekla,  while  other  guards  stood  by  with  goads,  to 
drive  the  bulls  in  opposite  directions  and  pull  her  body 
in  twain.  The  women  had  filled  the  section  occupied 
by  the  governor  and  were  shaking  their  clenched  fists  at 
him  and  screaming,  ‘^Murderer,”  “Brute,”  “Stop  it.” 

Queen  Tryphaena  fainted.  Because  of  the  love  they 
bore  their  native  queen  the  men  were  aroused  and  joined 
in  the  demand  that  Thekla  be  released.  The  governor 
signed  Alexander  to  release  her,  which  he  did  reluctantly, 
in  fear  of  the  people.  The  shouts  of  joy  aroused  Try¬ 
phaena.  Old  as  she  was  and  with  the  dignity  of  queen, 
she  eagerly  hastened  down  to  the  arena.  As  she  entered 
the  arena  she  was  stopped  by  a  cry  of  pain  close  by  her, 
for  Aspasia  had  leaped  to  the  arena  from  the  wall,  sprain¬ 
ing  her  ankle.  She  was  screaming  from  the  pain  and  to 
attract  Tryphaena.  The  queen  turned  aside  and  helped 
her  to  her  feet.  Aspasia  insisted  on  limping  along  with 
the  queen  to  Thekla.  Reaching  Thekla,  the  queen  helped 
her  to  rise  and  enveloped  her  in  her  own  regal  cloak. 


THEKLA  OF  ICONIUM 


263 


The  queen  and  Aspasia  led  Thekla  to  the  gates.  When 
the  gates  were  opened,  there  stood  Thamyris,  holding 
out  his  hands  to  Thekla. 

“My  shame  has  been  before  all  the  people,”  said 
Thekla. 

“Come  with  me.  I  love  you,”  said  Thamyris. 

“We  have  to  tell  the  story  of  good  news  to  the  women 
of  Asia,”  said  Thekla,  putting  her  arm  around  Aspasia. 
“You  see  that  in  the  new  freedom  the  two  classes  of 
women  have  met.  We  now  understand  each  other 
through  the  power  of  love.  I  will  go  on  my  mission; 
if  Aspasia  wishes  to  turn  back  with  you,  she  may.” 

“I,  too,  have  found  a  love  that  is  pure.  We  will  go 
on  and  take  the  word  to  women  of  my  class,”  said 
Aspasia. 

“That  man  Paul  has  ruined  our  lives,”  Thamyris 
said,  bitterly. 

“Not  Paul,  except  that  he  brought  the  truth  to  us, 
and  we  will  take  it  to  women  who  would  be  free  in  their 
souls,”  said  Thekla.  The  three  women,  unconscious  of 
the  shouting  multitude,  went  on  their  way,  leaving 
Thamyris  raging  in  his  defeat. 


CHAPTER  XXXIII 


“JOINT  HEIRS’’ 

It  was  in  the  early  summer  of  48  a.d.  that  Paul  and 
Barnabas  arrived  at  Lystra,  20  miles  south  of  Iconium. 
They  were  smarting  from  the  beatings  they  had  received 
at  Iconium.  The  people  of  the  country  spoke  the  native 
language  of  Lycaonia,  and  it  was  only  in  the  cities  of  this 
land  that  the  apostles  could  find  people  who  understood 
the  Greek  language. 

In  Lystra  Paul  found  a  family  with  whom  he  made 
his  home,  Eunice,  a  Jewess,  whose  husband,  a  Greek, 
was  dead.  Her  son  Timothy,  a  lad  fifteen  years  old, 
and  her  mother,  Lois,  constituted  the  family.  The  lad 
was  very  bright  and  Paul  grew  to  love  him;  especially 
was  he  interesting  to  Paul,  because  Lois  had  taught  him 
the  Law  and  the  Prophets,  yet  Timothy  had  never  been 
subjected  to  the  Jewish  ordinances. 

Paul’s  power  to  perform  miracles  was  demonstrated 
in  Lystra,  when  he  healed  a  cripple.  In  the  simplicity 
of  their  superstitions  the  people,  led  by  the  priests,  were 
about  to  offer  sacrifices  to  Paul  and  Barnabas,  as  gods. 
When  the  heralds  refused  to  accept  the  high  honors 
offered  by  the  priests  of  the  native  cult,  because  it  was 
idolatry,  the  priests  immediately  became  offended  at 
Paul.  Jewish  grain-buyers  of  Antioch,  in  the  city  at 
the  time,  urged  how  these  men  had  been  treated  in 
Antioch  and  Iconium;  and  the  priests  led  the  people  in 
an  attack  on  Paul.  They  stoned  him  until  he  was 
unconscious;  then,  fearing  what  they  had  done,  they 

264 


“JOINT  HEIRS” 


265 


dragged  his  body  outside  of  the  city.  This  occurred 
after  the  heralds  had  been  there  two  months.  Paul  and 
Barnabas  left  for  the  border  city  of  Derbe,  25  miles 
farther  south.  In  the  middle  of  the  winter  they  started 
on  a  return  to  the  cities  through  which  they  had  passed. 
They  went  to  the  converts,  who  had  been  organized  in 
bodies,  and  met  with  no  public  opposition.  In  Antioch 
Paul  was  again  treated  by  Luke,  the  physician.  They 
hastened  on  to  the  coast,  so  as  to  leave  before  the  malarial 
period  returned.  Though  once  in  a  while,  now  many 
days  apart,  the  attacks  would  come  on  Paul,  yet  he  had 
recovered  his  strength  in  the  high  altitudes.  On  the 
way  they  stopped  in  Adada  and  held  audiences  in 
Perga. 

In  June,  49  a.d.,  the  heralds  took  passage  from 
Attaleia  to  Syrian  Antioch. 

Paul  and  Barnabas  were  occupied  in  Antioch,  first 
in  telling  the  wonderful  results  of  their  journey,  and  next 
in  counteracting  the  activities  of  Judaists,  who  were 
spreading  the  doctrine  that  Gentiles  accepting  the 
gospel  must  comply  with  all  Jewish  requirements,  even 
to  the  ceremonial  washing  before  each  meal,  which  was 
merely  a  sanitary  symbol. 

Paul  would  not  yield  one  instant  to  the  claims  of  the 
Judaizers  who  justified  their  course  by  saying  they  were 
just  from  James  and  the  apostles  in  Jerusalem  who  had 
decided  that  Gentiles  could  not  come  into  full  fellowship 
under  the  gospel  until  they  had  complied  with  all  the 
ordinances  of  Moses  the  same  as  Jesus  himself  had  done. 
The  argument  had  great  weight  with  those  leaders  who 
were  Jews  and  in  the  majority.  Paul  threw  his  supreme 
energy  into  this  controversy;  for  hours  at  a  time  and 


266 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


for  many  days  he  confuted  their  arguments  until  baffled 
they  persistently  asserted  their  authority. 

Paul  fought  for  his  cause,  for  the  mighty  purpose  of 
Christ  submitting  to  death  on  the  cross  that  he  might 
bring  salvation  to  the  world;  he  fought  for  converts  from 
the  Gentiles  in  whom  he  had  planted  some  of  the  love 
of  Jesus  that  actuated  his  own  life.  He  was  almost 
exhausted  on  the  last  day  of  the  controversy,  tears 
streamed  down  his  cheeks  as  he  plead  that  they  would 
not  insist  on  customs  that  would  destroy  the  universal 
appeal  of  Jesus  to  men.  His  limbs  trembled,  his  throat 
was  parched,  his  voice  was  strained,  emotion  made  him 
shake  as  with  an  ague,  he  reeled,  he  was  falling.  Friends 
leaped  to  aid  him,  but  before  they  could  reach  him  he 
recovered.  A  great  calm  came  over  him,  he  seemed  to 
grow  in  stature  and  strength.  He  was  silent — the  hush 
settled  over  all — while  with  radiant  face  upturned  he 
was  listening  as  if  he  heard  a  voice.  He  looked  upon 
the  people  with  a  smile  of  the  generous  victor  and  said 
in  a  sweet,  impressive  voice: 

“It  has  been  revealed  to  me  that  we  should  take  this 
question  before  the  elders  in  Jerusalem  and  have  it 
settled  once  and  forever.’’ 

Barnabas  ably  seconded  the  idea  as  the  only  sensible 
thing  to  do.  The  Judaists  sought  to  be  heard,  but  the 
elders  and  the  congregation  would  not  hear  them,  and 
immediately  appointed  Paul  and  Barnabas  and  others 
to  go  to  Jerusalem  to  lay  the  question  before  the  apostles 
and  elders. 

The  Judaists  left  by  boat,  but  Paul  and  Barnabas  were 
so  confident  of  the  outcome  that,  taking  Titus  with  them, 
they  journeyed  overland,  stopping  on  the  way  to  pro- 


“JOINT  HEIRS” 


267 


claim  the  glad  tidings  with  the  fervor  and  simplicity  of 
their  other  journeys.  Paul  seemed  more  inspired  than 
ever  before  and  many  Gentiles  confessed  Jesus  as  their 
Lord  and  Master.  His  companions  had  difficulty  to 
persuade  Paul  to  take  time  for  rest  and  nourishment, 
for  his  zeal  had  been  renewed  or  rather,  if  possible,  he 
was  inspired  to  greater  efforts. 

When  Paul  and  Barnabas  arrived  in  Jerusalem  they 
found  that  the  Judaists  from  Antioch  having  preceded 
them  had  secured  the  aid  of  some  of  the  most  learned 
who  held  their  views  to  present  their  cause;  and  they 
had  arranged  for  a  large  crowd  of  their  friends  to  be 
present  at  the  hearing.  Paul  convinced  the  apostles 
and  elders  that  a  public  hearing  would  cause  schisms 
and  bitterness,  and  the  hearing  was  before  the  small 
body  of  apostles  and  elders.  Paul  insisted  on  taking 
Titus  in  with  him  and  Barnabas  although  it  was  well 
known  that  notwithstanding  Titus  had  been  active  in 
relief  of  the  suffering  of  Jerusalem  and  in  missionary  work 
he  had  never  submitted  to  the  Mosaic  ordinances.  The 
Judaists  stated  their  cause  as  if  the  question  had  already 
been  settled  favorably  to  their  contention  and  that  they 
were  only  carrying  out  such  interpretation. 

When  the  time  came  for  Paul  to  present  his  views 
he  began  without  any  reference  to  the  controversy.  He 
recalled  his  own  conversion,  the  revelation  to  him,  his 
years  of  work  without  so  much  as  showing  his  face  in 
Jerusalem,  the  appearance  of  Jesus  to  him,  and  that  the 
things  which  had  been  revealed  to  him  agreed  with  the 
understanding  those  who  had  walked  with  Jesus  had 
from  the  Master.  He  told  them  of  the  power  and  influ¬ 
ence  of  the  glad  tidings  among  the  Gentiles  wherever  he 


268 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


and  Barnabas  had  gone,  and  that  these  converts  were 
spreading  the  teachings  farther  and  faster  than  any 
other  word  had  ever  traveled,  even  to  the  remote  corners 
of  the  world. 

Think  you  that  this  is  all  in  vain?”  he  cried  out, 
visibly  holding  his  intense  emotions  in  subjection  so  as 
to  present  the  facts  in  orderly  fashion.  ^‘Already  the 
story  of  the  cross  has  outrun  the  power  of  the  law.  Was 
the  sacrifice  of  Jesus  merely  to  extend  burdensome  cus¬ 
toms  which,  he  declared,  by  interpretation,  killed  inspira¬ 
tion?  Or  have  I  run  in  vain?  Am  I  also  deceiving 
myself  ?  Would  you  withdraw  the  promise  of  the  resur¬ 
rection  that  Jesus  made  to  all  who  would  believe  on  him, 
and  limit  it  only  to  Jews  ?  He  is  the  fulfilment  of  the 
law;  and  I  am  his  servant  to  carry  the  glad  tidings  to 
all  the  world,  first  to  the  Jews  and  also  to  the  Gentiles, 
for  all  who  believe  on  him  are  joint  heirs  with  him.” 

Then  Peter  rose  and  with  his  wonderful  enthusiasm 
told  of  his  vision  in  Joppa  that  led  him  to  Cornelius,  the 
centurion,  who  received  the  Holy  Spirit,  and  that  the 
way  was  opened  for  all  Gentiles,  saying : 

‘‘Now,  therefore,  why  do  you  make  trial  of  God,  that 
you  should  put  a  yoke  upon  the  neck  of  the  disciples 
which  neither  your  fathers  nor  we  are  able  to  bear  ?” 

James,  the  leader  of  the  apostles,  answered  that  it 
seemed  to  him  that  they  should  not  lay  burdens  on  those 
that  came  from  the  Gentiles,  only  that  they  abstain  from 
pollutions,  from  meats  offered  to  idols  and  other  com¬ 
monly  acknowledged  wrongs.  This  met  with  approval, 
and  it  was  embodied  in  a  letter  to  the  gentile  converts  at 
Antioch  sent  by  special  messengers,  Judas  and  Silas,who 
returned  with  Paul  and  Barnabas  to  confirm  the  findings. 


“JOINT  HEIRS” 


269 


Apparently  the  Judaizers  had  been  suppressed;  and 
Paul  rejoiced  that  the  great  stumbling-block  of  Judaism 
had  been  removed  from  the  highway  being  thronged  by 
Christian  believers.  Within  a  short  time  the  Christians 
in  Antioch  felt  that  the  vexing  question  of  Judaism  in  the 
church  had  been  settled  and  released  Judas  and  Silas 
from  any  further  duties  to  repeat  and  enforce  the  decision. 

The  Judaists  did  not  accept  the  decision  of  the  council 
in  Jerusalem  in  the  broad  application  which  its  terms 
indicated,  but  they  set  about  to  give  a  private  interpreta¬ 
tion  among  the  Jews  of  the  congregation  that  the  decision 
only  affected  the  rights  of  the  Gentiles  to  become  mem¬ 
bers  and  to  be  received  in  the  public  gatherings.  The 
Judaizers  persisted  in  their  course  until  there  was  a  with¬ 
drawal  of  social  intercourse  of  many  of  the  Jews  with 
those  of  gentile  origin,  the  separation  being  principally 
evidenced  by  the  refusal  of  Jews  to  partake  of  meals  in 
company  with  gentile  members. 

When  Peter  came  up  to  Antioch  during  the  late  winter 
on  his  journey  of  inspection  of  the  work,  the  Judaists 
appealed  to  him  that  their  interpretation  saved  them  to 
the  seclusiveness  of  their  own  ritualism  and  saved  them 
from  becoming  unclean  under  the  Mosaic  Law,  while 
all  the  privileges  of  salvation  were  extended  to  the 
Gentiles.  Without  giving  deep  thought  to  the  argument 
Peter  was  won  to  it  and  refused  to  sit  at  meat  with  the 
gentile  members  of  the  church  lest  he  offend  the  con¬ 
science  of  the  Jewish  members.  Even  Barnabas  was 
led  into  taking  this  view. 

The  Judaizers  suddenly  became  open  in  their  views, 
intending  to  take  advantage  of  Peter’s  approval  to  carry 
their  point.  Until  Peter  had  been  won  over  to  the  side 


270 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


of  the  Judaizers  they  had  kept  their  construction  of  the 
letter  of  the  council  from  Paul. 

Paul  called  a  meeting  of  the  elders  as  soon  as  the 
action  of  Peter  and  Barnabas  came  to  his  knowledge. 
He  did  not  handle  the  subject  delicately,  nor  did  he  per¬ 
mit  the  standing  of  Peter  as  an  apostle  to  deter  him. 
He  accused  him  of  eating  with  Gentiles  until  influential 
Judaists  had  raised  this  new  question,  and  that  now  he 
insulted  gentile  brothers  by  refusing  to  sit  at  meat  with 
them.  “You  vacillate,”  Paul  charged  Peter  before  the 
elders.  “Before  this  question  was  raised  you  ate- with 
Gentiles  without  becoming  a  Gentile,  now,  because  these 
Judaizers  make  show  of  numbers,  you  would  compel 
Gentiles  to  become  Jews  before  they  could  eat  with 
you.  You  are  a  dissembler,  a  play-actor.  What  con¬ 
fidence  must  we  have  in  you  ?  We  are  justified  by  faith 
in  Jesus  Christ,  not  by  the  works  of  the  law.  Speak  the 
truth  as  you  did  at  the  council  in  Jerusalem.” 

Peter  thought  rapidly,  and  in  his  quickness  to  right 
a  wrong  humbly  begged  Paul  to  forget  and  forgive  him 
this  wrong,  and  then  he  told  the  assembly  all  that  had 
taken  place  and  that  Paul  was  right.  In  like  manner 
Barnabas  retracted  his  action.  From  that  day  forth 
the  Judaizers  were  powerless  in  Antioch,  though  they 
sought  other  fields,  even  in  far  Galatia. 

In  the  spring  of  50  a.d.  Paul  felt  the  urge  to  estabhsh 
new  organizations  and  to  stabiHze  those  already  formed. 
Barnabas  insisted  on  taking  John  Mark  with  them 
because  he  had  repented  of  hds  former  desertion  and  he 
was  a  competent  attendant.  The  two  old  comrades 
could  not  agree  on  John  Mark,  so  Barnabas  took  John 
Mark  and  sailed  to  Cyprus,  and  Paul  selected  Silas  to 


“JOINT  HEIRS” 


271 


go  with  him.  Paul  and  Silas  set  out  overland,  visiting 
places  Paul  had  gone  to  before  he  was  called  to  Antioch. 
They  came  into  Tarsus  where  Paul  found  a  hearty 
welcome  by  his  aged  parents,  and  his  old  friends  were  now 
glad  to  discuss  the  glad  tidings  with  him.  Paul  and 
Silas  journeyed  up  through  the  Cilician  gates,  across  the 
mountains  and  down  through  the  cities  Paul  and  Barna¬ 
bas  had  visited. 

Stopping  at  Lystra  with  his  old  friends,  Eunice  and 
Lois,  Paul  found  that  Timothy  had  rapidly  grown  to 
manhood  and  had  been  well  schooled  in  the  Scriptures, 
and  had  been  thoroughly  grounded  in  the  glad  tidings 
according  to  the  things  which  the  apostle  had  taught 
them  on  his  former  visits. 

The  proposed  trip  either  to  the  Far  East  or  northeast 
appealed  to  Timothy.  He  begged  to  join  Paul  and 
Silas,  and  he  argued  that  his  own  horse  would  be  sufficient 
for  him.  Paul  listened  to  the  plea  and  persuaded  Eunice 
to  let  her  boy  go  with  them.  In  evidence  of  his  regard 
for  the  Jewish  customs  and  to  convince  Eunice  that  her 
own  religion  would  be  a  safeguard  for  her  son,  Paul 
circumcised  Timothy.  Thus  it  was  that  the  young 
man,  Timothy,  entered  into  the  life  of  Paul. 

The  three  travelers  set  forth  from  Lystra,  uncertain 
of  their  destination.  In  Antioch  of  Pisidia  Paul  again 
met  Luke,  to  whom  he  rehearsed  the  controversy  about 
the  call  to  the  Gentiles.  This  so  encouraged  Luke  that 
he  volunteered  to  join  the  party.  They  went  forth 
along  the  mountain  roads  to  the  east  and  north.  Look¬ 
ing  down  the  rivers  flowing  to  the  east  and  north,  Paul 
felt  that  not  any  good  was  to  be  accomplished  in  those 
regions  which  looked  forbidding  from  the  mountains. 


272 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


They  found  no  suitable  places  to  stop  and,  after  many 
days  of  travel,  they  reached  Troas.  Luke  had  been 
telhng  Paul  of  the  great  needs  in  Macedonia. 

That  night  Paul  had  a  vision  of  Luke  standing  by 
and  begging  him  to  come  over  into  Macedonia.  When 
Paul  told  his  companions  of  the  dream,  they  agreed  that 
it  was  a  confirmation  of  the  suggestion  to  go  to  Mace¬ 
donia.  That  very  day  they  set  sail  and,  reaching 
NeapoHs,  they  journeyed  to  Philippi,  in  which  city  there 
were  many  Romans. 

Paul  and  his  companions  had  been  traveling  from 
June  until  August.  While  resting  for  a  few  days  they 
became  acquainted  with  the  customs  of  the  people. 
Women  without  veils  went  about  the  streets;  men 
affected  more  generally  the  Roman  dress;  there  were  so 
few  Jews  that  there  was  no  synagogue.  Jews  who  wor¬ 
shiped  went  to  a  spot  selected  on  the  river,  and  were 
often  accompanied  by  the  ‘‘God-fearers.”  In  this  land 
women  had  greater  privileges  than  in  Asia.  Among  the 
“God-fearers”  was  an  influential  tradeswoman  by  the 
name  of  Lydia,  a  dealer  in  the  purple  cloth  from  Thyatira, 
highly  prized  in  Philippi.  Paul  met  her  at  the  place  of 
worship  by  the  riverside  and  she  was  won  by  his  earnest 
presentation  of  the  glad  tidings.  She  accepted  the 
teachings  and  lavished  on  Paul  every  attention,  extend¬ 
ing  to  him  the  hospitality  of  her  commodious  home,  both 
for  himself  and  his  companions,  as  well  as  a  place  of 
meeting. 

An  insane,  afflicted  girl,  who,  in  her  half-witted  man¬ 
ner,  told  fortunes  for  the  fees  paid  her  Jewish  owners, 
followed  Paul,  crying  out: 

“These  men  are  servants  of  the  Most  High  God.” 


^‘JOINT  HEIRS” 


273 


After  some  days  Paul  became  weary  of  her  irrespon¬ 
sible  outcry  and,  turning  to  her,  he  commanded  the  evil 
spirit  to  come  out  of  her.  Immediately  she  was  restored 
to  her  right  mind;  and  her  owners,  in  rage,  seizing  Paul 
and  Silas,  took  them  before  the  magistrate  and  cunningly 
charged  them  with  stirring  up  sedition  against  Rome. 
The  rabble  followed,  demanding  the  punishment  of  Paul 
and  Silas.  The  heralds  knew  that  it  was  useless  to 
demand  justice  there.  Contrary  to  law,  the  magistrates 
ordered  them  flogged  without  trial.  Then,  bruised  and 
bleeding,  they  were  thrown  into  jail.  They  could  not 
sleep  and  were  singing,  when  an  earthquake  rocked  the 
jail.  The  chains  holding  the  prisoners  dropped  from  the 
broken  walls;  the  doors  flew  open;  the  jailer,  with  a 
light,  rushed  in.  Seeing  the  doors  open,  he  was  sure 
that  his  prisoners  had  escaped;  and,  knowing  the  disgrace 
of  allowing  prisoners  to  escape,  he  was  about  to  fall  on 
his  sword  when  Paul  called  out  to  him : 

^‘Do  yourself  no  harm,  for  we  are  all  here.” 

The  jailer  listened  to  the  wonderful  story  Paul  told 
of  Jesus  of  Nazareth,  and  believed.  The  magistrates  in 
their  superstition  thought  that  the  earthquake  was 
because  they  had  accused,  flogged,  and  thrown  Paul  and 
Silas  in  jail  without  trial;  and  they  sent  word  to  the  jailer 
in  the  morning  to  release  the  prisoners. 

“They  have  beaten  us,  uncondemned  Romans,  cast 
us  in  jail,  and  do  they  now  cast  us  out  privily?”  said 
Paul,  when  the  jailer  reported  the  directions  of  the  magis¬ 
trates.  “Let  them  come  themselves  and  bring  us  out.” 

The  magistrates  were  so  scared  that  they  hastened  to 
beg  Paul  and  Silas  to  come  out  and  to  leave,  lest  the 
rabble  would  attack  them.  Paul  and  Silas  went  to  the 


274 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


home  of  Lydia;  and,  bidding  her  farewell,  they  went  on 
their  way  to  Thessalonica,  where  they  tarried  until 
May,  51  A.D.  At  that  time  the  Jews  led  the  rabble 
against  the  Christians  and  took  one  Jason,  whom  they 
compelled  to  give  security  for  Paul  and  Silas  to  keep  the 
peace,  upon  the  charge  that  they  were  teaching  that  one 
Jesus  was  king,  instead  of  Caesar. 

Paul  and  Silas  were  sent  away  to  Beroea,  where  they 
met  with  great  success  and  kindly  treatment,  until  the 
Jews  of  Thessalonica  appeared  and  stirred  up  the  people. 
Paul  had  been  very  successful  in  gaining  as  converts 
honorable  Greek  women.  After  a  conference,  it  was 
decided  to  send  him  to  Athens,  where  he  waited  for 
Timothy  and  Silas. 


CHAPTER  XXXIV 

ATHENS  AND  CORINTH 

During  the  days  of  waiting  for  Silas  and  Timothy, 
Paul  indulged  a  craving,  renewed  from  his  days  in 
Nestor’s  school,  to  see  the  sculpture,  paintings,  and 
architecture  of  Athens.  In  his  soul  was  a  longing  for 
the  expression  of  the  beautiful.  He  spent  days  on  the 
Acropolis  and  in  the  temples,  reveling  in  the  sculptured 
and  pictured  masterpieces  of  the  geniuses  of  ancient 
Greece.  The  portrayals  of  the  human  form  did  not 
appeal  to  nor  excite  the  carnal  eye — they  were  spiritual 
revelations.  Again  and  again  he  contemplated  the  Par¬ 
thenon,  growing  more  beautiful  the  more  closely  it  was 
scrutinized;  the  wonderful  art  shown  in  its  columns,  pro¬ 
portions,  and  simplicity  was  exalting.  In  the  Parthenon 
the  gold  and  ivory  statue  of  Athena,  36  feet  high,  on  a 
pedestal  8  feet  high,  was  not  a  vulgar  sex-goddess,  but  it 
typified  dignity,  power,  and  beauty. 

Paul  felt  that  the  highest  art  was  only  an  effort  to 
express  the  longings  of  the  spiritually  minded  for  perfec¬ 
tion;  and  that  Jesus  was  an  expression  of  divinity  in 
human  form,  unequaled  by  artists.  He  believed  that 
the  great  masters  had  produced  their  marvels  by  rising 
above  all  grossness;  and  he  was  thrilled  with  the  thought 
that  his  mission  was  to  stir  all  men  to  emulate  this 
purity  and  beauty  of  love,  as  found  in  the  life  of  the 
Master. 

Paul  found  that  the  fawning  Athenians  had  chiseled 
the  names  of  Roman  generals  and  officers  on  many  of 

27s 


276 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


the  masterpieces  of  artists  of  bygone  centuries,  as 
fulsome  compliments  to  Roman  vanity.  Even,  in  some 
cases,  the  heads  had  been  removed  from  splendid  statues 
and  replaced,  in  grotesque  contrast  with  the  beauty  of 
the  body,  by  the  chiseled  features  of  Roman  officers 
to  whom  the  doubtful  honor  was  given.  Paul  was 
grieved  to  learn  that  the  frivolous  Athenians  made  no 
serious  protest  against  such  vandalism,  merely  laughing 
at  the  egotism  of  the  Romans.  The  elements  had  not 
destroyed,  during  the  long  centuries,  the  delicate  touch 
of  genius  in  marble,  but  Athenian  indifference  to  the 
rich  heritage  had  cruelly  permitted  the  works  of  inspira¬ 
tion  to  be  battered  and  bartered  for  the  favor  of  coarse 
conquerors. 

The  beautiful  stoas,  or  porches,  surrounding  the 
Agora,  or  Market  Place,  afforded  loungers  ideal  accom¬ 
modations.  In  the  Poecile  Stoa,  or  Painted  Porch, 
containing  the  paintings  of  Polygnotus,  where  once  had 
gathered  the  scholars  who  evolved  the  Stoic  philosophy, 
now  loitered  the  idling,  incessantly  talking  rhetoricians 
and  teachers,  pleased  merely  to  debate  any  new  question. 
The  discovery  of  philosophy  by  earnest  men  of  leisure 
in  the  past  was  now  a  precedent  for  profitless  discussions, 
as  an  excuse  for  idleness.  They  did  not  have  the  virility 
of  their  gifted  ancestors,  who  had  made  war  in  order  to 
supply  themselves  with  wealth  and  slaves  so  that  they 
could  have  leisure  for  the  study  of  politics,  philosophy, 
and  art. 

These  loiterers  preferred  soft  shades  to  the  toil  and 
thrill  of  adventure.  They  had  exchanged  the  spirituality 
of  their  race  for  the  love  of  idleness.  Their  learning 
exhausted  itself  in  the  application  of  the  rules  of  speech 


ATHENS  AND  CORINTH 


277 


and  of  logic  to  the  presentation  of  any  fact  or  theory, 
without  seriously  considering  the  substance — it  was  the 
decadent  period  of  Greece.  Even  the  ancient  blonde  type 
was  being  supplanted  by  those  of  darker  complexion,  who 
pretended  that  they  inherited  Grecian  pride.  The  altar 
Paul  had  seen  on  the  Acropolis,  dedicated,  in  the  uncer¬ 
tainty  of  doubt,  to  “The  Unknown  God,”  epitomized 
the  Greek  mind  of  that  day. 

Paul  often  joined  in  the  conversations  of  the  different 
groups  of  politicians  and  scholars,  lounging  in  the 
porches  about  the  Market  Place,  in  an  effort  to  direct 
the  discussion  to  immortality.  Some  had  called  him  a 
mountebank  of  philosophy,  others  said  he  was  merely 
a  picker-up  of  crumbs  of  thought.  After  a  few  days 
of  discussions  with  groups,  a  number  of  leading  men 
insisted  that  Paul  should  meet  them  the  next  day  in  the 
Areopagus,  the  place  of  large  gatherings. 

Before  the  large  assembly  Paul  began  his  address  by 
appealing  to  the  religious  ideas  of  the  Athenians,  although 
he  knew  that  they  did  not  have  any  settled  religious 
beliefs.  He  declared  to  them  that  all  men  should  seek 
God,  although  he  was  not  far  from  each  man,  and  then 
he  quoted  a  line  from  Aratus,  which  he  had  learned  in 
Nestor’s  school: 

His  offspring  are  we. 

He  asserted  that  the  appearance  of  Jesus  among  men 
was  a  revelation  of  God,  and  assured  them  that  through 
him  came  the  resurrection  of  the  dead.  At  this  the 
Athenians  laughed,  for  they  could  not  even  understand 
that  Plato  meant  anything  like  resurrection  when  he 
discussed  the  immortality  of  the  soul.  They  listened 
with  critical  ears  to  test  Paul’s  message  by  their  rules 


278 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


of  logic,  and  had  no  ears  for  a  message  that  would 
regulate  their  lives.  Paul’s  appeal  fell  on  unhearing 
ears;  to  them  he  was  only  a  babbler.  Dionysius,  a 
member  of  the  court,  was  led  to  believe;  and  a  poor 
woman  by  the  name  of  Damaris  was  informed  by  Paul 
that  her  faith  gave  her  the  assurances  of  the  promises. 
The  indifference  and  ridicule  of  the  Athenians  so  dis¬ 
gusted  Paul  that  he  left  for  Corinth. 

Paul  noticed,  on  entering  Corinth,  a  massive  monu¬ 
ment  in  the  form  of  a  lion,  holding  under  its  paw  a 
lamb,  with  an  inscription  dedicating  it  to  Lais,  the  most 
noted  courtesan  of  the  city.  The  Market  Place  was 
surrounded  with  temples  and  porches  that  rivaled  the 
art  of  Athens.  A  broad  roadway  led  up  the  Acro- 
corinthus,  a  thousand  feet  above,  on  which  was  the 
famous  temple  erected  to  Aphrodite,  in  which  were 
more  than  a  thousand  courtesans,  or  hetairai,  who 
openly  solicited  men  in  the  Market  Place  and  gave  their 
earnings  to  sustain  the  temple.  The  restoration  of  the 
city  by  Julius  Caesar,  after  its  destruction  a  century 
before  his  time,  had  made  Corinth  the  emporium  of 
Greece.  Many  cargoes  were  transported  across  the 
isthmus,  and  even  small  boats  were  taken  across  on 
rollers  from  Lechaeum,  on  the  Corinthian  Gulf,  and 
relaunched  at  Schoenus,  thus  avoiding  the  long  and 
dangerous  journey  around  the  peninsula. 

The  reputation  of  the  city  was  such  that  the  slang 
of  the  period  summed  up  excessive  debauchery  in  the 
word,  ‘‘Corinthianize.”  While  the  Greeks  were  in  the 
majority,  they  submitted  to  the  domination  of  the  Roman 
colonists;  and  the  Jews,  attracted  by  the  commercial 
advantages,  made  no  protest  against  the  customs. 


ATHENS  AND  CORINTH 


279 


So  degenerate  had  the  city  become  that  even  the  famihes 
of  Corinth  were  frequently  lax  in  the  morals  which 
were  necessary  for  any  degree  of  citizenship,  even  to  the 
extent  that  women  who  were  married  were  expected,  as  a 
rehgious  offering,  to  make  or  to  have  made  a  contribution 
to  the  support  of  the  temple  from  their  earnings  of  at 
least  one  sacrificial  act  of  prostitution. 

Paul  knew  all  this  about  Corinth  and  much  more 
rarely  written.  With  his  quick  judgment  he  decided 
that  in  this  city  of  great  activity  and  recklessness  many 
men  and  women  would  be  found  glad  of  an  opportunity 
to  enable  them  to  rise  superior  to  their  sordid  surroimd- 
ings.  In  his  effort  to  adapt  his  argument  at  Athens  to 
the  philosophical  style  he  felt  not  only  that  he  had 
failed  to  present  unequivocally  Christ  as  the  great  fact 
of  spiritual  Hfe  but  that  he  had  fallen  short  of  his  unswerv¬ 
ing  loyalty  to  Jesus.  He  resolved  that  henceforth  he 
would  present  the  loving  and  sacrificial  life  of  Jesus  in 
all  its  simpHcity  and  grandeur  as  the  supreme  sacrifice 
of  the  Creator  for  the  creature;  neither  controversy, 
dogmas,  nor  systems  of  philosophy  would  be  able  to 
drive  or  lure  him  from  presenting  the  divine  heroism 
of  Christ  as  the  great  revelation  of  the  love  of  God. 

Paul  had  given  his  life  to  make  plain  to  men  the 
marvelous  power  of  his  hero,  Jesus  Christ,  his  Lord  and 
Master.  He  believed  that  men  would  understand  from 
this  message  the  love  and  sacrifice  of  Christ,  and  that 
from  such  understanding  would  come  a  knowledge  of 
all  the  virtues  for  all  ages  and  the  certainty  of  the 
resurrection  to  those  to  whom  it  was  promised. 

Paul,  leaving  Athens  behind  him,  entered  Corinth 
determined  ‘‘not  to  know  anything  save  Jesus  Christ, 


28o 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


and  him  crucified.”  While  wandering  among  the  shops 
and  booths  he  met  a  tent-maker  by  the  name  of  Aquila, 
who,  with  his  wife,  Priscilla,  had  been  driven  out  of 
Rome  under  an  edict  of  Claudius  against  the  Jews. 
Paul  introduced  himself,  and  was  pleased  to  find  that 
the  couple  had  been  followers  of  the  Way  in  Rome  and 
had  heard  of  his  work.  He  immediately  set  to  work 
with  them  at  his  trade  and,  while  his  malaria  returned 
because  of  the  climate,  he  began  teaching  in  the  syna¬ 
gogue.  His  friends,  Silas  and  Timothy,  soon  joined 
him;  and  they  brought  such  news  of  errors  into  which 
the  converts  were  falhng  that  he  was  compelled  to  write 
a  long  letter  to  the  Thessalonians.  He  received  contribu¬ 
tions  from  the  faithful  brothers  in  Philippi  and,  notwith¬ 
standing  murmurings  of  the  Jews,  he  applied  himself 
more  zealously  than  ever  to  his  work. 

Aquila  and  Priscilla  told  him  of  the  teachings  in 
Rome  and  that  people  from  the  northland  came  there 
and  heard  the  tidings,  from  the  far  west  in  Spain,  even 
from  a  land  far  away  beyond  the  mountains,  forests, 
and  rivers  and  across  a  sea  to  the  north,  called 
Britain.  During  this  time  the  news  came  to  Paul  about 
troubles  stirred  up  by  Judaists  in  the  churches  he  had 
established  in  Galatia.  He  wrote  a  letter  to  the  Gala¬ 
tians,  which  was  carefully  read  over  by  others  before 
it  was  sent.  Visitors  from  Rome,  calling  on  Aquila 
and  Priscilla,  became  acquainted  with  Paul,  telling 
him  about  the  difficulties  of  keeping  the  word  clear 
in  Rome. 

^‘Why  do  you  not  write  a  letter  to  our  Roman 
brethren?”  said  Aquila.  ‘‘They  need  to  understand 
things  more  clearly.” 


ATHENS  AND  CORINTH 


281 


“I  would/’  Paul  replied,  ‘‘only  I  have  never  talked 
to  them,  save  those  I  have  met  here.” 

“Write  them  along  the  lines  of  your  letter  to  the 
Galatians,”  said  Aquila,  “but  more  in  detail.  The 
world  meets  in  Rome.” 

“I  hope  for  the  day  that  I  may  meet  those  in  Rome,” 
said  Paul.  “It  seems  to  me  that  the  great  city  would  be 
the  best  center  from  which  to  spread  the  glad  tidings 
through  the  length  and  breadth  of  the  Roman  Empire.” 

“The  day  may  come,”  Priscilla  said. 

“I  so  long  for  it  that  I  fear  I  may  anticipate  the 
proper  time,”  said  Paul.  “Those  I  have  met  here  are 
deeply  interested.” 

The  Jews  having  raised  an  outcry  against  Paul 
teaching  in  the  synagogue,  he  quit  them  in  anger  and, 
by  the  gesture  of  shaking  out  his  robe  as  if  shaking 
crumbs  out  of  his  lap,  he  gave  them  distinctly  to  under¬ 
stand  that  he  was  through  with  the  Jews  of  Corinth 
who  would  not  listen  to  the  new  teaching. 

When  the  Jews  saw  that  Paul  was  determined  to 
carry  on  his  work  in  the  house  of  Titus  Justus,  they  laid 
complaint  before  Gallio,  the  new  proconsul,  who  had,  a 
month  or  two  before  (July,  52  a.d.),  come  to  rule  over 
Achaia,  that  Paul  was  persuading  men  to  worship  God 
contrary  to  the  law.  A  coppersmith  by  the  name  of 
Alexander  was  active  in  stirring  up  the  Jews  to  make 
the  complaint  before  the  new  proconsul. 

Sosthenes,  the  ruler  of  the  synagogue,  appeared  at 
the  head  of  a  delegation  before  Gallio,  at  the  time  of  the 
trial.  The  loiterers  from  the  porches  and  Market 
Place  filled  the  hall  of  hearing,  for  it  was  great  sport 
to  them  to  see  the  despised  Jews  in  trouble.  Paul  was 


282 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


brought  before  Gallio,  who,  making  excuse  to  identify 
the  prisoner,  had  him  brought  closer,  when  he  saw  a 
faint  scar  across  Paul’s  left  temple.  After  the  Jews 
had  made  their  complaint,  Gallio  laughed  heartily. 
Paul  was  about  to  make  his  defense. 

“If  these  are  questions  about  words,  names,  and 
your  own  law,  look  to  it  yourselves,  you  Jews,”  said 
Gallio.  “I  am  not  minded  to  waste  my  time  on  these 
things.  Lictors,  drive  them  out.  They  know  better 
than  to  impose  on  me  this  way.” 

Then,  turning  to  Paul,  Gallio  smiled  and  said, 
“We  will  play  the  game  according  to  the  rules.” 

GaUio  engaged  Paul  in  conversation  concerning  their 
old  days  in  the  school  of  Nestor  in  Tarsus,  smihng 
indifferently  while  the  rabble,  in  rough  humor,  reheved 
the  Hctors  of  their  duty  by  seizing  Sosthenes  and  beating 
him,  while  he  ran  out  of  the  hall. 

During  his  stay  of  eighteen  months  in  Corinth, 
Paul  had  estabhshed  a  large  and  substantial  organization, 
and  in  the  spring  of  53  a.d.  started  for  Syria,  accompanied 
by  Aquila  and  Priscilla.  But  he  was  taken  ill  at  the 
seaport  of  Cenchreae,  where  he  was  delayed  for  some 
time  and  tenderly  nursed  by  Phoebe.  There  he  cut 
his  hair  in  token  of  a  vow,  and  carried  it  with  him  to 
be  burned  in  the  Temple  when  he  would  reach  Jerusalem, 
agreeable  to  a  Jewish  custom. 

Touching  at  Ephesus  for  a  short  stay,  he  left  Aquila 
and  Priscilla  there,  while  he  hastened  on  to  Jerusalem 
and  then  back  to  Antioch.  From  there  he  made  a 
hasty  trip  through  Galatia  and  Phrygia,  arriving  in 
Ephesus  in  the  fall  of  the  year. 


CHAPTER  XXXV 
EPHESUS 

During  the  three  months  that  Paul  taught  in  the 
synagogue  in  Ephesus,  a  Jew  a  little  older  than  Paul, 
the  same  Alexander  who  had  been  active  in  Corinth,  a 
regular  attendant,  interrupted  the  discourses  frequently 
with  many  questions;  and  he  stirred  up  other  Jews  in 
opposition  to  Paul.  Alexander  delighted,  mockingly,  in 
taking  a  prominent  place  among  those  in  the  front  part 
of  the  audience;  and,  by  grimaces  of  disagreement, 
cynical  laughter,  and  conversation  with  others,  he  sought 
to  disconcert  Paul,  often  succeeding.  He  fomented  such 
opposition  that  finally  the  Jews  drove  Paul  out  of  the 
synagogue. 

So  successful  had  been  his  work  in  Ephesus,  attracting 
influential  men  of  the  city  and  from  near  by  and  even 
distant  cities  of  Asia,  that  Paul  and  his  friends  hired  a 
hall  used  by  Tyrannus,  a  teacher;  but  they  were  com¬ 
pelled  to  use  it  after  the  morning  classes.  Paul  worked 
at  his  trade  from  early  morning  light  until  eleven  o’clock, 
and  then  spent  the  rest  of  the  day  teaching.  He  won 
prominent  men  and  attracted  great  crowds  of  common 
people.  The  superstitious  people  carried  away  handker¬ 
chiefs  and  small  articles  that  he  had  touched,  for  talismen 
to  restore  the  sick.  He  declaimed  against  all  superstition 
so  effectively  that  the  people,  who,  having  been  long 
used  to  all  forms  of  necromancy  and  having  spent  much 
of  their  wealth  for  charms  and  books  on  magic,  brought 
their  books  and  charms  together  and  made  a  monster 

283 


284 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


bonfire,  destroying  books  valued  at  ten  thousand  dollars 
(fifty  thousand  drachmae).  It  was  the  breaking  of  the 
superstition  of  ages. 

Alexander  even  followed  Paul  to  the  meetings  in  the 
hall  and  often  interrupted  the  discourse.  Whenever 
Paul  referred  to  his  experience  on  the  way  to  Damascus, 
Alexander  would  cry  out: 

“Did  you  ever  repay  the  cost  of  your  trip  to 
Caiaphas 

“That  I  did,”  Paul  finally  answered,  “with  earnings 
of  my  own  hands,  while  I  was  in  Arabia.  Now  tell' us 
who  bears  your  expense  to  follow  me  from  Corinth  ?” 

This  created  such  commotion,  by  efforts  to  put 
Alexander  out  (which  he  did  not  seriously  resist)  and 
the  shouting  of  men  brought  in  by  him,  that  the  meeting 
was  dismissed.  He  continued  actively  in  stirring  up 
all  opposition  to  the  apostle.  In  the  face  of  aU  efforts 
to  discourage  him,  Paul  made  great  progress  during  his 
two  years  in  Ephesus. 

Ephesus  was  the  center  of  trade  for  Asia;  close  to  the 
mouth  of  the  river  Caystros,  with  extensive  docks;  the 
western  end  of  trade  routes  to  the  Euphrates;  famous 
in  literature  and  art;  renowned  for  native  philosophers, 
astronomers,  poets,  and  painters — but  Ephesus  achieved 
its  greatest  fame  by  its  wonderful  temple,  erected  to 
“  the  Great  Goddess  Artemis,”  one  of  the  Seven  Wonders 
of  the  World.  The  temple  was  finished  in  polished 
marble  and  its  porches  had  one  hundred  and  twenty- 
seven  columns,  60  feet  in  height.  It  was  425  feet  in 
length  and  220  feet  in  width,  and  contained  the  image 
of  the  goddess  Artemis,  studded  with  breasts  symbolizing 
fecundity. 


EPHESUS 


285 


The  temple  had  been  two  hundred  and  twenty  years 
in  the  building;  the  vast  expense  had  been  borne  by 
the  contributions  of  all  the  people  of  Asia,  even  the 
women  giving  their  jewels  and  ornaments.  The  temple 
and  a  large  area  surrounding  it  was  so  sacred  that  it 
was  an  asylum  for  anyone  fleeing  from  officers.  The 
multitudes,  gathering  during  the  month  of  feasts,  by 
their  purchases  added  to  the  wealth  of  the  city,  and 
increased  the  trade  in  miniature  productions  of  the 
goddess  and  temple,  in  gold,  silver,  brass,  and  pottery. 
Ephesus  was  called  ‘The  Light  of  Asia.’’ 

The  influence  of  the  great  numbers  who  had  joined 
the  Way  was  so  strong  against  the  worship  of  idols 
that  the  sale  of  miniatures  fell  off,  to  the  detriment  of 
dealers.  Alexander,  being  a  coppersmith,  pointed  out 
to  his  friend,  Demetrius,  a  silversmith,  that  Paul  and  his 
associates  had  so  spread  his  preaching  against  idols 
that  the  business  of  the  dealers  in  images  was  being 
permanently  injured. 

“If  you,  because  of  your  high  standing,  would 
explain  the  conditions  to  the  craftsmen,”  said  Alexander 
to  Demetrius,  “what  Paul  is  doing,  and  make  the  plea 
as  if  in  behalf  of  Artemis,  you  could  arouse  the  people 
so  that  they  would  drive  him  out  of  Ephesus.” 

“I  am  not  such  an  orator  as  is  Paul  and  I  fear  that 
I  could  not  move  the  people,”  Demetrius  answered, 
doubtfully. 

“Make  the  appeal  for  your  goddess  and  you  will 
arouse  the  century-old  prejudice,”  Alexander  urged. 
“I  know,  for  I  do  not  believe  in  her,  but  as  a  Jew  I  am 
advising  you,  so  that  you  can  win  your  point.  I  am  in 
agreement  with  you  to  drive  out  Paul.  When  you  have 


286 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


aroused  your  people,  I  will  make  an  appeal  that  will 
cause  the  Jews  to  join  you.’’ 

Demetrius  called  his  fellow-craftsmen  together  and 
explained  the  injury  being  done  to  the  trade  and  the 
attack  Paul  and  his  kind  were  making  on  the  temple 
and  worship  of  Artemis.  Fired  with  religious  fervor 
and  mercenary  motives,  the  craftsmen  poured  into  the 
streets  shouting  many  things,  and  soon  had  attracted  a 
great  mob.  They  seized  Gains  and  Aristarchus,  Paul’s 
companions,  and  carried  them  to  the  great  open-air 
theater  of  the  city.  In  the  midst  of  the  wild  acclaim, 
“Great  Artemis  of  the  Ephesians,”  the  Jews  lifted 
Alexander  to  the  stage  to  explain  the  attitude  of  the  Jews, 
as  merchants  and  dealers,  and  to  tell  the  mob  that  the 
Jews  would  join  in  driving  Paul  out  of  the  city. 

A  Jew  was  no  more  popular  with  the  mob  than  was 
Paul,  for  he  was  a  Jew.  Alexander,  from  his  elevation, 
posed  as  one  with  an  important  and  friendly  message. 
The  mob,  now  beside  itself  with  much  shouting, 
screamed : 

“He,  too,  is  a  Jew.  A  Jew!  A  Jew!  Great  Artemis 
of  the  Ephesians!” 

They  pulled  him  down  from  the  stage,  they  cuffed 
him  about  and  tore  his  clothes  and  pulled  at  his  beard, 
until  his  friends  rescued  him,  in  most  unhappy  state. 

Paul  wanted  to  go  before  the  crowd  and  meet  them. 
Not  only  his  own  friends  of  the  Way  opposed  such  course, 
but  the  Asiarchs,  the  officers  in  charge  of  festivals,  who 
were  friendly  to  Paul,  also  dissuaded  him. 

Paul  had  been  training  men  for  two  years,  from 
Smyrna,  Pergamos,  Thyatira,  Sardes,  Philadelphia, 
Colossae,  and  Laodicea,  to  carry  the  glad  tidings  and 


EPHESUS 


287 


to  organize  the  believers  in  self-governing  bodies  through¬ 
out  the  province.  He  was  convinced  that  Rome  was 
now  his  destination,  since  the  work  in  Asia  had  been  so 
estabhshed  that  it  would  go  forward  without  his  personal 
attention.  He  had  learned  the  effectiveness  of  his  letters, 
which  not  only  settled  the  immediate  controversies  but 
would  serve  for  future  guidance  in  keeping  the  faith  to 
simple  and  fundamental  principles.  The  conditions  in 
Corinth  required  many  letters  and  special  messengers. 

Taking  with  him  a  few  reliable  men,  including 
Timothy  and  Trophimus,  Paul  set  out  for  a  visitation  of 
the  converts  throughout  Macedonia  and  Greece,  in  the 
course  of  which  he  would  attach  Luke  to  his  company  at 
Philippi. 

“I  am  determined  to  go  to  Corinth,”  said  Alexander 
to  Demetrius,  ‘To  be  ahead  of  Paul  and  his  company, 
who  are  going  there  through  Macedonia.” 

“Of  what  avail  will  be  such  a  journey  ?”  Demetrius 
asked. 

“If  you  and  your  friends  will  finance  my  trip,”  said 
Alexander,  “I  will  follow  Paul  until  he  is  put  out  of  the 
way;  and  if  he  is  removed,  then  all  these  teachings  and 
his  followers  will  fail.” 

“What  would  it  profit  you?”  Demetrius  asked. 
“Why  are  you  so  vindictive  against  him?” 

“I  am  a  Jew  and  my  opinions  are  fixed,”  said 
Alexander.  “Many  years  ago,  in  Jerusalem,  this  same 
Jesus  about  whom  Paul  preaches  was  on  his  way  to  his 
Crucifixion  and  dared  me  to  oppose  him.  I  laughed  at 
him,  aye,  I  spat  upon  him.  I  knew  this  Paul,  then  Saul, 
when  as  a  zealot  he  was  persecuting  the  people  of  the 
Way.  He  turned  traitor  and  has  become  so  powerful 


288 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


that  my  life  is  dedicated  to  getting  rid  of  him,  so  that 
he  will  not  be  a  martyr  in  the  eyes  of  the  converts. 
You  cannot  understand  the  satisfaction  it  would  give 
me  to  accomphsh  my  desires.  That  is  something  which 
would  be  of  greater  value  to  me  than  riches;  it  would  be 
revenge  on  the  man  who,  streaming  with  sweat,  turned 
on  me  in  assumed  saintliness  and  pronounced  a  curse, 
that  I  should  await  his  return;  and  neighbors  laughed 
at  me  so  that  I  had  to  change  my  name  and  business. 
I  could  get  my  revenge  and  you  business  profit  by 
destroying  this  rehgion.  Without  Paul  it  will  fail.’ ' 

‘‘I  never  hope  to  understand  a  Jew,”  said  Demetrius, 
^^but  I  will  furnish  you  the  money  for  this  undertaking.” 


CHAPTER  XXXVI 
PLOTS  THAT  FAILED 

Paul,  with  his  companions,  left  Ephesus  in  January, 
56  A.D.,  and  spent  the  time,  until  early  summer,  in 
Troas,  diligently  applying  himself  to  teaching  and 
writing.  His  fifty-five  years  of  active  Hfe  and  his 
later  years  of  hardship  and  anxieties  were  beginning  to 
show  in  his  age.  Though  a  sufferer  from  malaria,  often 
renewed  by  passing  through  the  lands  in  which  it  was 
prevalent,  he  did  not  slacken  in  energy.  The  advancing 
years  made  him  more  anxious  to  speed  up  his  work  and  to 
cover  the  lands  still  needing  the  uphft  of  the  glad  tidings. 
He  crossed  over  into  Macedonia  in  the  early  summer, 
and  spent  the  fall  and  winter  in  visiting  over  the  ground 
he  had  years  before  traveled. 

His  added  mission  now  was  to  carry  over  into  the 
Way  the  practical  ideas  of  brotherhood  and  relief  that 
he  had  learned  as  a  rabbi,  which  ideas  he  conceived 
were  the  very  essence  of  brotherly  love.  He  urged, 
wherever  he  went,  that  all  should  contribute  to  a  fund 
to  sustain  the  poor  and  persecuted  brothers  in  Jerusalem. 
He  drove  home  the  thought  that  practical  morality 
should  be  enforced;  that  mere  belief  in  Jesus  gave  no 
promise,  unless  the  spirituality  of  his  life  was  expressed 
in  daily  life;  that  love  was  not  an  abstract  term,  but 
a  command  to  do  the  things  that  relieved  the  distress 
of  others.  He  gave  to  his  appreciation  of  Jesus  an 
application  in  the  corrupt  life  of  the  age  that  would  save 
not  only  the  souls  of  believers  but  would  save  civilization. 

289 


290  HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 

While  he  did  not  hold  forth  as  a  reformer  of  civil  laws, 
he  planted  the  idea  of  freedom  of  conscience  in  the  mind 
of  the  slave  and  of  love  in  the  heart  of  the  master,  so 
that  justice  was  recognized  and  equahty  of  mind  was 
demonstrated,  trusting  that  in  the  fulness  of  time 
men  would  come  to  understand  the  life  of  Jesus  and 
to  imitate  the  freedom  of  the  soul  in  civil  righteous¬ 
ness. 

With  his  company  changing  from  time  to  time, 
by  reason  of  the  missions  delegated  to  different  ones, 
Paul  arrived  in  Corinth  in  the  winter  and  tarried  there 
until  March  of  57  a.d.  He  was  almost  selfish  in  his 
desire  to  have  Timothy  with  him,  for  his  great  heart 
yearned  for  the  love  of  his  own  son  and  Timothy  occupied 
the  place  of  the  son  who  had  passed  on. 

In  Corinth  he  found  an  improvement  in  conditions 
among  the  converts  of  the  Way,  although  it  had  been 
a  long,  hard  struggle  for  him,  Timothy,  his  most 
trusted  teachers,  the  eloquent  Apollos,  and  Peter,  to 
hold  them  to  a  life  devoted  to  higher  ideals  than  permitted 
by  Corinthian  environments.  His  appeals  for  funds 
for  the  relief  of  the  brothers  in  Jerusalem  were  being 
splendidly  answered.  The  members  in  Corinth  resolutely 
set  themselves  against  the  degradation  of  the  city, 
which  was  becoming  more  attractive  to  the  patricians 
of  Rome  in  the  rapidly  degenerating  morality  of  the 
capital  of  the  Empire.  The  news  which  he  had  from 
Rome  aroused  his  growing  desire  to  visit  the  city,  not 
only  to  spread  the  word  throughout  the  world  but  to 
establish  the  pure  morals  of  the  Way  and  to  take  hope 
to  the  slaves,  who  were  nearly  one-half  of  the  city’s 
population. 


PLOTS  THAT  FAILED 


291 


It  was  during  this  stay  in  Corinth,  at  the  home  of 
Gaius,  that  Paul  wrote  his  remarkable  Letter  to  the 
Romans.  He  had  with  him  for  consultation  Timothy, 
Luke,  and  Sopater,  while  Tertius  took  the  dictation. 
He  intended  to  make  plain  the  breadth  and  the  depth 
of  the  love  exemphfied  in  the  life  of  Jesus  and  in  his 
promises.  The  unseemly  display  of  the  hetairai  in 
the  Market  Place,  the  brazen  temple  of  Aphrodite  on 
the  mountain  top,  with  its  nameless  orgies,  aroused 
Paul  to  appeal  to  the  knowledge  of  God  that  all  men 
had  in  times  past  received,  whether  Jew  or  Gentile. 
In  sharp  contrast  with  the  present-day  Hcentiousness, 
he  gave  them  the  Beatitudes  of  the  soul  of  the  believer 
in  Jesus.  He  reminded  them  of  the  faith  that  gave 
men  the  power  to  believe,  to  live  up  to  the  purity  and 
become  partakers  of  the  love  revealed  by  Christ,  and  to  be 
justified  by  their  faith  in  him,  so  that  they  would  receive 
freedom  from  fear  on  earth  and  the  assurance  of  the 
resurrection. 

From  the  house  of  Gaius,  Paul’s  host,  Paul,  Gaius, 
Luke,  Timothy,  Trophimus,  and  several  others  were 
on  their  way  to  the  place  of  meeting  of  the  congregation. 
While  passing  through  a  long,  beautiful  porch,  they 
stopped  in  the  earnest  discussion  of  plans.  They  noticed 
a  group  of  loungers  near  the  front  of  the  porch  and  had 
stopped  so  that  their  conversation  would  not  be  over¬ 
heard.  They  did  not  see  that  one  of  the  loungers  had 
given  a  signal  to  a  group  of  hetairai,  parading  along  the 
front  of  the  stoas  or  porches;  but,  shortly,  twenty  of 
the  girls  from  the  temple,  in  their  filmy  and  scant 
clothing,  with  cymbals  and  trumpets,  crowded  down 
the  porch  and  tauntingly  jostled  Paul  and  his  friends. 


292 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


The  loungers  laughed  loudly.  After  the  girls  had  passed 
on  Paul  and  his  friends  went  to  the  Market  Place,  where 
they  paused  for  a  moment  to  separate,  some  going  on 
errands  and  others  with  Paul  going  to  the  place  of 
meeting.  Paul  looked  closely  at  the  group  of  loungers 
and  recognized  Alexander,  in  deep  conversation  with  the 
rest. 

‘‘Hasten,”  said  Alexander  to  a  bearded  Greek,  after 
Paul  had  passed,  “and  have  the  hetairai  come  back  into 
the  Market  Place  and  surround  Paul  and  his  deacons.” 

The  parading  women,  augmented  by  another  group 
they  had  met,  came  into  the  Market  Place  through 
another  porch,  so  that  they  intercepted  Paul  on  his 
way  to  the  hall.  There  were  many  men,  ogling  at  the 
side  of  the  hne  of  girls.  The  leader  of  the  girls  in  the 
parade,  on  seeing  Paul,  stopped  her  followers  and  said: 

“Ho,  you  charmers  of  Aphrodite.  Here  is  our  enemy, 
Paul.  We  will  make  sport  of  him.  Follow  me.” 

She  led  her  followers  in  mocking  honor  around  Paul, 
in  a  voluptuous  dance.  She  stopped  in  front  of  him  in 
suggestive  contortions,  laughing  and  shouting.  Alex¬ 
ander  and  his  loungers  came  closer,  joining  in  the 
laughter.  Paul  looked  upon  the  dancer  with  such 
earnestness  that  she  stopped  dancing  and,  in  a  surge  of 
shame,  hung  her  head. 

“Even  as  you  refuse  to  have  God  in  your  knowledge,” 
said  Paul  impressively  to  the  girl  before  him,  “he  gives 
you  up  imto  a  reprobate  mind,  to  do  those  things  which 
are  not  decent.” 

The  leader  of  the  parade  turned  in  shame  and  left, 
followed  by  the  other  women.  Alexander,  being  close 
to  Paul,  sneered  at  him.  The  men  with  Alexander  were 


PLOTS  THAT  FAILED 


293 


laughing  loudly.  Paul  looked  Alexander  in  the  eye 
fearlessly  and  wrathfully  and  said : 

‘‘Remember,  you  who  judge  them  that  practice  such 
things,  and  do  the  same,  that  you  shall  not  escape  the 
judgment  of  God.’’ 

Alexander  was  unable  to  meet  the  charge  or  the  gaze 
of  Paul. 

Paul  and  his  friends  went  on  their  way  to  the  hall 
used  for  meeting,  and  Alexander  shortly  followed  them 
to  listen.  Paul  was  telling  all  in  the  hall  that  the  contri¬ 
butions  had  been  liberal,  that  the  money  must  be 
safeguarded,  and  that  the  company  going  to  Jerusalem 
must  set  sail  from  Cenchreae  on  the  first  ship.  One 
of  the  men  inside  the  hall,  suspecting  that  there  was  an 
eavesdropper,  opened  the  door  quickly,  disclosing 
Alexander,  who  slouched  back  to  his  associates  in  the 
porch. 

When  Alexander  returned  to  the  porch,  the  bearded 
Greek  was  railing  against  Paul. 

“And  even  the  women  of  my  own  house  have  turned 
against  me,  refusing  to  earn  money  by  taking  guests, 
because  they  are  followers  of  the  Way,  and  they  say 
that  would  be  a  sin  against  their  souls.”  The  Greek 
had  to  stop  speaking  because  of  his  laughter.  Then 
he  said,  “As  if  women  could  have  souls.” 

While  the  Greek  was  speaking,  a  dandified  Greek 
youth  in  fine  raiment,  carrying  a  string  of  beads  which 
he  drew  through  his  fingers  for  amusement,  entered  the 
porch. 

“I  hear  that  Nero  is  about  to  establish  a  voice-culture 
school  in  Corinth,  as  soon  as  he  collects  the  taxes  for  it,” 
said  the  youth,  flippantly. 


294 


HERALD/LEADER,  MARTYR 


The  men  merely  glanced  at  the  youth  disdainfully. 
He  rechned  on  a  bench  near  by,  and,  taking  out  of  his 
girdle  some  pipes,  began  playing  softly,  as  if  the  men  were 
not  present  and  as  if  their  conversation  had  no  interest 
for  him. 

‘‘Paul  goes  with  a  large  sum  of  money,”  said  Alex¬ 
ander  to  the  Greek,  “on  the  next  ship  sailing  toward 
Jerusalem.” 

“No  doubt  my  family  have  contributed,”  said  the 
Greek  in  anger. 

“  If  a  man  would  slip  aboard  the  ship,”  said  Alexander, 
while  the  youth  struggled  apparently  to  get  the  right 
note,  “he  could  not  only  get  that  money  but  in  that 
crowd  he  might  heave  the  body  overboard,  undiscovered, 
and  that  would  be  bad.” 

“This  is  my  opportunity,”  said  the  Greek,  “You, 
as  a  Jew,  can  be  going  to  Jerusalem,  and  I  will  be  going 
to  Troas.” 

The  youth  arose,  stretched  himself,  put  his  pipes 
in  his  girdle,  took  out  his  string  of  beads,  thoughtlessly 
playing  with  them,  and  sauntered  to  the  front  of  the 
porch.  After  looking  up  and  down  the  Market  Place, 
as  if  uncertain  which  way  to  go,  he  passed  down  to  the 
hall  where  Paul  and  his  friends  were  in  conference.  He 
burst  in  very  excitedly.  His  assumed  hght  air  was 
gone,  for  he  was  known  and  trusted  as  one  who  beheved 
in  the  Way.  He  told  of  the  plot. 

“Alexander  has  followed  me  for  years,”  said  Paul. 
“I  have  often  thought  that  I  saw  him  at  the  stoning  of 
Stephen,  although  he  is  no  older  now  than  he  was  then. 
I  am  sure  he  led  the  mob  against  us  here  in  Corinth  five 


PLOTS  THAT  FAILED 


295 


years  ago.  I  know  that  he  was  at  Ephesus,  but  there 
he  became  the  victim  of  his  own  schemes.  It  is  no 
matter.  Dangers  have  always  beset  me.” 

advise  that  you  slip  away  from  the  others  at 
Cenchreae,”  said  Luke,  “and  make  them  think  that 
you  have  boarded  the  ship.  Our  friends  will  go  by  ship 
to  Troas  and  we  will  go  to  Neapolis;  from  there  we  will 
take  ship  to  meet  them  in  Troas.” 

When  news  came  that  a  ship  was  sailing  for  Troas, 
Paul  and  his  friends  went  to  Cenchreae  the  night  before, 
stopping  with  friends,  to  board  the  ship  in  the  early 
morning.  The  passengers  were  crowding  aboard  in  the 
dark  of  the  early  morning.  Paul  had  been  wearing  a 
peculiarly  marked  cloak  of  broad  stripes.  While  waiting 
their  turn  to  go  aboard,  the  friends  of  Paul  noticed 
Alexander  and  the  bearded  Greek  scanning  the  passen¬ 
gers.  Trophimus  and  Paul  exchanged  cloaks,  and,  by 
turning  up  the  broad  collar,  Trophimus  concealed  his 
shaven  face.  Alexander  and  the  Greek,  recognizing  the 
cloak  of  Paul  in  the  dim  light,  followed  Trophimus 
aboard,  while  Paul  and  Luke  returned  and  made  their 
trip  overland  to  Neapolis. 

After  the  early  morning  breeze  had  carried  the  ship 
out  on  its  course,  the  Greek  and  Alexander  set  about  to 
locate  Paul  among  the  passengers.  The  small  ship  was 
crowded  to  capacity  with  Jews,  who  were  on  their  way 
to  celebrate  the  Passover  in  Jerusalem,  and  almost  every 
available  place  was  occupied.  In  the  forward  part  of  the 
ship  they  saw  Trophimus,  wearing  Paul’s  cloak,  with  his 
back  toward  them.  He  was  on  the  farther  side  of  a  pile 
of  luggage  nearly  as  high  as  his  waist  and  no  one  appeared 


296 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


in  view  near  him.  Most  of  the  passengers  were  taking 
a  nap,  to  make  up  for  the  loss  of  sleep  in  boarding  the 
ship  early  in  the  morning. 

The  Greek  and  Alexander  made  their  way  unobtru¬ 
sively  toward  Trophimus,  whom  they  identified  as  Paul 
by  the  cloak.  The  Greek  carried  a  heavy  club  concealed; 
Alexander  followed  closely,  keeping  a  sharp  lookout 
for  any  who  might  be  observing.  The  Greek  stepped 
around  the  higher  part  of  the  bundles  and  with  drawn 
club  was  advancing  to  strike  Trophimus,  when  Aristar¬ 
chus,  lying  concealed  behind  the  bundles,  grasped  him 
by  the  ankle  and  threw  him  on  his  face.  Aristarchus  and 
others  had  concealed  themselves  behind  the  bundles  to 
guard  Trophimus,  taking  turns  in  resting.  Alexander 
immediately  interceded  to  prevent  any  outcry. 

‘‘Do  not  be  angry  or  frightened,”  said  Alexander  to 
Trophimus,  who  had  faced  the  Greek,  now  rising. 
“This  man  is  a  countryman  of  yours,  and  had  I  not 
seen  him  stumble,  I,  too,  would  have  thought  that  he  was 
going  to  strike  you.” 

“I  certainly  had  no  desire  to  strike  you,”  said  the 
Greek. 

“We  understand  you  very  well,”  said  Trophimus. 

When  the  Greek  and  Alexander  were  to  themselves 
the  Greek  said: 

“I  am  through.  We  have  been  badly  fooled.” 

“  Paul  is  so  cunning  that  I  know  he  cannot  be  honest,” 
said  Alexander.  “But  I  will  follow  him;  a  few  months, 
even  years,  are  nothing  to  me.” 

The  ship  having  reached  Troas  many  days  before 
Paul  and  Luke,  the  followers  of  the  Way  set  about  to 
have  a  great  conference  when  Paul  would  arrive.  They 


PLOTS  THAT  FAH^ED 


297 


hired  an  assembly-room  on  the  third  floor,  and  in  other 
parts  of  the  building  they  lodged  and  fed  the  visitors 
who  were  brought  in  from  the  country  and  the  smaller 
towns  to  participate.  Meanwhile,  Paul  was  delayed 
and  observed  the  Passover  in  Philippi,  which  in  that 
year  (57  a.d.)  began  April  6  and  continued  until  the 
evening  of  April  14.  He  and  Luke  were  four  days  in 
crossing  over  to  Troas. 

Paul’s  friends  in  Troas  kept  daily  watch  for  his 
arrival,  so  that  he  would  not  be  alone  even  from  the 
landing  to  the  place  of  lodging.  They  had  seen  Alex¬ 
ander  in  conference  with  many  questionable  men  and 
with  those  Jews  who  were  opposed  to  the  movement. 


CHAPTER  XXXVII 
FELIX  TREMBLES 

Paul  and  Luke  arrived  at  Troas  April  19,  57  a.d., 
and,  by  the  time  their  boat  reached  the  landing,  a  large 
crowd  of  their  friends  gathered  to  greet  them.  At  the 
same  time,  Alexander  assembled  several  Jews  who  had 
not  accepted  the  new  doctrine,  and  was  haranguing  them 
to  convince  them  that  Paul’s  work  all  over  the  world 
was  destroying  the  religion  of  Moses. 

‘‘He  is  the  only  one  able  to  make  the  new  religion 
universal,”  said  Alexander.  “If  we  get  rid  of  him,  we 
are  forever  free  of  these  apostate  disturbers.  So  many 
of  them  are  gathered  here  that  we  could  start  a  disturb¬ 
ance;  and  in  it  this  Greek,  who  came  with  me,  might 
find  a  chance  to  satisfy  himself  and  to  remove  Paul.” 

“We  are  not  concerned  with  your  plans,”  said  a  leader 
of  the  orthodox  Jews.  “Troas  has  had  a  bad  name  for 
brawls,  but  we  are  not  going  to  be  caught  in  anything 
unlawful.  The  soldiers  are  very  strict;  and  besides, 
these  people,  some  of  them  as  good  Jews  as  we  are,  do 
not  molest  us,  and  we  will  leave  them  alone.” 

Alexander  was  not  deterred  from  his  purpose, 
although  the  Greek  sailed  on  the  vessel  that  had  brought 
Paul  and  Luke.  Alexander  watched  Paul  for  the  seven 
days  that  he  was  in  Troas,  but  the  disciples  hovered 
about  the  apostle  so  that  no  stranger  could  get  near  him. 

The  last  night  Paul  was  in  Troas,  a  young  man  by 
the  name  of  Eutychus,  having  gone  to  sleep  in  the  window 
of  the  room  on  the  third  floor,  where  Paul  was  speaking, 

298 


FELIX  TREMBLES 


299 


fell  to  the  street  below.  Even  Luke,  the  physician, 
thought  the  youth  was  dead,  but  Paul  took  the  body  in 
his  arms  and  declared  his  life  was  still  in  him.  There 
was  great  rejoicing  when  the  young  man  soon  recovered. 
All  night  long  Paul  talked  with  his  friends,  and,  at  break 
of  day,  he  set  out  on  foot,  going  to  Assos,  a  distance  of 
20  miles,  where  he  met  his  companions,  who  had  come 
in  a  hired  boat.  Alexander  was  compelled  to  wait  many 
days  before  he  could  gain  a  passage  to  Syria. 

Paul  and  his  company  sailed  to  Mitylene  and  in  four 
days’  sailing  they  came  to  Miletus,  where  he  met  the 
elders,  who  came  down  from  Ephesus.  He  had  a  pre¬ 
monition  that  he  would  never  see  them  again  and  his 
address  to  them  was  a  solemn  farewell.  They  sailed  to 
Cos,  thence  to  Rhodes,  and  on  to  Patara,  where  they 
took  passage  on  another  ship  to  Tyre.  While  the  ship 
tarried  seven  days  in  Tyre,  unloading,  Paul  visited  with 
the  disciples,  who  so  loved  him  that  they  came  down  to 
the  beach  with  their  families,  and  lingeringly  bade  him 
farewell.  Sailing  to  Ptolemais,  Paul  and  his  companions 
stopped  with  the  friends  in  that  city,  and  then  came  the 
next  day  to  Caesarea,  where  they  lodged  with  Philip, 
the  evangelist. 

The  four  daughters  of  Philip  were  teachers,  with 
whose  work  Paul  was  so  dehghted  that  he  prolonged  his 
visit.  Timothy  and  Trophimus  went  to  the  Roman 
office  and  registered  the  party,  according  to  the  custom, 
for  a  journey  to  Jerusalem;  and  then  engaged  horses 
to  carry  them  on  their  way.  While  engaging  their  horses, 
they  saw  Alexander,  who  had  just  arrived,  and  they  were 
filled  with  fear  that  he  would  contrive  some  harm  to 
Paul. 


300 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


Agabus,  the  prophet,  who  had  years  before  foretold 
at  Antioch  the  famine  in  Jerusalem,  had  come  down  from 
Jerusalem;  and,  meeting  Paul  in  the  house  of  Philip, 
he  dramatically  prophesied  that  Paul  would  be  bound 
as  a  prisoner  in  Jerusalem.  Agabus  wound  Paul’s 
girdle  about  his  own  feet  and  said : 

^‘So  shall  the  Jews  at  Jerusalem  bind  the  man  that 
owns  this  girdle,  and  shall  deliver  him  into  the  hands  of 
the  Gentiles.” 

All  present,  with  great  sorrow  and  love,  urged  Paul 
not  to  go  to  Jerusalem. 

^‘What  do  you,”  said  Paul,  weeping  and  breaking 
my  heart  ?  I  am  ready  not  to  be  bound  only,  but  also 
to  die  at  Jerusalem.” 

On  the  journey  to  Jerusalem  Paul  reminiscently 
recalled  his  first  journey  over  the  same  road,  when,  as  a 
lad,  his  father  was  taking  him  to  the  school  of  Gamaliel. 
Often  he  had  fretted  at  the  austerity  and  unwavering 
convictions  of  his  father,  but  now  he  remembered  the 
love  and  pride  of  that  strong  man.  He  was  devoutly 
thankful  that  so  much  of  experience  and  love  had  come 
into  his  own  life.  Sympathy  had  displaced  hate;  love 
had  supplanted  pride;  tolerance  had  driven  out  sectarian¬ 
ism;  devotion  to  the  elevation  of  humanity  supplied 
him  with  unfaltering  zeal;  and  his  love  for  Jesus  had 
made  him  a  sacrificing  messenger. 

The  first  view  of  the  Holy  City  thrilled  him  once 
again,  but  with  new  emotions,  for  it  was  the  center  of  the 
new  force  in  the  world;  the  city  over  which  his  Master 
had  wept,  because  of  the  love  he  had  for  it;  the  place  of 
the  Crucifixion  and  of  the  Resurrection,  which  gave  hope 
to  the  world.  The  narrowness  characterizing  the  Jews 


FELIX  TREMBLES 


301 


and  the  disciples  was  offset  by  the  glory  of  the  message 
that  he  had  been  commissioned  to  proclaim  to  the 
world. 

Paul  and  his  companions  were  welcomed  by  James 
and  the  elders  and  they  rejoiced  in  all  that  the  glad  tid¬ 
ings  had  achieved — they  lived  in  Jerusalem. 

“Thousands  of  Jews,  zealous  for  the  law,  have 
accepted  our  faith,”  said  James  to  Paul.  “However, 
they  hear  that  you  teach  the  Jews  among  the  Gentiles 
to  forsake  the  Law  of  Moses  and  to  cease  circumcision. 
They  will  hear  that  you  have  come.” 

“I  have  never  ceased  to  be  a  Jew,  nor  have  I  ever 
advised  any  Jew  to  refrain  from  obedience  to  the  law. 
I  do  not  insist  that  Gentiles  shall  become  Jews  before 
they  become  Christians.  Even  now  I  am  under  a  vow, 
to  be  fulfilled  in  the  Temple,  as  a  strict  Jew,”  said  Paul 
with  warmth. 

“We  have  no  doubt  of  you,”  replied  James.  “As  a 
matter  of  policy,  to  set  at  naught  all  complaints,  take 
with  you  into  the  Temple  four  men  we  have  here  under 
vows,  paying  their  charges,  and  that  will  be  the  final 
answer  to  your  critics.” 

“I  will  do  it,”  said  Paul,  “for  it  in  no  manner  violates 
my  conscience,  although  it  is  an  indirect  way  of  telling 
the  truth.” 

The  next  day  Paul  and  his  companions,  including 
Trophimus,  were  passing  along  the  street,  when 
Alexander,  in  conference  with  a  priest  and  three  others, 
pointed  out  Paul,  saying: 

“I  have  followed  him  from  Corinth.  He  preaches 
against  the  Law  of  Moses,  yet  he  is  on  his  way  to  the 
Temple  with  that  Greek,  by  the  name  of  Trophimus. 


302 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


Note  them  well,  and  no  doubt  he  will  take  the  Greek  into 
the  Temple.” 

Alexander  was  so  interested  in  talking  that  he  did 
not  notice  that  he  and  his  friends  were  blocking  the 
narrow  street;  and,  turning  to  leave,  he  jostled  against 
James,  who  was  walking  with  Timothy. 

‘‘You  are  one  of  the  gabblers  of  the  Way,”  said 
Alexander  insolently  to  James. 

“And,  save  you  do  not  show  the  lapse  of  years,”  said 
James,  with  dignity,  “I  would  say  that  you  are  that 
Ahasuerus,  the  shoemaker,  who  spat  on  Jesus  while  he 
was  bearing  his  cross  to  Calvary.” 

“Not  so;  no,  no,”  protested  Alexander  in  fright. 
“I  am  Alexander,  the  coppersmith,  of  Asia.” 

While  Alexander  lost  himself  in  the  crowd,  Timothy 
turned  to  James  and  said: 

“I  fear  some  plot  against  Paul  from  that  evil-minded 
Alexander.” 

“They  would  not  dare  to  profane  the  Temple  by 
seizing  him  while  he  is  fulfilhng  the  days  of  his  vows,” 
James  rephed,  as  they  went  on  their  way. 

On  Pentecost,  May  28,  57  a.d.,  while  crowds  of  wor¬ 
shipers  were  thronging  the  entrances  and  courts  of  the 
Temple,  Paul  was  conducting  along  the  streets  the  four 
men  who  had  been  assigned  to  him  by  James  to  the 
registry  for  sacrifices.  One  of  the  men  was  smooth- 
shaven  because  he  was  from  another  country.  In 
passing  the  home  of  his  sister,  Paul  had  the  four  men  wait 
while  he  called  upon  her  to  tell  her  that  as  soon  as  his 
days  of  purification  were  completed,  and  the  sacrifice 
made,  he  would  come  to  visit  with  her.  Alexander  had 
other  men  following  Paul,  who  were  not  well  enough 


FELIX  TREMBLES 


303 


acquainted  with  Trophimus  to  identify  him.  They  lost 
sight  of  Paul  and  his  associates  in  the  crowd,  but, 
diligently  watching,  they  again  recognized  him  in  the 
Temple,  when  the  seven  days  were  almost  completed. 
They  came  to  the  outer  courts  and  declared  that  Paul 
had  taken  a  Greek,  who  was  not  a  Jew,  into  the  Temple, 
in  violation  of  the  warnings  at  every  entrance. 

These  men  who  had  been  urged  on  by  Alexander 
raised  the  cry  that  aroused  every  Jew  in  hearing: 

“Men  of  Israel,  help.” 

“This  man,  Paul,  not  only  preaches  against  the  law, 
but  he  has  brought  a  Greek  into  the  Temple  to  defile  it,” 
they  shouted. 

The  word  was  shouted  along,  even  to  the  streets,  and 
a  great  mob  gathered,  while  Paul  and  his  companions 
were  at  their  devotions  in  the  Temple.  Alexander 
joined  the  crowd,  but  from  his  experience  in  Ephesus 
he  did  not  push  himself  forward  as  a  leader.  The  mob 
rushed  into  the  Temple  and,  forgetting  that  the  offense 
could  only  be  committed  by  one  not  a  Jew,  they  seized 
Paul.  They  pulled  him  along  the  floor,  down  the  steps, 
through  the  courts,  and  down  the  outside  steps,  tearing  off 
his  clothing  and  bruising  his  body,  wounding  his  face  so  that 
trickhng  blood  matted  his  beard.  Outside  the  Temple, 
gaining  his  feet,  he  demanded  to  know  what  was  his  offense. 

Alexander,  seeing  the  helpless  state  of  Paul,  came 
close  to  him,  shouting,  “Apostate,”  and  spat  in  Paul’s 
face.  So  quickly  that  Alexander  did  not  know  what  had 
happened,  Paul  struck  out  and  laid  him  low.  He  turned 
on  others,  striking  at  them,  felling  them  until  there  was 
a  clear  space  around  him.  The  Roman  officer  with  the 
guard  had  seen  the  valiant  defense,  but  it  was  his  duty 


304 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


to  arrest  the  man  whom  all  seemed  to  accuse,  some  ot 
one  thing  and  some  of  another.  He  led  Paul  to  the  tower 
of  Antonia;  and  Paul,  turning  to  the  howhng  mob 
following,  spoke  in  the  Aramaic,  to  their  surprise.  He 
recounted  his  experience  on  the  way  to  Damascus,  and 
held  the  mob  in  close  attention  until  he  told  them  that 
he  had  been  commanded  to  carry  the  word  to  the 
Gentiles.  At  that  their  old  fury  broke  out. 

The  Roman  centurion  took  Paul  into  the  tower,  to 
prevent  the  mob  from  injuring  him,  and  then  directed 
that  he  should  be  flogged  to  compel  a  confession.  Paul’s 
instant  claim  of  Roman  citizenship  stopped  the  officer, 
who  reported  the  claims  of  Paul  to  Claudius  Lysias,  the 
mihtary  tribune. 

Claudius  Lysias  treated  Paul  with  the  consideration 
due  a  Roman  citizen.  He  took  him  before  the  Sanhedrin 
the  next  day  to  find  out  what  was  the  charge. 

When  Paul  declared  before  the  council  that  he  had 
lived  before  God  in  all  good  conscience,  the  high  priest 
Ananias  commanded  the  guards  to  smite  him  on  the 
mouth.  With  all  his  pride  offended,  Paul  retorted: 

God  shall  smite  you,  you  whited  wall.” 

Reminded  that  he  should  not  revile  the  high  priest, 
Paul  with  fine  sarcasm  rephed: 

‘H  could  not  know  that  he  was  the  high  priest.” 

The  council  was  united  against  Paul,  but,  knowing 
the  fierce  partisanship  of  the  sects,  he  adroitly  set  the 
factions  against  each  other  by  saying: 

‘H  am  a  Pharisee  of  a  long  fine  of  Pharisees.  Because 
of  my  hope  of  the  resurrection  I  am  accused.” 

Immediately  the  factions  set  at  each  other  so  fiercely 
that  Claudius  Lysias  sent  guards  to  take  Paul  away. 


FELIX  TREMBLES 


305 


fearing  he  would  be  torn  to  pieces.  That  night  Paul 
had  a  vision  bidding  him  be  of  good  cheer,  that  he  should 
bear  witness  of  his  Master  in  Rome. 

Alexander,  in  a  meeting  with  some  Jews  known  as 
dagger  men,  was  telling  them  many  stories  about  Paul 
in  Asia;  and  he  persuaded  them  to  bind  themselves  under 
an  oath  to  slay  Paul  when  he  should  be  brought  before 
the  council  on  pretense  of  further  examination.  Ahiram, 
Paul’s  beloved  nephew,  heard  the  plot  and,  hastening 
with  fresh  clothing  to  Paul,  told  him  of  the  plot.  Paul 
had  his  nephew  tell  the  story  to  Claudius  Lysias,  who 
immediately  made  preparations  and  sent  Paul  by  night 
under  safe  guards  to  Felix,  the  procurator  in  Caesarea, 
with  a  letter  stating  the  case. 

Felix  was  an  avaricious  ofhcer  who  could  not  conceal 
the  low  estate  of  a  slave  from  which  he  had  risen. 
When  Paul  had  been  presented  before  him,  he  made  care¬ 
ful  inquiry  of  what  province  Paul  was,  and  his  time¬ 
serving  retainers  learned  that  Paul  had  brought  a  large 
sum  of  money  to  Jerusalem  for  charity.  Felix  gave 
time  for  Ananias  and  his  special-pleading  lawyer,  Ter- 
tullus,  to  appear  and  prosecute.  Tertullus  fawned  on 
Felix,  but  the  procurator  knew  that  there  was  no  money 
to  be  gained  from  the  high  priest’s  party.  The  lawyer 
made  serious  and  eloquent  charges  that  Paul  was  stirring 
up  trouble  among  the  Jews  throughout  the  world.  Fie 
tried  to  force  Felix  to  put  Paul  to  inquisition,  to  discover 
the  proof  of  his  charges. 

Paul  denied  the  charges  and  defied  his  accusers  to 
produce  any  proof.  He  aroused  the  cupidity  of  Felix  by 
stating  that  not  over  twelve  days  before  he  had  passed 
through  Caesarea  on  his  way  to  Jerusalem,  bearing  alms 


3o6 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


to  his  countrymen  in  that  city.  He  surveyed  the  accusers 
who  had  come  down  with  the  high  priest,  as  if  looking 
for  someone;  then,  looking  the  high  priest  significantly 
in  the  eye,  he  said: 

‘‘There  were  certain  Jews  from  Asia  who  ought  to 
have  been  here.” 

Paul  began  an  explanation  of  the  teachings  of  the  Way, 
but  Felix  said  that  he  understood  the  teaching  very  well. 

Felix  seemed  indifferent  to  the  accusations  and  yet 
he  wanted  to  hold  Paul.  He  brought  the  hearing  to  an 
end,  so  far  as  the  accusers  were  concerned. 

“When  Lysias  shall  come  down,  I  will  determine  your 
matter,”  said  Fehx  to  Paul.  Then,  turning  to  the  lictors, 
he  said: 

“Keep  him  nominally  in  the  praetorium,  but  with 
privileges;  permit  him  to  visit  and  to  receive  his  friends.” 

In  a  few  days  Felix,  scheming  to  procure  some  pay¬ 
ment  by  Paul  or  his  friends  for  release,  had  him  brought 
up  as  if  for  hearing  as  to  his  faith.  Felix  and  his  wife, 
Drusilla,  sat  in  the  hall  of  hearing,  in  all  the  pomp  of  the 
procurator’s  station,  to  receive  Paul.  She  was  the  sister 
of  Agrippa  H  and  of  Berenice.  While  she  was  the  wife 
of  Azizus,  king  of  Emesa,  she  yielded  to  the  praises  of 
Felix,  left  her  husband,  and  allied  herself  with  Fehx. 
She  was  a  Jewess.  Paul  saw  the  insincerity  of  Felix 
and  the  vain  curiosity  of  Drusilla. 

Paul’s  fearless  exposition  of  righteousness,  condemna¬ 
tion  of  yielding  to  lust,  and  his  attack  upon  lawlessness 
so  terrified  Fehx  and  DrusiUa  that  Felix  dismissed  him. 
Often  he  sent  his  emissaries  to  suggest  to  Paul  and  his 
friends  that  the  payment  of  money  would  release  him. 

After  being  detained  in  Caesarea  for  three  months, 
Paul  was  surprised  by  a  visit  from  his  brother  David. 


FELIX  TREMBLES 


307 


Paul  was  anxious  about  home  affairs,  he  was  getting 
along  to  that  age  when  the  memories  of  his  youth  were 
dear  to  him.  David  told  him  that  his  father  had  been 
buried  in  the  early  spring;  and,  after  long  hesitation, 
David  told  him  that  Deborah,  his  mother,  had  passed 
on,  leaving  a  last  word  for  her  son,  Saul.  According  to 
David’s  report,  Ben  Hanan  had  softened  toward  Saul  in 
his  last  years,  and  had  told  the  elders  of  the  congrega¬ 
tion  of  the  Way  in  Tarsus  that  he  wanted  them  to  know 
that  as  much  faith  as  they  had  in  their  doctrines,  he  had 
more  in  his  son,  Saul,  who  could  not  have  been  wholly 
wrong. 

‘‘And  mother  said  to  tell  you,”  David  spoke  brokenly, 
“that  all  these  years  she  has  believed  that  every  word  you 
spoke  was  inspired,  and  that  your  Master  will  welcome 
her  in  the  resurrection.” 

The  two  men  sat  long  in  silence,  solemnly  communing 
with  sacred  memories. 

“Mother  bade  me  give  you  Tabitha’s  wedding  ring,” 
said  David,  taking  the  treasure  from  his  girdle  and  giving 
it  to  Paul. 

While  Paul  gazed  fondly  upon  the  ring,  his  lips 
were  forming  words  unspoken;  but  a  lovelight  was 
in  his  eyes  that  disclosed  the  tenderness  of  his  memo¬ 
ries. 

“Father’s  last  request  was  that  as  soon  as  I  could,  I 
should  convert  your  interests  in  the  business  into  cash, 
and  that  your  interest  should  be  reckoned  the  same  as  if 
you  had  been  actively  in  the  business  all  the  time.  That 
I  have  done  and  have  letters  of  credit  for  you,”  said 
David,  taking  from  his  girdle  a  wallet. 

“This  I  cannot  take,”  said  Paul.  “I  have  not  helped 
you  in  all  these  years.  No,  it  must  not  be  so.” 


3o8 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


‘‘Would  you  refuse  the  gift  from  him  whose  last  act 
was  in  atonement?’^  David  asked.  “He  feared  that  if 
it  were  left  to  me  to  make  the  division  you  would  refuse 
it,  but  he  said  you  could  not  refuse  it  from  him,  as  his 
dying  gift  of  shght  reparation.’’ 

“But  I  have  been  bitter.  You  take  it;  give  it  to  the 
poor  in  Tarsus,”  said  Paul,  in  his  confusion. 

“And  I  promised  our  father,”  continued  David,  “that 
I  would  convince  you  that  it  was  best  for  you  to  take  this 
yourself.  It  could  never  be  more  timely  than  in  The 
present  case,  when  you  are  held  prisoner.” 

During  the  conversation  David  had  been  holding  the 
wallet,  containing  the  letters  of  credit,  open  before  Paul, 
who  took  it  as  if  it  were  a  hallowed  memento.  Then  the 
stalwart  David  bowed  his  head,  while  the  elder  brother, 
with  his  hand  on  David’s  head,  pronounced  a  blessing. 

The  detention  of  Paul  lengthened  into  months,  even 
to  two  years.  During  that  time  he  was  not  compelled 
to  remain  in  the  praetorium,  but  he  was  permitted  to 
hve  with  his  friends.  Once  in  a  while  Felix  would  have 
him  returned  to  the  praetorium  and  then  an  agent  would 
appear  to  suggest  the  payment  of  money  for  a  release. 
To  every  demand  of  Paul  for  a  trial,  Felix  would  make 
excuse  that  he  could  not  fix  a  time  that  would  suit 
his  convenience  and  the  presence  of  Claudius  Lysias. 

The  Hst  of  extortions  and  reckless  indulgences  of 
Fehx  culminated  in  his  immediate  recall  to  Rome. 
Learning  that  Felix  was  about  to  leave,  Alexander 
hastened  down  to  Caesarea  and  convinced  him  that  it 
would  enhst  the  aid  of  the  Jews,  if  he  would  imprison 
Paul,  so  that  the  succeeding  procurator  would  be  com¬ 
pelled  to  deal  with  the  case. 


CHAPTER  XXXVIII 
TO  CAESAR 

Porcius  Festus  succeeded  Felix  in  July,  59  a.d.,  and 
found  Paul  in  prison,  under  charges  made  two  years 
before.  He  was  anxious  to  dispose  of  the  case  quickly 
to  avoid  any  scandal  hkely  connected  with  it.  Festus 
went  up  to  Jerusalem  to  learn  the  details  of  the  case. 
The  wily  Ananias  urged  Festus  to  send  Paul  back  to 
Jerusalem  for  trial ;  and,  believing  that  that  would  be  done, 
Alexander  collected  the  dagger  men,  among  whom  were 
the  men  who,  two  years  before,  had  sworn  to  slay  Paul. 
They  plotted  to  kill  him  on  the  way  up  from  Caesarea. 
After  a  few  days,  Festus  set  out  for  Caesarea,  accom¬ 
panied  by  leading  men  of  the  Sanhedrin.  He  was 
anxious  to  please  the  Jews. 

Paul  was  brought  before  the  new  procurator;  and 
immediately,  the  Jews,  who  had  come  down,  began 
making  different  charges  against  him.  Paul  vehemently 
denied  the  charges  of  any  wrong  against  Caesar  or  the 
laws  of  the  Jews.  Then  Festus  proposed  that  Paul 
go  up  to  Jerusalem  and  be  tried  before  him  there. 

With  fine  scorn  Paul  declared  that  he  stood  before  a 
court  of  Rome  where  he,  as  a  Roman  citizen,  had  a 
right  to  be  judged;  that  he  could  not  be  given  up  to  be 
tried  by  the  Jews. 

“I  appeal  to  Caesar,”  Paul  said,  impressively. 

Festus  suddenly  realized  that  he  had  been  led  into 
a  false  position  with  a  man  above  the  average  in  intelli¬ 
gence. 


309 


310 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


He  conferred  with  his  counselors,  then  said: 

‘‘Unto  Caesar  you  shall  go.’’ 

Agrippa  II,  with  his  sister  Berenice,  was  making  a 
tour  of  display  and  inspection  throughout  the  regions 
over  which  he  was  king.  He  had  been  favored  by  the 
powers  of  Rome  because,  in  that  city,  he  had  ingratiated 
himself  with  influential  men.  His  family,  from  Herod 
the  Great,  had  always  been  strong  supporters  of  Roman 
rule,  although  they  had  embraced  the  Jewish  faith  in 
outward  semblance.  It  was  well  known  at  the  time  that 
Agrippa  was  living  in  his  palace  in  Caesarea  Philippi 
with  his  sister  Berenice,  as  if  she  were  his  wife.  Agrippa 
and  Berenice,  in  great  pomp,  visited  Festus  shortly 
after  Paul’s  hearing,  and  Festus  asked  the  king  for  advice 
as  to  the  charges  to  be  sent  up  with  Paul  on  his  appeal; 
for  he  did  not  want  Rome  to  laugh  at  him  for  sending 
up  an  improper  case. 

When  Agrippa  and  Berenice  had  retired  to  their 
chambers  in  the  palace,  a  slave  gave  her  a  letter. 

“From  whom  is  the  letter?”  Agrippa  asked. 

“It  is  from  our  sister,  Drusilla,”  said  Berenice,  while 

reading.  “She  says  they  have  been  ordered  to  Rome  to 

answer  charges  and  she  asks  us  to  send  her  letters  to  help 

her  and  Felix.” 

» 

“As  if  we  could  help,”  said  Agrippa,  despondently, 
“living  as  we  are.” 

“Why  be  ashamed,”  said  Berenice.  “Marriage  laws 
and  rules  are  good  for  the  people,  but  not  necessary  for 
rulers.  Cleopatra  married  her  brother,  and  rulers 
have  always,  in  such  things,  been  a  law  unto  themselves. 
Besides,  the  time  may  come  when  some  Roman  of 
influence  will  desire  me,  and  then  we  will  not  have  to 


TO  CAESAR 


311 

be  divorced.  Life  is  as  you  live  it,  and  conscience  is 
of  your  own  making.” 

At  a  sumptuous  banquet  that  evening,  Agrippa  told 
Festus  that  he  would  like  to  hear  Paul  himself,  and 
Berenice  added  that  Drusilla  said  he  was  almost  a 
magician. 

Festus  arranged  an  elaborate  ceremony  in  the  hall 
of  judgment  the  next  day.  Soldiers  escorted  Agrippa, 
Berenice,  Festus,  and  his  wife  to  seats  on  the  dais; 
the  fasces  were  there  in  burnished  brightness;  rugs 
of  elaborate  design  covered  the  steps  and  the  dais. 
Paul,  in  chains,  was  brought  before  them  and  the 
assembled  officers,  with  an  audience  of  prominent  citizens, 
making  use  of  the  occasion  to  pay  honor  to  Agrippa. 
Then  Festus  made  a  speech,  saying  that  his  reason  for  the 
hearing  was  that  he  might  know  what  to  write  to  Caesar. 

“Wherefore,  I  have  brought  him  before  you.  King 
Agrippa,”  said  Festus. 

Upon  Agrippa  giving  Paul  permission  to  speak,  the 
apostle  changed  the  whole  aspect  in  a  moment  by 
assuming  the  attitude  of  one  who  was  master,  although 
courteously  paying  tribute  to  the  office  held  by  Agrippa. 
In  an  adroit  compliment  to  Agrippa’ s  knowledge  as  a 
Jew,  he  made  the  king  judge  of  the  things  involved  in 
the  story  of  Paul’s  life,  and  made  his  appeal  to  the 
righteousness  taught  in  the  law.  He  knew  that  the  king 
was  a  Pharisee,  and,  after  presenting  his  own  claims 
to  that  sect,  he  swept  the  king  on  to  the  resurrection, 
saying:  “Why  is  it  judged  incredible  with  you,  if  God 
does  raise  the  dead  ?” 

Then  he  hurried  on  to  the  story  of  his  own  life  in 
persecuting  the  saints  and  his  experience  on  the  road  to 


312 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


Damascus.  He  repeated  that  story  vividly.  Agrippa 
and  those  with  him  forgot  their  own  doubts  and  in  awe 
listened  to  the  orator,  who  made  them  see  the  vision  as 
he  had  seen  it.  He  told  them  of  the  commission  to  him, 
in  that  vision,  to  take  the  glad  tidings  to  all  Jews,  and 
even  to  the  Gentiles;  then,  rising  to  the  loftiest  heights 
of  eloquence,  he  cried  out: 

‘H  stand  unto  this  day,  testifying  both  to  small  and 
great,  how  that  the  Christ  first  by  the  resurrection  of 
the  dead  should  proclaim  hght  both  to  the  Jews  and  to 
the  Gentiles.” 

Festus  interrupted  to  tell  Paul  that  he  was  mad, 
in  fact,  to  make  him  remember  that  he  was  a  prisoner. 
Paul  courteously  answered  that  he  was  not  mad.  Then 
he  said  that  the  king  knew  all  these  things. 

Agrippa  had  forgotten  his  kingly  pose.  Berenice 
paled  under  the  condemnation  of  that  conscience  she 
had  denied.  Paul  sensed  the  situation  and  like  a  flash 
of  judgment  he  said  abruptly: 

‘^King  Agrippa,  do  you  believe  the  prophets?” 

The  king  was  confused,  Berenice  was  in  worse  state. 
Before  the  king  could  make  answer,  Paul  clinched  the 
indictment  before  the  court  of  conscience  by  saying: 

‘H  know  that  you  believe.” 

Agrippa  dared  not  deny  his  behef.  He  recovered 
his  composure  by  strong  will-power,  laughed  in  the 
cynical  manner  he  had  learned  in  Rome  and  said: 

‘‘With  so  Httle  persuasion,  would  you  make  me  a 
Christian  ?” 

“Would  to  God  that  not  only  you  but  all  who  hear 
me,”  said  Paul,  in  such  impressive  manner  that  reply 
was  impossible,  “might  become  such  as  I  am,”  and 


KXOW  THAT  YOU  BELIEVE 


TO  CAESAR 


313 


stretching  out  his  manacled  arms,  he  said  in  a  whisper 
reaching  everyone  in  the  room,  ‘‘except  these  bonds/’ 

An  awkward  pause  followed.  All  arose  and  followed 
the  military  escort  out  of  the  hall.  The  guards  were 
puzzled  to  know  what  to  do  with  Paul,  for  there  had 
been  no  decision.  A  lie  tor  advised  them  to  take  him 
back  to  his  cell. 

When  Paul  learned  that  he  was  to  be  taken  to  Italy 
by  Julius,  a  centurion,  he  made  all  arrangements  with 
his  friends  for  his  departure.  Juhus  told  him  that  the 
ship  would  be  crowded,  but  that  if  he  had  any  servants, 
he  might  take  two  of  them  along.  Thus  it  was  that 
Luke  and  Aristarchus  were  hsted  as  servants  of  Paul 
and  taken  with  him  to  Rome,  although  Julius  knew  them 
well.  Agrippa  had  said  to  the  centurion: 

“This  man  Paul  might  have  been  discharged  if  he 
had  not  appealed  to  Caesar.  See  that  your  soldiers  do 
not  mistreat  him,  and  that  you  give  him  fair  treatment.” 

The  guards  of  the  praetorium  permitted  all  privileges 
to  Paul  and  his  friends.  When  Julius  came  to  take  Paul 
to  the  ship,  he  laughed  tolerantly  at  the  guard,  bunglingly 
slipping  the  chains  on  Paul  in  bringing  him  to  the 
centurion;  and  then  Julius  took  off  the  chains  and  handed 
them  back  to  the  guard. 

It  was  in  August,  59  a.d.,  that  Paul,  with  Luke  and 
Aristarchus,  set  sail  from  Caesarea  under  the  guard  of 
Julius,  who  was  taking  other  prisoners  to  Rome.  At 
Sidon,  70  miles  north,  they  stopped  for  a  week  to  unload 
and  reload,  during  which  time  Julius  permitted  Paul 
to  go  ashore  among  his  friends.  In  contrary  winds 
they  made  their  way  to  Myra  of  Lycia.  There  Julius 
transferred  his  prisoners  to  an  Egyptian  grain  ship. 


314 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


bound  for  Italy,  a  much  larger  ship  on  which  there  were 
276  passengers,  besides  a  cargo. 

The  ship  sailed  close  to  the  coast  to  gain  the  help 
of  land  breezes  until  it  reached  opposite  Cnidus;  and 
then  tried  to  sail  close  to  the  wind  from  the  west,  which 
drove  the  ship  south  to  Crete.  Sailing  along  the  southern 
shore  of  Crete,  the  ship  reached  Fair  Havens.  It  was 
now  early  October  and  nearing  the  season  when  naviga¬ 
tion  would  be  suspended,  from  November  until  February. 

When  a  wind  came  from  the  south  the  master  of  the 
ship  persuaded  Julius,  over  Paul’s  protest  from  his 
experience  as  a  traveler,  to  put  to  sea  to  reach  Phoenix, 
only  50  miles  away,  because  the  harbor  in  Fair  Havens 
was  not  suitable  for  wintering.  Suddenly  a  northeast 
wind,  called  the  Euraquilo,  burst  down  on  them  and 
drove  them  to  the  little  island  of  Cauda.  Under  the 
lee  of  Cauda,  the  sailors  took  on  deck  the  boat  in  tow, 
and  undergirded  the  leaking  ship  by  ropes  passed  around 
it  midship  and  tightened  by  a  capstan.  They  lowered 
the  sail,  fearing  they  would  be  driven  on  the  dangerous 
sands  off  the  African  coast,  and  struggled  to  keep  the 
ship  headed  to  the  northwest.  While  they  drifted,  they 
threw  over  the  spars  and  tackling  of  the  ship.  Neither 
stars  nor  sun  shone  for  many  days.  Paul  cheered  the 
men  when  they  were  in  panic,  saying  that  his  God  in  a 
vision  had  told  him  that  no  life  would  be  lost,  although 
the  ship  would  be. 

After  fourteen  days  of  imminent  peril,  without  sight 
of  land  or  of  sun  or  stars,  the  sailors  heard  the  boom 
of  waves  on  a  coast  line;  and  at  midnight,  by  sounding, 
they  found  they  were  approaching  a  coast.  Panic 
seized  some  of  the  sailors,  who,  under  pretense  of  laying 


TO  CAESAR 


315 


out  anchors,  tried  to  launch  the  small  boat;  and  Paul 
notified  Julius,  who  had  soldiers  cut  away  the  ropes 
and  let  the  small  boat  go  adrift. 

In  the  early  morning  Paul  heartened  the  passengers 
by  his  calm  manner,  taking  bread,  blessing  it  as  was  his 
custom,  and  persuading  all  to  eat.  They  threw  overboard 
the  jars  of  grain  in  the  hold,  to  lighten  the  ship,  for  they 
were  coming  to  a  strange  coast  at  daylight.  They  cut 
loose  the  anchors,  which  had  been  let  out  from  the  stern 
of  the  ship,  unloosed  the  rudders  for  use,  and,  setting  the 
small  sail  at  the  bow,  they  steered  the  ship  for  a  sandy 
beach.  The  soldiers,  fearing  the  penalty  for  allowing 
prisoners  to  escape,  wanted  to  kill  the  prisoners;  but 
Julius,  on  account  of  his  friendship  for  Paul,  refused  to 
allow  the  slaying  of  the  prisoners. 

Paul,  along  with  those  who  could  swim,  leaped 
overboard,  and  others,  clinging  to  wreckage,  for  the  ship 
was  now  going  to  pieces,  made  their  way  to  land,  where 
they  learned  they  were  on  the  island  of  Melita  (Malta). 
The  survivors  shivered  from  the  cold  November  wind. 
The  natives  built  fires  and  Paul  brought  fagots  to  lay 
on  the  fire.  A  serpent  among  the  fagots  was  warmed 
to  life  and  fastened  on  Paul’s  hand,  terrifying  the  natives; 
but  he  shook  it  off  without  it  doing  him  any  harm. 
The  natives  had  at  first  thought  he  was  a  criminal,  but 
now  that  he  suffered  no  harm  from  the  serpent,  they 
thought  he  was  a  god. 

Paul  and  his  companions  were  taken  and  housed  by 
Publius,  the  governor  of  the  island,  for  three  days. 
While  there  Paul  restored  the  father  of  Publius  whom 
Luke,  the  physician,  pronounced  to  be  suffering  from 
fever  and  dysentery.  The  news  of  this  restoration 


3i6 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


spread  through  the  island,  so  that,  during  the  three 
months  they  stayed  there,  the  people  brought  their  sick 
to  be  cured. 

In  February,  6o  a.d.,  Julius  engaged  passage  for  his 
prisoners  on  the  Alexandrian  ship,  Dioscuri  (Twin 
Brothers),  which  had  wintered  at  Melita.  They  reached 
Puteoli,  a  seaport  for  ships  in  the  Eg3^tian  trade, 
although  it  was  loo  miles  to  Rome  by  the  Appian  Way. 

During  the  seven  days  of  waiting  at  Puteoli  for  escort 
of  the  prisoners,  Julius  permitted  Paul  to  hunt  up  and 
visit  with  his  brethren.  Paul  was  filled  with  misgivings 
as  to  the  outcome  of  his  trial;  and  they  increased  when 
he  learned  that  the  year  before  Nero  had  started  on  his 
bloody  career  by  having  his  mother,  Agrippina,  assassi¬ 
nated. 

The  news  that  Paul  was  on  his  way  to  Rome  as  a 
prisoner  was  sent  ahead  of  him;  and  Christians  came  to 
meet  him  at  the  Market  of  Appius  and  at  the  Three 
Taverns,  welcoming  him  with  demonstrations  of  joy. 

“Am  I  merely  a  military  escort  of  a  returning 
commander  or  am  I  to  deliver  you  as  prisoner?”  said 
Julius  in  good  humor  to  Paul. 

“I  am  an  ambassador  in  chains,”  Paul  replied. 


CHAPTER  XXXIX 
BUSY  IN  CHAINS 


Julius,  arriving  with  his  prisoners  in  Rome,  took  all 
except  Paul  to  the  centurion  Longinus,  who  had  general 
supervision  of  the  Praetorian  Guard.  All  his  prisoners 
had  been  accounted  for  and  checked  from  his  list,  save 
Paul. 

‘‘Where  is  this  Paul  of  Tarsus?”  Longinus  asked. 

“He  is  waiting  with  some  of  his  friends  on  the  outside, 
until  I  call  him,”  Julius  replied. 

“You  ojSicers  in  the  provinces  are  entirely  too 
trusting;  you  know  the  penalty  is  your  life,  if  he  escapes,” 
said  Longinus. 

“And  he  has  had  my  hfe  in  his  keeping,”  replied 
Julius.  “It  was  his  calmness  and  wisdom  that  saved 
us  in  a  shipwreck;  he  healed  the  father  of  Publius  in 
Melita;  he  was  two  years  on  his  honor,  waiting  for 
trial  before  Felix;  and  Festus  does  not  send  up  any 
charge  that  can  be  a  violation  of  the  Roman  law.  It  is 
something  about  Jewish  law.  Agrippa  asked  me  to 
extend  him  every  favor.  I  have  given  him  liberty  at 
seaports  in  his  own  country  and  here  in  Italy.  He  has 
a  high  sense  of  honor,  and  he  is  a  most  interesting  man.” 

“Let  us  go  to  Burrus,  the  prefect  of  the  Praetorian 
Guard,  who  yet  rules  for  Nero,”  said  Longinus.  “Tell 
your  prisoner  where  you  have  gone,  lest  he  get  lost  in 
trying  to  find  you.” 

Julius,  laughing  at  the  humor  of  Longinus,  went  to 
the  entrance  to  the  Praetorian  Camp,  where  Paul  was 

317 


3i8 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


holding  a  reception  to  many  friends  coming  to  meet 
him.  The  centurion  told  Paul  to  await  his  return,  for 
he  hoped  to  avoid  taking  him  to  the  cells. 

When  Julius  and  Longinus  appeared  before  Burrus, 
they  found  there  Seneca,  the  tutor  of  Nero  and  associate 
with  Burrus  in  administering  civil  government.  These 
two  administered  the  details  of  government  and  were 
the  advisers  of  the  emperor,  until  a  fews  year  later,  when 
Nero  could  not  brook  any  advice  contrary  to  his  desires. 

Longinus  said,  ‘‘Julius  has  a  prisoner  from  Caesarea, 
who  has  come  with  such  high  recommendation  that  I 
fear  we  will  have  to  send  Julius  to  jail  with  him.  Let 
Juhus  tell  the  story.” 

Then  Julius  rehearsed  all  the  history  he  had  of  the 
case,  and  he  told  them  of  the  great  help  Paul  had  been 
in  saving  the  passengers,  and  that  he  had  been  given 
plenty  of  opportunity  to  escape,  long  before  he  had  been 
turned  over  to  him. 

“For  two  years  Felix  held  him  on  honor  that  he  would 
not  leave  Caesarea;  and,  when  Felix  left  on  summons 
to  Rome,  he  placed  Paul  in  prison  to  satisfy  some  Jews.” 

“If  this  man  has  been  under  the  custody  of  Felix 
for  two  years,”  said  Burrus  in  gruff  honesty,  “he  has 
suffered  enough  humiliation  to  expiate  any  crime,  short 
of  treason.” 

“I  feel  interested  in  this  man,”  said  Seneca,  “for  I 
read  a  letter  he  wrote  to  his  followers  here  that  displays 
deep  knowledge  of  the  foundation  of  morals.” 

“I  know  him  well,”  spoke  up  Gallio,  who  was  visiting 
his  brother  Seneca.  “There  is  a  class  of  Jews  opposing 
him,  and  many  Jews  and  others  believe  in  him  implicitly. 
He  will  die  rather  than  violate  his  pledge.  I  knew  him 


BUSY  IN  CHAINS 


319 


in  Tarsus  as  a  lad,  and  again  I  met  him  in  that  miserable, 
sickly  Corinth,  when  I  was  proconsul  there. 

‘‘Receipt  Julius  for  him,”  said  Burrus  to  Longinus, 
“and  parole  him  on  honor.”  Noticing  Seneca  lift  his 
eyebrow  suggestively,  Burrus  added,  “And  furnish  him 
with  a  guard  in  his  house,  the  expense  of  which  he  must 
bear;  otherwise,  he  must  be  confined,  however  merito¬ 
rious  his  case.” 

When  Julius  met  Longinus  later,  he  asked  him  what 
had  been  done  with  the  prisoner,  Paul. 

“He  has  hired  a  house  and  I  have  agreed  to  detail 
a  guard  from  day  to  day  for  him,”  said  Longinus.  “He 
is  a  most  delightful  gentleman;  made  me  feel  sorry 
that  I  had  to  be  even  as  exacting  as  that.  I  am  going  to 
hear  him  talk  to  the  people  he  has  invited.  Very 
interesting  man.” 

Paul  first  sent  for  the  Jews  of  the  city;  but,  because 
they  were  divided  in  opinion,  he  invited  the  Gentiles. 
His  days  were  filled  with  activity.  Guards  eagerly 
sought  the  assignment  to  watch  over  him.  Day  by 
day  he  expounded  the  fife  of  Jesus,  and  showed  how  it 
was  an  appeal  to  every  man  as  an  individual.  Officers 
of  the  Praetorian  Guard  came  to  hsten,  and  their  friends 
counted  it  a  favor  to  accompany  them.  There  was  a 
simphcity  in  the  morals  that  Paul  taught,  a  stern  upright¬ 
ness  demanded  by  him,  that  aroused  the  vanishing 
integrity  and  rigid  morality  once  taught  by  Cato  and 
the  honored  men  of  Rome.  Slaves  slipped  in  to  hear 
the  words  of  cheer;  women,  whose  burdens  were  heavy, 
found  strength  to  bear  them  in  the  love  of  the  Christ. 

The  most  arduous  of  Paul’s  labors  was  to  advise  the 
men  he  sent  out  as  heralds  over  the  lands;  for  all  of 


320 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


his  old,  faithful  associates  (and,  daily,  new  converts) 
came  and  went  on  missions.  He  composed  letters  in 
the  hearing  of  audiences  crowding  his  hired  house.  He 
explained  how  he  was  trying  to  keep  the  congregations 
to  the  simplicity  of  the  faith,  and  to  prevent  the  graft¬ 
ing  on  it  of  any  Jewish  customs  or  the  merging  of  it 
with  other  religions.  His  guard  would  often  neglect 
to  place  the  manacle  on  his  wrist,  linking  him  to  the 
guard.  He  was  no  longer  the  herald;  he  was  now  the 
leader,  the  organizer;  for  men  came  from  Colossa'e, 
from  Macedonia,  from  Asia,  and  from  all  over  the 
country,  to  be  instructed  how  to  organize  the  congre¬ 
gations,  and  to  settle  the  questions  arising  in  every 
section.  Prominent  people  listened  and  believed. 
Longinus  often  took  his  friends  to  hear  Paul  dictate 
some  of  his  letters. 

A  poor  slave,  Onesimus,  hearing  the  words  of  love, 
confessed  that  he  had  stolen  what  he  thought  he  had 
earned  from  Philemon,  his  master,  a  friend  of  Paul 
in  Colossae,  and  had  spent  it  in  riotous  living  in  Rome. 

‘‘What  can  I,  a  despised  Phrygian  slave,  hope  for?” 
Onesimus  cried,  groveling  at  Paul’s  feet. 

“It  is  simple,”  said  Paul.  “Let  him  that  stole, 
steal  no  more.  You  are  now  a  brother.  What  matters 
it  that  you  are  a  slave  under  these  laws?  You  are  free, 
because  your  soul  is  free.” 

Paul  dictated  a  letter  for  Timothy  to  write  to  Phile¬ 
mon,  pledging  himself  to  pay  whatever  the  slave  failed 
to  pay,  signing  it  himself;  and  gave  it  to  Onesimus 
to  take  to  his  master.  The  Roman  officers  marveled 
that  Paul’s  words  could  inspire  lowly  men  with  such  lofty 
ideals  and  at  the  same  time  hold  patricians  spellbound. 


BUSY  IN  CHAINS 


321 


After  Paul  had  been  in  custody  over  a  year,  Burrus 
came  one  day  with  a  friend  whom  he  did  not  introduce, 
who  was  intensely  interested  in  Paul’s  teaching.  Paul 
made  an  earnest  request  that  some  time  be  set  for  his 
hearing. 

“I  do  not  see  the  need  of  delaying  longer,”  said 
Burrus,  ‘‘but  things  seem  changed  in  Jerusalem,  so  that 
we  get  no  news  about  accusers  being  sent.” 

“However,  you  forget,”  said  the  companion  of 
Burrus,  “that  Poppaea  Sabina,  the  favored  mistress, 
has  asked  the  emperor  that  the  hearing  be  postponed 
until  the  full  limit  of  two  years  for  accusers  to  appear, 
because  she  has  embraced  the  Jewish  faith.” 

“That  has  its  influence,  but  I  will  not  wait  longer 
than  that  period,  as  a  matter  of  justice,”  said  Burrus. 
“How  much  longer  will  we  have  to  endure  this  degrada¬ 
tion?” 

“Perhaps  not  long,”  said  the  visitor,  whimsically, 
“for  Nero  does  not  hesitate  to  ask  leading  men  to  open 
their  veins.” 

When  Burrus  and  his  companion  had  left,  Urbanus 
told  Paul  that  the  visitor  with  Burrus  was  the  famous 
Seneca,  the  teacher  and  philosopher,  who  was  the  civil 
administrator  under  the  emperor. 


CHAPTER  XL 

BORN  A  GENTLEMAN 

In  Jerusalem  conditions  had  changed.  The  continual 
agitation  of  the  Jews  against  Rome  made  it  necessary  for 
Agrippa  to  exercise  his  full  authority,  by  deposing  Ananias 
and  appointing  Ismael  high  priest.  Ananias  had  grown 
wealthy  and  still  exercised  a  considerable  influence  in 
opposition  to  Agrippa.  The  time,  two  years,  in  which 
accusers  must  appear  against  Paul  would  soon  expire. 
Alexander  went  to  Agrippa  with  a  plea  that  he  should 
send  accusers,  or  authorize  them  to  be  sent,  to  Rome. 

“It  is  no  affair  of  Roman  law,”  said  Agrippa,  “and 
if  any  accusers  go,  they  must  be  sent  by  the  San¬ 
hedrin.” 

“It  is  not  any  concern  of  my  administration,”  said 
the  high  priest,  Ismael,  in  answer  to  Alexander’s  request 
to  send  witnesses.  “You  and  Ananias  were  the  principal 
ones  stirring  up  the  trouble  against  Paul;  now  complete 
your  plans.” 

Alexander  called  on  Ananias,  who  had  retired  to  his 
richly  furnished  home  to  enjoy  his  wealth. 

“The  time  will  soon  be  gone  in  which  we  can  appear 
against  Paul,”  Alexander  urged  to  Ananias. 

“I  am  without  power,”  said  Ananias.  “Agrippa  has 
stripped  me  of  all  influence,  even  denying  me  the  rights 
of  a  past  high  priest.” 

“Use  your  own  wealth;  finance  me  and  the  witnesses 
I  will  get,”  Alexander  insinuatingly  argued,  “and  the 
Jews  who  taunt  you  with  having  made  money  out  of 


322 


BORN  A  GENTLEMAN 


323 


your  office  will  be  silenced.  More  than  that,  I  will  prove 
that  Paul  is  against  Rome,  and  I  will  tell  the  emperor 
that  you,  out  of  your  loyalty  to  him,  even  against 
Agrippa,  sent  us  there  to  save  the  power  of  Rome.  This 
would  undermine  Agrippa  and  reinstate  you  in  your  of¬ 
fice  out  of  the  emperor’s  gratitude.” 

‘‘But  there  is  the  expense,”  Ananias  urged. 

“But  the  satisfaction  there  would  be  in  overcoming 
this  ambitious  Paul,  and  in  replacing  you  as  high  priest,” 
urged  Alexander.  “And  I  must  start  at  once  to  reach 
Rome  before  the  seas  are  closed  by  the  winter  season. 
It  is  now  late.” 

Ananias  studied  long  in  silence;  then  he  went  to  a 
secret  panel  in  the  walls  of  the  room  and  took  out  a 
purse,  which  he  handed  to  Alexander,  saying: 

“See  to  your  witnesses,  for  Paul  is  skilful.  Come 
when  you  are  ready  to  start  and  I  will  give  you  letters  to 
men  in  Rome,  vouching  for  you  and  your  friends.” 

Thus  it  was  that  Alexander,  with  witnesses,  departed 
for  Rome,  but  he  was  so  delayed  in  getting  transporta¬ 
tion  along  the  coast  to  a  place  where  he  could  find  a  ship 
bound  for  Rome,  that  he,  with  his  prepared  witnesses, 
took  passage  from  Antioch  on  the  last  ship  sailing  before 
the  winter  season.  A  Jewish  writer  says  that  no  one 
was  saved  from  the  wreck  of  that  ship,  although  more 
than  two  hundred  were  aboard.  The  vessel  was  driven 
out  of  its  course  and  wrecked  off  the  coast  of  Melita. 
One  survivor,  Alexander,  was  washed  ashore,  lashed  to 
a  spar;  but  he  was  lost  for  so  long  a  time  and  was  so 
discouraged  in  seeking  identification,  that  he  feared  to 
make  himself  known  in  Jerusalem.  His  funds  and  letters 
were  lost.  When  he  recovered  consciousness  on  the 


324 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


sands  of  the  beach,  he  felt  a  strange  thrill,  as  if  new  life 
had  come  to  him. 

The  natives  in  pity  took  Alexander  to  Publius  to 
whom  the  former  told  his  mission.  The  winter  season 
was  now  on.  A  ship  was  in  port,  waiting  for  spring  to 
open.  Publius  shrewdly  refrained  from  telling  Alexander 
that  he  knew  Paul,  and  refused  to  give  him  permission 
to  sail  on  the  first  ship,  which  left  in  February,  giving 
the  excuse  that  it  was  loaded  to  capacity.  It  was  late 
in  April  when  another  ship  bound  for  Puteoli  touched 
at  Melita,  and  Publius  permitted  Alexander  to  sail  on  it. 

Meanwhile,  the  hired  house  in  which  Paul  held  forth 
had  become  a  resort  for  the  learned  and  the  common 
people.  He  had  gathered  around  him  a  large  number 
of  helpers,  some  of  whom  had  been  with  him  through 
Asia  and  Macedonia  and  Greece,  others  who  had  been 
with  him  on  his  long  journeys  and  while  he  held  his 
school  for  two  years  in  Ephesus.  They  relieved  the 
tedium  of  teaching  the  new  attendants.  They  organ¬ 
ized  the  believers  in  congregations,  after  the  manner 
of  the  democracy  of  the  synagogue;  they  helped  select 
trustworthy  overseers,  who  had  supervision  over  the 
congregations  in  the  country  to  which  they  were  assigned. 
Paul  was  not  content  to  have  mere  allegiance  to  him,  but 
his  desire  was  to  establish  growing  and  perpetuating 
bodies. 

Rome  became  the  center  of  the  new  movement. 
Paul  was  delighted  that  an  increasing  interest  was  spread¬ 
ing  the  glad  tidings  over  the  world.  There  was  no  ritual 
provided;  but  Luke,  poet,  physician,  and  painter,  had 
prepared  hymns  expressing  the  divine  origin  of  their 
belief,  their  hopes  and  their  gratitude,  which  were 


BORN  A  GENTLEMAN 


325 


chanted  with  heartfelt  enthusiasm  by  the  followers. 
While  the  leaders  were  discussing  the  necessity  of  keep¬ 
ing  the  story  of  Jesus  free  from  future  mistakes,  Paul 
said: 

‘‘Luke  should  preserve  those  two  hymns  of  his,  the 
one  that  expresses  our  adoration  and  the  one  that  is  a 
holy  benediction.” 

“What  appeal  will  this  religion  have  after  you  are 
gone?”  Longinus  asked,  after  Paul  had  made  that 
statement. 

“The  appeal  that  there  is  in  the  hfe  and  divinity  of 
Jesus,”  Paul  answered,  r  “His  life  is  not  for  one  people, 
nor  for  any  hmited  number  of  generations.  He  touches 
humanity  in  every  phase  and  under  all  conditions,  in 
all  times  and  lands,  because  he  is  the  Spirit  of  Love  and 
Truth.” 

“How  shall  we  know  those  who  are  his  followers?” 
Longinus  urged. 

“By  the  manner  of  their  lives,  and  not  by  their 
names,”  Paul  replied;  and,  noticing  several  patricians 
with  Longinus  puzzling  over  the  answer,  he  added, 
“Jesus  has  said  that  not  everyone  that  calls  him  Lord 
shall  enter  in,  but  believers  in  him  will  show  their  love 
without  hypocrisy;  they  will  abhor  that  which  is  evil, 
seek  that  which  is  good;  they  will  be  honest  and  loyal 
citizens  of  their  own  land;  compassionate  with  those 
who  sin,  in  weakness  or  ignorance ;  and  they  will  always 
be  sweetly  reasonable.  They  are  not  less,  but  more 
efficient,  citizens  of  their  country,  in  the  everyday  affairs 
of  life.” 

“Seems  impossible  that  men  can  reach  that  superior 
state,”  Longinus  said. 


326 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


“They  may  not,  owing  to  human  imperfection;  but 
the  distinctive  characteristic  of  the  lover  of  Jesus  is  that 
he  is  striving  to  that  end,”  said  Paul. 

“Since  no  man  can  be  perfect,”  Longinus  urged,  on 
the  whispered  suggestion  of  a  patrician,  “how  is  a  man 
to  know  that  he  has  been  received,  or  is  acceptable  ?” 

“Easily;  however  great  the  sins  forgiven  him,  or  the 
faults  he  must  overcome,  his  witness  is  not  someone  out¬ 
side  of  himself,”  said  Paul.  “The  Spirit  itself  bears  wit¬ 
ness  with  our  spirit,  that  we  are  the  children  of  God.”  ' 

Longinus  and  his  friends  had  nothing  more  to  say, 
but  left,  shaking  their  heads  in  doubt  and  discussing  the 
matter  solemnly  among  themselves. 

From  early  morning  until  the  oil  burned  low  in  the 
flickering  lamps,  great  and  small,  strong  and  weak,  rich 
and  poor,  heard  from  Paul  the  tidings  that  gave  them 
hope  and  love.  They  learned  that  the  Christ-spirit 
came  to  heal  and  bind  up  the  spiritual  wounds  of  every¬ 
one  and  to  give  him  the  courage  to  struggle,  to  sacrifice, 
and  truly  to  enjoy  living.  The  hours  of  every  day  were 
too  short  for  Paul  to  tell  the  wondrous  power  of  the  glad 
tidings  to  bring  forth  and  increase  spirituality  in  men 
and  women. 

The  last  of  the  days  in  which  Paul  could  be  held, 
awaiting  accusers,  had  passed;  and  he  was  brought 
before  Burrus  in  his  council-room.  Burrus  had  sum¬ 
moned  Felix  to  be  present,  out  of  caution,  so  that  the 
discredited  procurator  could  not  make  it  an  occasion  for 
an  appeal  to  Poppaea,  to  excite  her  growing  animosity 
toward  Seneca  and  himself. 

“Felix,  it  appears  that  this  prisoner  was  left  by  you 
in  prison;  and  that  Festus,  your  successor,  has  sent  him 


BORN  A  GENTLEMAN 


327 


here  on  his  appeal/’  said  Burrus,  before  speaking  to 
Paul.  ‘^Do  you  know  of  any  offense  that  he  has  com¬ 
mitted  against  Rome  ?” 

‘‘None/’  replied  Felix.  “I  was  compelled  to  hold 
him  because  of  the  insistence  of  leaders  of  the  Sanhedrin 
that  he  taught  a  doctrine  that  was  against  their  faith.” 

“Then  why  did  you  not  release  him  ?”  Burrus  asked. 

“Because  I  feared,”  said  Felix,  “that  they  might 
complain  of  me.” 

“Have  you  any  charges  to  prefer,  or  testimony  to 
give  against  him?”  Burrus  asked  severely. 

“Assuredly  not.  I  know  that  his  doctrine  is  not  a 
menace  to  Rome,”  said  Felix  frankly.  “In  fact,  I 
feared  that  he  would  complain  against  me.” 

“That  is  not  my  affair,”  said  Paul.  “I  am  not 
concerned  with  laws  and  their  administration,  but  I  am 
interested  in  the  welfare  of  men.” 

“No  one  having  appeared  against  you,”  said  Burrus 
to  Paul,  “it  is  my  duty  to  release  you.  I  take  this 
opportunity  to  thank  you  for  the  splendid  lessons  of 
morality  which  you  have  given  to  our  soldiers  and 
citizens,  something  we  very  much  need.  I  do  not  know 
that  I  accept,  or  wholly  reject,  the  faith  which  you 
teach;  but  I  pay  my  respects  to  the  honesty  of  your 
purpose  and  the  purity  in  the  lives  of  men  and  women 
alike,  that  your  teaching  demands.  My  associate  here,” 
he  turned  to  Seneca,  who  remained  silent,  “is  in  happy 
accord  with  all  that  I  have  said.  You  are  now  free  to 
remain  in  the  city  on  account  of  your  age,  or  to  go.” 

“The  charge  against  me  was  absurd  and  untrue,  but 
I  do  not  hold  the  officers  responsible,”  said  Paul,  with  a 
courtesy  as  if  he  were  himself  a  patrician.  “I  have  been 


328 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


treated  generously,  and  I  thank  God  for  the  friends  I  have 
been  given  in  Rome;  but  while  there  is  vigor  in  my  body, 
I  must  travel  with  this  message  to  other  countries. 
I  bid  you  farewell.’’ 

^‘That  man  was  born  a  gentleman,”  said  Seneca,  as 
Paul  left  the  chamber.  ^^He  reminds  me  over  and  over 
of  the  admonition  of  the  wise  Athenodorus,  ‘  So  live  with 
men,  as  if  God  saw  you;  so  speak  with  God,  as  if  men 
were  listening.’  He  has  no  fear,  because  his  soul  is  free.” 

After  a  season  of  rejoicing  and  preparation,  Paul  sum¬ 
moned  his  friends  to  bid  them  farewell,  saying: 

“I  am  going  to  a  strange  field,  the  farther  hmits  of 
the  west,  to  take  to  those  who  have  never  heard  it  the 
story  of  the  Life,  Crucifixion,  and  Resurrection  of  Jesus. 
I  will  take  Luke  with  me,  and  if  it  be  that  my  fife  shall 
pay  the  price,  it  will  be  a  small  sacrifice  compared  with 
the  suffering  of  Jesus  to  bring  to  me  and  all  men  the  way 
of  salvation,  for  our  spiritual  lives  are  of  greater  moment 
than  the  physical  lives  we  have  to  live.  You  will  have 
our  beloved  Mark  with  you,  to  whose  loyalty  I  testify  in 
the  sweet  forgetfulness  of  past  differences,  to  keep  you 
in  the  faith  delivered  to  you.  My  own  funds  have  failed, 
but  the  contributions  of  the  brothers  in  Macedonia  and 
Asia  are  sufficient.  The  work  is  now  in  your  hands. 
May  Jesus,  our  Lord  and  Master,  keep  you  in  his  ever¬ 
lasting  love.  F  arewell  1” 

In  a  few  days,  the  early  spring  of  62  a.d.,  Paul  and 
Luke,  having  been  accompanied  to  the  coast  by  a  host 
of  friends,  set  sail  on  their  journey  from  Rome  to  the 
principal  cities  of  Spain. 


CHAPTER  XLI 
AGAIN  IN  PRISON 


Alexander,  upon  his  arrival  in  Rome,  hunted  up 
Felix  and  Drusilla  and  tried  to  enlist  them  in  his  cause. 

‘‘I  have  a  dim  recollection  of  a  man  by  the  name  of 
Alexander,  who  came  down  from  Jerusalem  with  the 
principal  men,  when  Paul  was  brought  before  me,” 
said  Fehx  to  Alexander,  ‘‘but  he  was  an  older  man  than 
you  seem  to  be,  and  that  was  four  years  ago.” 

“But  do  you  not  remember  me,  when  I  came  down 
just  before  you  left,  and  advised  you  to  put  Paul  in 
prison;  that  it  would  make  the  Jews  your  friends?” 
Alexander  asked.  But  Felix  not  showing  any  sign  of 
recognition,  Alexander  urged,  “I  started  from  Jerusalem 
with  witnesses  who  would  have  convicted  him,  but  I 
am  the  only  survivor  of  the  shipwreck.  I  can  still  make 
good  my  promise  to  help  you.” 

“I  am  not  concerned  with  any  prosecution,”  said 
Felix,  “for  I  have  my  own  affairs  to  look  after  and  Jews 
are  not  helpful,  in  the  courts  of  Rome.” 

“At  least,  identify  me  before  the  magistrates,” 
Alexander  urged,  “for  I  lost  all  my  papers  in  the  ship¬ 
wreck.” 

“I  have  told  you  that  I  could  not  make  good  identi¬ 
fication,”  said  Felix.  “Besides,  Paul  was  released  and 
left  the  city  almost  two  months  ago.” 

The  coppersmith  was  without  friends,  although 
he  met  many  he  had  known  in  Corinth  and  Ephesus 
who  seemed  to  doubt  him  and  failed  to  recognize  him. 

329 


330 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


Often  he  looked  in  a  mirror  to  find  a  strange  face 
reflected,  although  it  was  his  own;  but  he  saw  there  was 
an  expression,  as  if  a  few  Hnes  of  youth  had  been  grafted 
on  an  old  face.  His  eyes  were  still  old  and  sinister, 
in  contrast  to  the  younger  lines.  He  laughed,  speaking 
aloud  to  himself: 

‘‘So  this  is  my  curse,  to  live.  It  shall  be  a  blessing.’’ 

He  found  that  whatever  of  youth  had  been  restored 
to  him  separated  him  from  his  former  acquaintances, 
and  that  he  had  to  seek  new  friends  and  had  to  estabhsh 
a  personality,  which  his  mixture  of  youth  and  age  made 
impossible.  He  could  not  return  to  Jerusalem,  for  they 
would  not  believe  him:  nor  could  he  go  to  Corinth  or 
Ephesus,  for  the  same  reason,  and  because  he  had  not 
accomplished  any  of  his  boasts  to  remove  Paul.  He  had 
to  take  up  his  life  in  Rome;  and  yet,  moved  by  his  long 
hate  against  Paul,  he  found  a  little  satisfaction  in  spying 
on  the  Christians. 

The  great  fire  in  Rome,  breaking  out  July  19,  64  a.d., 
raged  for  six  days,  destroying  the  portions  of  the  city 
where  Nero  had  desired  to  build  wonderful  works  of 
art.  The  part  of  the  city  occupied  by  the  Jews  strangely 
escaped,  although  exposed.  The  populace  immediately 
muttered  that  Nero  had  set  the  fire.  Then  friends  of 
the  emperor  pointed  to  the  fact  that  the  Jews  had 
escaped,  as  proof  that  the  Jews  had  set  the  fire.  There 
were  many  Jews  who  had  advanced  funds  to  Nero  in 
his  profligate  expenditure,  to  tide  him  over  until  taxes 
would  be  returned,  for  the  senate  servilely  voted  any 
allowance  that  he  asked.  A  close  friend  of  the  emperor, 
who  had  met  Alexander,  suggested  that  the  Christians 
had  started  the  fire.  Alexander  spread  this  false  story, 


AGAIN  IN  PRISON 


331 


eagerly  accepted,  and  for  a  time  it  was  sufficient  to  allay 
the  murmurings  of  the  populace. 

When  the  explanation  offered  was  about  to  lose  its 
force,  Nero  seized  on  it  to  give  himself  full  exoneration. 
To  divert  the  minds  of  the  pubhc  from  the  charges  against 
him,  he  caused  the  Christians  to  be  taken;  and  with 
short  shrift  they  were  condemned  to  furnish  the  rare 
spectacle  of  human  torches  along  the  pillared  walks; 
they  were  fed  to  wild  beasts  in  the  arena,  until  even  the 
lust  of  Rome  for  blood  was  satiated,  disgusted.  But  Nero 
could  not  understand  that  any  passion  could  be  satisfied. 

Many  Christians  fled  in  terror  from  Rome,  while 
brave  ones  remained,  to  comfort  and  succor  the  families 
of  their  unfortunate  brothers.  They  met  in  subter¬ 
ranean  rooms,  in  the  catacombs,  in  half-destroyed 
buildings,  guarded  by  an  outpost  to  give  them  warning 
of  the  approach  of  their  enemies. 

Alexander  kept  in  close  touch  with  the  Christians 
and  found  many  of  their  places  of  meeting.  He  learned 
that  if  one,  not  personally  known  to  the  guard,  made 
a  figure  of  a  fish  in  the  dust,  or  traced  it  out  on  a  wall, 
he  was  admitted  or  directed  where  to  go  to  meet  the 
Christians. 

The  active  persecution  of  the  Christians  had  sub¬ 
sided,  except  in  the  provinces.  The  years  were  passing, 
and  in  the  meetings,  once  in  a  great  while,  Alexander 
learned  of  the  journeys  of  Paul:  that  he  was  in  Dalmatia, 
or  that  he  had  been  in  Crete;  that  he  was  in  Laodicea 
and  on  his  way  for  a  brief  visit  to  Colossae;  but  always 
the  news  was  so  late  that  Paul  would  have  left  the  city 
from  which  the  news  came,  before  anyone  could  arrive 
from  Rome. 


332 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


Alexander  had  followed  his  trade  as  coppersmith 
and  his  spying  for  four  years.  He  did  not  care  to 
report  upon  the  ordinary  members  he  found  in  the 
meetings  of  the  Christians.  He  was  embittered  against 
Paul,  because  he  felt  that  Paul  was  the  principal 
agency  in  exalting  the  hfe  of  the  Crucified  One.  His 
many  failures  to  accompHsh  his  revenge  on  Paul  only 
served  to  increase  his  desire,  now  grown  to  an  obses¬ 
sion. 

Nero  had  spent  much  of  his  time  and  had  almost 
taken  up  his  permanent  residence  in  Corinth,  where  he 
was  concerned  in  constructing  a  canal  across  the  isthmus 
and  in  winning  crowns  in  the  Isthmian  games,  by  the 
simple  expedient  of  demanding  the  punishment  of  anyone 
who  dared  to  defeat  him.  He  indulged  the  fancy  that 
he  was  a  musician  and  an  actor  who  could  restore  the 
old  Greek  drama.  In  the  distant  provinces  of  Rome 
rebelhons  were  fomenting. 

Alexander  heard  that  Paul  was  growmg  old  rapidly; 
and,  after  specially  strenuous  activities,  that  in  the 
autumn  of  66  a.d.  he  was  going  to  NicopoHs  of  Epirus, 
the  memorial  city  built  by  Augustus,  overlooking  a 
small  bay  on  the  gulf  of  Arta,  to  spend  the  winter  there. 

Seneca  and  Burrus,  earnest  and  honest  advisers  of 
Nero,  had  been  dismissed.  Nymphidius  Sabinus  and 
Sofonus  Tigelhnus  had  been  appointed  as  administrators 
in  Rome,  chiefly  because  they  fawningly  served  Nero  and 
obeyed  every  venal  and  egotistic  whim  of  the  degen¬ 
erating  emperor.  Tigellinus,  having  many  plans  of 
his  own  to  carry  out,  followed  Nero  to  Corinth.  HeHus, 
a  freedman,  often  discharged  the  duties  of  Sabinus  in 
Rome. 


AGAIN  IN  PRISON 


333 


Drusilla  had  found  favor  with  some  of  the  influential 
men,  because  she  had  the  favor  of  Poppaea,  who  had 
now  become  the  wife  of  Nero;  and  Poppaea  was  pleased 
to  extend  some  favors  to  Drusilla,  on  account  of  the 
Jewish  rehgion,  which  she  had  embraced.  Felix  was 
scheming  to  regain,  through  the  questionable  influence 
of  his  wife,  Drusilla,  his  standing  in  the  government. 
These  conditions  were  known  to  Alexander  and  he  went 
to  Felix  with  the  news  he  had  of  Paul.  He  came  to  the 
house  of  Felix  at  the  very  moment  that  Drusilla  was 
upbraiding  her  husband  with  demanding  that  she  make 
every  sacrifice  to  win  the  senators  to  a  favorable  report 
on  his  case,  while  he  did  nothing  himself. 

“You  refused  to  identify  me,”  said  Alexander,  when 
admitted  to  the  presence  of  Felix  and  Drusilla,  “but 
that  was  because — well,  a  change — no  matter — that  is 
past.  You  know  that  I  know  all  that  Alexander  knew. 
I  have  not  been  idle  these  four  years.  I  have  witnesses 
that  will  swear  that  Paul  has  spent  all  these  years 
since  his  release  in  speaking  against  the  rule  of  Rome. 
I  know  where  he  is  hiding,  in  Nicopolis,  in  easy  reach 
of  Brundisium.  They  have  killed  many  of  his  deluded 
followers,  but  why  not  take  Paul,  the  man  responsible 
for  all  this  turmoil?  If  you  go  to  the  magistrates 
with  this  information,  you  will  have  a  strong  claim  upon 
the  friends  of  the  emperor.” 

“Why  do  you  hesitate?”  said  Drusilla,  petulantly. 
“Helius,  a  freedman  like  yourself,  ought  to  be  willing 
to  help  you,  and  he  acts  for  Sabinus  in  all  things.  You 
urge  me  to  claim  religion  with  Poppaea,  now  you  should 
claim  the  ties  between  two  men  who  came  from  the 
same  station.” 


334 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


Drusilla  had  lost  her  fear  of  Felix  along  with  her  respect 
for  him,  since  he  had  thrown  her  into  the  arms  of  senators. 

When  Felix,  with  Alexander,  appeared  before  Helius, 
asking  that  Paul  be  brought  from  NicopoHs  on  a  charge 
of  disloyalty,  because  he  was  a  leader  of  the  proscribed 
sect,  Helius  demanded  that  the  man  Alexander  should 
lead  officers  where  they  could  make  arrests  of  Christians 
meeting  secretly,  so  that  it  would  not  appear  as  if  only 
one  man  were  being  singled  out.  He  slyly  urged  that 
if  it  became  necessary  to  show  any  leniency,  there 
would  be  plenty  of  subjects  to  be  released  without 
releasing  the  man  Paul. 

am  pleased  that  you  have  brought  this  about,” 
said  Helius  with  a  smirk  to  Felix.  ‘‘By  catching  the 
leader,  we  may  relieve  ourselves  of  passing  sentence  on 
so  many  sobbing  women  and  martyr- like  men.” 

Much  against  his  will,  Alexander  was  compelled  to 
betray  a  gathering  of  Christians  to  the  Roman  guards. 

While  resting  at  NicopoHs  by  the  side  of  the  placid 
gulf,  Paul  reviewed  to  Luke  and  Titus  his  trips  through 
Spain  and  Dalmatia  and  told  of  the  friends  he  had  left 
there.  He  was  worn  and  weary;  the  evening  shadows 
from  the  peninsula  on  which  they  were,  creeping  away 
from  them  across  the  bay  to  the  farther  shore,  seemed 
to  him  as  if  they  were  a  curtain,  softly,  slowly  drawing 
over  his  years  of  activity.  Now  he  was  compelled  to 
rest;  the  days  of  unflagging  zeal  were  gone  forever.  As 
the  sheen  of  the  gulf  lost  the  glint  of  the  sun  and  mirrored 
up  the  distant  stars,  so  he,  while  losing  the  fierce  energy 
of  his  early  life,  was  reflecting  back  to  the  heavens  the 
glory  of  his  faith. 


AGAIN  IN  PRISON 


335 


“Titus,  you  must  leave  at  once  for  Dalmatia,”  said 
Paul.  “For  they  need  help.  They  have  written  me 
of  their  troubles.” 

After  Titus  left,  Paul  and  Luke  spent  days  in  review¬ 
ing  Paul’s  life  and  their  experiences  since  they  had 
become  companions  in  spreading  the  glad  tidings. 

Then  came  the  soldiers,  who  arrested  Paul  and  hurried 
him  off  to  Rome.  Luke  went  with  him,  at  great  peril, 
as  he  was  told  by  the  guards.  While  Paul  and  Luke 
had  heard  of  the  persecution  and  had  met  many  who 
were  fugitives,  they  understood  that  the  brutal  saturnalia 
had  passed.  So  by  ship  to  Brundisium  and  then  on 
horseback  to  Rome,  the  guards  hurried  their  prisoner 
forward ;  yet  Paul  had  won  their  confidence. 

In  Rome  a  crowd  of  men  and  women  were  being 
examined,  who  had  been  arrested  in  the  raid  led  by 
Alexander.  Women  were  in  tears.  Men  were  in 
anguish,  but  sternly  awaited  their  fate.  Helius  was 
dressed  as  a  military  officer  and  had  with  him  two  citizens 
of  counsel. 

“We  will  put  the  test  question  first,”  said  Helius 
to  his  associates,  who  nodded  assent. 

“All  who  will  renounce  any  allegiance  to  this  sect 
step  to  the  front  and  take  the  oath,”  said  Helius,  address¬ 
ing  the  crowd  of  prisoners. 

Alexander,  who  had  been  arrested  with  them  when 
acting  as  a  spy,  was  the  only  one  who  stepped  to  the 
front  and  placed  himself  in  posture  for  the  oath. 

The  rest  of  the  prisoners  looked  on  Alexander  in 
scorn.  An  old,  patriarchal  man  beckoned  for  permission 
to  speak,  which  being  given,  he  said  in  a  loud  voice: 


336 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


‘‘We  do  not  know  this  man.  He  is  not  and  has 
never  been  one  of  us.” 

Alexander  in  fear  stepped  behind  the  guards.  The 
judges  looked  admiringly  on  the  group  of  twenty  or  more 
men  and  women. 

“The  people  are  sick  of  spectacles,”  said  Helius  to 
his  associates.  “In  Nero’s  absence,  we  will  mercifully 
sentence  them  to  death.” 

The  associates  silently  acquiesced,  and  Helius  simply 
said  to  the  lictors,  as  a  matter  of  form: 

“The  sentence  is  death.” 

Helius  was  talking  lightly  with  his  associates  while 
the  guards  were  driving  and  leading  the  condemned 
out  and  Alexander  approached,  sycophantly  bowing 
to  Helius. 

“What  news  have  you  about  the  arrest  of  Paul?” 
Alexander  asked.  “I  have  done  all  that  was  required 
of  me.” 

“As  soon  as  the  officers  arrive  with  him,  we  will 
have  the  preliminary  hearing,”  Helius  said,  impatiently. 
“We  have  just  condemned  many  of  your  race  to  death, 
and  still  you  persist.” 

“They  were  only  incidental  to  the  capture  of  Paul, 
a  condition  which  you  imposed,”  said  Alexander. 

“A  middle-aged  man,  with  hate  centuries  old,” 
said  Helius  to  his  associates,  as  Alexander  left. 

Paul  had  bravely  insisted  that  he  would  ride  at  the 
pace  set  by  the  guards,  from  Brundisium,  although  he 
was  worn  and  almost  fainting.  Luke  interposed  on  behalf 
of  the  aged  prisoner.  Paul  kindly  urged  that  he  would 
bear  the  long  and  arduous  trip  from  Brundisium  to  Rome, 


AGAIN  IN  PRISON 


337 


if  need  be,  without  rest ;  but  the  officer  in  charge  stopped 
at  different  inns  on  the  way  so  as  to  give  the  apostle  an 
opportunity  to  rest.  They  entered  the  praetorium  while 
the  prisoners  condemned  by  Hehus  were  being  led,  as 
they  believed,  to  await  their  execution,  followed  by  a 
crowd  of  curious  men  and  women.  Paul  aroused  and 
gave  them  the  sign  of  blessing,  which  caused  them  to 
recognize  and  call  to  him,  although  the  guards  brutally 
beat  them  back  into  the  line. 

Luke  supported  Paul  into  the  corridor  of  the  prison, 
and,  after  gently  laying  him  down  on  a  bench,  bathed 
Paul’s  head  from  a  basin  of  water  furnished  by  the  guards. 

‘‘  Go  and  tell  our  friends  that  I  am  here,  and  may  have 
a  chance  to  speak  to  them,”  said  Paul  to  Luke,  after 
being  revived  by  Luke’s  ministrations. 

While  Paul  was  being  cared  for  by  Luke  in  the  prison, 
a  meeting  was  being  held  by  six  of  the  leaders  of  the 
Christians,  both  Jews  and  Greeks;  and  Demas,  who  had 
stood  high  in  the  esteem  of  Paul,  was  the  spokesman. 

‘‘The  persecutions  are  being  renewed,  and  leaders 
are  now  sought.  Already  they  have  arrested  Peter 
and  given  him  a  preliminary  hearing,”  said  Demas. 
“We  can  now  make  our  escape.” 

The  leaders  were  astonished  at  that  instant  by  the 
entry  of  Luke.  He  told  them  of  Paul’s  arrest,  that  the 
beloved  teacher  wanted  to  see  them  and  counsel  with 
them.  He  noticed  that  they  had  on  their  heavy  coats 
and  had  their  packs  with  them,  and  he  looked  at  them 
questioningly. 

“Yes,  we  are  making  our  escape,”  said  Demas. 
“We  can  do  Paul  no  good,  and  if  we  remain,  we  only 
sacrifice  our  Lives  to  no  purpose.” 


338 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


Luke  upbraided  them  for  their  cowardice  and 
reminded  them  that  Paul  had  given  his  life  to  the  cause, 
without  thought  of  himself  or  of  danger. 

“We  may  live  to  teach  in  our  own  country,”  said 
Demas.  ‘  ‘But  if  we  remain,  we  die  unknown.  Give  our 
love  to  Paul,  but  we  go  to  our  own  cities.” 

When  Luke  returned  to  Paul,  the  guard  was  kneeling 
beside  him. 

“Never  fear  for  your  soul,”  said  Paul,  laying  his 
hand  on  the  shoulder  of  the  guard,  “for  you  must  perform 
your  duty;  and  if  I  lose  my  life,  I  can  suffer  no  more  than 
I  have  suffered.” 

Luke  reported  all  that  he  had  learned  and  Paul  told 
Luke  to  insist  on  a  hearing  as  soon  as  possible.  It  was 
then  late  in  the  evening  and  Luke  made  Paul  as  com¬ 
fortable  as  he  could  for  the  night. 

“I  will  be  on  duty  during  the  night,”  said  the  new 
guard  to  Luke  as  he  left.  “I  will  gladly  give  him  aid, 
for  I  am  his  friend.” 

In  his  fevered  sleep  that  night  Paul  had  a  vision  of 
an  angelic  visitor.  The  moonlight  was  streaming 
through  the  window  on  his  face,  now  showing  the  deep 
lines  of  care  and  hardship.  The  guard  was  standing 
close  by,  looking  down  on  him  in  pity.  Paul  feebly 
raised  his  hands  and  said  softly : 

“I  come  quickly.” 

The  guard  watched  closely,  and  often  during  the 
night  paused  to  admire  the  sleeping  figure  whose  face, 
even  in  repose,  expressed  the  confidence  and  courage 
of  one  who  had  faith  beyond  the  power  of  man  to  destroy. 
The  guard  at  daybreak  furtively  brought  Paul  a  bowl 
of  steaming  food,  which  refreshed  and  strengthened  him. 


I  COME  QUICKLY 


AGAIN  IN  PRISON 


339 


In  the  early  morning  the  guards  and  Luke  assisted 
Paul  to  the  hall  of  hearing  before  Helius.  The  civilian 
counselors  were  present,  and  Alexander  stood  near  the 
table,  eager  to  give  his  statements.  A  guard  provided 
a  chair  for  Paul,  an  act  that  caused  Helius  to  study  the 
prisoner  closely.  Helius  grudgingly  told  Alexander  to 
make  his  statement. 

Alexander  licked  his  lips,  as  if  he  were  about  to  enjoy 
a  choicest  morsel,  and  proceeded  with  his  charge  in  a 
wandering  way,  his  recital  covering  all  the  accusations 
that  had  been  made  against  Paul  in  Philippi,  Corinth, 
and  Jerusalem  in  the  years  past,  mingling  charges  of 
violating  the  Jewish  law  with  charges  that  he  taught 
men  against  the  Roman  government.  In  his  mad  zeal 
he  turned  to  denounce  Paul  to  his  face. 

‘‘This  man  is  a  falsifier,”  said  Paul,  rising  and  looking 
Alexander  in  the  eye  until  he  quailed.  “He  is  merely 
a  fanatical  enemy  who  has  pursued  me  for  years,  a 
coppersmith,  and  a  Jew  who  profits  by  making  images 
for  idol  worshipers,  while  he  believes  idols  to  be  con¬ 
demned  by  God.” 

Alexander,  feeling  that  Paul  had  given  him  a  hard 
thrust,  and  might  slip  away  from  the  charges,  became 
vehement  in  a  rehearsal  of  his  former  statements. 

“ Stop,”  cried  Helius  to  Alexander.  “If  you  continue 
your  accusations,  we  will  be  compelled  to  release  him. 
We  will  submit  the  question  to  Nero,  now  in  Corinth.” 

A  messenger  was  dispatched,  with  a  statement  of  the 
case,  to  Nero. 

Onesiphorus,  formerly  of  Iconium,  now  of  Ephesus, 
had  journeyed  to  Rome  in  an  effort  to  enlarge  his  trade, 
and  heard  the  rumor  that  Paul  had  been  arrested. 


340 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


Notwithstanding  Christians  pointed  out  the  great  danger 
he  ran  if  he  sought  Paul,  he  visited  Paul  in  prison  and 
with  Luke  ministered  to  his  comfort.  The  fearlessness 
of  Onesiphorus  encouraged  others  less  courageous  and  a 
way  was  always  found  to  permit  visitors  to  see  Paul. 

Paul,  in  his  longing  for  old  friends  and  those  whom 
he  dearly  loved,  had  Luke  write  to  Timothy  to  hasten 
to  him  before  the  winter  would  close  the  seas.  He 
learned  of  the  friends  who  had  been  slaughtered  in  the 
wild  days  of  the  persecution  following  the  fire,  and 
gave  all  those  who  visited  him  encouragement  in  their 
sorrows.  They  bewailed  the  fate  that  awaited  him, 
and  he  replied: 

‘‘As  once  I  wrote  to  you,  so  I  repeat,  with  the  sword 
poised  over  my  head : 

“‘I  am  persuaded,  that  neither  death,  nor  fife,  nor 
angels,  nor  principalities,  nor  things  present,  nor  things 
to  come,  nor  powers,  nor  height,  nor  depth,  nor  any 
other  creation,  shall  be  able  to  separate  us  from  the  love 
of  God,  the  love  which  is  in  Christ  Jesus  our  Lord.’  ” 


CHAPTER  XLII 

BY  THE  OSTIAN  WAY 

The  scheming  Tigellinus  spent  his  time  close  to  Nero 
in  Corinth  and  pretended  an  interest  in  the  silly  efforts 
of  Nero,  attempting  in  his  inordinate  egotism  to  be  a 
leader  in  the  games  and  in  the  revival  of  music,  dancing, 
and  histrionic  art.  Sabinus  came  with  the  messenger 
asking  for  advice  as  to  the  disposition  of  prominent 
Christians  being  held  for  final  hearing.  He  intended  to 
return,  if  the  answer  was  favorable  to  release;  and  if 
Nero  would  show  no  mercy,  then  he  had  decided  that 
he  would  remain  in  Corinth  and  let  Helius  dispose  of 
the  disagreeable  situation.  Nero,  at  the  time  Sabinus 
and  the  messenger  arrived,  was  in  the  midst  of  training 
a  chorus  of  dancing  girls.  Several  Roman  flatterers  were 
in  attendance,  as  well  as  Tigellinus,  watching  that  no 
one  caught  the  vagrant  fancy  of  Nero. 

Nero  stopped  his  dancers;  and,  going  down  from  his 
director’s  chair,  representing  a  throne,  went  through 
ludicrous  contortions  with  his  fat  body  to  show  the 
chorus — twenty  girls  in  filmy  garments — how  to  dance 
gracefully.  The  instant  his  back  was  turned,  they  were 
laughing  while  the  courtiers  praised  him. 

^Ht  is  well,”  said  Nero  to  Sabinus,  while  panting  from 
his  exertions,  “that  I  can  train  this  generation  in  the 
lost  art  of  grace.” 

“We  have  a  mob  of  deluded  Christian  followers  and 
many  of  the  leaders  of  the  Christian  sect  under  arrest  in 
Rome,”  said  Sabinus,  “to  serve  for  a  spectacle;  but  the 


341 


342 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


people  rudely  cry  for  the  emperor  to  be  served,  instead 
of  these  victims,  who  make  no  resistance.  The  people 
almost  fall  down  in  worship  of  them.” 

‘‘Here  I  am  wearing  myself  away,”  said  Nero,  “to 
give  my  people  the  poetry  of  motion,  and  they  do  not 
appreciate  it.  Who  are  the  men  ?” 

“There  are  many  you  do  not  know  of,”  said  Sabinus, 
“but  we  have  the  two  principals,  Peter  and  Paul.” 

“I  have  heard  of  Peter,”  said  Nero,  swelling  with 
anger,  “and  Paul,  Paul,  a  rank  mountebank.  He  per¬ 
suaded  my  beautiful  Lalagen  to  quit  the  bower  I  had 
fitted  up  for  her  and  serve  among  the  common  women, 
in  his  organization.”  Turning  to  an  attendant,  he  said, 
“Write  a  rescript  to  Rome,  ordering  the  death  of  these 
two  men,  unless  they  recant;  and  to  release  all  the  rest. 
That  will  show  the  people  that  I  pursue  the  consistent 
course  of  a  statesman.” 

Meanwhile,  during  the  early  winter  months,  the 
friends  of  Paul  had  gathered  from  the  four  corners  of 
the  globe,  defying  the  dangers  that  beset  them.  Timothy 
came  at  once,  with  John  Mark.  The  guards  were 
oppressed  with  visitors.  The  common  people  who  had 
not  believed  the  Christian  teachings  were  growing 
louder  in  their  mutterings,  and  were  eager  to  learn  the 
story  of  Paul.  They  stood  in  open  places,  hailing  his 
visitors,  to  learn  more  of  the  man.  He  was  rapidly 
becoming  a  hero  in  the  eyes  of  the  uncertain  mob. 
Hehus  delayed  action,  because  he  feared  the  political 
results,  and  wrote  to  Sabinus.  He  received  a  second 
rescript  from  Nero,  to  proceed  as  formerly  directed. 

It  was  in  the  balmy  days  of  June,  67  a.d.,  that  Helius 
had  Paul  brought  before  him.  Felix  and  Alexander, 


BY  THE  OSTIAN  WAY 


343 


under  notice,  were  present.  Notwithstanding  great 
caution  had  been  used  to  avoid  publicity,  a  large  crowd 
followed  the  guards  up  to  the  steps  leading  to  the  trial 
chamber.  The  case  against  Peter  had  been  disposed  of; 
and  now  Paul  was  the  last  to  be  heard,  if  the  proceedings 
could  be  called  a  hearing. 

Hehus  had  several  civilians  for  counsel,  but  all  were 
time-servers  of  the  emperor,  present  only  to  give  an  air 
of  judicial  consideration  to  the  proceeding.  Fehx  and 
Alexander  were  there,  although  Felix  adroitly  refused  to 
converse  with  the  Jew;  and,  noticing  the  contempt  that 
Helius  had  for  Alexander,  Felix  turned  his  back  to  him. 
When  the  case  was  called,  Alexander  stepped  to  the 
front  and  started  to  talk. 

‘‘This  business  is  bad  enough,  without  having  to  listen 
to  you,”  said  Helius. 

The  special  guard  ordered  by  Helius  was  in  charge 
of  Longinus,  who,  recognizing  Paul,  almost  forgot  his 
dignity  as  a  centurion. 

“This  is  the  second  rescript  in  this  case,”  said  Helius, 
unrolling  a  manuscript.  “The  emperor  has  magnani¬ 
mously,  out  of  the  tenderness  of  his  poetical  nature, 
ordered  the  release  of  the  followers  of  this  sect  who 
were  arrested  about  the  time  these  charges  were  pre¬ 
ferred;  but,  with  that  firmness  found  in  a  wise  ruler,  he 
demands  that  we  apply  the  test  in  this  case  of  Paul,  as 
formerly  it  has  been  applied.  Let  the  prisoner  stand 
forth.” 

Paul  stood  up,  with  a  guard  who  strangely  pressed 
close  to  him. 

“  Will  you  under  oath  renounce  this  name  you  teach  ?” 
said  Helius. 


344 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


The  guard  whispered  in  Paul’s  ear: 

‘‘Take  the  oath.  Many  have  taken  it.  It  means 
nothing,  because  extorted  by  threats.” 

Paul  did  not  indicate  that  he  heard  the  guard,  but 
answered  reverently: 

“For  me  to  live  is  Christ,  and  to  die  is  gain.” 

The  counselors  of  Helius  plainly  showed  their  admira¬ 
tion  of  the  courage  of  the  apostle. 

“There  is  no  discretion  left  us,”  said  Hehus.  “Unden 
this  rescript  you  must  die.  Being  a  Jew,  you  will  be 
crucified.” 

Paul  stepped  forward,  aroused  to  his  most  sublime 
attitude,  the  weight  of  years  falling  away  as  he  straight¬ 
ened  up  before  the  Roman  court  and  said : 

“Because  of  one  immortalized  Crucifixion  in  Jeru¬ 
salem,  which  I  would  not  suffer  to  be  imitated  on  my 
humble  person,  and  because  I  am  a  Roman  citizen,  I 
demand  that  my  death  be  at  the  block.” 

After  a  conference  with  his  counselors,  Helius  said: 

“Beit  so.” 

The  soldiers,  under  Longinus,  led  the  way,  clearing 
the  steps  by  pushing  back  the  crowds,  followed  by  the 
guards  in  charge  of  Paul. 

“Nero’s  lions  were  not  hungry,”  said  a  loud-voiced 
brawler  on  the  edge  of  the  crowd,  “and  now  he  kills  off 
the  men  who  think  of  us.” 

This  brought  such  a  cheer  from  the  crowd  that  the 
guards  faced  on  each  side  toward  the  crowd,  with  spears 
at  charge;  and  the  miserable  plebeians  fell  back. 

Ten  days  passed,  the  time  required  by  law  between 
the  sentence  and  death,  during  which  the  friends 
assembled  daily  in  the  streets  near  the  praetorium,  that 


BY  THE  OSTIAN  WAY 


345 


Paul  might  know  they  loved  him.  The  word  had  passed 
quickly  that  the  other  worshipers  had  been  released  and 
only  the  two  leaders  had  been  held.  So  great  was  the 
throng  of  visitors  to  the  distinguished  condemned  that 
guards  almost  feared  an  uprising. 

In  the  very  early  morning  of  the  fateful  day,  Longinus 
came  with  his  escort  to  lead  Paul  to  a  secluded  place  of 
execution,  the  Acque  Salvie,  2  miles  south  of  the  Ostian 
gate,  a  hollow,  level  space,  surrounded  by  hills.  Even 
at  that  early  hour,  Paul’s  friends,  who  had  spent  the 
night  in  watching  and  praying,  accompanied  the  proces¬ 
sion  in  great  numbers,  followed  by  a  rabble  that 
delighted  in  blood. 

Helius  felt  it  necessary  to  attest  by  eye-witnesses 
that  the  sentence  had  been  carried  out;  and  he  caused  to 
be  erected  a  canopy  and  a  platform,  furnished  with 
comfortable  chairs,  on  the  side  of  a  hill,  in  full  view  of 
the  place  of  execution,  where  he  assembled  fifty  nobles 
and  senators.  FeHx  was  among  the  invited  guests. 
Alexander  came  crowding  in  among  them  and,  by  order 
of  Helius,  was  ignominiously  kicked  out. 

The  beheading  block  was  at  the  center  of  a  space 
marked  off  by  posts  on  the  low  level  ground,  and  soldiers 
on  guard  prevented  any  unauthorized  person  from  enter¬ 
ing  the  segregated  area.  The  professional  executioner, 
leaning  on  his  massive  sword,  awaited  the  preparations. 
Longinus  led  Paul  to  the  block  and  with  tears  in  his  eyes 
took  Paul’s  hand  to  bid  him  farewell. 

‘‘Grieve  not,  nor  condemn  yourself,”  said  Paul,  “for 
you  only  obey  a  government  that  you  serve.” 

An  assistant  of  the  executioner  stepped  forward  to 
bind  Paul  and  to  blindfold  him.  Paul  protested  to 


346 


HERALD,  LEADER,  MARTYR 


Longinus  that  he  would  submit,  without  being  bound 
or  blindfolded,  but  would  crave  the  favor  of  saying  a 
last  word  to  the  group  of  weeping  friends,  who  stood  as 
near  as  the  guards  would  permit. 

The  request  was  granted.  While  Paul  spoke, 
Timothy,  recognizing  that  the  words  were  from  the 
letter  to  him,  lifted  his  face  toward  heaven  in  silent 
prayer.  The  rest  of  the  friends  ceased  weeping;  their 
faces  lighted  up  with  the  glory  of  their  faith.  A  solemm 
stillness  fell  on  all,  while  Paul  spoke  in  ecstatic  tones: 

“I  have  fought  a  good  fight; 

I  have  finished  the  course, 

I  have  kept  the  faith; 

Henceforth  there  is  laid  up  for  me  the  crown  of 
righteousness, 

Which  the  Lord,  the  righteous  judge,  shall  give 
to  me  at  that  day; 

And  not  to  me  only, 

But  also  to  all  them  that  have  loved  his  appear¬ 
ing.” 

Kneeling,  he  laid  his  head  on  the  grooved  block.  The 
assembled  Christians  held  their  breath.  The  idlers 
bowed  their  heads.  Helius  and  his  friends,  though 
inured  to  brutal  scenes,  were  so  touched  by  the  fearless¬ 
ness  of  the  man  that  they  turned  their  eyes  away. 

The  executioner  swung  his  sword. 

Longinus  gave  Paul’s  friends  permission  to  take  away 
the  body.  While  they  reverently  placed  the  remains  on  a 
stretcher,  Longinus  and  his  guards,  without  any  com¬ 
mand,  formed  in  open  column  for  the  mourners  to  pass 
through,  as  if  it  were  a  funeral  of  state. 


BY  THE  OSTIAN  WAY 


347 


Helius  and  his  friends  slipped  away. 

Luke,  Timothy,  Titus,  and  Mark,  followed  by  the 
silent  mourners,  daring  death  by  their  presence,  gently 
bore  the  martyred  chieftain  to  an  unmarked  place  of 
burial  by  the  Ostian  Way.  They  believed  that  his  name 
and  work  would  be  revered  and  hallowed  by  his  joint 
heirs,”  long  after  any  memorial  of  granite  would  be 
destroyed  by  the  elements. 


INDEX 


I 


I, 


\ 


\ 


I 


{ 


f 


r'M 


INDEX 


Abraham’s  faith,  17-18 

Agabus  in  Antioch,  239;  in 
Caesarea,  300 

Age  of  Paul,  born  i  a.d.,  216; 
fifteen  at  opening  of  story,  3; 
sixteen  when  he  enters  Gama¬ 
liel’s  school,  77;  twenty  on 
leaving  school,  112;  five  years 
younger  than  Jesus,  216;  fifty- 
five  years  old  when  leaving 
Ephesus,  289 

Agrippa  and  sister,  310;  hears 
Paul,  311-12;  refuses  to  send 
witnesses,  321 

Ahiram,  Saul’s  nephew,  no,  113; 
tells  of  plot,  305 

Alexander,  coppersmith,  in  Cor¬ 
inth,  281;  in  Ephesus,  283,  286; 
his  curse,  188,  330;  plots  to  slay 
Paul,  294;  in  Jerusalem,  301-2; 
shipwrecked,  323;  Felix  fads 
to  recognize,  329;  meets  Helius, 
334;  is  spy,  334-35;  witness 
against  Paul,  338 

Altar,  of  sacrifice,  84;  of  incense, 
91-92 

Ambassador  in  chains,  316 

Ananias,  disciple  in  Damascus, 
195-96;  plans  Saul’s  flight,  209 
High  priest,  orders  Saul  smit¬ 
ten,  304;  ousted  by  Agrippa, 
322;  finances  Alexander,  323 

Antioch,  Pisidia,  Luke’s  home, 
251;  heralds  driven  out  of, 
251;  Thekla  offends  native 
priest  of,  260;  Luke  joins  Paul 
in,  271 

Antioch,  Syria,  Saul’s  first  visit 
to,  1 19;  conditions  in,  236-37; 
Saul  at  work  in,  238;  Chris¬ 
tians  named  in,  246;  Judaizers 
in,  265-66;  Peter’s  visit  to, 
provoked  Paul’s  attack,  269 


Antony,  Mark,  confers  citizenship 
on  Azel,  21 

Aphrodite,  temple  of,  278 

Apollo  and  Artemis,  shrine  to,  237 

AquOa  and  Priscilla,  280,  282 

Arabia,  Saul  retires  to,  202;  Saul 
leaves,  207-8 

Aramaic,  language  of  Jews,  24,  in 

Aratas,  poet,  13;  quoted  by 
Saul,  16;  quoted  by  Paul,  277 

Areopagus,  Paul  speaks  in,  277 

Aristarchus  seized  in  Ephesus,  286; 
with  Paul  in  Rome,  313 

Artemis  in  Ephesus,  284;  images 
of,  285 

Arza,  Ben,  rabbi  in  Tarsus,  7,  59; 
commends  Saul  to  Gamaliel,  76 

Aspasia,  dancer,  255,  263 

Athena,  statue  of,  275 

Athenodorus,  saying  of,  328 

Athens,  275-76 

Athlete,  keep  bod}'-  clean,  29 

Athletics  in  Tarsus,  44-45,  49; 
in  Jerusalem,  102-3 

Azel,  grandfather  and  teacher,  6; 
a  Roman  citizen,  2 1 ;  death  of,  97 

Barjesus,  sorcerer,  247 

Barnabas  meets  Saul,  the  rabbi,  in 
Tarsus,  146;  in  Salamis,  147; 
Saul  threatens,  in  Jerusalem, 
176;  vouches  for  Saul,  21 1; 
takes  Saul  from  Tarsus,  232; 
takes  relief  to  Jerusalem,  240; 
with  Saul  to  Cyprus,  247; 
to  Pisidia,  250;  to  council 
about  Gentiles,  267;  follows 
Judaizers,  269;  separates  from 
Paul,  270 

Ben  Arza,  Rabbi,  commends  Saul 
to  Gamaliel,  76;  friend  of 
Nestor,  103 


351 


352 


INDEX 


Ben  Hanan,  Saul’s  father,  8, 
42-44;  puzzled  over  zeal  of 
pilgrims,  65-66;  doubts  Saul’s 
teaching,  234;  faith  in  Saul,  307 

Benjamin,  family  of,  10 
Berenice,  310,  312 
Birth,  date  of  Saul’s,  216 
Blood  of  sacrifice,  91 
Boxing,  14-15;  rules  of  game,  15 
Boxing  gloves,  cestus  served  as,  14 

Burrus,  officer,  317-18;  releases 
Paul,  327;  dismissed,  332 

Caesar,  Paul  appeals  to,  309 

Caesarea,  seat  of  Roman  govern¬ 
ment,  63;  Paul  prisoner  in,  308; 
Agrippa  and  Berenice  visit, 
310;  Paul  taken  from,  to  Rome, 

313 

Caesarea  Philippi,  near  head  of 
Jordan,  187;  Jesus  remembered 
in,  189;  Saul  delayed  in,  190; 
Agrippa’s  home,  310 

Caiaphas,  presides  at  trial  of 
Stephen,  170;  selects  Saul  to 
pursue  fugitives,  184 

Caravansaries  for  pilgrims,  67 
Caystros  river,  284 
Cestus,  in  boxing,  14 
Chaplet,  victor’s,  44,  55 
Christians,  named  in  Antioch, 
239,  246;  persecuted  in  Rome, 

331 

Cilician  Gates,  153 

Cleopatra,  2 1 ;  married  her 
brother,  310 

Corinth,  278;  temple  of  Aphrodite 
in,  278;  Gallio  proconsul  in,  281; 
epistles  and  messengers  to  be¬ 
lievers  in,  287,  290;  Paul’s  last 
visit  to,  291;  Paul  leaves  for 
Jerusalem,  295;  Nero  in,  332 

Corinthianize,  278 

Damascus,  Saul’s  first  visit  to, 
1 1 7;  fugitives  flee  to,  183; 
Saul  in,  194-95;  Ananias  meets 


Saul  in,  196;  Saul  teaches  in, 
208;  Saul  flees  from,  210 

Dancers,  in  Corinth,  341;  in 
Iconium,  256;  in  Pisidian 
Antioch,  260 

Daphne,  gardens  of,  119 
Davm,  Temple  services  at,  90-94 

Deborah,  Saul’s  mother,  8;  wel¬ 
comes  Saul,  217;  death  of,  307 
Demas  deserts  Paul,  337 
Demetrius,  silversmith,  285 
Derbe,  365 

Dining,  Jewish  custom,  9;  Roman 
custom,  257 

Disciple,  Ananias,  195 

Drusilla  in  Caesarea,  306;  in 
Rome,  333 

Ephesus,  284;  wonderful  temple 
in,  284;  Paul  rents  hall  in,  283; 
images  and  books  destroyed  in, 
283-84;  mob  turns  on  Alexan¬ 
der,  286 

Eunice,  mother  of  Timothy,  264 
Eutychus  falls  from  window,  298- 
99 

False  teachers  to  be  stoned,  7,  179 
Felix,  305;  sense  of  gmlt,  306- 
called  to  Rome,  308;  remands 
Paul  to  prison,  308;  in  Rome, 
326;  joins  Alexander,  334 

Festus,  Porcius,  succeeds  Felix, 
309;  takes  up  Paul’s  case,  309; 
asks  advice  of  Agrippa,  310 

Fire  in  Rome,  330 

Fire  on  altar  of  sacrifice,  93;  on 
altar  of  incense,  92 

Fish,  sign  of,  331 
Foot  race,  49 

Gallio,  boxes  with  Saul,  15-16; 
plots  to  defeat  Saul,  39;  pro- 
consul  in  Corinth,  281;  com¬ 
mends  Paul,  318 

Gamaliel,  famous,  41;  princely 
bearing,  75;  interested  in  Saul, 


INDEX 


353 


78,  79,  99;  liberal  views  of, 
99,  103;  invites  Saul  to  San¬ 
hedrin,  158;  expects  Messiah, 
164;  advises  leniency  toward 
disciples,  178;  simplicity  of 
funeral,  214 

Games,  Greek,  held  honor  to  be 
in,  49 

Gentiles,  Saul  messenger  to,  213; 
murmurs  against,  240-41;  coun¬ 
cil  decides  rights  of,  268;  Peter 
refuses  to  eat  with,  270;  Paul 
demands  rights  of,  270 

Gerber,  Ben,  71 

Gods,  many,  12-13 

God-fearers,  219,  227,  251,  272 

Gratus,  Flavius,  fears  Jewish 
revolt  in  Damascus,  115 

Greek  school  in  Tarsus,  ii 

Gymnasium  in  Tarsus,  14;  in 
Jerusalem,  73 

Haggada,  legends,  106-7;  edifying 
Scriptures,  105 

Halacha,  tradition  of,  100;  memo¬ 
rized,  loi;  same  as  Mishna,  loi 

Hallel,  88,  95;  Greater,  89,  93 

Hanan,  Ben,  Saul’s  father,  8; 
plans  for  Saul,  42-44;  questions 
teaching  of  Jesus,  221-22,  234; 
has  faith  in  Saul,  307;  death  of, 

307 

Hassen,  Amur  ben,  Saul’s  Arabian 
friend,  203,  206 

Helius,  acts  for  Sabinus,  332,  334; 
dislikes  Alexander,  339,  343; 
sentences  Paul,  344 

High  priest  officiating,  92 

HiUel,  sayings  of,  80,  in 

Holy  of  Holies,  94 

Iconium,  home  of  Onesiphorus, 
253;  home  of  Thekla,  254; 
Paid  and  Barnabas  driven  out 
of,  259 

Incense,  91,  92 

Isis,  II,  13 


Ismael,  high  priest,  322 

Israel,  Court  of,  in  Temple,  86 

James,  the  apostle,  meets  Saul, 
21 1 ;  decides  for  Gentdes,  268; 
advises  Paul  to  pay  vows,  301; 
recognizes  Alexander,  302 

Jannes  and  Jambres,  legend  of,  107 

Jars,  grain  containers,  315 

Jehovah,  Greeks  knew  of,  13;  the 
ineffable  name,  104 

Jerusalem,  pdgrims  to,  66;  wor¬ 
ship  of,  68;  crowds  coming  up 
to,  for  Passover,  41,  70;  Saul 
and  Barnabas  take  relief  to,  240; 
council  of,  fixes  rights  of  Gen- 
tdes,  268 

Jesus,  crucifixion  mentioned,  161; 
reputation  among  neighbors, 
186,  189;  appearance  to  Saul, 
194;  revealed  Divine  Love, 
198,  205;  Saul’s  interpretation 
of  life  of,  222;  Paul  determines 
to  know  only,  and  him  crucified, 
279 

Jewish  faith  kept  by  Paul,  301 

Jonathan,  Saul’s  son,  147;  death 
of,  158 

Jove,  II,  13 

Judaists  in  Antioch,  265-66;  de¬ 
feated  in  council,  268;  change 
meaning  of  decree,  269;  Paul 
overcomes  them,  270;  make 
trouble  elsewhere,  270 

Julius,  centurion,  takes  Paul  to 
Rome,  313;  saves  Paul’s  life, 
315;  commends  Paul  to  officers, 
317-18 

Jupiter,  38 

Khans  for  pilgrims,  64 

Kish,  son  of,  51-56,  80,  183 

Lais,  monument  to,  2  78 

Law  of  custom,  Halacha,  100; 
later  the  Mishna,  loi 

Law  of  stoning  false  teachers,  7, 
179 


354 


INDEX 


Legends,  Haggada,  io6,  107;  ap¬ 
plied  to  non-legal  Scriptures, 
107 

Letter  of  Saul  to  parents,  from 
Jerusalem,  159;  from  Damas¬ 
cus,  202 

Letters  of  Paul  to  Galatians,  280; 
to Thessalonians,  280;  toothers, 
287;  to  Romans,  291;  to 
Philemon,  320;  to  Timothy,  340 

Library  of  Gamaliel,  75,  99 

Lois,  Timothy’s  grandmother,  264 

Longinus,  in  charge  of  Paul  in 
Rome,  319;  takes  friends  to 
hear  Paul,  320;  has  charge  of 
Paul’s  execution,  343-47 

Luke,  physician  in  Pisidia,  251, 
265;  joins  Paul  in  journey, 
271;  at  Troas,  272;  leaves  for 
Rome,  313;  his  hymns,  324- 
25;  leaves  for  Spain,  328; 
in  Nicopolis,  334;  returns  to 
Rome,  335 

Lydia,  272 

Lysias,  Claudius,  sends  Paul  to 
Felix,  305 

Lystra,  home  of  Timothy,  264; 
Paul’s  second  visit  to,  271 

Malaria,  Paul  subject  to,  249,  250, 
252,  254,  280 

Mark,  John,  cousin  of  Barnabas, 
242;  attendant  to  Cyprus,  246; 
turns  back,  250;  Paul  refuses 
him  for  second  trip,  270;  Paul 
forgives  him,  328;  at  Paul’s 
death,  347 

Marriage,  settlement,  142;  cere¬ 
mony,  142-43 

Martha,  Saul’s  sister,  71 

Meals,  among  Jews,  9;  among 
Romans,  257 

Memory,  Jews  trained  in,  14; 
scribe’s  likened  to  a  cistern, 
105-6 

Men’s  Court  in  Temple,  86 

Melita,  island  of,  315 


Necromancy,  belief  in,  247,  259, 
283 

Nicopolis,  332,  334 

Nero  accused  of  setting  fire  to 
Rome,  330;  persecutes  Chris¬ 
tians,  331;  trains  dancers,  332, 
341;  orders  death  of  Paul,  342 

Nestor,  Greek  teacher,  5,  10; 
praises  all  gods,  13;  becomes 
friend  of  Ben  Arza,  132;  invites 
Saul  to  speak,  144 

Non-legal  Scriptures,  106 

Offspring  are  we.  His,  13,  16,  277 

Onesimus,  320 

Onesiphorus,  253;  visits  Paul  in 
prison,  340 

Ormazd,  ii,  13 

Osiris,  II,  13 

Ostian,  Gate,  345;  Way,  347 

Paschal  lamb,  86;  roasted  and 
eaten,  87 

Passover,  observing,  87-88;  Sab¬ 
bath  services,  90-94 

Paul,  bom  i  a.d.,  216 

Paul,  Roman  name,  2 1 ;  prefers  it, 
247-48;  sailing  for  Pamphylia 
is  swept  into  sea,  249;  contracts 
malaria  in  Perga,  249;  de¬ 
nounces  John  Mark,  250;  sets 
out  on  journey,  250;  captures 
robbers,  250;  meets  Luke,  251; 
driven  out  of  Antioch,  Pisidia, 
251;  in  Iconium,  254;  Thekla 
visits  him  in  prison,  258;  meets 
Timothy,  264;  confronts  Juda- 
izers  in  Antioch  of  Syria, 
265-66;  fights  for  Gentiles 
before  council,  267-68;  repri¬ 
mands  Peter,  270;  disagrees 
with  Barnabas  and  chooses 
Silas  for  journey,  270;  Timothy 
joins  him,  271;  Luke  joins 
him,  271;  in  Philippi,  272;  in 
Athens,  275;  meets  Aquila  and 
Priscilla  in  Corinth,  280;  before 
Gallio,  282;  establishes  school 


INDEX 


355 


in  Ephesus,  283;  after  mob  to 
Troas  and  to  Corinth,  289; 
collects  funds  for  relief,  289; 
letter  to  Romans,  291;  escapes 
plot  to  kill  him,  295;  farewells 
on  way  to  Jerusalem,  299;  vows 
in  Temple,  302;  arrested,  303; 
prisoner  of  Felix,  306,  308; 
appeals  from  Festus  to  Caesar, 
309;  before  Agrippa,  3 1 1 ;  ship¬ 
wrecked,  314-15;  in  Rome, 
319  £E.;  released,  327;  to  Spain, 
328;  arrested  in  Nicopolis, 
335;  trial  and  martyrdom, 
339,  343-47 

Paulus,  Sergius,  proconsul  in 
Paphos,  247 

Perga,  Paul  contracts  malaria  in, 
249 

Peter,  meets  Saul  in  Jerusalem, 
211;  supports  Paul  in  council, 
268;  reprimanded  by  Paul,  270; 
arrested  in  Rome,  337 

Petra,  strange  city  to  which  Paul 
retires,  202 

Pharisees,  robe  of,  3,  106;  differ¬ 
ences  with  Sadducees,  100; 
believed  in  resurrection,  100; 
furnished  most  of  scribes,  loi; 
zealots  claimed  to  foUow,  108; 
Paul  appeals  to  when  arrested, 
304 

Philip,  the  evangelist,  entertains 
Paul,  299 

Philippi,  271;  earthquake  opens 
jail  doors,  273 

Philemon,  letter  to,  320 

Philo  of  Alexandria,  108-9,  203, 
206-7 

Phoebe,  282 

Phylacteries,  106 

Pilgrims  to  Jerusalem,  41,  63 

Playing  the  game,  14 

Poppaea  Sabina,  321,  333 

Prayer,  an  ancient  Jewish,  129; 
at  Passover,  87;  power  of, 
115-16;  family  custom  of,  128 

Priests’  Court  in  Temple,  86 


Priscilla,  280,  282 

Publius,  proconsul  of  Melita,  315 

Puteoli,  seaport,  316 

Rabbi,  qualifications  of,  in; 
duty  to  visit  sick,  etc.,  143,  289 

Rabbis,  lament  loss  of  wife,  159, 177 

Resurrection,  believed  by  Phari¬ 
sees,  35,  100;  Paul  believed  in, 
159,  312;  proved  by  Jesus, 
176,  200,  268,  312;  not  under¬ 
stood  by  Greeks,  277 

Right  thinking,  28 

Romans,  Paul’s  letter  to,  291; 
quotation  from,  340 

Sabbath  of  Passover,  90-94 

Sacrifices  in  Temple,  92-93,  95 

Sadducees,  differences  with  Phari¬ 
sees,  100 

Sanhedrin,  100;  qualifications  of 
members,  113;  Saul  a  member 
of,  148 

Saul,  learning  tent-making,  6; 
learning  the  Law,  7-8;  in 
Greek  school  and  athletics, 
12,  16;  a  Roman  citizen,  21; 
wins  race,  54;  Gamaliel  favors, 
103;  has  doubts,  104;  sent  to 
Damascus,  113;  woos  and 
marries  Tabitha,  141,  142; 

mourns  loss  of  wife  and  son, 
157-60;  in  Sanhedrin,  163; 
at  trial  of  Stephen,  179;  perse¬ 
cutes  disciples,  181-82;  frus¬ 
trated,  186  ff.;  has  vision  on 
road  to  Damascus,  193-94; 
taught  by  Ananias,  196,  199- 
201;  in  Petra,  202,207;  escapes 
from  Damascus,  209;  by  aid  of 
Barnabas  meets  James  and 
Peter,  21 1;  leaves  Jerusalem, 
212,  214;  salesman  and  mis¬ 
sionary,  225,  227;  goes  to 

Antioch  with  Barnabas,  236; 
takes  relief  to  Jerusalem,  240; 
first  missionary  journey,  246; 
in  Paphos  prefers  Paul,  247-48. 
See  Paul 


3S6 


INDEX 


Scribes,  loo,  loi,  105 

Scriptures,  edifying,  105,  106,  107 

Seneca,  38,  318,  321,  328,  332 

Sepulchers,  whited,  69;  Paul 
calls  Ananias  whited  wall,  304 

Ship,  Egyptian,  60,  313 

Shipwreck  of  Paul,  314-15 

SUas,  in  Antioch,  268;  goes  with 
Paul,  271 

Slaves,  free  in  mind,  290,  320; 
hear  Paul  in  Rome,  319 

Spitting,  to  show  contempt,  70, 
74;  at  Stephen,  180 

Statues,  Greeks  change,  275,  276 

Stephen,  in  synagogue,  166;  trial 
of,  170;  addresses  Sanhedrin, 
171-74;  death  of,  180;  Saul’s 
remorse  over,  205 

Strigil,  31 

Synagogues  in  Jerusalem,  112; 
the  one  in  Tarsus,  136 

Tabitha,  the  girl,  23,  24,  62;  the 
woman,  135;  the  wife,  147; 
death  of,  157 

Tarsus,  population  of,  no;  trade 
center,  153 

Taxes,  107 

Temple,  rebuilt  by  Herod,  82; 
description  of,  82-86;  Gentiles 
prohibited,  84 

Tent  cloth,  making,  6 

Tertullus,  lawyer  against  Paul, 

305 

Thamyris,  a  noble  of  Iconium,  255 


Thekla  of  Iconium,  255  £f.;  a 
missionary,  263 

Thessalonica,  274;  letter  to,  280 

Timothy,  264;  becomes  Paul’s 
companion,  271;  Paul  asks  him 
to  Rome,  341;  present  at  Paul’s 
death,  342 

Titus,  Greek  convert,  240;  with 
Paul  at  council  on  Gentiles,  266; 
in  Nicopolis,  334 

Troas,  Paul’s  vision  in,  272; 
Paul  teaches  in,  289;  meets 
friends  on  last  trip  to  Jerusalem, 
297 

Treasury,  the,  85 

Trophimus,  personates  Paul,  295; 
in  Jerusalem,  301 

Unknown  god,  altar  to,  277 

Unwritten  law,  100;  its  applica¬ 
tion,  lOI 

Victor’s  crown,  55 

Votiug  in  Sanhedrin,  170,  179 

Way,  followers  of,  167,  181,  182 

Wells  cleaned  by  officers  of 
Temple,  64 

Wharf  in  Tarsus,  3,  59 

Wisdom,  spirit  of,  164 

Witness  of  the  Spirit,  326 

Women’s  Court,  85 

Wrestling,  30 

Zealots,  108 

Zeus,  12,  13 


PRINTED  IN  THE  U.S.A. 


Date  Due 


'f 


